JP7316733B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, various marks such as model name, function name, and warning display are displayed at positions visible from the front side. In the past, these marks were often fixedly displayed near the center of the game machine, such as the game area of the game board. As the amount and projection range increase, the placement position of the mark tends to expand from the vicinity of the center of the game machine to the outside. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine in which a model name is displayed above a frame (front frame).

JP 2018-175949 A

By the way, the player plays the game while sitting right in front of the gaming machine, and spends much of the time watching the image display means placed substantially in the center of the game area. There is a possibility that the farther the mark is located from the center of the game machine, the less the mark will be able to fully demonstrate its function to the player during the game. For example, if a mark consisting of the model name, etc. is placed on the top of the frame (front frame), etc., it will be more visible from a position slightly away from the game machine, so that the product identification function, etc. will be more effective. On the other hand, the function as an effect means is greatly restricted because it is hardly visible to the player during the game. Also, with regard to marks consisting of warning signs, etc., if they are out of the player's field of vision during play, of course, even if they are in the player's field of vision, if they do not pay attention to them, they will not be displayed. However, it is not possible to fully demonstrate the function of calling attention.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that allows a player during a game to fully demonstrate the functions of the marks placed on the gaming machine. aim.

The above objects of the present invention are achieved by the following means.
(1) operation means that can be operated by a player;
a display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect;
a display control means capable of controlling display by the display means;
a movable body that can be displaced;
displacement control means capable of controlling the displacement of the movable body at a predetermined timing;
a first mark that is composed of a plurality of individual elements and is arranged at a position visible to the player and that indicates the model name;
a first lighting control means capable of controlling lighting of the first mark;
an operation valid period control means capable of setting an operation valid period for the operation means;
a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is established;
In a gaming machine configured to be able to transition from a gaming state to a non-gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied,
The display control means is
It is possible to control the variable display of symbols during the game state, and it is possible to control the demonstration effect during the non-game state,
The non-gaming state includes a first period during which the demonstration effect is not executed and a second period during which the demonstration effect is executed,
The operation effective period control means is
It is possible to provide the operation valid period during the variable display of the pattern,
The displacement control means is
Displacement control of the movable body can be performed at a timing when the operation means is operated during the valid operation period during the variable display of the pattern as the predetermined timing,
The first lighting control means is
A first aspect of the first mark, wherein all of the plurality of individual elements are lit in the same system color or all of the plurality of individual elements are extinguished; and individual elements of the first mark. and a second mode in which only a part of the first mark is lit or all the individual elements of the first mark are lit so as not to be the same system color,
During the operation effective period during the variable display of the symbols , the first mark is set to the first mode during the symbol variation until the operation means is operated, and when the operation means is operated, the first mark is set to the first mode during the symbol variation. It is possible to control the 1 mark to be the second mode during design fluctuation ,
During the non-playing state, while the demonstration effect is not being executed, the first mark is set to the first mode during the non-execution of the demonstration effect, and during the execution of the demonstration effect, the first mark is set to the state during the demonstration effect. A second mode of control is possible,
The first mark is configured such that the first period is longer than the second period when the operation means is not operated during the non-game state, so that the first mark is a demonstration effect. configured such that the period of the first mode during non-execution of the demonstration effect is longer than the period of the second mode during execution;
A gaming machine characterized by :

According to the present invention, it is possible to allow the player who is playing the game to fully exhibit the function of the mark arranged on the game machine.

1 is a front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game board and an effect button. It is a block diagram which shows a control apparatus. It is a figure where it uses for description of hit classification and game state transition. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device; It is a game flow for explaining game contents (usually, time saving, ST mode). This is a game flow for explaining game contents (Omen, Ceiling, Heaven mode). 4 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control side; It is a flow chart which shows main control side timer interruption processing. 10 is a flowchart showing special symbol management processing in FIG. 9; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. 10 ; 11 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 10; 13 is a flowchart showing ceiling function management processing in FIG. 12; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing ceiling activation management processing in FIG. 12 ; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing game state transition preparation processing in FIG. 12; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a front part of processing during a special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 10. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the latter part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 10. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric accessary product management process in FIG. 9; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing a jackpot end process in FIG. 17; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows production control side main processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control side timer interruption processing. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table selection table for big hits. It is a figure which shows a game state transition table. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table for ceilings. It is a figure which shows a hit fluctuation|variation pattern distribution table (general, an omen, a ceiling, heaven time reduction use). It is a figure which shows the per variation pattern distribution table for ST (for ST beginning stage, ST middle stage, and ST end stage). It is a figure which shows a loss fluctuation|variation pattern distribution table (general, an omen, a ceiling, heaven time reduction use). It is a figure which shows the loss variation pattern distribution table for ST (for the early stage of ST, the middle stage of ST, and the end stage of ST). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the game mode type, the internal game state type, the variation pattern allocation designation number, and the game state determination number. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in ST mode which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in ST mode based on the 1st modification of the same embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in ST mode based on the 2nd modification of the same embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pre-reading notice according to the embodiment; It is explanatory drawing where it uses for description of the modification of a privilege provision form. It is explanatory drawing where it uses for description of the modification of a privilege provision form. It is a front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine used in another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention (model name on board); It is a front view showing the appearance of a game machine according to another embodiment of the present invention (model name in the frame). FIG. 36B shows a front view and a side view of the gaming machine, in which (A) shows the case where the player's line of sight is in the standing position, and (B) shows the case in which the player's line of sight is in the sitting position. is. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of displaying a "model name" on a game machine as a type of identification information made up of a mark. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of displaying a "function name" on the gaming machine as a type of identification information made up of marks. It is a diagram showing an example of displaying a "performance display" on the gaming machine as a type of identification information made up of marks. It is a diagram showing an example of displaying a "warning display" on the gaming machine as a type of identification information made up of a mark. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of displaying an “intellectual property right license” on a gaming machine as a type of identification information consisting of a mark. It is a diagram showing an example of displaying "other display" on the gaming machine as a type of identification information made up of a mark. It is the figure which illustrated the case where "other display" is displayed on a display means. It is the figure which showed the example of the production|presentation which a movable accessory moves. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which the “luminescence mode of the model name logo” changes according to the progress of the game (while symbols are stopped, while symbols are fluctuating, and when symbols are stopped). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (during a big win) in which the “light emission mode of the model name logo” changes according to the progress of the game; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (waiting for customers) in which the “light emission mode of the model name logo” changes according to the progress of the game; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which various marks are displayed on the display means according to the progress of the game; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which the fonts of various marks displayed on the display means are different according to the progress of the game; It is the figure which showed the example which displays various marks on a display means according to a big-hit expectation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of displaying various marks on the display means in accordance with the degree of advantage of the player; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which the amount of information of various marks displayed on the display means differs depending on the display timing; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of an embodiment (another embodiment 5) in which the “arrangement” of the constituent elements of identification information is devised on a screen other than the liquid crystal display screen. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing another example of the embodiment (another embodiment 5) in which the “arrangement” of the constituent elements of the identification information is devised on a screen other than the liquid crystal display screen. It is the figure which illustrated about embodiment (another embodiment 6) which devises "how to make it light" of the identification information arrange|positioned other than a liquid crystal display screen. Some examples (a) to (c) of the fifth and sixth embodiments are shown in list format. The rest of the examples (d) to (g) of the fifth and sixth embodiments are shown in list format. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of an embodiment (another embodiment 6) in which the “how to illuminate” a constituent element of identification information is devised on a screen other than the liquid crystal display screen. It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (i). It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (b). It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (c). It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (d). It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (e). It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (f). It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (g). It is the figure which showed an example of embodiment (another embodiment 7) which makes the specific identification information arrange|positioned other than a liquid crystal display screen conspicuous. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing another example of the embodiment (alternative embodiment 7) in which specific identification information arranged on a screen other than the liquid crystal display screen is conspicuous. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an embodiment (another embodiment 8) in which non-specific identification information is not conspicuous. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a list of relationships between second identification information and locations where the first identification information is arranged in the “front frame” (Example 1) as examples of different embodiments 7 and 8; . FIG. 68 is an enlarged view of the case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged in the "front frame" in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 67; 68 is an enlarged view showing a case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged on the "game board surface" in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 67; FIG. FIG. 68 is an enlarged view showing the case (c) in which the second identification information is arranged in the "liquid crystal display device" in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 67; As an example of another embodiment 7, 8, when the first identification information is arranged on the "game board surface" (example 2), it is a diagram showing a list of the relationship with the arrangement place of the second identification information. . FIG. 72 is an enlarged view showing the case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged in the “front frame” in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 71; 72 is an enlarged view showing a case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged on the "game board surface" in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 71; FIG. 72 is an enlarged view showing the case (c) in which the second identification information is arranged in the "liquid crystal display device" in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 71; FIG. As examples of different embodiments 7 and 8, in the case where the first identification information is arranged in the "liquid crystal display device" (example 3), it is a diagram showing a list of the relationship with the arrangement location of the second identification information. be. 76 is an enlarged view showing the case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged in the "front frame" in the third embodiment shown in FIG. 75; FIG. 76 is an enlarged view showing the case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged on the "game board surface" in the third embodiment shown in FIG. 75; FIG. FIG. 76 is an enlarged view showing the case (c) in which the second identification information is arranged in the "liquid crystal display device" in the third embodiment shown in FIG. 75; FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating fonts that can be used for identification information; It is the figure which illustrated the embodiment which gave setting machine information to the gaming machine. It is the figure which illustrated the setting machine mark. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggesting effect (during symbol fluctuation to demo screen display); It is a figure which shows the example of setting suggestion production|presentation (example of production|presentation in reach). It is a diagram showing an example of the setting suggestion effect (during the jackpot to the start of symbol fluctuation). It is a figure which shows the game board which concerns on another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (accessory) of the setting suggestion production|presentation by LED. It is a figure which shows the example (surrounding LED) of the setting suggestion production|presentation by LED. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect by a united accessory. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggesting effect by a separable accessory. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect using the operation means;

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiments described below, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of the game machine according to the present invention.

<1. Overview of Configuration: Figures 1 and 2>
An overview of the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of a game board.

A pachinko game machine 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as "game machine 1") shown in FIG. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. As shown in FIG. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Also, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. By inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 is released. , to release the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 and open to the front side.

Under the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 is pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. An upper tray unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

The upper tray unit 8 also has a ball ejection button 14 for ejecting the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 to the lower side of the gaming machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the island facility side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting the putting out of the balls and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

The upper tray unit 8 includes a button 75a, a right button 75b, a down button 75c, and a left button 75d pointing upward in addition to the push-button effect button 13 (first operating means). A cross-shaped directional key 75 (second operating means) is provided for input operation in a direction. The effect buttons 13 and direction keys 75 function as operation means that can be operated by the player, and during a specific advance notice effect (for example, "player participation type effect" described later), a predetermined operation valid reception period (button valid period ), and if a predetermined operation (for example, single press, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is performed during this valid period, the effect can change before and after that operation. It is possible. In addition, these operation means allow the player to set the desired game settings on the "game setting screen" related to waiting for customers (during "demonstration waiting for start of demo" or "demonstration (demonstration display)" described later). Also used when doing The game setting screen is, for example, a menu screen on which the player can set game settings such as sound volume and light intensity. The effect button 13 is provided with a built-in lamp (button LED 13b) inside thereof, and depending on the difference in the light emission mode of the button LED 13b, the effective period of operation reception (for example, lighting or flashing in a predetermined color) and the operation A reception invalid period (for example, while lights are off) can be notified.

A firing operation handle 15 for operating a firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7 . This launching device 32 employs one having a launching performance of about 100 rounds per minute.

Speakers 46 are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the shooting operation handle 15 to produce a sound effect (sound effect). In addition, in suitable places of the game machine, for example, in the interior of the decorative member on the periphery of the front frame of the glass door 6 and the center decorative body 48 (see FIG. 2), a decorative lamp 45 (for production) that exhibits a light production effect by light decoration is provided. LED) are provided.

(Game board: Figure 2)
Next, referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described. As shown in the figure, on the game board 3, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the shot game ball is mounted in an annular shape as a board surface partitioning member. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. The liquid crystal display device 36 independently displays a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, the left pattern) by numbers, characters, symbols, etc. in a predetermined display area (design variable display area) under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later. , middle pattern, and right pattern (see FIG. 5)).

In the game area 3a, a center decorative body 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long way. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3, and forms a front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3 and the outer periphery of the center decoration 48 to surround the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. It is integrally provided with an armor frame 48b to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and distributes the flow path of the game ball to the left and right depending on the strength of the game ball's launch or stroke length. It works as a channel distribution means that makes it possible. In this embodiment, a play area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and a game ball hit by the launcher 32 into the upper part of the game area 3a is formed. is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flows down either the left flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 or the right flow path 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 serves as various function display portions, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is placed on the upper starting port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b ( A second special symbol display device (second special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a 'special symbol variable display game' is executed by a variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of a "special symbol" represented by 7 segments. The above liquid crystal display device 36 temporally synchronizes with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and variably displays the decorative symbols by images, thus providing various advance notice effects (effect images). Along with this, the 'decorative pattern variation display game' is executed. Details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be described later.

In addition, in the various function display units, next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display device) 38c consisting of a 7-segment display device (with dots) is arranged. What is called composite is the display of the number of operation pending balls of special symbol 1, the display of the number of operation pending balls of special symbol 2, the display of the number of operation pending balls of normal symbols, the variable time reduction function in operation (during time reduction) and This is because it is a holding/time-saving/high-precision composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as "composite display device") having five display functions, namely, state notification during a high-probability state (high-probability state).

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In the normal symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the normal symbols represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbols by the LED alternately turn on and off like a seesaw, and by stopping with one side lit up, the propriety of the normal symbol variable display game can be determined. there is

A right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. This right-handed display device 39b uses a combination of the lit/unlit states of the LEDs to indicate whether a "right-handed shot" is advantageous in that the game ball is aimed to pass (flow down) through the right flow path 3c. It informs whether or not "left-handed hitting" which sets the aim so as to pass (flow down) the flow-down path 3b is advantageous. For example, if the light emitting state of the LED is lit, it is notified that right-handed shots are advantageous, and if it is unlit, it is notified that left-handed shots are advantageous.

In addition, a round number display device 39c is provided adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b, in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are arranged. The number-of-rounds display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the big hit by combining the ON/OFF states of a plurality of LEDs.

Below the center ornament 48, there are an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means). A normal variable winning device 41 is provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start sensor 34a, lower start sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of game balls are formed inside each. It is

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). In some cases, it is abbreviated as "Special Figure 1"). It is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and does not have a 'starting opening opening and closing means' that makes it possible to open or expand the starting opening. It is configured as a prize winning device. In this embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, game nail (not shown), windmill 44, center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the left flow path to the upper start port 34 A game ball that has flowed down the path 3b is configured to easily enter (win a prize), while a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to enter.

The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a "variable winning rate type winning device" capable of varying the winning rate of the game ball at the starting opening by the opening opening/closing means. In this embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as a starting port opening and closing means, and the lower starting port 35, which is the second special symbol starting port, is provided by opening and closing the movable wing pieces 47. can be opened or expanded.

In addition, the lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2" in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). , depending on the case, abbreviated as "Special Figure 2") is a prize winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation. Then, it is converted into an open state (easy winning state) that facilitates winning and a closed state (difficult winning state) that makes winning more difficult or impossible than in the open state. In this embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, the closed state (non-winning state) is maintained in which the lower starting port 35 cannot be won.

On both sides of the normal variable prize winning device 41, a total of five general prize winning ports 43 are arranged, four on the left (43a to 43d) and one on the right (43e). A general winning hole sensor 43h (corresponding to each of the general winning holes 43a to 43e individually) for detecting passage of the ball is formed.

In addition, a normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) consisting of a passage gate through which game balls can pass is provided diagonally above the normal variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle part of the right flow path 3c. It is This normal symbol starting port 37 is a prize winning port related to normal symbol fluctuation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside thereof, a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is provided. is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side, but is not limited to this and may be formed on both flow paths. .

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, there is a special variable winning configured to be able to open or expand the big winning port 50 by a projecting open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a big winning hole sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entering the big winning hole 50 is formed inside.

A bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging out from the surface of the game board 3 is formed around the big winning opening 50, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right downstream path 3c. there is When the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (large winning opening closed state), the downstream guide portion ( It is adapted to form part of the upper edge 55a). In addition, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, a flow path correction plate is provided substantially parallel to the downstream direction of the game ball. 51d is protruded, and functions to attract the falling game balls toward the big winning hole 50.例文帳に追加

The process of entering the game ball into the big winning hole 50 is as follows. A game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is projected from the game board 3 and is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that functions as a guide for the game ball. flowing down along Then, the game ball contacts the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the game board 3 surface, thereby correcting the flowing direction of the game ball to the direction of the big winning hole 50 (downward). At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (closed state of the large winning opening), the game ball rolls on it, and the gauge configuration (not shown) By (arrangement of game nails), it is guided in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower starting port 35 is in a winning state (starting port open state), a game ball can enter the lower starting port 35, but the open door 52b is retreating in the game board surface and the big winning port 50 is open (large winning opening open state), the game ball is guided into the large winning opening 50.例文帳に追加In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the firing position on the side of the special variable winning device 52 (when aiming so that the game ball passes through the right flowing path 3c), the upper start A game ball is difficult or not guided to the mouth 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", unless the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates, it is difficult or impossible to win the respective starting openings 34 and 35.例文帳に追加

To which of the left and right flow paths the above-described prize winning means belongs, that is, to which of the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c a game ball can win a prize, the prize winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b There are an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and a left general winning port 43a to 43d, and the winning means belonging to the right flow down route 3c includes an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and a normal symbol starting port 37, a large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43e on the right side. In addition, when the movable wing 47 is open (starting opening open state), the lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c, and winning is possible from either the left or right flow path. It is possible. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 has its operating condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a (winning a prize), it is substantially flowing downward to the right. It can be said that it belongs only to route 3c. Also, the big winning hole 50 belongs only to the right-flowing path 3c, and only game balls from the right-flowing path 3c can win.

(Composition favorable to right-handed hits under specific conditions)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is aimed to pass through the right flow path 3c and is hit to the right, the game ball tends to enter the normal symbol start port 37, but the upper start port A game ball is difficult or not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates, it is difficult or impossible to win the respective starting openings 34, 35. However, this movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening/closing pattern that is more advantageous than at least the normal state (normal game state) when the later-described "state with electric sapo (state of electric sapo)" occurs. Therefore, if it is under non-electric sapo (no electric sapo state to be described later), the game ball passes through the left flowing path 3b instead of "right hitting" aiming so that the game ball passes through the right flowing path 3c. ``Left-handed'' aiming is advantageous, and on the other hand, if it is under the electric sapo state, ``Right-handed'' is more advantageous than ``Left-handed''. That is, depending on the game state, the game progresses to the player's advantage or disadvantage depending on which of the left-flowing path 3b and the right-flowing path 3c the game ball is allowed to flow down. As to which way of hitting "strikes" makes the situation advantageous for the player (game progress is advantageous for the player), it changes according to the game state, and the game state accompanied by the non-electric support state (for example, , Normal state or latent state), "left-handed" is advantageous, and "right-handed" is advantageous in a game state accompanied by an electric sapo state (for example, time-saving state or variable probability).

Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the big winning opening 50, or the general winning openings 43a to 43e functions as winning means arranged in the game area 3a. , In addition, detection of the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal pattern starting opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43h (corresponding to each general winning opening 43a to 43e individually) The switch (winning detection switch) functions as winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the winning means. It should be noted that the number, shape, formation position, etc. of each of the prize winning means described above can be appropriately changed according to the game characteristics. In addition, regarding each prize winning means, whether the game ball flowing down either the left flow path 3b and/or the right flow path 3c is difficult to win, impossible to win, or possible to win is appropriately changed according to the game performance. be able to.

When a game ball wins in each winning hole, the number of prize balls per winning ball promised for each winning hole is paid out from a game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 5). For example, there are 3 upper starting ports 34, 1 lower starting port 35, 0 normal symbol starting ports 37 (no prize balls), 15 big winning ports 50, and 3 general winning ports 43a to 43e. is paid out. The game balls that have not won the winning openings are ejected from the game area 3a through the out opening 49. FIG. Here, "winning" does not mean that the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening consists of a pass-through gate (for example, the normal symbol start opening 37 ), it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and in fact, when the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning hole, the winning hole is "winning". is treated as having occurred. A game ball related to this winning is also called a "winning ball".

<Movable role>
In the game area 3a, a plurality of movable accessories are arranged at positions that do not interfere with the flow of game balls. In this embodiment, the first movable accessory 80 is arranged on the upper right side in the center decoration body 48, and the second movable accessory 90 is arranged on the obliquely lower right side thereof. The first movable accessory 80 includes a clock board portion 81 consisting of a number display portion divided into 12 number sectors with numbers from "I" to "XII" in Roman letters; and a clock hand 82 consisting of a short hand and a long hand formed rotatably, forming a "wall clock part" as a whole. In this sense, the first movable accessory 80 is also called a "clock-shaped accessory". The clock face part 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division place indicated by the hour hand, or the number sector itself is composed of full-color LED, and each number sector is individually and independently colored. It is configured to emit light.

The second movable accessory 90 has a corolla composed of a plurality of petals arranged around the flower center, and a calyx is arranged around the outer periphery of the corolla to double the perianth, thereby forming the shape of a flower. A flower-shaped part 91 (first movable body 91) is attached to the tip of an arm 92 (second movable body 92) capable of swinging, and the flower-shaped accessory 90 as a whole is constructed. Note that the flower-shaped portion 91 has a plurality of petals that can rotate about the flower center as a center axis. This flower-shaped accessory 90 is normally stationary at the original position (indicated by the solid line in FIG. 2) defined on the edge of the liquid crystal screen or on the side outside the liquid crystal screen. tilts to move the flower-shaped portion 91 together with the arm 92 to a position (indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 2) covering the liquid crystal screen. 2, the flower-shaped portion 91 rotates at the tip of the arm, and the translucent flower center and petals can be illuminated from behind by lamps or full-color LEDs to create a beautiful light color. . When the flower-shaped accessory 90 finishes its action, it returns from the performance position indicated by the dashed line to the original position indicated by the solid line. The flower-shaped portion 91 can perform a plurality of types of motion patterns such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation as the petal rotation motion. A plurality of motion patterns are possible, such as a quasi-tilting motion that tilts up to the tilting angle, a vibrating motion that rattles the arm, and an inching motion. The clock-shaped accessory 80 (clock hands 82) and the flower-shaped accessory 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for advance notice effects and/or suggested settings to be described later, depending on their operation modes. It is also used when executing (appearing) a production.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device for controlling game operations of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing the outline of the control device.

The control device of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control unit 20") that controls overall game operations (game operation control). Then, an effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control unit 24”) that receives the effect control command from the main control unit 20 and controls the execution (appearance) of the effect by the effect means. ), a payout control board (payout control means) 29 for controlling the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and the necessary power supply (including backup power supply) for each board of the game machine from an external power supply. and a power supply substrate (power supply control means (not shown)) for supplying power. A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control section 24 . A power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor containing a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and in addition to a control program describing game operation control procedures, a ROM 202 (main control unit) for storing various data necessary for game operation control ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) functioning as a work area and buffer memory are mounted, and the whole constitutes a microcomputer (equivalent to the Z80 system).

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 provides the Z80 system with periodic interrupts, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) with a constant period, and a time measurement function, CTC, and interrupt signals to the CPU. An interrupt controller circuit that enables/disables interrupts such as timer interrupts, a reset circuit that detects when the power is turned on or off, a power failure, etc., and outputs a system reset signal to reset the CPU, and a control program. A watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors operation abnormalities, a designated area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is being executed correctly within a preset address range, a certain range of hardware It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers (hard random numbers). In addition, at least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal (power failure signal) from a power supply board (not shown), and start backup processing prior to power shutdown. The game operation before the power shutdown can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). In this game machine 1, it is possible to hold each memory content of the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generating circuit for generating random numbers and a sampling circuit for sampling random numbers from the random number generating circuit at a predetermined timing, and functions as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 obtains the numerical value indicated by the random number generating circuit as a random number for internal lottery (random number for judging a big hit (magnitude of random number: 65536)). , the random number is used for the jackpot lottery. The internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number in order to prevent cheating such as hitting a winning target.

In addition, the main control unit 20 includes an upper starting hole sensor 34a that detects winning to the upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole sensor 35a that detects winning to the lower starting hole 35, and a game ball to the normal symbol starting hole 37. A normal symbol start opening sensor 37a that detects the passage of the, a large winning opening sensor 52a that detects winning to the big winning opening 50, and a general winning opening sensor 43a that detects winning to the general winning opening 43 are connected, The main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. Based on the detection signals from these sensors, the main control unit 20 grasps which winning hole the game ball has won (entered).

The main control unit 20 is also connected to an OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting game balls discharged from the gaming machine through the out port 49 and each winning port (so-called out balls). A detection signal from 49a can be received. The main control section 20 has counting means for counting the number of out balls based on the detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. As long as the player continues to shoot game balls from the launching device 32, the number of out balls is determined regardless of whether or not the starting holes 34 and 35 are won, that is, whether or not the symbol variation display game is executed. It will continue to increase. The shooting performance of the shooting device 32 according to the present embodiment is 100 shots per minute. Information (cumulative number of out-balls (pieces)/shooting performance (100 shots per minute) can be obtained. The information on the number of out-balls (counting result of out-balls by the counting means) is used for calculating a base value (one of game performance information), which will be described later.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected with a fraud detection sensor (for example, a vibration sensor, a radio wave sensor, a magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraudulent actions on the gaming machine 1. Based on the detection signal, it is possible to monitor fraudulent activity with respect to the gaming machine.

The main control unit 20 also includes a normal electric accessary solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for driving and controlling these.

A special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. there is Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the display of normal symbols.

The main control unit 20 is also connected to a compound display device 38c, a right-handed display device 39b, and a round number display device 39c, and the main control unit 20 controls the display of various information displayed on these devices. A control signal can be transmitted.

A frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 provides predetermined game information (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine via the frame external terminal board 21. can be transmitted to an external device such as a "data counter DT" or a "hall computer HC". Predetermined game information includes, for example, winning game start/end information, prize winning information, special symbol variation start/variation stop information, number of winning balls information, various security information (fraud detection information, RAM clear, door open, occurrence information such as setting changes). The "data counter DT" is based on the game information contained in the outer end signal, and stores specific information related to the gaming machine, such as the number of big wins, the number of game executions (number of symbol fluctuations), and the number of game executions between big wins. It is a game information notification device that can notify, and is usually installed on the upper part of the game machine. In addition, the hall computer HC monitors and collects the game information of the game machines based on the game information contained in the above-mentioned outer end signal, and comprehensively manages the operation status of the game machines installed in the pachinko hall. It is a management computer dedicated to the store.

The main control unit 20 also includes a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (memory in the area) of the RAM 203, and a setting key switch for switching to a setting change allowable state in which setting values can be changed, which will be described later. 94, a setting change switch 95 for changing the setting value in the setting change permitted state, and a setting change completion switch 96 for confirming the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95 are connected, and the main control The unit 20 can receive detection signals from these switches.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting change completion switch 96 are all push-button switches that can be operated by the operator. The setting key switch 94 is a key switch capable of switching between a setting change permitted state (ON) and a setting change prohibited state (OFF) by inserting a setting key and turning it ON/OFF. Note that these switches 95, 96, and 98 are formed at appropriate locations inside the game machine from the viewpoint of preventing cheating (fraudulent acts) such as illegally changing set values, and unless the front frame 2 is opened, the game can be played. ON/OFF operation from the outside of the machine is impossible.

A setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information about setting values is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display. . The setting display 97 according to this embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control section (main control board) 20 . In addition, the setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, but the payout control board 28, the launch control board 29, the relay board (relay board that relays the connection between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: Figure not shown), or an effect control unit (effect control board (including liquid crystal control board)) 24, etc., can be provided at an appropriate place inside the gaming machine.

(About setting value)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" that can change the expected value (profit) of the profit to be given to the player, such as the payout rate (so-called machine discount, payout rate), for each stage. The "set value" is a value indicating this stage. This setting value can be confirmed by the setting display 97, and is set appropriately by the pachinko hall clerk exclusively based on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game parlor).

For example, the "set value" defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of the big hit (hit type that the condition device described later will operate) for each stage. Winning probability) is set high, and it is designed to work in favor of the player. At least two stages (at least a first set value and a second set value) can be provided for such set values. In the present embodiment, six levels of setting values are provided, setting 1 to 6. For example, when the probability is low, setting 1 is 1/240, setting 2 is 1/231, setting 3 is 1/222, setting 4 is 1/210, setting 5 is 1/198, setting 6 is 1/189, and so on. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to win a big win (higher machine discount), which is advantageous to the player. In this way, the "set value" is a value that defines an event that affects machine allocation by stages, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a special event such as a big win. That is, the lottery probability of the big win at the time of low probability and/or the lottery probability of the big win at the time of low probability can be configured to differ according to the set value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the later-described special symbol probability variation function operates), the probability can rise to a value that does not exceed 10 times. However, the rate of increase may be the same or different for each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the rate of increase is the same for each set value. In the above example, if the probability of winning a lottery at low probability is 1 to 6 = 1/240 to 1/189, and the rate of increase is 3 times, the probability of winning a lottery at high probability is set to 1 to 6. = 1/80 to 1/63.

Also, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or more types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, when there are four types of jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value is, the higher the winning probability of all jackpots 1 to 4 may be. It may be configured so that only certain jackpots 1 to 3 win probability is increased (in this case, jackpot 4 has a common winning probability for all set values), or only a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 only). ) may be increased (in this case, all set values for jackpots 2 to 4 have a common winning probability). Further, it may be configured such that the higher the set value is, the higher the combined winning probability of the jackpots 1 to 4 is. Also, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the condition device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the big hit described above.

(Regarding setting value change operation)
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, if at least the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting change permission state is set. It is controlled in a setting change prohibition state. When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in this setting change permitting state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is changed to "1→2→3→4→5→6→1→2→3→...". The usage range of settings 1 to 6 is switched and displayed in a cyclical manner. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, if the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (setting confirmation operation), the currently displayed value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 ( set value storage area). Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change permitting state is ended, and thereafter the game is started under the established set values. The main control unit 20 of this embodiment includes setting value selection means capable of selecting one of setting values from among a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and setting values selected by the setting value selection means. and set value setting means for setting the It should be noted that the game machine may be a "non-setting game machine" that does not have the setting function as described above.

In addition, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information on the special symbol variation display game and error information to the effect control unit 24 by the effect control command according to the processing state. . However, in order to prevent slanderous actions from the outside, the main control unit 20 only transmits signals to the production control unit 24, and is configured for one-way communication in which signals from the production control unit 24 cannot be received. It's becoming

(About the performance indicator 99)
In addition, the main control unit 20 is connected to a performance indicator 99 (information display means) for notifying information (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") relating to the game result for a predetermined period (specific game period). 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display. The performance indicator 99 of this embodiment consists of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs. , and mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to form a display capable of displaying a four-digit number. Each 7-segment LED also has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment number. The above "performance information" is mainly used by pachinko parlors and related agencies for confirmation and investigation. This is information for investigating whether the game machine’s original ball payout performance (designed ball payout performance) is properly demonstrated, in other words, “information on game performance (game performance information)” . Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player enjoys the game, unlike the advance notice effect and the setting suggesting effect, which will be described later. For this reason, the performance indicator 99 is not installed at a location visible to the player, but is mounted at a location within the gaming machine that is easily visible, for example, on the control substrate or on the substrate case that protects it.

In this embodiment, the total number of payouts (normal number of payouts) in the normal state (low probability of jackpot lottery probability (normal probability) and no electric sapo, which will be described later), and the cumulative number of out balls in the normal state (normal The number of payouts under normal conditions divided by the number of outflows under normal conditions multiplied by 100 (base value calculated by dividing the number of payouts under normal conditions ÷ the number of outages under normal conditions × 100) is calculated in real time. , is employed as the above-mentioned "performance information", and is displayed in a predetermined manner by the performance indicator 99. FIG. The base value is displayed on the performance indicator 99 as a value rounded off to the first decimal place. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), when the number of out balls being measured reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. , the base value at the end of the measurement is stored in the RAM 203 as history information (the current base value is stored), and measurement of a new base value is started again. In the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned "specified number (60000 pieces)", which is the trigger for ending the measurement, is not the number of normal outs, but the cumulative outs measured during all game states (including during winning games). The number of balls (number of outs in all states) is adopted, and this "number of outs in all states" is also measured in real time. The processing program for display control and base value on the performance indicator 99 and its work area are set in an area (outside memory) different from the area (inside memory) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progress. ing. Also, the performance information is not limited to the base value of the normal state described above, and is not particularly limited as long as it is useful game performance information.

A payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20. The payout control board 29 includes a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 for controlling the launching device 32 and a game ball payout. A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 is connected.

The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive the payout control command from the main control unit 20, control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and provide information on the payout operation state to the main control unit 20 ( status signal). The main control unit 20 can transmit a control command (“payout control command” specifying the number of prize balls) related to payout to the payout control board 29 when the ball needs to be put out. The payout control board 29 can transmit the state signal to the main control section 20 .

The payout control board 29 is equipped with a full detection sensor 60 for detecting the storage state of game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether the upper tray 9 is full or not), the front frame 2 and/or the front operation panel. A door open sensor 61 (ON when open/OFF when closed) for detecting the open/closed state of 7 is connected, and the payout control board 29 can receive detection signals from these sensors.

In addition, the payout control board 29 is provided in the game ball payout device 19, detection from a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of game balls, a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting game balls (prize balls) to be paid out, etc. signal can be received. Also, the payout control board 29 can transmit a control signal for controlling the payout motor 19c of the game ball payout device 19 (motor for driving a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for putting out the game balls). ing.

The payout control board 29 outputs a "ball clogging" indicating a full state based on detection signals from various sensors such as the full detection sensor 60, the door open sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. signal", "door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2 and front operation panel 7 are open, "replenishment out signal" indicating insufficient supply of game balls, abnormal payout of prize balls (insufficient payout, excess payout) and a "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation is completed. Based on these state signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are in an open state (door open error) and whether the dispensing operation of the game ball dispensing device 19 is normal ( Prize ball error) and whether or not the upper tray 9 is full (ball clogging error) are monitored.

A launch control board (launch control unit) 28 is connected to the payout control board 29 , and a launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) can be transmitted to the launch control board 28 . The shooting control board 28 controls energization of a shooting solenoid (not shown) provided in the shooting device 32 based on the shooting control signal, and realizes a game ball shooting operation by operating the shooting operation handle 15. . In addition, the strength of launching the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the shooting operation handle 15. - 特許庁

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor that incorporates a CPU 241 (production control CPU), and includes a ROM 242 (production control ROM) that stores production data required for production control processing, and a RAM 243 that functions as a work area and buffer memory. It is composed mainly of a microcomputer equipped with a performance control RAM), and also includes a sound control unit (sound source LSI), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), and a counter circuit (16 bits) for generating hard random numbers within a certain range. counter, 8-bit counter), an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, etc., are provided to control the entire production operation. In addition, the RTC function unit is a clock IC that ticks the time, and is related to real-time time information such as the current time ("what is the current hour, minute, and second") and/or date (month, day, day of the week). Acts as a clock means to provide calendar information. In addition, like the main control unit 20, it also has a backup function and software random number generating means (for example, random number generating means for the lottery for effect).

The main role of the production control unit 24 is reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection and determination of production based on the production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, various Light emission control of production LEDs (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, and other production LEDs), operation control of various movable accessories (watch-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90), and the like.

The effect control section 24 also includes a display control section (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36 . This display control unit includes a VDP that controls overall video output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) for which the VDP performs image expansion processing, and a VDP expansion. A VRAM (Video RAM) for temporarily storing the image data obtained, a liquid crystal control CPU for outputting control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, and a program describing the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and its It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory.

In addition, the production control unit 24 controls the light display device 45a including various production LEDs such as the decorative lamp 45 and the button LED 13b to perform an image display production, a light production, a sound production, or a movable body production. A control unit, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, and movable accessory motors 80c and 91c for operating the movable accessories (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped portion 91, and arm 92). , 92c and the like.

A position detection sensor 82a for monitoring the motion of the movable body role is connected to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 detects the current motion of the movable body role based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. Its operation is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). The effect control unit 24 also monitors malfunctions in the motion of the movable body role based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and performs predetermined error notification processing if malfunctions occur.

The effect control unit 24 is connected with the effect button switch 13a for detecting the operation of the effect button 13 and the direction key switches 75a' to 75d' for detecting the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d) to control the effect. The unit 24 can receive operation detection signals from the effect buttons 13 and direction keys 75 .

When a performance control command sent from the main control unit 20 is received, the performance control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely among a plurality of types of performance patterns prepared in advance based on the information included in the command. Then, various performance means are controlled at necessary timing to produce the desired performance. As a result, display of an effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display effect), reproduction of sound from the speaker 46 (sound effect), and lighting and blinking of the decoration lamp 45 and other effect LEDs (light effect) are realized. , various production patterns (variation display operation of decorative patterns, advance notice production, etc.) are developed in time series, thereby realizing a "production scenario" in a broad sense. In addition, during a predetermined operation reception effective period, the effect control unit 24, based on the operation detection signal from the effect button switch 13a and the direction key switches 75a' to 75d' (for example, press, long press, repeated presses, pressing order of the direction key 75 in the up, down, left, and right directions) can be identified (operation identification means). It has a configuration that can control the execution of the production.

The effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte structure consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT). Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is OFF. When transmitting these information as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, the CPU 201 (main control CPU), when there is a command to be transmitted, sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting, the first time strobe signal. Further, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the transmission of this strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive commands.

In addition, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing, so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It's becoming Further, unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing interrupt processing (periodically executed timer interrupt processing) based on another interrupt. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the processing concerned, and even if other interrupts occur at the same time, the command reception interrupt processing is preferentially performed.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a game operation of the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special Symbol Variation Display Game, Decorative Symbol Variation Display Game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 performs A "big hit lottery" is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variably displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variation display game, and displays the result in the special symbol after a predetermined time elapses. Derivation display is performed on the device, and the special symbol variation display game is ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big-hit lottery based on the winning at the upper starting port 34 and the big-winning lottery based on winning at the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the big win lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived from the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big winning lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived from the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that the game ball enters the upper starting port 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the side of the special symbol display device 38b, on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed and the second special symbol variability display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the big win lottery result is a "big win", a predetermined "big win". When the result of the jackpot lottery is a ``small win'', the special pattern during variable display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined ``small win'' mode, otherwise in a predetermined ``losing'' mode. The game result (jackpot lottery result) is derived by.

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the side of the special symbol display device 38a will be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second game on the side of the special symbol display device 38b will be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game may be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". In addition, unless particularly necessary, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" will simply be referred to as "special symbol" (abbreviated as "special symbol" in some cases), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and " It may be referred to as a "special symbol variation display game" without distinguishing from the "special symbol variation display game 2".

Further, when the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, along with this, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying decorative symbols (dramatic game symbols) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Then various productions are developed. When the special pattern variation display game ends, the decoration pattern variation display game also ends, and the special pattern display device reflects the predetermined special pattern indicating the big win lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the big win lottery result. A decorative pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (the result of the big win lottery) is "big win", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect that reflects the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the display state of "7" in the 7 segment), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". ” in each display area, the decorative pattern reflects the “big hit” (hit pattern: for example, in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” display areas, the three decorative patterns are “7”, “ 7” and “7” display mode).

When the "big hit" is achieved, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the "big win" symbol mode is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 operates to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, thereby opening and closing the large winning opening 50, and the game is played more than the normal state. A special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is generated. In this jackpot game, until the opening time of the big winning opening by the open door 52b elapses for a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds), or the number of winning balls into the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number ( The winning area is opened or expanded until the upper limit number of winning balls allowed for the winning opening opened or enlarged by one actuation of the accessory is reached (for example, 10). If any of the conditions are met, the big winning mouth is closed (satisfaction of the round game end condition (closure condition)). )Repeated.

When the jackpot game starts, an opening performance is first performed using a start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT ends, a plurality of round games are performed up to a predetermined number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). times. Then, when the maximum number of rounds is completed, an ending effect is performed using an end interval time (end INT), and a series of big winning games is completed. When the current round game ends, the next round game is started after a predetermined interval time (INT between rounds). In addition, during the round game, the "in-round effect" appears, and during the round game (during the INT between rounds), the "INT effect between rounds" appears. That is, the jackpot game is roughly divided into an opening period (start INT period), a round game period with the maximum number of rounds as the upper limit, and an ending period (end INT period).

Regarding the information necessary for executing the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20, based on the entry (winning) of the game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, specifically , on the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper starting opening sensor 34a or the lower starting opening sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition regarding the special symbol) is established, "big hit", "small hit" or "losing". If it is a ``big hit'', the type of the jackpot, if it is a ``small hit'', the type of the small hit, and if it is a ``losing'' A big win lottery including a 'symbol lottery (winning type lottery)' for drawing a lottery for the type of loss is performed (when there is one type of big win, small win or loss, the lottery is omitted because there is no need to conduct the pattern lottery. can be done), and based on the lottery result information, the variation pattern of the special symbols and the special symbols (special stop symbols) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. Then, as an effect control command specifying the processing state, a "variation pattern specification command" including at least special symbol variation pattern information (for example, jackpot lottery results, information on special symbol variation time, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Send to side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control section 24 . In this embodiment, a "decorative design designation command" including information on special stop designs (design lottery result information) is also transmitted to the performance control unit 24 in order to provide a wide variety of performances.

In addition to the jackpot lottery result, the above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern information may include information specifying the execution of a specific advance notice effect (for example, reach effect and pseudo-continuous effect (including the number of pseudo-continuous times) described later). can. Specifically, the variation patterns of the special symbols are broadly classified into a "hit variation pattern" in the case of winning and a "loss variation pattern" in the case of loss according to the result of the jackpot lottery, and these variation patterns include, for example, ``Reach variation pattern'' that specifies the execution of reach production (including specification of the type of reach), ``Normal variation pattern'' that does not specify the execution of reach production, 'Pseudo-continuation pattern' that specifies the execution of pseudo-continuation production and reach production Plural types of variation patterns are included, such as "with reach variation pattern", and "normal variation pattern with pseudo-continue" that specifies the execution of pseudo-continuous production but does not specify the execution of reach production. In addition, regarding the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, basically, a longer variation time is set than the variation time of the normal variation pattern in order to secure the effect time of the advance notice effect.

Effect control unit 24, based on the information included in the effect control command (here, variation pattern designation command and decorative design designation command) sent from the main control unit 20, chronologically during the decorative design variation display game Decide the content of the production to be developed (production scenario) and the decorative pattern to be displayed finally (decorative stop pattern), etc., and according to the time schedule based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern, the decorative pattern fluctuation display During the game, To control the variable display performance of decorative patterns. As a result, the decorative symbols are variably displayed by the liquid crystal display device 36 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and during the period of the special symbol variable display game and during the decorative symbol variable display game. has substantially the same time width. The effect control unit 24 also controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, reproduction of images (image effect), reproduction of sound effects (sound effect), and lighting and blinking of effect LEDs such as the decorative lamp 45 (light effect) are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

As described above, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol variation display game are reflected in the decoration symbol variation display game. , these two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, the above-described two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games" unless otherwise required. Also, for convenience of explanation, the number of executions (the number of games) of the symbol variation display game (particularly, the special symbol variation display game) is referred to as "symbol variation number" or "variation number" or "** rotation (for example, one rotation). , 10 rotations, 1000 rotations, etc.)”.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol variation display game)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning a prize), the main control unit 20 performs an "assisting winning lottery" by random number lottery. Based on the result of the lottery, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variation display game. It is designed to stop display by combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assist hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, two LEDs 39 are all lit).

When this "assist hit" occurs, the normal electric accessary item solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, thereby opening the movable wing 47 in an inverted "V" shape and opening the lower starting port 35. Or it will be enlarged and the game ball will easily flow in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "general electric open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this general electric open game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates (open operation), and the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (starting port open state time) is the maximum opening time (for example, maximum 6 seconds ), or until the number of winning balls entering the lower starting port 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 at most), the winning area is controlled to open or expand, and any of these conditions are satisfied. When this is done, the opening operation of the movable wing 47 is completed and the lower starting port 35 is closed. Note that the lower starting port 35 can be opened once or multiple times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Operation retention ball)
In this embodiment, during the symbol variation display game, during the normal symbol variation display game, during the big win game, during the small win game, or during the general electric open game, each start port 34, 35 or the normal symbol start port 37 is won. When it occurs, that is, when there is an input of a detection signal from the upper start sensor 34a, the lower start sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition is satisfied, this is the right to start the variable display game. Such data is reserved and stored up to the maximum number of reserved memories, which is a predetermined upper limit value, except for the data related to the variable display. The data on hold which is not used for the symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the data on hold is also called "operation hold ball". In order to make clear to the player the number of activated balls held, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate place on the gaming machine 1, or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. light up the device.

Also, in this embodiment, up to four operation reserve balls relating to special design 1, special design 2, and normal design are reserved and stored in corresponding storage areas of RAM 203, respectively, and reserved as the number of determinations of special design or normal design. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reservation memory number) of each operation reservation ball number regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. Also, all or part of the maximum reserved memory number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics. In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol operation retention balls are respectively referred to as "special figure 1 operation retention ball", "special figure 2 operation retention ball", " It is also called "normal figure operation retention ball".

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the game state will be explained. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of game states in addition to the big win which is the special game state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the generation of various game states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" of which the main control section 20 (CPU 201) serves as the functional section. There are two types of probability variation function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probability variation function") and normal symbol probability variation function (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol probability variation function").

The special pattern probability variation function is a function to generate a "high probability state (big hit high probability state)" that is more advantageous than the normal state by changing the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability. . Under the game state (high-probability state) in which this special symbol probability variation function is in operation, the big-hit lottery probability becomes high, so that the big-hit is likely to occur. As already described, in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery probabilities at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability differ according to the set value (see FIG. 4).

The normal pattern probability variation function varies the auxiliary winning lottery probability from a low probability with a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, from 1/256 to 255/256), which is more advantageous than the normal state. It is a function that generates "assistance hit probability change state". Under the game state in which this normal pattern probability variation function is in operation (assistance winning probability variation state), the assistance winning lottery probability becomes a high probability state, so the assistance winning is likely to occur, and the general electric open game occurs frequently. , the operating rate improved state in which the operating rate of the movable wing 47 per unit time is higher than that in the normal state.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "fluctuation time reduction function (time reduction function)" of which the main control unit 20 serves as the functional unit. There are two types of this, a time-saving function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time-saving function") and a time-saving function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol time-saving function").

The special symbol time-saving function generates a "special symbol time-saving state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is stopped). It is a function that allows Under the gaming state (special symbol time-saving state) in which this special symbol time-saving function is in operation, the average variation time of the special symbols in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average required for reach-less loss variation The time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), and the number of lotteries is improved in which the number of lotteries per unit time is increased compared to the normal state.

The normal pattern time saving function generates a "normal pattern time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal pattern fluctuation display game (average time from the start of normal pattern fluctuation to the stop display). It is a function that allows Under the game state in which the normal design time saving function is in operation (normal design time saving state), the average fluctuation time of the normal design in one normal design fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds shortened), and the lottery frequency improvement state in which the number of lotteries per subsidy per unit time is improved compared to the normal state.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment also has an "open extension function" for which the main control section 20 serves as the functional section. This open extension function is a function of generating an "extended open state" in which the opening operation period of the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 (open time of the movable wing 47) is extended from the normal state. Under the extended open state, the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 (starting opening open state time) is extended from 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, for example, and the number of times of opening and closing is increased, for example, once (open extension function is not in operation) to twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), resulting in an operating rate improvement state in which the operating rate of the movable wing pieces 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, when the opening extension function is activated, the frequency of winning prizes to the lower starting port 35 increases, so that the frequency of fulfillment of the conditions for starting the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big win is higher than in the normal state. As compared with the state in which the opening extension function does not operate (non-operating), the game state becomes more advantageous for the player. In this respect, the open extension state is also referred to as an "electric tube support state (electric support state)".

By activating one or more of the above functions, the internal game state (internal game state) of the gaming machine can be changed. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the game state in which the special symbol probability variable function, the special symbol time saving function, the normal symbol probability variable function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the open extension function operate is called "probability variable state", and from among these functions The game state in which the special symbol probability variation function is removed is called a "time saving state", and at least the special symbol probability variation function operates, and the opening extension function does not operate (In this embodiment, the game state in which only the special symbol probability variation function operates ) is called the “latent state”, and the state in which all functions are not operating (non-operating) is called the “normal state”. Therefore, focusing on the jackpot lottery probability in these game states, when the game state is "time saving state" or "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes 'low probability state (normal probability)', and the game state is In the case of the "probability state" or the "probability variation state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes the "high probability state". In addition, during the jackpot related to the operation of the conditional device, a winning game is generated in which the big winning opening is opened and closed. It is put down and the floating display of special symbols is interrupted.

(High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the normal design, that is, the three functions of the normal design probability variation function, the normal design time saving function, and the open extension function operate at the same opportunity. However, when focusing on the normal symbol probability variable function, the normal symbol time saving function and the open extension function individually, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operation rate of the movable wing 47 is improved. Since the winning frequency to the lower starting port 35 increases (becomes easier to win) in the rate improvement state, the game state is the frequency of establishment of the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game that derives the lottery result of the big win or the number of balls to be released. The rate (base) is higher than the normal state, resulting in a "high base gaming state (advantageous state for entering a ball at the starting gate)". It should be noted that the "high-base game state" here refers to a game state when the normal symbol-related function (at least one of the normal symbol probability variable function, normal symbol time saving function and open extension function) is activated, and special symbols It is different from the game state when at least one of the functions related to, ie, the special symbol probability variation function and the special symbol time saving function operates.

On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability variation function and special symbol time saving function) individually, when the above special symbol probability variation function operates, the jackpot lottery probability is higher than the normal state It becomes a "high probability state", When the special symbol working time saving function is activated, a "special symbol working time saving state" is established in which the special symbol fluctuation display game takes a shorter time than the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high-base game state" in which the frequency of establishment of conditions for starting the special symbol variation display game is higher than in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the "high base gaming state", at least the electric chew support state to which the opening extension function is provided is treated as the "high base gaming state". Under this electric chew support state, the operation rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower starting port 35 is increased, and the frequency of winning per unit time is increased. Since it rises, it becomes a game state that is advantageous to the player compared to the case where it is not in the electric chew support state (low base game state). When focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, if the game state is "normal state" or "latency state", it becomes "no electric chew support state", and the game state is "time saving state" or "variable state" , it becomes 'there is an electric chew support state'. In this specification, "no electric support state" is referred to as "no electric support state" or "non-electric support state", and "with electric support state" is referred to as "state with electric support" or "electric support state". called "state".

(3-2-1. Internal game state (game state determination number YJ): Fig. 28)
Regarding the operation status of each of the above functions that determine the game state (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function), on the main control unit 20 side, these functions Its operation (5AH)/non-operation (00H) is managed by the ON/OFF state of the corresponding flag. A game state focused on the operation status of each function is also called an "internal game state". What kind of internal game state the current internal game state is is managed using an identifier "game state determination number YJ". For example, if the gaming state determination number YJ is "00H", specify 'normal state', if it is '01H', specify 'probability variable state', if it is '02H', specify 'time saving state', In the case of "03H", it designates the 'latency state'.

(3-2-2. Variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode): Fig. 28)
Here, in this embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the above-described internal game state, it is possible to further classify and manage one internal game state. Details will be explained later, but for example, the normal state includes multiple types of normal states such as "general" and "sign", and the variable state includes multiple types such as "ST beginning", "ST middle", and "ST end". are included, and these are managed as different game states using the identifier "variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode". The entity of this variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is an identifier (variation pattern selection mode data to specify). Therefore, for example, when the variable probability state (game state determination number YJ = 01H) is classified into "ST early stage", "ST middle stage" and "ST final stage", that is, the variable pattern vibration corresponding to the variable probability state (YJ = 01H) If "ST beginning (Tcode=02H)", "ST middle (Tcode=03H)", and "ST end (Tcode=04H)" are defined as the minute designation number Tcode (see FIG. 28), each variation pattern is different. A distribution table can be selected.

The "variation pattern distribution table" is used when determining the variation pattern of the special symbols related to the symbol variation display game, and one or more types of variation patterns (variation patterns of special symbols) are at least It is determined in association with the current game state (fluctuation pattern allocation designation number Tcode) and the jackpot lottery result. For example, if the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "00H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the general mode is designated, and if it is "01H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the precursor mode is designated. be done. That is, even if the internal game state is the same "normal state", if the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is "00H", the variation pattern related to the variation pattern allocation table for the general mode is selected, When the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is "01H", a variation pattern related to the precursor mode variation pattern allocation table is selected (see S413 in FIG. 12 described later, FIGS. 24 to 27, etc.). ).

In addition, due to this, a plurality of types of "production modes" related to the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode are provided, and the production control unit 24 side makes the production under each production mode appear (execute). It is possible to do so. Details of the effect mode will be described later.

Therefore, the operation status of each function (special symbol probability variation function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function) regarding the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of an electric sapo, that is, "internal game When focusing on "state", even though it is the same "normal state", regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol, selection of the variation pattern corresponding to the different variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode, "general" or "precursor" It is possible, and it is possible to make an effect related to the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode appear.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the types of the "internal gaming state" include a normal state, a time-saving state, and a variable probability state (see column "YJ" in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the game state related to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, in other words, the type of the game state related to the "variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode" when focusing on the determination of the effect, than the type of the internal game state "General", "Omen", "Ceiling", "Heaven", "Time saving", "ST early stage", "ST middle stage", and "ST end stage" are included (see column of "Tcode" in Fig. 28).

In this way, the "internal game state" when focusing on each function related to the determination of the probability of a big hit lottery and the presence or absence of an electric sapo, and the "variation pattern distribution" focusing on the determination of the variation pattern of special symbols (decision of production) By managing the specified number Tcode as being different, even if the internal game state is the same (for example, normal state), it corresponds to different fluctuation pattern distribution specified number Tcode (for example, during general and during omen) Variation patterns can be selected. As a result, even under the same internal game state, it is possible to greatly change the digestion time of the symbol variation display game (variation time of the special symbols) and the related effects, and under the same internal game state. It is possible to make a wide variety of productions in.

In this specification, at least the game state related to the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is referred to as a "game mode" unless otherwise required (see the "game mode type" column in FIG. 28). This game mode is, as shown in FIG. 28, a game state related to "variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode and game state determination number YJ (internal game state)", in other words, "a game captured as the whole game machine". can be treated as "state". For convenience of explanation, the internal game state and the game mode may be simply referred to as "game state" without distinguishing between them. In addition, the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is referred to as "variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)", and is abbreviated as "Tcode" as appropriate.

<4. About hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the "hit" according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning type, winning game operation mode, and transition destination game state (shift destination game mode) after the winning game.

(4-1. About hit type)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, a plurality of types of hit types such as probability variable jackpots 1 to 6 and time-saving jackpots 1 to 2 are provided as jackpot lottery target hit types. These hits are hits that belong to the "big hit type" that triggers the operation of the condition device, and are different from hits that belong to the so-called "small hit type" that does not trigger the operation of the condition device (minor hits). Here, the "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (device that continuously operates the special electric accessory) for playing the round game. or when a game ball passes through a specific area in the big prize gate (excluding those that win the big prize gate while the continuous actuating device is in operation). . In addition, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a condition for causing a state with electric sapo (open extension function operation) and probability fluctuation (shifting from one internal game state to another internal game state). .

Therefore, when a small win is won, the condition device does not operate and the accessory continuous actuating device does not operate, so there is no transition to the internal game state (the internal game state transition control due to the small win is not performed). cannot be broken). In addition, in the winning game (small winning game) by the small winning, since the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, the round game like the big winning is not executed, but depending on how the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening is determined, A "pseudo-round game" that behaves as if a round game is being executed can be realized. The operation mode of the small winning game is basically the same as the big winning game except that the round game is not executed, and after the predetermined start INT has passed, the "opening and closing operation game" that opens the big winning opening is executed. Then, when the opening/closing operation game is completed, a series of small winning games are completed after a predetermined end INT. Such a small win is a winning type that serves as an opportunity (execution opportunity) to transition to a winning game (special game state) that involves opening and closing the big winning opening like the big win. be different.

Further, when a small hit is won, the transition to the internal game state is not performed, but the transition to the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be performed. By using such a transition form, for example, when the game state after the small winning game and the game state after the other big winning game are shifted to the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the same effect is produced in both. You can stay in production mode. Also, due to the small hit, it is possible to shift from the first variation pattern selection mode to the second variation pattern selection mode, or to re-shift from the second variation pattern selection mode to the first variation pattern selection mode. is. In addition, although "small hits" are not provided in this embodiment, it is possible to provide one or more types of small hits for the lottery targets on the special figure 1 side and / or special figure 2 side in consideration of game characteristics. can.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the probability variable jackpots 1 to 3 and the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are the special symbol 1 side jackpot lottery targets, and the probability variable jackpots 4 to 6 are the jackpot lottery targets on the special symbol 2 side. It's becoming Also, the symbol lottery probability is as illustrated.

(4-2. Winning game)
Next, the contents of the winning game based on each winning described above will be described.

The notations of "5R", "7R", and "10R" in the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 and time-saving jackpots 1 to 2 in the column of "win content" in FIG. Each jackpot of the present embodiment is a "long opening time" in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game can be sufficiently expected that the number of winnings to the big winning opening reaches the maximum number of winnings (10). (for example, 29.8 seconds)”. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the big winning opening related to the round game can be determined freely. For example, at least part of the round game (round game of a specific number of rounds) opening pattern of the big winning opening is set to "short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds)" shorter than the long opening time or In addition, it may be set to a short "extremely short opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds)". Also, during the maximum opening time, the big prize opening may be kept open, or an opening pattern involving one or more closings (for example, "open for 1.3 seconds + close for 0.5 seconds + open for 27 seconds", etc.) may be The profit state (profit degree) during the jackpot game increases as the maximum number of rounds is relatively large, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is higher than that when the maximum opening time is short. In the case of this embodiment, since the maximum opening time for each big win is the same, the larger the maximum number of rounds, the higher the profit status during the big win game.

(4-3. Transition destination game state after winning game: Fig. 4)
Next, a description will be given of the game state (game mode) to be shifted after each jackpot game is completed. In the column of "game state at the time of winning / game state to shift" shown in FIG. relationship is shown.

In this embodiment, the game state after the big win game is determined based on at least the jackpot type won and the game state (internal game state) at the time of winning. Specifically, when the jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot game is determined based on the game state (internal game state or game mode) at the time of winning and the type of the jackpot. (See later-described game state transition table selection table in FIG. 21 and game state transition table in FIG. 22). In addition, the "game state at the time of winning" in FIG. internal game state).

In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, the internal game state to be shifted after the jackpot game will be described. The details of the game mode transition mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG.

(4-3A. If you win the time-saving jackpot (time-saving jackpot 1-2))
First, the case of winning the time saving jackpot 1 (5R time saving A) and the time saving jackpot 2 (5R time saving B) will be described. When these time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are won, at least the internal game state is shifted to "time-saving state (YJ=02H)" regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are called “time-saving jackpots” in that they are jackpots that trigger a transition to a time-saving state.

When the transition to the above "time saving state", the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of symbol variations) is continued until the predetermined prescribed number of times is completed, and a big hit within the prescribed number of times (however, the internal game state When the special symbol variation display game ends without winning a small win that does not trigger the transition), the time saving state ends and the next game is shifted to the "normal state (YJ = 00H)". It's becoming Whether or not the specified number of times has been reached is determined by counting the number of times the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 are executed (the same applies to counting the number of STs and the number of ceiling games, which will be described later). That is, when the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the total number of variations of the special symbols 1 and 2) is completed for a specified number of times without a big hit, the time saving state is terminated.

When the time-saving big win 1 is won, the number of times of time-saving is set to 100 times (time-saving A) as the specified number of times, and when the time-saving big win 2 is won, the number of times of time-saving is set to 50 times (time-saving B). That is, the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 of the present embodiment are finite time-saving jackpots that give a finite number of time-saving times. In addition, a jackpot (infinite time-saving jackpot) may be provided to continue the time-saving state until the next jackpot election (the number of times of time-saving is infinite). Also, the number of times of time saving big hits 1 and 2 may be the same, or there may be only one kind of time saving big hits.

(4-3B. If you win the probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot 1 to 7))
Next, the case where the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 are won will be described.

When any one of the variable probability jackpots 1 to 7 is won, at least the internal game state is shifted to the "variable probability state (YJ=01H)" regardless of the game state at the time of winning. The variable probability big hits 1 to 7 are called "variable probability big hits" in that they are the big hits that trigger the transition to the variable probability state.

In the case of shifting to the "probability variable state", as in the case of shifting to the time-saving state described above, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (number of symbol variations) continues until a predetermined prescribed number of times is completed. When the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the jackpot within the prescribed number of times, the probability variation state ends, which is the so-called ``number-cut probability variation type (ST type (limited probability variation type))''. To be precise, after the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a game state with at least a high probability state (probability variable state or latent probability state), if the above specified number of times ends without winning the jackpot, the high probability state ends. Then, the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a low probability state. The upper limit number of times that this high-probability state continues is called "ST number". Therefore, after being moved to the probability variation state, when the probability variation state ends when the number of times of ST ends and is shifted to the normal state (YJ = 00H) (variation of probability A described later) and when the ST number of times ends In the case where only the high probability state ends, in detail, only the "special symbol probability change function" ends from "special symbol probability change function, special symbol time reduction function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function". It includes a case (probability variation B, probability variation C described later) that is shifted to "time saving state (YJ = 02H)".

In the variable probability state of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of variable probability states (variable probability A, variable probability B, and variable probability C) with different ST numbers are provided. It is designed to be transferred to either of C. Although the details will be described later, when focusing on the game mode, ST100 mode when shifting to probability variation A, ST75 mode when shifting to probability variation B, ST25 mode when shifting to probability variation C, etc. The game mode is shifted to a game mode corresponding to variable probability A to C (see FIG. 6).

(Probability A, probability B, probability C)
The above "probability variation A", "probability variation B", and "probability variation C" will be described.

(B) Probability A (ST100 mode)
The probability variation A is a probability variation state in which the number of times of ST is set to 100 times. In the present embodiment, when the probability variable large 1, the probability variable big hit 4, or the probability variable big win 7 is won, the game is shifted to the probability variable A. In the case of shifting to variable probability A, when 100 times of ST are completed without winning a jackpot, the "variable probability state" is ended, and the internal game state is shifted to the "normal state" from the next game.
(B) Variable probability B (ST75 mode)
The probability variation B is a probability variation state in which the number of STs is set to 75 times (the number of STs of the probability variation B<the number of STs of the probability variation A). In this embodiment, when the probability variable jackpot 2 or the probability variable jackpot 5 is won, the game is shifted to the probability variable B. In the case of shifting to variable probability B, when 75 times of ST are completed without winning a jackpot, the ``variable probability state'' is terminated, and from the next game, the game is shifted to the ``time saving state'' with 25 times of time saving. Specifically, after the transition to the variable probability state after the jackpot game, when the predetermined number of ST is completed, only the high probability state is terminated (the special symbol variable probability function is turned OFF), and the game state is changed to "low probability state + electricity State with support", that is, shift to "time saving state" (Here, probability variation B = "ST number 75 times + time saving number 25 times"). Then, when the number of times of time saving ends 25 times without winning a jackpot, the "time saving state" ends, and the game is shifted to the "normal state" from the next game. Therefore, the electric sapo itself is designed to be given 100 times, just like the above-mentioned probability variation A, but the probability variation B is shifted to the time saving state after the predetermined number of STs is completed, and the above-mentioned probability variation A very different from
(C) Variable probability C (ST25 mode)
The variable probability C is a variable probability state in which the number of STs is set to 25 times (the number of STs of the variable probability C<the number of STs of the variable probability B). In this embodiment, when the probability variable jackpot 3 or the probability variable jackpot 6 is won, the game is shifted to the probability variable C. When it is shifted to the variable probability C, when the number of times of ST ends 25 times without winning a big hit, the "variable probability state" ends, and from the next game, it is shifted to the "time-saving state" with the number of times of time-saving 75 times (Here, Probability variation C = “ST number of times 25 times + time saving number of times 75 times”). Then, when the number of times of time saving ends 75 times without winning a jackpot, the "time saving state" ends, and the game is shifted to the "normal state" from the next game. Like the probability variation A and B, the probability variation C is also given 100 electric sapo times.

In addition, the probability variable jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 are “pure probability However, in this specification, it is treated as belonging to "variable probability big hit" in that it first shifts to a variable probability state. Therefore, to be precise, there are "variable probability big hit" that does not give the time saving state and "variable time saving big hit" that gives the time saving state.

The above-mentioned variable probability A, variable probability B, and variable probability C have the same number of electric sapo times (number of times with electric sapo) (100 times), but at least one of the variable probability A, variable probability B, and variable probability C is different. It may be the number of times of power support. For example, variable A is 200 electric sapo, variable B is 150 electric sapo, variable C is 100 electric sapo, variable A is 200 electric sapo, variable B is 150 electric sapo, and variable C is 150 can be times. In addition, the variable probability B and the variable probability C have been described as shifting from the variable probability state to the time saving state, but the variable probability state may not be shifted to the time saving state, that is, the variable probability state may be accompanied by a predetermined number of STs. In other words, the variable probability big hits 2, 3, 5 and 6 may be defined as the same “variable probability big hits” as the variable probability big hits 1 and 7 instead of the “variable probability big hits in short time”. Further, at least a part of the variable probability big hit of the present embodiment may be a latent probability big hit (latent probability state transition opportunity big hit). For example, the probability variation jackpot 1 to 3 on the special figure 1 side can be set as the latent probability jackpot.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the production mode (production state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes related to the game state (internal game state and/or variation pattern selection mode). For example, "Normal production mode" to make production related to "normal state", "Time saving production mode" to produce production related to time saving state, "Variable production mode (ST production mode)" to make production related to probability variable state , There are provided a plurality of types of production modes related to each game state, such as a "time saving production mode" that produces productions related to the time saving state. The effect control unit 24 executes the effect based on the current effect mode, thereby realizing the effect related to the current game state. In addition, in each production mode, the background display (background production) as the background of the variable display screen of decorative patterns is provided so that the player can grasp what kind of game state the player is staying in under the production mode. BGM and the like are controlled to be switched to an effect mode related to the game state. Details of each effect mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG.

The production control unit 24 (CPU 241) is configured to be able to control the transition between each production mode according to the transition (update) of the game state, and a functional unit (production state transition control means ). The effect control unit 24, among the effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifies the effect control command including information about the game state, specifically, the current game state, the game state Based on the information included in the specific effect control command that specifies that the transition is made, the game state (internal game state (YJ) and / or fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) is grasped, and the main control unit 20 The production mode is managed in a form that maintains consistency with the game state on the side, and the transition from one production mode to another production mode (transition between multiple types of production modes) can be controlled according to the processing state. It is The above-mentioned specific effect control commands include, for example, a variation pattern designation command, a game state designation command, a specific command (jackpot start command, jackpot end command) transmitted during a hit, and the like.

(5-2. Notice production)
Next, the advance notice effect will be described. The production control unit 24 is based on at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern specification command (in this embodiment, the information included in the variation pattern specification command and / or the decorative pattern specification command), various related to the big hit lottery result It is configured to be able to control the appearance of the "notice effect" (notice effect appearance control means). The main role of the notice effect is the suggestion (notice) of the expectation of whether or not the winning type has been won (the well-known "winning expectation"), and the expectation of occurrence of a specific notice effect (specific notice occurrence expectation) and other suggestions. Many of the advance notice effects work as a "promotion effect" for arousing the player's expectation of winning. Typical examples of advance notice effects include ``reach effects'', ``pseudo continuous effects'', ``player participation type effects'', and ``look-ahead notice effects''. There are various advance notice effects (so-called step-up effects, cut-in effects, etc.) that occur repeatedly) or independently.

(5-2-1. Reach production)
The “ready-to-win effect” refers to an effect mode accompanied by a ready-to-win state (so-called tenpai state), and more specifically, to an effect mode in which the game result can be derived and displayed via the ready-to-win state. In the reach production, when a specific reach production appears, the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when a normal reach production (N reach (normal reach) appears). It is called “SP reach (super reach).” SP reach has a relatively longer production time (fluctuation time) than N reach in order to arouse the player's expectation of winning. The above N reach and SP reach include a plurality of types of reach associated with winning expectations.

When the game results in winning, most of the winning symbols (for example, matching symbols) are derived and displayed via this ready-to-win effect. That is, in the process of deriving and displaying the winning symbols, some kind of ready-to-win effect can appear. Therefore, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect is a clue for the player to know the possibility of winning. Therefore, a plurality of types of "notice effects" are provided as an effect mode for foretelling (suggesting) the possibility of occurrence of the ready-to-win effect, in other words, as an effect mode for more clearly foretelling the degree of expectation for winning. This "notice effect" plays a role as an agitation effect that foretells the expectation of winning, but there is a possibility that a specific effect (for example, a reach effect or a pseudo-ren) may occur, or a specific effect It also plays the role of deterministically reporting the occurrence. Therefore, for example, in the ready-to-win effect scenario, there is a case where a certain advance notice effect occurs before the ready-to-win effect occurs to announce the possibility of occurrence of the ready-to-win effect and the degree of winning expectation. In other words, when the ready-to-win effect is accompanied by another notice effect, the degree of expectation for winning is more clarified than when the ready-to-win effect occurs alone, and the player's expectation for winning can be aroused. In addition, in relation to the jackpot lottery result, one or more types of expected advance notice effects may occur in combination (simultaneously or overlappingly). , a clearer winning expectation is shown. For example, if a low-expectation notice effect with a low winning expectation is combined with a high-expectation notice effect with a high winning expectation, the winning expectation will be further increased, and if multiple high-expectation notice effects are combined , the expectation of winning will increase dramatically.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-continuous performance (pseudo-continuous))
“Pseudo-continuous” refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo-continuous-variation display state of decorative symbols (so-called “pseudo-variation”). This "pseudo-fluctuation" is a display operation in which, during a decorative pattern fluctuation display game, some or all of the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped, and then the decorative patterns are displayed again in a variable manner from the temporarily stopped state. Refers to a variable display mode that repeats once or multiple times. In this respect, it is different from the later-described "predictive effect" that can be executed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. The rate of occurrence of "pseudo-runs" is basically determined such that the higher the number of pseudo-changes, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is two times rather than once, the expectation of occurrence of the announcement effect (for example, SP reach) with high expectation of winning is increased. Therefore, in the case of a production scenario including a ready-to-win effect, the “pseudo-run” is mainly generated in the stage before the ready-to-win state is formed (before the ready-to-win effect), and after one or more times of pseudo fluctuation , the ready-to-win effect, which is the main variation, is executed, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In this specification, when pseudo N is used, it means the total number of pseudo fluctuations M times and the main fluctuation. For example, "pseudo 2" means "one pseudo fluctuation + main fluctuation", and "pseudo 3" means "two pseudo fluctuations + main fluctuation".

(5-2-3. Player Participation Production)
"Player-participation-type production" is a production mode belonging to the so-called "button announcement production", in which a predetermined operation (for example, one-time press, long (push, repeated hits, etc.) is performed, the content of the presentation can change based on the content of the operation. In the player-participation type effect, an "operation instruction effect" for instructing the operation means to perform a predetermined operation appears during a predetermined button effective period, and the player operates the operation means during the button effective period. When operated, the presenting effect changes to another effect (effect at the time of operation) based on the content of the operation, and depending on the effect mode (details of effect) before and after the operation, the degree of winning expectation, winning or losing, or setting suggestion information. etc. can be reported. The performance control unit 24 is a functional unit (operation effective period setting means); pre-operation effect control means capable of controlling the appearance of a predetermined pre-operation effect during the button effective period; is provided with an operation effect control means capable of controlling the execution of

(5-2-5. Look-ahead notice effect)
"Pre-reading notice effect" (hereinafter abbreviated as "pre-reading notice") refers to the operation suspension ball (undigested operation suspension ball) that has not yet been provided for the execution of the symbol variation display game (variation display operation of special symbols) , Mainly, using the pending display mode (holding change system pre-reading notice) and the effect in the design variation display game that is executed earlier in time series (symbol change medium-system pre-reading notice), the winning related to the operation holding ball This is an effect mode that can notify the degree of expectation in advance.

An overview of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment, including the pre-reading notice, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to this embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the figure, below the display area of the decorative pattern), a reservation display area 76 that displays the number of special figure 1 operation reservation balls and the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls A holding display area 77 is provided to display the presence or absence of the operation holding ball, which is lit (with operation holding ball: "○ (white circle)" in the figure) or extinguished (no operation holding ball: Information on the current number of pending balls in operation is reported at (broken line circle mark in the figure).

The display regarding the presence or absence of this operation pending ball (hereinafter referred to as "holding display") is displayed in the order of occurrence (in the order of prize winning). It is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) activated suspended ball on the time axis among all activated suspended balls in the suspension display. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is provided with the same number of pending icons (icon images) as the maximum number of pending memories (4). (corresponding to special design 1 side), a2 to d2 (corresponding to special design 2 side) are provided. These suspension display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 normally switch the display mode to the operation state (lighting state) for the same number as the number of operation suspension balls that exist at the time of pre-reading determination, for example, three. Therefore, this holding display portion works as a holding display means for displaying the number of operation holding balls. However, when the later-described pre-reading notice is executed, the holding display mode of one of the holding display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined pre-reading notice display mode (special holding display mode). This serves as a means of generating a look-ahead notice.

Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, there is provided a changing display area 78 for showing the active holding ball currently being used in the special symbol changing display game. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game pending K currently being played is placed on the icon of the strike seat J appears. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest pending a1 or a2 icon (icon image) displayed in the pending display areas 76, 77 is the game running pending K As an icon, it moves onto the icon of the striker J in the changing display area 78, and this state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

In addition, in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. A sub-display area 79 is provided that can display information on the variable display operation of special figures 1 and 2, and information on the variable display operation of the normal figure. The information in the sub-display area 79 continues to be displayed even when the display of the decorative pattern and/or the reserved display part is hidden in displaying the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to identify from the information in the sub-display area 79 whether or not the symbol variation display game is currently being performed and how many balls are pending operation. In addition, depending on the game state (game mode or internal game state), in the case of the first game state (for example, normal mode (normal state)), the hold display area 76 is given priority over the hold display area 77 Display (cooperatively) (display one and not the other, or reduce the transparency of one and increase the transparency of the other, display one relatively larger than the other, or display the effect image Attached to one side and not attached to the other), during the second game state (for example, time saving mode (time saving state) or ST mode (variable probability state)), the holding display area 77 is the holding display area 76 can be preferentially displayed. Further, both the reserved display areas 76 and 77 can be displayed during the first game state, and the reserved display area 77 can be preferentially displayed during the second game state.

(About advance notice)
Next, a look-ahead notice will be described. Regarding the appearance control related to this pre-reading notice, first, in the main control unit 20, when an operation pending ball is generated (when the starting condition is satisfied), the operation pending ball executes the symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display). action), a "pre-reading hit determination" for determining in advance the big hit lottery result related to the operation pending ball is performed (steps S318 to S320 in FIG. 11 (random number determination processing to special stop symbol data creation processing ), see steps S410 to S410 of FIG.

Furthermore, by using the result of the above-mentioned "prediction hit determination", the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern at the start of variation) when the operation reserve ball is provided for execution of the symbol variation display game in the future is determined in advance. "Look-ahead variation pattern determination" is performed (refer to step S320 of FIG. 11 (random number determination process at start-up winning)). This pre-determined special symbol variation pattern is referred to as a "forecast variation pattern". In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance whether it will be a reach variation pattern that goes through what kind of reach state, or whether it will be a normal variation pattern that does not go through a reach state. Thus, a series of processes for determining a look-ahead variation pattern through a look-ahead hit determination is referred to as "look-ahead determination".

When the information about the look-ahead determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs effect control processing regarding the look-ahead notice. In the case of this embodiment, it is possible to specify the number of balls that are held in operation at the time of predictive determination (the number of balls that are currently held in operation, including the balls that have been activated this time) and the above-mentioned predictive fluctuation pattern information (at least the information obtained by prefetching the results of wins and losses). A "suspended addition command" is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 (see step S323 in FIG. 11 described later), and when the effect control unit 24 receives the pending addition command, based on the information included in the command , As part of the display control processing related to the pending display, effect control processing related to pre-reading notice is performed.

Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives the pending addition command, based on the look-ahead variation pattern information, performs a "look-ahead notice lottery" regarding whether or not to execute (appear) the look-ahead notice, and executes the look-ahead notice. In this case, a production scenario relating to the pre-reading notice is determined, and the pre-reading notice is made to appear according to the production scenario (for example, see FIG. 32 which will be described later). The execution probability of the foreseeing advance notice lottery is higher for "big win" than for "losing", and for the foreseeing variation pattern type with relatively high winning expectation. Therefore, the winning expectation is indicated by whether or not a pre-reading notice is generated. In addition, the pre-reading notice is targeted at the timing when the operation suspension ball occurs, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game that is performed earlier in chronological order, or at a predetermined timing during the game. A look-ahead notice may appear. In addition, the pending addition command is the upper byte side data that can specify the special figure type information (special figure 1 and 2), and the lower byte side data that can be specified with the operation pending ball number information at the time of pre-reading judgment. and 2 bytes. In addition, the pending addition command is composed of two bytes, the upper byte side data that specifies the result of winning and the lower byte side data that can specify the content of the prefetching fluctuation pattern as the prefetching judgment information (FIGS. 24 to 27). reference).

It should be noted that the information on the above-mentioned look-ahead determination result is the result of the jackpot lottery (big hit lottery result at the start of fluctuation) executed when the operation reserve ball is offered to the symbol variation display game in the main control unit 20, and the fluctuation at the start of fluctuation. This is game information obtained when a pattern or the like is determined in advance. Therefore, the information about the look-ahead determination result includes at least the look-ahead determination result (pre-read win-lose result) information of the win-lose lottery result at the start of the fluctuation, and in addition, the look-ahead determination result (look-ahead pattern result) information of the pattern lottery result, Prefetch determination result (prefetch fluctuation pattern) information regarding the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation can be included. For example, the look-ahead variation pattern information includes not only information on whether it is a "hit variation pattern" at the time of winning or a "losing variation pattern" at the time of losing (information on the result of the winning/losing lottery), but also the pattern lottery result. Pre-reading judgment result (pre-reading pattern result) information, information on the presence or absence of reach (if there is reach, its type), and information on the presence or absence of quasi-continuation (if there is quasi-continuation, the number of times), etc. Execution information can also be included. What kind of information is included in the pending addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be determined as appropriate according to the content of the notice to be notified. For example, the "prediction variation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation reserve ball is generated does not necessarily have to be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" itself obtained when the operation reserve ball is subjected to the variable display operation. . For example, in the case of a variation pattern that specifies "N reach 1" at the start of variation, the content specified by the look-ahead variation pattern is not the reach type itself of "N reach 1", but the skeleton "N reach Species (N reach 1 or N reach 2)" may be specified.

(Prize-winning time-based look-ahead notice: pending change notice)
In this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice is executed (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the holding icons of the holding display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 (for example, the icon shown in Note 3 in FIG. 29 described later, or the 32), the hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice, for example, changes from the normal hold display (normal hold display mode) white, to the notice display flashing white, blue, yellow, A suspension change notice that changes to special suspension colors such as green, red, and rainbow or to a colored suspension display (special suspension display mode) can be executed. This pending change notice can appear at the time of winning (holding display) as a trigger, so it is also referred to as "pre-reading notice of winning timing".

As this hold change notice, FIG. 5 shows an example in which the operation hold ball of the hatched hold display portion b1 has changed to a special hold display. Here, the display of white blinking, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors of the pending icon means that the expectation of winning is high in the order of these colors. It is a premium pending icon (precisely reserved notice) that will be displayed (accurate). The white blinking icon display is a pending icon that suggests the possibility of occurrence of the "step-up pending change notice" described later, and makes us expect what color the final pending color will be (pending color may remain blinking in white without any change). In the case of blinking white, if the reserved display is left as it is, the degree of winning expectation is the lowest among the special reserved displays, but if it changes to another reserved color, the degree of winning expectation due to that reserved color increases.

In this embodiment, regarding the notice effect, if the big hit lottery result is a loss, it is selected with a relatively low probability (low appearance rate), and if it is a big hit, it is selected with a relatively high probability (high appearance rate). As an announcement effect with a high expectation of winning, such as "High expectation (expectation of winning)" High" notice effect, and others are treated as low-expectation notice effects.In the case of the above-mentioned pending change notice, the winning expectation of white flashing, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors is 1%, If it is 5%, 9%, 20%, 30%, and 100%, "green, red, rainbow color" belongs to the high expectation notice effect, and the others (white blinking, blue, yellow) are low. Belongs to the expectation notice effect.If a look-ahead notice occurs, during the pattern fluctuation display game for the operation holding ball, there is a high expectation notice with a relatively high winning expectation (high number of pseudo-ren, SP reach, etc.) ) is generated, coupled with the content of the look-ahead notice effect, the expectation of winning will be further increased.

The existing operation pending balls are sequentially digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game as a trigger. At this time, in order to express that one operation reserve ball has been digested, the display position of the reservation display part corresponding to the existing operation reserve ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-described special hold display continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display during this period. In this regard, the pre-reading notice is that a special notice effect can appear across multiple symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations), so it is possible to make a single symbol variation such as a pseudo-run. It is different from the announcement effect performed during operation.

The special pending display related to the pending change notice is (A) the case of appearing when winning a prize, in other words, the case of appearing at the timing of the pending display, and (B) the normal pending display (white) at the time of winning. However, when changing from normal hold display to special hold display (blue, etc.), (C) change to special hold display with relatively higher winning expectation than current special hold display (for example, from blue to yellow or more hold There are also cases where the color is changed in a step-up manner. In the case of (B) or (C), the predetermined timing during the shift display, the predetermined timing during the previously executed symbol variation display game, the predetermined timing during the appearance of the specific advance notice effect, the suspension During the player-participation type effect for change notice (for example, during the effective period of the button operation), it is possible to change from one pending display mode to another pending display mode. Note that a hold change notice that changes to a hold display with a higher winning expectation like the above (B) or (C) is called a "step-up hold change notice".

Further, when the game pending K is placed on the receiving seat J, basically, the same display mode as the pending display mode in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the pattern variation display game of this time is maintained. A player can be notified of a pre-reading notice (special hold display) for the operation hold ball during the game, but at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game, the hold display mode of the hold K during the execution of the game is displayed. may change to another hold display mode. Such a change in the display mode of the game execution suspension K is also treated as belonging to the step-up suspension change notice.

In principle, there is no "special hold display downfall" that changes from the current hold color to a hold color with a relatively low winning expectation, but if an exception occurs, the operation hold ball is correct. It is suggested that it is, and it becomes a premium reservation change notice similar to this reservation notice. An example of a case of a successor is a case where the pending display changes to a pending display with a lower winning expectation than the current pending display, such as "blue→white" or "red→blue". In addition, the hold display mode is not limited to still image hold icon display (static display mode), but moving image (animation) hold icon display (dynamic display mode: for example, hold icon rotates, vibrates, rocks, blinks, etc.). (Blinking at high speed or blinking at low speed) may be used.

(Pattern change mid-system look-ahead notice: change look-ahead notice)
In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned "winning timing" foreknowledge effect, it is possible to appear "fluctuation foreknowledge" that is triggered by the start of the symbol variation display game. Unlike the pending change notice described above, this predictive notice during fluctuation can appear at a predetermined timing during the display of pattern fluctuations, so it is also called "predictive notice during pattern fluctuation (variation start change system)".

This "varying prefetch notice" means, for example, displaying a prefetch exclusive notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and executing this one or more times in the symbol change display game (single-shot or continuous display). ) is a look-ahead notice. In other words, when a game ball enters a starting hole during a certain symbol variation display game and a starting condition is satisfied, the pre-reading notice during variation temporarily stores the right to execute the symbol variation display game related to the establishment of the starting condition. In addition, a pre-reading notice lottery is performed regarding whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect, and when this pre-reading notice lottery is executed, if there are a plurality of active pending balls (holding memory) existing at that time , all or some of them can be expressed in some way related to those symbol-changing display games. For example, during a game in which all or part of the symbols of the existing balls, from the oldest ball to the ball to be held in memory to the ball to be held in operation, is changed, a preview-only preview image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. (For example, the preview image imitating lightning in FIG. 5B) is displayed. In this case, in each symbol variation display game, all or part of different pre-reading notices may be displayed. For example, in the case of displaying three symbol variation display games, the first symbol variation display game is a thundercloud image, and the second symbol variation display game is a rain image (an image display expressing rain falling from a thundercloud), or A thundercloud image and a lightning bolt image can be used for the third symbol variation display game. Also, the winning expectation may differ according to the preview image. In the above example, the thundercloud image may be of low expectation, the rain image may be of medium expectation, and the lightning image may be of high expectation. In this case, if the game ends with only the thundercloud image, the expectation of winning is low. Further, a step-up type pre-reading notice may be used in which the degree of expectation develops step by step (the degree of expectation increases) in the order of "thundercloud image→rain image→lightning image" each time the symbol variation display game is executed.

It should be noted that the effect means and the content of the effect used for the predictive notice during fluctuation can be appropriately determined. For example, in the case of image display, it is possible to use a combination of a background image exclusively for reading ahead and a decorative pattern. good too.

In the present embodiment, the prefetch notice during fluctuation and the pending change notice can appear independently. Specifically, the lottery for execution of the pending change notice and the lottery for execution of the prefetching notice during fluctuation are independent lotteries. Therefore, there are a case where the pending change notice occurs alone, a case where the prefetching notice during fluctuation occurs singly, and a case where the pending change notice and the prefetching notice during fluctuation occur simultaneously (overlapping). It should be noted that the effect means and the content of the effect used when executing the pre-reading notice during fluctuation can be appropriately determined.

(4-2-6. Setting Suggestion Effect)
In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to present an effect mode (setting-suggestion effect) that suggests information about the "set value". For example, it is a setting suggestion production such as the following (a) to (b).
(a) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests a low setting range (settings 1 to 3, 1 to 2, 2 to 3, etc.).
(k) A "high setting suggestion effect" that suggests a high setting range (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(g) "Even number setting suggestion effect" to suggest even number setting (settings 2, 4, 6).
(U) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" to suggest odd number setting (settings 1, 3, 5).
(m) "Specific setting confirmation effect" for deterministically notifying a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6). For example, a "setting N confirmation effect" for deterministically informing "setting N". However, it is not preferable to inform the internal setting value definitely. The reason for this is that, like confirmation of setting 1 and setting 2, anything that definitely suggests a low setting region reduces the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is preferable to let one of the settings 4 to 6 of the high setting area be notified definitely. In particular, if a specific setting confirmation effect appears in which a high setting such as setting 5 confirmation or setting 6 confirmation appears, the player's willingness to play can be improved.
(m) "Specific setting denial effect" for deterministically notifying that the specified setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 is acceptable).
(H) "Specific range suggestive effect" that suggests a set value in a specific range. For example, suggesting settings 3 to 5 (α ≤ setting value ≤ β), suggesting settings 4 or more (α ≤ setting value), suggesting multiple specific values of "settings 1, 3, 5, 6", etc. . In addition, by varying the appearance rate according to the setting value, for example, setting 1 is difficult to appear, setting 4 is moderately appearing, setting 6 is easy to appear, suggesting a high/low possibility of a certain setting value. It is possible to

Note that the appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be appropriately determined according to the set value. For example, it may be determined such that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect decreases as the set value is relatively low. Moreover, there is no particular limitation on the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect, and one or a plurality of effects out of sound effect, light effect, image display effect, and movable body effect can be used.

Also, the setting suggestion effect can be displayed at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game, for example, combined with or independently of the advance notice effect. In addition, it can be made to appear not only during the symbol variation game, but also during the jackpot game, "demo start waiting effect" or "customer waiting effect (demonstration display)", which will be described later, while waiting for the start of the game.

Further, by defining the appearance rate of a specific advance notice effect according to a set value, the notice effect itself can be made to function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, the appearance rate of at least one of the specific reach production, the specific quasi-continuation (specific quasi-continuation mode and specific quasi-continuation number), the specific player participation type performance, and the specific pre-reading notice etc. By making it different according to the setting value, the advance notice effect itself can be made to function as a "setting suggesting effect". For example, if a specific SP reach is likely to appear at the time of loss, "high setting rich", "high setting rich" if it is easy to appear 3 times of pseudo consecutive (2 times of pseudo fluctuation + main fluctuation) at the time of loss, specific button When an operation effect appears, it is a suggestion such as "setting 6 confirmed". Also, by using the effect of the pre-reading notice, it is possible to make the pre-reading notice mode dedicated to the setting suggesting effect appear. For example, when the hold icon blinks at high speed, high setting rich is suggested, and when one or all of the hold icons change to a dedicated hold icon (dedicated character or item image), "high setting rich" is suggested.

<6. Directing means>
Various effects in the game machine 1 are produced by effect means provided in the game machine. Such directing means may be stimulus transmission means capable of exhibiting directing effects by appealing to human perception such as visual, auditory, and tactile sensations, and light generating (light emitting) means such as decorative lamp 45 and LED devices ( light production means), a sound generator such as a speaker 46 (sound production means), a production display device such as a liquid crystal display device 36 (display means), a pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the body of the operator, and a player that vibrates. Typical examples are a vibrating device (for example, the shooting operation handle 15 vibrates), a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body, and a movable accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the sense of sight like the image display device (image display means), but differs from the image display device in that it also includes devices that do not depend on images (for example, a 7-segment display device). When it is called an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that produces an effect (image display effect) by displaying an image. contained within.

<7. Game mode transition form: Fig. 6, Fig. 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, the contents of the "game mode" related to the variation pattern selection mode and transition control between each game mode (between each game state) will be described. 6 and 7 are game flows showing an outline of a game mode and an effect mode related thereto.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a plurality of game modes such as general, omen, ceiling, heaven, and ST (ST beginning, ST middle, ST end) are provided. The progress of the game is controlled under the mode.

(About 7-1A. “Normal mode”)
The normal mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the normal state, and this normal mode is an initial state that is started when the RAM is cleared (for example, when the RAM is cleared, when the settings are changed, etc.). It is a game mode of.

The normal mode includes a "general mode" with a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) of "00H" and a "precursor mode" with a "01H". "General mode" is a game mode in which you can stay the longest while the game is in progress. will be

(7-1A-1. About production in normal mode)
During the general mode, it is shifted to a "general production mode" that produces productions related to the general mode. The general production mode according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of general production modes. It is possible to switch to general production mode. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the normal mode block frame of FIG. ” (player-selectable presentation mode) can be selected. However, what should not be confused is that these production modes are production modes under the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode = 00H), and the player side can freely switch the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself. does not mean Therefore, depending on the difference between normal, simple, and premium modes, the effects that appear may differ, but the internally selected special pattern variation pattern (variation pattern distribution table) does not change, so the pattern variation display game The time (variation time of special symbols) itself does not change.

"Normal mode" is the default production mode, and "Simple mode" is a production mode in which the appearance rate of a specific announcement production is lower than in normal mode or does not appear at all (appearance rate 0%). (Specific notice effect appearance rate change mode).
In "simple mode", for example, (a) the appearance rate of specific high-expectation notices with relatively high winning expectations (for example, winning expectations of 30% or more in normal mode) is higher than normal mode. The probability is low, and when the specific high-expectation notice appears, the winning expectation is greatly increased, and the excitement at the appearance of the high-expectation notice is increased. In addition, (b) the appearance rate of a specific low-expectation notice with a relatively low winning expectation (for example, a performance with a winning expectation of less than 30% in normal mode, a pre-reading notice) has a lower probability than normal mode (0% ), which is suitable for players who like simple effects with little excessive excitement (effects at the time of failure). In addition, (C) the appearance rate of player participation type effects is lower than in normal mode (including 0%), and the appearance rate of effects involving operation of the effect button is low, so calm games are preferred games. It is suitable for
In "Premium Mode", the probability of appearance of the hit-probable effect (the effect of winning the jackpot (for example, the expectation of winning is 90% or more) or the effect of confirming the winning of the jackpot) is higher than the normal mode and simple mode, 1 or The appearance rate of a plurality of types of specific low-expectation-level announcements has a low probability (including 0%). Therefore, this production mode is suitable for players who want to enjoy the appearance of a premium production that predicts the accuracy.
The appearance rate of setting suggestion effects may be set to the same probability in any of the normal, simple, and premium effect modes, or may be different.

In addition, in each production mode of normal, simple, and premium, since it is possible to identify which mode it is in, a unique production corresponding to each production mode is displayed. Specifically, image display effects (for example, background images (background display), characters appearing in advance notice effects, decorative patterns, etc.), sound effects (for example, BGM, sound effects), and light effects (for example, specific At least one of the lighting mode of the LED for effect) changes corresponding to each effect mode. This makes it possible to identify which of the normal/simple/premium production modes is being used. In this embodiment, in the general mode, the "daytime background image" with the sun shining is used as a base, and in the "normal mode", a background image reminiscent of the season 'spring' (for example, a background image containing a cherry tree), " A background image reminiscent of the season 'summer' in "simple mode" (for example, a background image containing the sea and sandy beach), a background image reminiscent of the season 'autumn' in 'premium mode' (for example, a background containing mountains and trees in autumn colors) image), etc., are controlled to switch to a background display (background effect) corresponding to at least each effect mode. In addition, under other game modes, it is possible to switch between at least two production modes of normal, simple and premium modes. Also in this case, as described above, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which it is possible to visually identify which mode it is in.

(7-1B. About Omen Mode)
Also, the above-mentioned "prediction mode" is a game mode that is shifted to when the "ceiling (relief function)" to be described later is about to be reached. It is provided as a game mode for. This portent mode is shifted to when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning a jackpot in the normal mode (normal state). In the case of this embodiment, when 989 games are played during the normal mode, the mode is shifted to the precursor mode from the 990th game (see the block frame (α) of the "precursor mode" in FIG. 7). The details of the "ceiling" will be described later, but in this embodiment, when 1000 games (1000 spins) are addicted (continue losing) during the normal mode (at least when the internal game state is normal), the ceiling function is activated, A special profit (ceiling privilege) is given (see column of example of ceiling privilege in Remark 2 of FIG. 7).

(7-1B-1. Regarding production during omen mode)
During the omen mode, a transition is made to an "omen production mode" that produces an production (omen production) related to the omen mode. During the omen production mode, the "daytime background image" of the sun shining in the normal mode is switched to the "night background image" of the stars shining, and the omen mode is notified. In addition, even during the omen effect mode, it is possible to switch to any of the normal/simple/premium mode (see the omen mode block frame (γ) in FIG. 7). Also, during the omen effect mode, for example, a countdown display appears as an effect (residual ceiling number display effect) that can identify the number of remaining games (number of remaining ceilings) until the ceiling is reached (the omen mode in FIG. 7). See block frame (δ)). This remaining ceiling number display effect may appear during a part of the period during the omen mode. For example, the remaining ceiling number display effect may start (countdown display starts) from the 996th game when the ceiling is near. For example, considering the maximum number of reserved memories of 4, a countdown display (eg, suggesting a count of zero in the ceiling game) can be made between the 996th game and the 999th game, or between the 995th and 1000th game including the ceiling game. If the number of games up to the ceiling is known, there is a performance advantage that the player can prevent wasteful beating until reaching the ceiling.

In addition, during the indication production mode, at least a suspension display mode (suspension icon) different from that in the general mode appears. For example, in the general production mode, the pending display mode is based on the simple "round icon" shown in FIG. (Block frame (ε) of precursor mode in FIG. 7, see FIG. 32). In addition, in the general mode, one or more pending displays that exist immediately before the transition to the omen mode (989th game) will all change to a dedicated pending display (character icon) after the transition to the omen mode (990th game). Alternatively, only the pending display to be digested during the precursor mode may be changed to a dedicated pending display. To explain the latter configuration in detail, for example, in the case where there are three operation pending balls during the execution of the 988th game, the pending display related to the 989th game to the 991st game is indicated by a 'round icon (in normal mode). Suspension of digestion target: 989th game) '' Character icon (suspension of digestion target during precursor mode: 990th game) '' Character icon (suspension of digestion target during precursor mode: 991st game) ''. In addition, from the start of the omen effect mode until the predetermined number of games is consumed, the same suspension display (round icon) as in the general effect mode is displayed, and the ceiling is approaching (for example, considering the maximum number of pending memories of 4, 996 between game and 999 games), it may be switched to a pending display (character icon) dedicated to the precursor. Further, during the portent effect mode, the above-mentioned "remaining ceiling count display effect" and/or "holding display dedicated to portents" may appear.

(Regarding selection of normal/simple/premium mode in Omen mode)
Although it has been described that it is possible to switch to any of the "normal/simple/premium mode" during the omen effect mode of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the switching is not possible (under the non-switching state). control). That is, during the sign effect mode, the effect mode selectable by the player can be fixed. For example, it can be fixed to the production mode selected in the general mode, or forced to be fixed to one of the normal/simple/premium modes (for example, the default normal mode). (The same applies to heaven mode, which will be described later). In this case, the fact that the effect mode, which was switchable in the general mode, cannot be switched causes the player to feel a sense of incongruity, and the player can be made aware that the game is about to reach the ceiling. In particular, when the omen production mode and the general production mode are in a hidden state for production (for example, the omen production mode and the general production mode are made a common background image, the production mode common to the omen mode and the general mode (Internally it is a sign mode, but the production mode is a general production mode), no sign mode itself is provided, etc.) By giving the player the discomfort of "a state in which it is impossible to switch the production mode", reaching the ceiling ( It is possible to notify that the ceiling game) is approaching.

(7-2. About “ST mode”)
ST mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the variable probability state (YJ = 01H), and in this ST mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "02H""ST early stage mode" and ""03H""ST middle mode" and "04H""ST end mode" are included. This ST mode is shifted to when one of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won.

In the case of this embodiment, depending on which one of the variable probability jackpots 1 to 7 is won, the game mode is shifted to any one of the above "variable probability A" to "variable probability C", so the mode of transition of the game mode is also different. More specifically, the following transition modes (A-1) to (A-3) are used.

(A-1: If you win a variable hit 3, 6 (5R variable ST25, 7R variable ST25) that gives a variable C (25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving))
When one of the variable probability jackpots 3 and 6 is won, the game is shifted to "variable probability C" as already explained in FIG. In this case, the transition form of the game mode is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" until the 1st to 25th games (the beginning of the ST number), and stay in the "time saving mode" until the 26th to 100th games (within the time saving number). It has become. Focusing on this series of transition modes of "ST early stage mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ time-saving mode", the game mode that is shifted when the probability variable jackpot 3, 6 is won is also called "ST 25 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(A-2: If you win the probability variation jackpot 2, 5 (5R probability variation ST75, 7R probability variation ST75) that gives probability variation B (ST number 75 times + time saving number 25 times))
When one of the probability variable jackpots 2 and 5 is won, the game is shifted to the above-mentioned "probability variable B", and "ST number 75 times + time saving number 25 times" is given (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the mode of transition of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" until the 1st to 25th games (early stage within the ST number), and "ST middle stage mode" until the 26th to 75th games (middle stage within the ST number). , and stays in the “time-saving mode” from the 76th to the 100th game (within the number of times of time-saving). Focusing on this series of transition forms of "ST early stage mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle stage mode (ST 50 times) ⇒ time saving mode", the game mode that is shifted when the probability variable jackpot 2, 5 is won is also called "ST 75 mode". (See Figure 4).

(A-3. If you win the probability variation jackpot 1, 3, 7 (5R probability variation ST100), 10R probability variation ST100, special 7R probability variation) that gives probability variation A (ST number of 100 times))
When one of the probability variable jackpots 1, 3, and 7 is won, the game is shifted to the above-mentioned "probability variable A", and "ST number 100 times" is given (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the transition mode of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" until the 1st to 25th games (early stage within the ST number), and to stay in the "ST middle stage mode" until the 26th to 75th games (middle stage within the ST number). and stay in "ST end mode" from 76th to 100th game (end of ST number). Focusing on this series of transition forms of "ST early stage mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle stage mode (ST 75 times) ⇒ ST final stage mode (ST 25 times)", the game mode that is shifted when the probability variable jackpot 1, 3, 7 is won is also called "ST100 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(B. Continuous performance of variable A to variable C (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode))
Since the "ST number" differs depending on which of the above-mentioned variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won, that is, whether it is shifted to one of "variable A to variable C", in the state with electric support in variable A to variable C ( Probability variable state or time saving state) jackpot pullback rate (so-called "Renzo rate") is also different. That is, the degree of advantage to the player (the state of profit (degree of profit) given to the player) is different. For example, in the case of setting 6 (1/189 at low probability, 1/63 at high probability), the probability variable A (ST number of 100 times) consecutive rate, that is, the ST intermediate rate is about 79.8% . In addition, the probability variable B ("ST number 75 times + time saving number 25 times" electric sapo 100 times) has a rate of about 70% for the ST middle rate, about 12.4% for the short time rate, Overall (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), the rate of consecutive houses is about 73.6%. In addition, the probability variable C (100 electric sapo with “25 ST times + 75 times of time saving”) has a continuous rate of about 33% for ST, about 32.8% for short time, The overall rate of consecutive residences (with power sapo) is about 55%. In addition, the continuous rate in the case of the time-saving jackpot (time-saving medium rate) is about 41.2%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of probability variable jackpots with different numbers of STs are provided, the degree of consecutive wins during the ST can be varied according to the type of jackpot won. In particular, as in the present embodiment, when the number of times of the state with electric support (electric support number) is the same (for example, 100 times), but the number of STs is different (for example, ST 25 times, ST 75 times, ST 100 times), The degree of profit and the degree of continuous ownership in the state with an electric support can be greatly varied according to the winning jackpot type. As a result, the degree of freedom in game play is increased, and the amusement of the game can be further improved. In addition, the degree of freedom of the production (ST production mode, which will be described later) related to the ST mode is also improved, and the production can be diversified.

(7-2-1. Fluctuations at the beginning of ST, middle of ST, and end of ST)
As already described, the "ST early stage mode", the "ST middle stage mode", and the "ST final stage mode" have different variation pattern selection modes (Tcode) (see FIG. 28). As a result, it is possible to select a variation pattern distribution table (see FIGS. 25 and 27) corresponding to each ST mode, so that each ST mode can create its own characteristic ST mode. For example, in the variation pattern distribution table for ST early stage mode, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected with a high probability, and in the variation pattern distribution table for ST middle mode, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is high. It is selected with a probability, and in the variation pattern distribution table of the ST final stage mode, the variation pattern with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected with a high probability, and the average variation time (variation pattern variation time), in other words, the average execution time of the symbol variation display game (average execution time of the symbol variation display game per game or the number of symbol variation display games executed per unit time: hereinafter, “average (also referred to as "digestion time") can be slowed down. It should be noted that the average duration of the pattern variation display game (average duration) is at least the average duration at the time of loss, that is, the "average variation time of the variation pattern of failure" in each ST mode.

In the case of this embodiment, the relationship of the average digestion times in the ST mode is determined so as to satisfy "ST end mode<ST middle mode<ST early stage mode" (see FIG. 27). That is, the ST early stage mode is "high speed fluctuation state (fastest in all game modes (shortest average digestion time))", the ST middle stage mode is "medium speed fluctuation state", and the ST end mode is controlled under "low speed fluctuation state". . If the average digestion time (digestion speed) in each mode satisfies the relationship of "ST end mode<ST middle mode<ST early stage mode", the time is not particularly limited. However, the ST mode is a game mode related to the variable state, and during the ST mode, the "special symbol time saving function" works, so any variation state is at least normal mode (normal state) than the symbol variation display game. Average digestion time is short. Each of the above fluctuation states (high speed, medium speed, and low speed fluctuation states) has the following characteristics.

The above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation state" is mainly useful in a game mode (game state) in which emphasis is placed on game characteristics, such as "increase the average speed of the game to increase the time efficiency of the progress of the game." During the ST mode (variable state), it becomes "state with electric sapo + high probability state (special pattern variable function activated) + special symbol time-saving state (special symbol time-saving function activated)", and at least compared to the normal mode, the symbol variation display game The average digestion time of the game is relatively short, and the game state is devised to make it easier to win a big hit. There are many players who want to get a big hit as soon as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of the ST early stage mode, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected to generate a "high-speed variation state".

On the other hand, in the "medium-speed fluctuation state" or "low-speed fluctuation state" in which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is likely to be selected as compared with the "high-speed fluctuation state", the average pattern fluctuation display game Although the digestion time is longer than that of the "high-speed fluctuation state", the performance time can be set longer, which is useful in a game mode emphasizing the playability such as "enjoying the performance".

(7-2-2. Regarding effects during ST mode)
The ST mode according to the present embodiment includes the "ST early stage mode", the "ST middle stage mode", and the "ST final stage mode" as described above. Therefore, as a production mode (ST production mode) corresponding to these ST modes, "ST early stage production mode" in which production (production for ST early stage) related to "ST early stage" appears, and "ST middle stage""ST middle stage effect mode" in which the effect (ST middle stage effect) appears, and "ST end stage effect mode" in which the effect (ST end stage effect) related to "ST end stage" appears. ing.

(7-2-3. Example of production in ST mode: Fig. 29)
FIG. 29 shows examples of effects in the ST opening stage effect mode, the ST middle stage effect mode, and the ST end stage effect mode.

Referring to FIG. 29, the "ST early stages production mode" according to the present embodiment is an "underwater acoustic warfare mode" that produces a production representing a battle between submarines, and the "ST middle stage production mode" represents a battle between fleets. The "surface battle mode" and "ST final stage production mode", which produce an expressive production, are the "land battle mode", which produces a production that expresses the battle between tanks. In other words, the ST mode period is divided into three stages of the ST beginning stage, the ST middle stage, and the ST end stage according to the remaining number of STs. In addition, the player is notified by dynamic changes in the fluctuation pattern (changes in the fluctuation state of high speed, medium speed, and low speed) and accompanying effects (switching of background effects, advance notice effects, etc.). It should be noted that the display of "Right shot ⇒" shown in the figure is a shooting guidance notification effect (right shot instruction effect) that urges the player to hit right. Further, the reserved icon is shown only in the example of presentation (example of presentation relating to the ST100 mode) in FIG. In addition, the illustration shows that the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, but for convenience of explanation, this shows the state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state after the game is finished. If there is a reserved ball, of course, the variable display of decorative symbols is executed under the current production mode.

Regarding the "ST division effect" that divides the effect mode during the ST period, in each effect mode of "ST early stage effect mode", "ST middle stage effect mode", "ST final stage effect mode", underwater sound warfare mode , a surface combat mode, a land combat mode, etc., and thereby, it is informed that the number of STs is gradually approaching the final one.

In this embodiment, even if any of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won, the production mode is started from the "underwater sound warfare mode" of the ST early stage production mode. That is, the ST opening production mode (underwater acoustic warfare mode) is common to each ST mode (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode) as shown. However, each ST mode is different in the transition form of the game mode, and accordingly the transition form of the production mode is also different.

(In case of ST25 mode: Fig. 29 (C))
In the case of ST25 mode (25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving), as shown in FIG. Then, when the 25th game of the final ST is finished, the game mode is shifted from the ST early stage mode to the time saving mode, and along with this, the production mode is also changed from the ST early stage production mode (underwater sound battle mode) to the time saving production mode (fighters between fighters). (The details of the time-saving mode and time-saving production mode will be described later). This time-saving production mode (air combat mode) stays for 26 games to 100 games (time-saving final game). Although not shown, when the 100th game is finished, the time saving mode ends (the state with the electric sapo ends) and shifts to the normal mode. (General presentation mode) (similarly to ST75 mode, which will be described later).

(For ST75 mode: Fig. 29 (b))
In the case of ST75 mode (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), as shown in FIG. 29(b), between 1st and 25th games, stay in ST early stages production mode (underwater sound warfare mode). When the 25th game ends, the game mode is shifted from the ST early stage mode to the ST middle stage mode, and along with this, the production mode is also shifted from the ST early stage production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) to the ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode). , and stays in this ST middle production mode (water battle mode) until the 75th game. And when the 75th game of the ST final is finished, the game mode is shifted from the ST middle stage mode to the time saving mode, and along with this, the production mode is also from the ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode) to the time saving production mode (air battle mode). migrated. In the case of the ST75 mode, this time-saving production mode (air combat mode) stays for 76 games to 100 games (time-saving final game).

(For ST100 mode: FIG. 29 (a))
In the case of the ST100 mode (100 times of ST), as shown in FIG. 29A, up to the 75th game, the same game mode and effect mode transition as the above-described ST75 mode. However, when the 75th game is finished, the game mode is shifted to the ST middle stage mode ST end stage mode, and along with this, the production mode and the production mode are changed from ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode) to ST end stage production mode (land battle mode). is transferred to In the case of the ST100 mode, all 100 games until the end of the state with the electric sapo are ST (probability variable), and this land battle mode is a special production mode that occurs only in the ST100 mode. In addition, in the case of ST100 mode, since the background is sequentially switched in all sections of ST mode, the player's sense of tension can be reduced to three different production modes: underwater acoustic battle (ST early stage), water battle (ST middle stage), and land battle. It gets stronger every time it switches to the mode (end of ST), and becomes strongest when it reaches the land battle mode at the end of ST. Although not shown, when the 100th game is finished, the ST mode ends (the state with the electric sapo ends) and shifts to the normal mode. Mode (general presentation mode).

In this way, in this embodiment, when any jackpot is won, the game is started from "ST early stage mode+ST early stage effect mode". That is, regardless of the transition destination game state of the big hit game (probability change A to probability change C), in other words, regardless of the initial remaining ST number (number of ST to be given), the start production mode after the big hit game (initial production mode) are common.

(Modifications related to ST mode: FIGS. 30 and 31)
It should be noted that the transition of the ST mode and the ST effect mode in the state of progress of the game is not limited to the above-described embodiment (FIG. 29), and can be configured to follow the transition shown in modified examples 1 and 2 below. Modifications 1 and 2 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG.

(Modification 1 related to ST mode: FIG. 30)
FIG. 30 shows Modification 1 according to the ST mode of this embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 30, the pending icon corresponding to the production mode is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 31 described later).

In the case of this example (modified example 1), the ST mode is divided into a plurality, but depending on each ST mode (depending on the jackpot type that was elected), the start production mode is different, and depending on the number of remaining ST , is designed to start from different production modes.

Referring to FIG. 30, in the case of ST100 mode, as shown in FIG. 30(a), the same mode transition as in the above embodiment (FIG. 29(a)) is followed.

However, in the case of ST75 mode (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), focusing on the fact that the initial remaining number of STs is 75 times, as shown in the figure (b), the following mode transition ( ST mode, transition of the corresponding production mode) is to be traced.
"Between 1 to 25 games": "ST middle stage mode + ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode)"
"Between 26 and 75 games": "ST end mode + ST end stage production mode (land battle mode)"
“Between 76 to 100 games”: “Time saving mode + time saving production mode (air combat mode)”

In addition, in the case of ST25 mode (25 times of ST + 50 times of time saving), focusing on the fact that the initial remaining number of STs is 25 times, as shown in the figure (ha), the following mode transition It is designed to be traced.
"Between 1 to 25 games": "ST end mode + ST end stage production mode (land battle mode)"
“Between 26 and 100 games”: “Time-saving mode + Time-saving production mode (air combat mode)”

In this example, the "ST early stage mode" exists only in the ST100 mode, and the "ST middle stage mode" exists in the ST100 mode and the ST75 mode. The ST final stage mode exists in common in each ST mode. This example differs from the above-described embodiment in the following points.

In the case of this example, focusing on the fluctuation state, in the ST75 mode, the fluctuation state is started from the "middle speed fluctuation state" because the ST middle stage mode (surface warfare mode) is started. Further, in the ST25 mode, since the ST final stage mode (land battle mode) is started, the fluctuation state is started from the "low speed fluctuation state". That is, in the case of this example, as the number of STs in the initial stage is relatively small, the game mode is started from a game mode in which the average completion time of the symbol variation display game is slow. Therefore, the section corresponding to the "high speed fluctuation state" at the beginning of the ST in the above embodiment (between 1 to 25 games) is the section of the medium speed fluctuation state or the low speed fluctuation state, so even if the number of STs is small , the ST period can be enjoyed for a long period of time without fear that the ST period will end quickly.

(Modification 2 related to ST mode: FIG. 31)
FIG. 31 shows Modified Example 2 of the ST effect mode according to the present embodiment. This example is started from the common "ST production mode" regardless of the number of times of ST, and is shifted to the "time saving mode" when the time saving state is transferred. In the drawing, an example starting from the ST middle stage mode is representatively shown.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 31(a) to 31(b), ST25, ST75 and ST100 modes all have common ST mode and ST effect mode (naval warfare mode). That is, during the ST mode, the variation pattern selection mode is the same ("03H" in ST middle stage mode in this example), and at least the variation state (average digest time) does not change according to the remaining ST number. In this respect, it is significantly different from the above-described embodiment and Modification 1. However, in the case of ST25 mode or ST75 mode, when the number of ST ends, it is shifted from the ST mode to the time saving mode (variation pattern selection mode is updated to "05H" of the time saving mode), along with this production mode is also shifted from the ST middle stage production mode to the time reduction production mode. In other words, in the case of the ST25 and ST75 modes, the transition of the game mode (variation pattern selection mode) in the state with the electric support occurs, and in the case of the ST100 mode, the game mode in the state with the electric support (variation pattern selection mode ) does not occur.

In the case of this example, since the ST production mode (ST mode) does not change according to the number of ST, for example, the number of ST is relatively small such as "5 times, 10 times, 15 times" (low ST probability variable state) is suitable when a plurality of types are provided. This is because when the number of times of ST is small, the player feels annoyed if the performance mode or the variation pattern selection mode is changed recklessly.

It should be noted that during the ST mode, the "normal mode", "simple mode", and "premium mode" explained in the normal mode may be configured to be unswitchable, or like the normal mode, the player may be configured to be switchable. (The same applies to other game modes (shorter working hours mode and heaven mode, which will be described later)). In the case of a switchable configuration, specific colors (for example, dark color), or change the display color and pattern of weapon images (submarines, ships, tanks, fighter planes (in the case of the time-saving production mode described later)) related to each ST mode to normal/simple/premium mode. By applying display processing such as changing in each production mode, it is possible to identify which production mode is being switched to. Also, how to determine the fluctuation state (average digestion time) in each mode is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, the relationship "ST end mode <ST middle mode <ST early mode" was described, but it may be configured like the variation state of Modifications 1 and 2, or "ST early mode <ST middle mode <ST end The relationship may be such that the fluctuation state relatively slows down according to the number of STs, like the relationship of "Mode".

The following (1) to (10) can be used for the "remaining ST number of times notification effect" for notifying the remaining ST number and the "remaining power supply number of times notification effect" for notifying the remaining number of power supply support.
(1) In each ST production mode (each ST mode), the "remaining ST number notification production" and/or the "remaining electricity sapo number notification production" can appear.
In addition, (2) when displaying the remaining ST number informing effect, the remaining ST number of each effect ST mode may be notified. For example, if it is in ST early stage mode, the countdown display is performed from the remaining 25 times, if it is in the ST middle stage mode, the countdown display is performed from the remaining 50 times, and if it is in the ST final stage mode, the countdown display is performed from the remaining 25 times. and so on.
Further, (3) a configuration in which the remaining ST number informing effect is not displayed (a configuration in which the remaining ST number cannot be grasped) may be adopted. In this case, only the residual electric power support number informing effect may be displayed.
Also, (4) the remaining ST count notification effect may be started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed from the start of the ST. For example, the countdown display may be started five games before the end of the ST.
Also, (5) the remaining ST number informing effect may appear only in a specific ST mode. The specific ST mode may be any of ST25, ST75, and ST100, but as the number of remaining STs increases, the player tends to enjoy the game while paying attention to the number of STs. It is preferable to make it appear.
Also, (6) during the ST performance mode (ST mode), the remaining ST number of times notification effect may be displayed, and during the time reduction performance mode (time reduction mode), the remaining power supply number of times notification effect may be displayed.
Further, (7) the remaining ST number of times notification effect and the remaining electric power sapo number of times notification effect may not be separately displayed, but may be used as a countdown display, for example. For example, using the same countdown display, the number display is "white" during ST mode and "red" during time saving mode, or a predetermined effect image (( For example, display with light (glow effect, shadow effect, gradation, blur, embossing, etc.), but no effect during time-saving mode.

(7-3. About “time saving mode”)
Returning to the description of FIG. The time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the time saving state (YJ=02H), and in the case of this embodiment, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is one type of "05H". In the time-saving mode, in addition to winning the time-saving jackpot 1, 2 (5R time-saving A, 5R time-saving B), the variable hits 2, 3, 5, 6 (5R variable ST75, 5R variable ST25, 7R variable ST75, 7R variable This is a game mode that is shifted even after the number of times of ST is completed when ST25) or the like is won. After the end of the time saving mode (after the end of the time saving number of times), it is shifted to the "normal mode" (see the upward bold arrow in the block frame of the time saving mode in FIG. 6).

(7-3-1. Regarding the fluctuation state during the time saving mode)
During the time-saving mode, it becomes "low probability (special symbol probability variation function not activated) + electric sapo state + special symbol time-saving state", but regarding the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game, the high speed related to the ST mode It is free to select a variable state that is the same as or substantially the same as the variable state, medium-speed variable state, or low-speed variable state, or a variable state that has an average digestion rate different from these. However, in the time saving mode, it is also transferred from ST mode, specifically, in the case of ST25 mode, it transfers from "ST early stage mode (high speed fluctuation state)" to "time saving mode", and in the case of ST75 mode Is the point of transitioning to the "time saving mode" after "ST early stage mode (high speed fluctuation state)" and "ST middle stage mode (medium speed fluctuation state)", and the point that the jackpot lottery probability is low during the time saving mode (losing In view of the frequent occurrence of ), it is preferable to position the time-saving mode as a game mode that emphasizes game characteristics such as "enjoying production". Therefore, it is preferable to set the fluctuation state (average digestion time) during the time saving mode to "the fluctuation state during the time saving mode < the high speed fluctuation state during the ST mode", more preferably "the fluctuation state during the time saving mode ≤ during the ST mode medium-speed fluctuation state of In addition, like the ST mode, the time saving mode may be configured so that a plurality of time saving modes can be shifted, and in this case, a plurality of variation pattern selection modes for the time saving mode may be provided.

(7-3-2. About production during time saving mode)
During the time saving mode, it is shifted to the "time saving production mode" in which the production related to "during the time saving state" appears. In the time-saving production mode, it becomes an "air battle mode" that produces a production that expresses the battle between fighters, and is distinguished from each game mode (ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST final stage mode) in the above ST mode. In this embodiment, in addition to the case of winning the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2, even when shifting to the time-saving mode after the ST of the probability variable jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 is completed, all are shifted to the same time-saving performance mode. , the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving jackpot 1 and the time saving jackpot 2 may be shifted to a time saving production mode (for example, when the time saving jackpot 1 is won, the time saving A production mode is won, and when the time saving jackpot 2 is won, the time saving B production mode is performed). . In addition, the time-saving performance mode at the time of winning the time-saving jackpot and the time-saving performance mode (time-saving performance mode related to ST25, ST75) after the end of the ST at the time of winning the probability variable jackpot may be different.

(7-4. "Ceiling mode": Figure 7)
Next, the "ceiling mode" will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, a "ceiling function" is provided as a relief function in the event of a serious addiction. This ceiling function is a function of providing a predetermined profit state (ceiling privilege) to save the player when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning the jackpot. The ceiling privilege is provided with a profit state that is at least more advantageous than the normal state in terms of the hamari relief function. The number of ceiling games in this embodiment is the number of games (number of ceiling games) considering the jackpot lottery probability at low probability of setting 1 to 6, and is the 1000th game in normal mode (three times the low probability). ~4 times), and the ceiling mode is a game mode that occurs in the 1000th game. It should be noted that the number of ceiling games can be determined as appropriate. For example, if the jackpot lottery probability in the normal state is a relatively high probability (about 1/100) of the "sweet digital type", the ceiling number of games can be about 300 to 500 games. In this embodiment, the number of ceiling games is the same regardless of the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling game can be different for all or part of each setting value. For example, settings 1 to 6 may have different number of ceiling games (for example, 1100 games to 1050 games: the higher the setting value, the fewer number of ceiling games), and the high setting area (settings 4 to 6) will set the number of ceiling games to 1000. As a game, the medium and low setting areas (settings 1 to 3) can be 1032 games, or only a specific setting value (for example, the highest setting setting 6) can be the number of ceiling games different from other setting values.

First, the types of ceiling benefits will be explained. As the types of ceiling benefits, as shown in the list of "Examples of ceiling benefits" in Note 2 of FIG. Infinite Potential", "Limited Potential", and "Forced Hit". If you broadly classify these benefits, “Infinite time saving” and “Limited time saving” are “Ceiling time saving type”, “Infinite probability change” and “Limited probability change” are “Ceiling probability change type”, “Infinite potential” and “Limited potential Accurate" is a ceiling privilege belonging to the "ceiling latent certainty type", and "forced hit" belongs to the "ceiling hit type". These ceiling privilege types will be sequentially described below.

(Infinite reduction of working hours)
(A) “Infinite reduction in working hours” is a benefit that gives a reduction in working hours until the next big hit. In addition, in the case of infinite time saving, the number of times of time saving is "no number of times limit (infinite)", but the number of time saving times that will be substantially until the next big hit, such as 10000 times or 65536 times, etc. Even if there is no possibility of ending the time-saving state (when it is safe to consider it to be 0%), or when giving an undigestible number of time-savings during the business hours of the pachinko hall (for example, 65536 times, etc.), In the present invention, it can be treated as belonging to infinite time reduction.

(limited working hours)
(B) "Limited time saving" is to provide a time saving state within a predetermined number of times of time saving so as to achieve an appropriate jackpot winning rate. In this respect, it differs from the above-mentioned infinite reduction of working hours, which does not have a limited number of times. As the number of times of time saving to be given, for example, the same number of times of time saving 100 times or the number of times of time saving 75 times as the time saving jackpots 1 and 2 are typical examples, but not limited to giving the same number of time saving times as the time saving jackpots, different time saving times A number of times (for example, 75 times, 150 times, 200 times, etc.) can be given. In addition, even if the number of times of time reduction that becomes "substantially until the next big hit" in the above "infinite time reduction" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this limited time reduction in that there is a limit on the number of times, but as described above, the present invention can be treated as belonging to infinite time reduction.

(Specific example of giving finite time reduction)
Here, when giving a finite time saving, the following giving forms (1) to (4) (finite time saving giving forms 1 to 4) can be used.

(Limited time saving form 1)
(1) There are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of times of time reduction due to the jackpot (the number of times of time reduction given due to winning the jackpot (time reduction state)), but the number of times of time reduction due to ceiling benefits (time reduction state) is more than that. Decide on a small number of types (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured so as to satisfy the relationship "the number of types B<the number of types A".

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, there are two types (number of types A) of 100 times (time saving A) and 50 times (time saving B) for the number of times of time saving due to the big hit, but in the ceiling privilege, for example, the ceiling privilege Then, it is configured to give only one type of time saving number of times 100 times (time saving A). In addition, if the relationship of "the number of types B<the number of types A" is satisfied, the number of times of time saving (for example, 150 times) different from the number of times of time saving due to the big hit may be provided. In addition, if there are two or more types of time-saving number of times (time-saving state) due to the ceiling privilege (in the case of "2 ≤ number of types B < number of types A"), by a predetermined lottery, one of the number of time-saving times (time-saving state ) can be configured to be determinable.

(Limited time saving form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of the number of times of time saving (time saving state) by the ceiling privilege, one of the number of times of time saving (time saving state) is determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery).
For example, it can be determined by lottery from among a plurality of times of time saving (50 times and 100 times in this embodiment) given due to winning a big hit. In this case, the number of time reductions equivalent to the jackpot can be given. Of course, it may be determined by lottery from among a plurality of times of time saving (for example, 100 times, 75 times and 25 times) including times of time saving different from the number of times of time saving given due to a big hit. In this case, the number of time reductions different from the jackpot may be awarded. In addition, the lottery probability (selection rate) of the lottery target ceiling privilege type (here, each time saving number of times) may be the same or substantially the same, and all or part may be different. Further, the lottery target may include a "ceiling privilege lost" in which no ceiling privilege is given. When the ceiling privilege loss is included, the ceiling privilege is not necessarily given even if the ceiling game is reached, but in this case, "execution of the ceiling privilege lottery" plays a role as a hamari relief function.

Moreover, you may determine the lottery probability according to a "setting value", and may determine the number of times of time saving (time saving state) by predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery according to a setting value). For example, as the set value increases, a relatively large number of times of time saving (time saving state) is likely to be selected. In other words, as the set value increases, a privilege with a relatively high degree of profit is likely to be awarded (the same applies to other ceiling privileges described later). Specifically, when "100 times, 75 times, 50 times" are provided as the types of time saving, if the lottery probability is "setting 1", "25%, 35%, 40%", "setting For 6″, it is “45%, 30%, 25%” and so on. However, on the contrary, considering that the lower the set value is, the more addicted to it, the lower the set value, the more likely the number of time reductions to be selected. In other words, as the set value becomes lower, a privilege with a relatively high degree of profit is likely to be granted (the same applies to other ceiling privileges described later). Moreover, it is good also as a structure of "when a specific ceiling privilege is provided, a specific setting value is fixed." For example, when the number of times of time saving is given 25 times, it is "setting 6 fixed", and when 75 times is given, it is "setting 4 or more fixed". In this way, the ceiling privilege determination method related to the setting value can provide the player with useful information in the form of a setting guessing element, and is therefore useful in increasing the willingness of the player who encounters a addiction to play.

(Limited time saving form 3)
(3) When the average number of times of reduction of time is N due to the time reduction jackpot and the average number of times of reduction of time is M due to the ceiling privilege, it can be configured to satisfy the relationships of the following (formula 1) to (formula 3).
(Formula 1) Configured so as to satisfy the relationship of “average number of times of reduced working hours N<average number of reduced hours of working hours M”. In the case of the present embodiment, since the average number of times N of time saving due to the big hit is 75 times, the average number of times M of time saving due to the ceiling privilege is set to a number of times of time saving greater than this. In the case of this example, since the ceiling privilege is relatively higher in the degree of profit than the normal jackpot winning, it is a pleasant privilege for a player who is addicted to the game and has a significantly reduced desire to play. In addition, the average number of times of reduction of working hours M may be an infinite number of times. When the average number of times of shortening of working hours M is infinite, it is equivalent to the case of giving the above "infinite shortening of working hours".
(Formula 2) Configured so as to satisfy the relationship of "average number of times of reduced working hours N = average number of reduced hours of work M". In this case, the degree of profit from the big hit (the number of times of time reduction) and the degree of profit from the ceiling privilege are the same.
(Formula 3) Configured so as to satisfy the relationship of “average number of times of reduced working hours N>average number of reduced hours of working hours M”. In this case, the degree of profit from the big hit is relatively lower than the degree of profit from the ceiling privilege, and it is possible to avoid giving excessive privileges.

(Limited time saving form 4)
(4) As with the above (Formula 3), focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, at least the number of time savings that satisfies the relationship of "number of times of time savings due to ceiling benefits ≤ maximum number of times of time savings due to big hits" is set. If it is this embodiment, the number of times of time saving by a ceiling privilege is below the number of times of time saving of "time saving A" by time saving big hit 1, for example, is 100 times, 90 times, etc. In addition, focusing on the minimum number of time-savings due to the big hit, it may be the number of times that satisfies the relationship of "minimum number of times of time-savings due to the big hit ≤ number of times of time-savings due to the ceiling privilege < maximum number of times of time-savings due to the big hit". In this embodiment, the number of times of time saving by the ceiling privilege is more than the number of times of saving time B by the time saving jackpot 2, less than the number of times of saving time of "time saving A" by the time saving jackpot 1, for example, 50 times, 60 times.

(Infinite variation)
(C) “Infinite probability variation” is a benefit that gives a probability variation state until the next big hit. In addition, in the case of infinite probability variation, the ST number is "no number limit (infinite)", but like the above "infinite short time" and the same event, the ST number (for example, 10000 times or 65536 times) may be given.

(finite variable)
(D) “Limited probability variation” is different from the above-mentioned infinite probability variation, and provides a probability variation state within a predetermined number of STs so as to achieve an appropriate jackpot winning rate. For example, 100 times, 75 times, or 25 times, etc. are given as the number of STs, like the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7. Of course, the number of times may not be the same as the number of STs of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7, and 50 times, 150 times, etc. may be given. In addition, even if the number of STs that becomes "substantially until the next big hit" in the above "infinite probability variation" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite probability variation in that there is a limit on the number of times, but the same thing as "infinite time reduction" Like an elephant, it can be treated as belonging to infinite probability variation, or it can be treated as belonging to finite probability variation (the same applies to infinite probability described later).

(Specific example of giving finite probability variation)
Here, when granting a finite probability variation, the following ceiling privilege grant form (limited probability variation grant form) 1 ~ 4. In addition, in the following finite probability variable grant forms 1 to 4, the "time reduction number of times" explained in the above "finite time reduction grant form 1 to 4" was replaced with "ST number", and the "time reduction state" was appropriately read as "variable state". Since it is substantially the same as the content (concept), the content will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid redundant description for convenience of explanation.

(Finite probability variation grant form 1)
(1) Number of STs due to big hits (There are multiple types of ST numbers (variable state) given due to winning the jackpot (number of types A), but the number of STs (variable state) due to ceiling benefits is less than that ( The number of types is B), that is, the configuration is made so as to satisfy the relationship of "the number of types B<the number of types A".

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs (variable probability state) given due to winning the variable probability jackpot is 100 times (variable probability A), 75 times (variable probability B), 25 times (variable probability C ), for example, in the ceiling privilege, only one type of ST number of 100 times (probability variation A) is provided.

(Finite probability variation grant form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of ST numbers (variable probability state) due to ceiling benefits, one of the ST numbers (variable probability state) is determined by a predetermined lottery. Regarding this point, it is substantially the same as the content of "time saving number" explained in "(limited time saving form 2)" in the above finite time saving as "ST number", "time saving state" to "variable state" etc. is.

(Limited probability variation grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of STs due to the variable probability big hit is N, and the average number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is M, the relationship of the following (Formula 4) to (Formula 6) can be satisfied. Regarding this (Formula 4) ~ (Formula 6), the wording of "Time saving number" of (Formula 1) ~ (Formula 3) explained in "(Limited time saving form 3)" in the above finite time saving is changed to "ST number ” is substantially the same as the content replaced with the wording, etc.
(Formula 4) It is constructed so as to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N<average number of STs M". Note that the average number of STs M may be an infinite number of times. If the average number of STs M is infinite, it is equivalent to the above-mentioned "infinite variation".
(Equation 5) Configure so as to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N=average number of STs M".
(Formula 6) The configuration is made so as to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N>average number of STs M".

(Finite probability variation grant form 4)
(4) Focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, the number of STs is determined to satisfy at least the relationship of "the number of STs due to ceiling benefits ≤ the maximum number of STs due to big wins". In the present embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is equal to or less than the number of STs due to the probability variable jackpot 1 or the like, for example, 100 times, 90 times, or the like. Also, focusing on the minimum number of STs due to a big hit, the number of STs may satisfy the relationship of "minimum number of STs due to a big hit ≤ number of STs due to a ceiling privilege<maximum number of STs due to a big hit". In this embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is more than the number of STs due to the probability variation jackpot 6, etc., less than the number of STs due to the probability variation jackpot 1, etc., for example, 25 times, 50 times, 75 times (same ST number as ST75) etc. is.

(Infinite potential)
(E) "Infinite Potential" is a benefit that gives a potential state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite potential, the ST number is "no number limit (infinite)", but in the same way as the above infinite time reduction and infinite probability variation, even if the ST number is given until the next big hit good.

(finite latency)
(F) “Limited probability” is different from the infinite probability mentioned above, in which a probability state is given within a predetermined number of STs so as to achieve an appropriate winning rate. In this embodiment, there is no latent probability big hit that triggers the transition to the latent probability state, but if a part of the probability variable big hit is the latent probability big hit, the finite probability variable grant form 1 explained in the finite probability variation 4 (configuration related to giving the number of STs) can be used. Regarding this point, since it is substantially the same content as the finite probability change (contents in which the wording of "probability change state" is appropriately read as the wording of "potential state"), detailed explanation is omitted to avoid duplication. .

(forced hit)
(G) "Forced winning" means to forcibly award a jackpot regardless of the jackpot lottery. "Unrelated to the jackpot lottery" means that the jackpot lottery itself is not executed, or even if the jackpot lottery is executed, the result is treated as invalid, and the jackpot lottery is completely irrelevant. not limited in meaning.

The types of forced hits are variable hits (limited hits, infinite hits), short-time jackpots (limited hits, infinite hits), or latent hits (finite hits, infinite hits). There may be. Also, the maximum number of rounds or a round game mode can be determined as appropriate. In addition, it is also possible to appropriately determine the transition destination game state after the forced hit. For example, it may be the same transition destination game state (for example, time saving A, time saving B, or probability (ST) A to C) as when the jackpot shown in FIG. Grant forms 1 to 4, finite probability variable grant forms 1 to 4, etc. may be shifted to the same game state.

However, in order not to give excessive benefits, as a forced hit, one of the jackpot lottery targets (in this embodiment, one of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 and the time-saving jackpots 1 to 2) ) is preferable. More preferably, the degree of profit should not be higher than the total jackpot. The profit here means "profit from the jackpot game" or "profit including the jackpot game and the transition destination game state". In the present embodiment, it is preferable to satisfy at least the relationship of "profit from forced winning ≤ profit from variable probability jackpot 4 (jackpot with the highest degree of profit among all jackpots)".

Since the above-described ceiling privilege can provide a profit that is the same as or different from the profit that is provided based on the result of the jackpot lottery, it is useful as a relieving function.

Moreover, although various ceiling privileges have been described above, it is free to adopt any ceiling privilege. In addition, ceiling benefits are provided with multiple types of benefits with different characteristics (for example, finite time reduction and finite probability variation), and benefits with the same character but different advantages (profit status) (for example, 100 times of time reduction finite It is possible to provide multiple types of time saving A and finite time saving B with 50 times of time saving. In this case, it is possible to appropriately determine what kinds of ceiling privileges (two or more ceiling privileges) are to be provided. For example, a finite time reduction and a finite probability variation are provided, and which ceiling privilege is given can be determined by a predetermined lottery. In this case, the same lottery probability may be set regardless of the set value, but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the set value, as in the above-described "ceiling privilege lottery". Specifically, as the set value increases, the benefits with a relatively high degree of profit (for example, if you draw a lottery between the finite time saving and the finite probability variation, the "finite probability variation" side) are likely to be granted. On the contrary, As the set value increases, the benefit degree is relatively low ((for example, if you draw a lottery finite time reduction and finite probability variation "limited time reduction" side) can be configured to be easily granted. In the case of a hit, the above-mentioned case of ``providing multiple types of benefits with different characteristics'' includes, for example, the case of ``providing at least two of the time-saving jackpot, probability variable jackpot, and latent hit jackpot''. However, in the case of providing multiple types of benefits with different degrees of advantage (profit status), for example, ``cases of providing multiple jackpots with different times of time reduction (time reduction jackpots)'' and ``multiple jackpots with different ST times (variable hits Or there is a case such as setting a latent hit jackpot).

Further, after the ceiling privilege is provided, the game state (game mode) relating to the ceiling privilege is controlled until the ceiling privilege is consumed or until the jackpot is won. Specifically, if it is a "finite system privilege" such as a finite time saving, a finite probability change, or a finite probability, without winning the jackpot, if the specified time saving number or ST number ends, or if the jackpot is won In this case, the normal mode (normal state) is entered, and the ceiling privilege is not given until the ceiling activation opportunity (ceiling game) arrives again. On the other hand, if it is an "infinite system privilege" such as infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite probability, the privilege state will be continued until the next big win, and the privilege state will be terminated with the winning of the big win.

In addition, if the ceiling privilege is finitely variable, it is a ceiling privilege of "finitely variable short-time type" that shifts to a time-saving state (limited time-saving or infinite time-saving) when the specified number of STs is completed, such as ST75 mode or ST25 mode. may This “finite variable time-saving type” includes the following types (A) to (D).
(A) When the prescribed number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed, the ceiling privilege of the “finite probability variable / limited time reduction” type that shifts to a finite time reduction (for example, 100 times of time reduction).
(B) Ceiling privilege of “finite probability variable / infinite time reduction” type that shifts to infinite time reduction when the prescribed number of STs is completed.
(Hei) When the first specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) ends, only the electric sapo state ends, and the second specified number of STs (for example, 100 times) moves to a finite probability. ” type ceiling privilege (the first specified number of STs and the second specified number of STs may be the same or different).
(D) When the prescribed number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed, only the electric sapo state ends and the ceiling privilege of the “finite probability variation / infinite probability” type that shifts to infinite probability.

Returning to the description of the ceiling mode in FIG. Here, as a representative example, a configuration in which "limited working hours" (100 times of the maximum number of working hours due to a big hit) is adopted as the ceiling privilege will be described.

Ceiling mode, depending on the ceiling privilege, the internal game state is a game mode related to the time saving state and probability variable state, etc., but here we describe an example in which "limited time saving" is given, so the ceiling mode is , it becomes a game mode related to the time saving state (YJ=01H). However, in the ceiling mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to dedicated "06H" in order to select the ceiling-dedicated variation pattern. Here, when reaching the ceiling (during the ceiling game), a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (ceiling variation pattern) is selected in order to ensure the duration of the “ceiling effect” described later. there is In this embodiment, the longest variation pattern is selected during all game modes (during all variation pattern selection mode) (see column of "ceiling variation" in FIG. 26). In addition, the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not particularly limited as long as the production time width of the "ceiling production" can be secured, but a fluctuation pattern that has a fluctuation time of at least SP reach during normal mode (at least SP reach without pseudo continuous) is used. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be selected.

In addition, since the jackpot lottery is executed as usual in the 1000th game (ceiling game), if the jackpot is won in the 1000th game, the jackpot game will be started as usual after the 1000th game. Become. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the ceiling game by chance, activation of the ceiling function is restricted (prohibited) (see ceiling activation management processing in FIG. 13 to be described later). ), when the ceiling privilege is awarded, the 1000th game is a case of "losing". When a small win is provided, even if a small win is won in the 1000th game, a ceiling privilege is provided in the same manner as a loss. This point is not limited to when the ceiling privilege is finite time saving, but the same is true for infinite time saving, infinite probability variation, finite probability variation, infinite latent probability, or finite probability. However, when the ceiling privilege is "forced winning", the state is forcibly controlled to the jackpot winning state, so the jackpot lottery itself in the 1000th game is not executed, or the result is invalidated even if the jackpot lottery is executed. It should be treated as if the jackpot for the ceiling was won. Therefore, when the ceiling privilege is a "forced win", after the 1000th game, a jackpot game (forced jackpot game) related to the jackpot for the ceiling is started in the same way as when a normal jackpot is won. becomes. In addition, the effect during the hit during the forced big win game may be the same as the normal big win (the same as the time-saving big win 1 and the probability variable big win 1 to 7), or the effect during the hit only for the forced big win may be displayed. may

(7-4-1. Regarding effects during ceiling mode)
During the ceiling mode, a transition is made to a "ceiling effect mode" in which an effect (ceiling effect) for notifying that the player has reached the ceiling is displayed. This ceiling effect mode is a effect mode dedicated to the ceiling (1000th game), and in the case of this embodiment, is a effect mode limited to one game (limited to one rotation). As an example of the effect in the ceiling effect mode, for example, a decorative pattern (decorative pattern for the ceiling) at the time of the ceiling is different from at least the normal mode (number patterns of 1 to 9). The reason for saying "At least the decoration pattern different from normal mode" is that the ceiling is reached when you encounter a big hook in normal mode, and the decoration pattern that is different from the decoration pattern that has appeared in normal mode for a long time This is because it is appropriate to make it appear and notify that it has reached the ceiling.

The decorative pattern for the ceiling is specifically a dedicated pattern (decorative pattern for the ceiling) that displays special characters, items, or characters, and the decorative pattern for the ceiling is a pattern that has a strong impact in terms of production. Preferably, for example, it is the decorative design 778 shown in Note 1 of FIG. There are usually three decorative pattern rows, a right pattern, a middle pattern, and a left pattern (see FIG. 5), but the ceiling decorative pattern row does not necessarily have to be three pattern rows. For example, it is possible to have four symbol rows of "heaven", "well", "to" and "till", or two symbol rows of "heaven" and "well". Also, in order to emphasize that the ball has reached the ceiling, a giant decorative pattern having a larger display area than a normal decorative pattern, or a pattern with a predetermined effect image may be used. In addition, regarding the decorative patterns related to the ceiling game, normal decorative patterns are used during variable display (all or part of the same decorative patterns), and only decorative patterns that are finally stopped (decorative stop patterns) are used as ceiling decorative patterns. good too.

Also, a dedicated character image 777 appears as a background display of the decorative pattern. This character image 777 is a special effect that appears only in the ceiling game. In addition, as one of the characteristic effects, when the symbol variation display game is started, a "right-hand shot instruction image 779 (shooting guidance notification effect)" appears to prompt a right-hand shot.

The reason for displaying the right-handed instruction image 779 is as follows. When a finite reduction in time is given as a ceiling privilege (the same is true when an infinite reduction in time, finite probability change, or infinite probability change is given), a “state with electric support” occurs at the start of the 1000th game. For this reason, it is intended to immediately inform the player that hitting to the right is advantageous so as not to give a disadvantage to the player. In this embodiment, a right-handed instruction image 779 appears at the same time or substantially at the same time as the symbol variation display game is started. In addition, considering the fact that the "state with electric sapo" occurs at the ceiling (1000th game), during the omen mode or during a part of the period (for example, the game immediately before the ceiling game (the last omen mode)), It is preferable to display an effect (preliminary firing guidance notification effect) for notifying that the "right-handed shot" will soon occur.

Further, in the case of "losing" in the symbol variation display game at the ceiling (1000th game), it is preferable not to display the specific notice effect. For example, at least the high-expectation-level announcement effect does not appear, or at least one of the simulated series, ready-to-win effect, and player-participation type effect does not appear. The reason for this is that there is no need for an exaggerated forewarning effect that arouses the expectation of winning the jackpot at the peak. However, this is not the case when a simulated series, a ready-to-win effect, or a player participation type effect is provided as a preview effect dedicated to the ceiling mode (ceiling game). However, in any case, it is preferable not to show a notice effect that arouses the expectation of winning. It is preferable to set the effect mode exclusively for the ceiling, which is different from the effect mode appearing in the mode. Also, as a privilege for reaching the ceiling, a setting suggestion effect may appear. This is because providing the player with useful information such as the setting guessing element is useful for increasing the player's willingness to play when he encounters a addiction. In addition, when the setting suggesting effect is displayed at the ceiling, the appearance rate may be 100%, or may be displayed by a predetermined lottery.

On the other hand, in the ceiling game (the 1000th game), when a jackpot is won by chance, the effect related to the ceiling effect mode is not displayed, but in the normal effect mode (for example, during the general mode or the omen mode). (See the "Ceiling" column in FIG. 24). This is because if a ceiling effect is displayed even when a jackpot is achieved in the ceiling game, it becomes unclear whether a jackpot or a ceiling privilege is given, and the player is confused.

(7-5. Heaven Mode)
The heaven mode is a game mode that is shifted to the next game (1001th game) of the ceiling game, and according to the ceiling privilege, the internal game state becomes a game mode related to a time saving state, a probability change state, etc. Here, Since the example in which "finite time saving (time saving number of times 100 times)" is given is described, the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the time saving state (YJ=01H). Further, during the heaven mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to dedicated "07H" so as to select a variation pattern dedicated to heaven. In addition, when shifting to this heaven mode, it is a case of ceiling benefits other than "forced hit" (limited time reduction, infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, finite probability change, infinite probability, or finite probability).

The heaven mode is terminated when a jackpot is won, or when a specified number of times of time reduction or ST is completed without winning a jackpot in the case of the finite ceiling privilege. Here, the ceiling privilege is described as "finite time saving (100 times saving time)", so heaven mode is when 100 times saving time ends, or when a jackpot is won during the time saving number of times will be terminated. Then, when the heaven mode ends, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In addition, if the ceiling privilege is finite probability variation or finite probability probability, it will be terminated when the number of STs ends or if the jackpot is won within the number of STs, and infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation and infinite probability In this case, it will be terminated when the jackpot is won.

(7-5-1. Fluctuation state related to heaven mode)
Here, during the heaven mode, any of the above-described high speed fluctuation state, medium speed fluctuation state, low speed fluctuation state, and the like can be employed. However, it is preferable to determine the variable state during heaven mode according to the ceiling privilege type. For example, if the ceiling privilege is limited time reduction or infinite time reduction, it is preferable to position it as a game mode that emphasizes game characteristics such as "enjoying production" as in the time reduction mode. That is, the fluctuation state in heaven mode at the time of finite time reduction or infinite time reduction is "variation state in heaven mode < high speed fluctuation state in ST mode" or "variation state in heaven mode ≤ medium speed fluctuation state in ST mode ” is preferred. However, in consideration of the fact that there is no limit to the number of times of time saving when giving infinite time saving, it may be in a high-speed fluctuation state.

On the other hand, when the finite probability variation or infinite probability variation is given, the probability of the jackpot lottery is high in addition to the state with the electric sapo, so it is possible to have the same or almost the same variation state as the high-speed variation state in the ST mode. preferable. On the other hand, when infinite or finite probability is given, the probability of the jackpot lottery is high, but it is controlled without an electric sapo, so it is difficult for the ball to hold the operation as in the normal state. . Considering this point, in the case of infinite or finite latency, the same or almost the same fluctuation state as the normal mode, or at least a slower fluctuation state than the short time mode (a fluctuation state with a relatively long average digestion time ) is preferable. That is, the relationship is set to satisfy "fluctuation state in normal mode≦variation state in infinite or finite latency <variation state in time-saving mode".

(7-5-2. Regarding production during heaven mode)
During the heaven mode, a transition is made to a "heaven effect mode" for performing a effect (heaven effect) related to the heaven mode. This paradise effect mode is a dedicated effect mode after the next game of the ceiling (after the 1001st game), and ends when the paradise mode ends. During this paradise production mode, the background display is switched to a special background display different from other game modes (for example, a "space background image" expressing outer space) to notify that the paradise mode is on.

In addition, as a ceiling privilege, when giving finite time saving or infinite time saving, the above-mentioned "time saving production mode (air battle mode)" related to time saving state may be adopted as heaven production mode.

In addition, when giving finite probability variation, infinite probability variation, finite probability, or infinite probability as the ceiling privilege, the above-mentioned "ST production mode" related to the probability variation state may be adopted as the heaven production mode. In this case, as in the ST production mode, the ST production mode may be shifted to a different ST production mode according to the number of times ST is consumed. Specifically, depending on the number of ST digests, the production mode is sequentially changed like "ST production early stage mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) ⇒ ST production middle stage mode (water battle mode) ⇒ ST production final stage mode (land battle mode)". can be transferred. In the case of infinite probability change or infinite probability, there is no limit on the number of STs, so after the ST101st time, the ST end stage production mode may be continued as it is, or a separate new ST production mode (ST continuous production mode) You can move to In addition, it is also possible to return to the ST presentation early stage mode in ST101 and loop the transition of "ST presentation early stage mode ⇒ ST presentation middle stage mode ⇒ ST presentation final stage mode" again.

In addition, during the heaven production mode, it may be configured to be switchable between normal/simple/premium mode like the contents of the already explained "foreshadowing production mode" and "ST production mode". , a configuration in which switching between the normal/simple/premium modes is impossible (control is performed in a state in which switching is not possible).

In addition, as part of remedial measures for a player who is very addicted, during the heaven mode, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects may be made higher than in other game modes. For example, the heaven mode should be configured to have a higher probability of appearance of setting suggesting effects (setting suggesting effects that can appear during the symbol variation display game) than at least the normal mode (general mode and/or omen mode). can be done. In particular, if the ceiling privilege is a privilege with an electric sapo (ceiling privilege other than infinite potential and finite potential), it is placed under a high base state during heaven mode, so the player can use his own ball (game The game can be progressed without reducing the game medium owned by the player or the game value equivalent thereto, or while maintaining the current situation. Therefore, some players say, ``Until you see the setting suggestion effect, you can be a little addicted,'' and in contrast to the normal mode, you can learn advantageous information by being addicted. It is conceivable that there are many players who want to do so. Considering such a point, it is preferable to change the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects with high probability during the heaven mode to function as a "setting suggestion appearance chance zone". As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play after becoming hooked.

<8. About the game progress mode: Fig. 6, Fig. 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, a specific game progress mode related to the gaming machine 1 will be described while paying attention to the game mode transition control and the presentation aspect.

It should be noted that, as to what kind of strokes the player should make to obtain an advantageous situation, basically it changes according to the internal game state. It changes depending on the game mode to be played). As already explained, if it is a normal state (normal mode), it is advantageous to aim at "left hitting" so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b. If it is time saving mode, ceiling mode, heaven mode), "right hitting" aiming so that the game ball passes through the right flow path 3c is advantageous. In the following, it is assumed that the player follows an advantageous beating method according to the game state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of left-handed beating advantage (normal state), "symbol variation display game 1 on the side of special figure 1" is executed, and in the case of right-handed advantage (probability variable state, time-saving state), it is assumed that "symbol variation display game 2 on the side of special figure 2" is executed. Also, the game mode will be described as starting from the "normal mode" which is the initial game mode.

When a big win is won in the normal mode, it becomes a so-called "first win", and a big win game corresponding to the won big win is started (see "first win" block frame in FIG. 6). The hitting method during the big win is "right hitting" aiming at the big prize winning opening 50 side.

Focusing on the production aspect, if you win the probability variable jackpot 1 (5R probability variable ST100: special figure 1 side highest profit jackpot) during the normal mode, the decorative pattern will stop at "7 patterns aligned (777)". to be notified that you have won the jackpot with the highest profit. As for the performance during winning at the time of winning one probability variable jackpot, the ``ST rush determination performance'' for deterministically informing the ST mode entry appears, and the determination of the shift to the ST100 mode is reported. Then, after the big hit game, the mode is shifted to ST100 mode.

On the other hand, in the normal mode, when the variable probability jackpots 2 and 3 and the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are won, the decorative symbols are stopped except for "7 patterns are aligned", and the probability variable jackpot is won in this pattern fluctuation display game. or whether it is a time-saving jackpot is not reported. In the case of stopping other than ``seven patterns are complete'', the ``ST rush challenge performance'' of the player participation type performance is developed in the winning medium performance during the subsequent big win game, and the big win type is notified by the performance result. . In this ST rushing challenge presentation, when the success presentation appears, it is decidedly notified that the probability variable big win is shown, and when the failure presentation appears, the time saving big win is announced. In addition, there are two types of success effects, "great success effect" and "normal success effect". However, when the "normal success effect" appears, it is reported that the variable probability jackpot 3 (ST25 mode) has been won. On the other hand, there are two types of failure productions, "big failure production" and "normal failure production". , and when the ``normal failure effect'' appears, the fact that the winning time saving jackpot 1 (time saving A: time saving 100 times) is notified.

When the variable probability jackpots 1 to 3 are won, after the jackpot game, the corresponding ST mode is shifted (refer to the block frame of the ST mode in FIG. 6), and when the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are won, after the jackpot game. , is shifted to the time-saving mode (see the block frame of the time-saving mode in FIG. 6). Then, during the ST mode and during the time saving mode, as described above, it becomes "advantageous to hit to the right", and the symbol variation display game 2 on the side of the special figure 2 is executed. When the jackpot is won on the side of the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 4, it is all probability variable jackpots, so as long as the jackpot continues to be won during the ST mode or the time saving mode, the ST mode loops and the player is greatly profited. is designed to bring

When one of the probability variable jackpots 4 to 7 is won during the ST mode, the decoration pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed. For example, if you win the "probable variable jackpot 4 (10R variable ST100)" of the highest profit jackpot (highest profit jackpot among all jackpots) on the special figure 2 side, a special decorative pattern that is not displayed in the normal mode (for example, a number (not a pattern, but a pattern displaying a character, etc.) stops to congratulate the winning of the jackpot. In addition, if the profit degree is lower than the probability variable jackpot 4 (10R probability change ST100), but the profit degree is higher than the probability change jackpot 6 (7R probability change ST25), "odd number "Pattern matching" is stopped, and "Even number pattern matching" is stopped when "probability variable jackpot 6 (7R probability variable ST25)" with the lowest profit degree is won. It should be noted that during the jackpot game, a hit-during effect corresponding to the jackpot type appears.

(Regarding the case of winning the "variable jackpot 7 (special 7R variable)")
However, when winning the "probability variation jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation)", "odd number pattern alignment" or "even number symbol alignment" is stop-displayed with a predetermined probability. In the event that the even-numbered pattern arrangement is stopped, a hit-during performance that is at least partly common to the above-mentioned definite variable jackpot 5 (7R definite variable ST25) and/or definite variable jackpot 6 (7R definite variable ST75) is performed during the subsequent jackpot game. Appears, at a predetermined timing of the performance during the hit, for example, during the performance during a specific round or the ending performance, information on the probability variable jackpot 7 winning (for example, confirmation of entry into ST mode (ST100 mode)) is announced (promotion notification). As a result, even if the "even pattern matching" stops, the possibility of entering ST100 mode, which can be expected to be highly profitable, is left, and the expectation of entering ST mode can be fueled by the production during the hit. It's becoming

However, in the performance during the hit, without notifying the promotion, the performance during the hit that is common (same) as the probability variable big hit 5 (7R probability variable ST25) and / or the probability variable big hit 7 (7R probability variable ST75) appears. Then, the winning of the variable probability jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation) may be concealed, and the probability variation jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation) winning may be reported in the ST mode after the jackpot game.

If the promotion notification is performed during ST mode (ST production mode), it may be during the period until ST early stage mode ends (until ST ends 25 times), but ST early stage mode end game (ST It is preferable to notify during the middle 25th rotation). Specifically, until the 1st ST number (for example, ST25 times with probability variable jackpot 5 wins) or the 2nd ST number (for example, ST100 times with probability variable jackpot 7 times), whichever is smaller (For example, the number of games during ST reaches 25 times), the display can be controlled so as not to directly indicate whether the first win (for example, the probability variable jackpot 5) or the second win (for example, the probability variable jackpot 7). is. However, the notification timing is not limited to such timing, and the timing of the promotion notification may be, for example, the start of the next game after the end of the ST opening production mode or a predetermined timing during the ST middle stage mode. Also, a "step-up"-like promotion notification may be performed in which the first promotion notification is performed in the ST early stage production mode, and the second promotion notification is performed in the ST middle stage production mode. In this case, the first promotion notification is a promotion notification that notifies that entry into the ST75 mode or above is definite, and the second promotion notification is a promotion notification that definitely notifies entry into the ST100 mode. In this way, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension as to whether the winning jackpot type is any one of probability variable jackpots 5 to 7 over a long period of time from the jackpot game to the ST mode. In other words, it is possible to maintain the expectation of transition to the ST100 mode. Incidentally, it is possible to determine whether to notify the promotion during the performance during the winning or to notify the promotion during the ST mode by a scenario lottery or the like when determining the performance scenario during the winning at the start of the big winning game.

(transition to ceiling mode)
Also, in the normal mode, if a big win is not won until the 989th game, the game is shifted to the "precursor mode" from the 990th game (see the block frame of the precursor mode in FIG. 7). When the game reaches the 1000th game without winning a jackpot even in the omen mode (reaching the ceiling), the game shifts to the "ceiling mode" and the ceiling function is activated. In this embodiment, in the case of a loss, the ceiling privilege "Limited time reduction" is given, and the 1001st and subsequent games are shifted to heaven mode.

<9. Regarding the function for prohibiting the specific advance notice effect during the omen mode: Fig. 32>
Here, in the present embodiment, a specific advance notice effect prohibition function (specific notice effect prohibition means) works during the omen mode. Specifically, focusing on the point that the omen mode is a game mode related to the notification that the ceiling is near, and the point that the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the granting of the ceiling privilege, omen mode (omen effect mode) and ceiling mode (ceiling effect mode) prohibits the appearance of a specific advance notice effect. In the case of the present embodiment, as the prohibition function, there is provided a "means for prohibiting the prefetching notice during the sign (specific prefetching notice prohibiting means)" for prohibiting the execution of the prefetching notice. Hereinafter, the "means for prohibiting pre-reading advance notice during a sign" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32 .

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where a pre-reading notice is prohibited by means for prohibiting pre-reading notice during a sign. FIG. 32 illustrates a form in which "holding change notice" is treated as a prohibited target by means for prohibiting prefetching notice during a sign. It can be set as "pre-reading notice in the middle".

(A. A configuration without provision of means for prohibiting prefetching advance notice in the sign (normal case): FIG. 32 (b))
The "normal case" will be described with reference to FIG. This "normal case" indicates a configuration in which no means for prohibiting pre-reading advance notice during a sign is provided. ) is shown as a comparative example. The illustrated pending icon 770 is the "normal pending display (white pending)", the pending icon 771 is the "high-expectation pending display" of the special pending display (ordinary pending change notice), and the pending icon 772 indicates "holding display for ceiling (holding change notice for ceiling)". In addition, the hold icon 771 here indicates a "rainbow color hold (retained hold display)" that can appear when a big win is won among the special hold displays.

Also, for convenience of explanation, FIG. (Hereinafter referred to as "ceiling game suspended ball") is shown as a representative case.

In the case of the comparative example shown in FIG. Regardless, execution of the suspension display for the ceiling (suspension change notice for the ceiling) is permitted for the suspension display of the 1000th game. Here, "permitting" the suspension display for the ceiling means that it may appear either when it always appears or when it appears when a predetermined lottery is won. ) (C-1) and (C-2) are the same). Therefore, in the case of this comparative example, even if there is a hold change notice of the third rainbow color hold (this hold), the hold display of the fourth ceiling game hold ball is Fujimaru's hold icon 772 (for the ceiling). pending display).

However, if the jackpot is won before the ceiling is reached, the ceiling function is not activated (the number of ceiling games is reset), so it can be said that there is little need to execute the ceiling suspension display. In addition, if a hold change notice (special hold display) for notifying the degree of winning expectation and a ceiling change notice (ceiling hold display) for notifying that it is a ceiling game are displayed at the same time, notices with different characteristics are displayed. The displays will appear at the same time, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a means for prohibiting pre-reading advance notice during a sign is provided to solve these problems.

(B. Configuration example in which means for prohibiting prefetching advance notice in omen: FIG. 32 (b), (ha-1), (ha-2))
Hereinafter, a configuration example in which the above-mentioned "means for prohibiting pre-reading advance notice during a sign" is provided will be described. In this case, there are two forms: "a case of preferentially executing the normal pre-reading notice" shown in Fig. (b) and "a case of preferentially executing the pre-reading notice for the ceiling" shown in Fig. (Ha-1) and (Ha-2). be.

(Case where normal pre-reading notice is preferentially executed: Fig. 32 (b))
FIG. 32(b) shows a "case in which the normal pre-reading notice is preferentially executed", specifically, "a case in which the pre-reading notice for the ceiling is prohibited when there is a hold before the ceiling game is reached (ceiling game holding ball This is a case where pre-reading notice is prohibited for the target)”. Here, similarly to the case of FIG.

In the case of this example, when there is a hold before the ceiling game is reached, the hold display for the 1000th game (ceiling game) is not changed to the hold display for the ceiling (hold change notice for the ceiling), but the "normal hold display". appears. In other words, the configuration is such that the "holding of the prefetching prohibited object" by the prefetching prediction prohibiting means during the omen is set to the "ceiling game holding ball".

The reason why the prefetching prohibition target hold is set as the "ceiling game hold ball" is as follows. If there is a hold before the ceiling game, the jackpot is won before the ceiling function is activated (before the ceiling privilege is given), so there is little need to display the ceiling reservation display. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the holding display for the ceiling is prohibited when there is a fixed hold, if the hold display for the 1000th game remains the normal hold display, it is a speculation element that "there is a fixed hold before reaching the ceiling game". , and the player who knows this can prevent wasteful beating until the ceiling is reached. However, if this secure hold does not prohibit the ceiling display at all when this secure hold exists, but if the hold change notice (rainbow color hold) related to this secure hold does not appear, that is, the look-ahead for this secure hold If the advance notice lottery results in "losing", the suspension display for the ceiling may appear (permit). If the hold change notice relating to this reserved hold is not displayed, the player cannot know that this reserved hold exists before reaching the ceiling game, but even if the hold display for ceiling has appeared. Even so, if a big win is won before the ceiling game is reached, the player is not particularly disadvantaged. In addition, instead of prohibiting the appearance of the hold display for the ceiling when the hold change notice (rainbow color hold) related to this secure hold appears, it is more than a high expectation hold change notice (for example, green hold or more) It is also possible to prohibit the appearance of the suspension display for the ceiling when the suspension change notice of is displayed.

(Case of priority execution of pre-reading notice for ceiling: Fig. 32 (Ha-1) (Ha-2))
Next, the case of preferentially executing the pre-reading notice for the ceiling will be described.

Fig. 32 (H-1) is an example of "a case of preferential execution of pre-reading notice for ceiling",
(α) A configuration example of “while prohibiting part of the normal pre-reading notice during the omen mode, allowing the ceiling change notice (ceiling hold display)”,
(β) shows a configuration example of "in the foreshadowing mode, normal pre-reading notice is totally prohibited, while ceiling pending change notice (ceiling pending display) is allowed".
In the configuration example shown in FIG. This is an example of a configuration in which only "balls that are held in operation" are excluded from the prohibited objects, and the balls held in the ceiling game are excluded.

In (α) above, ``prohibiting part of the normal pre-reading notice'' means, for example, of the normal hold change notices (special hold display), while allowing the appearance of low-expectation hold change notices, high It is configured such that the appearance of the expectation pending change notice is prohibited. Specifically, configurations 1 and 2 below are used.
(Configuration 1) Appearance of hold change notices below yellow hold (blue hold and yellow hold) is allowed, and green or higher hold change notices (green hold, red hold and rainbow color) with higher winning expectations than the yellow hold Hold) is prohibited from appearing.
(Configuration 2) A configuration that permits the appearance of hold change notice (hold display other than rainbow-colored hold) indicating other than accuracy, and prohibits the appearance of hold change notice hold indicating accuracy.

The above "configuration 1" prohibits only high-expectation hold change notices such as green, red, and rainbow colors in the case of this reservation. On the other hand, the above "configuration 2" prohibits only the "rainbow color hold" of the current hold display of the high expectation hold change notice. Therefore, in the case of configuration 2, occurrence of hold change notice other than "rainbow hold" indicating accuracy is allowed.

"Totally prohibit pre-reading notice" in (β) above means that normal pre-reading notice (here, hold change notice) is prohibited at all, and the appearance of hold change notice for ceiling (hold change notice for ceiling) It is a configuration that allows. Therefore, in the case of the above configuration (β), the usual pre-reading notice does not appear at all during the precursor mode, and only the appearance of the pending change notice for the ceiling (holding display for the ceiling) is permitted.

The reason for the arrangement shown in Fig. (H-1) ((α) or (β) above) is as follows. If the appearance of the normal hold change notice (special hold display) is blindly allowed, the normal hold change notice and the ceiling hold display will be displayed at the same time. It invites confusion for game beginners). In particular, if the high expectation pending change notice and the ceiling pending change notice are mixed, the degree of confusion of the player increases. Therefore, it is preferable to prohibit the look-ahead announcement itself, or at least prohibit the high-expectation pending change announcement. In addition, when part or all of the pre-reading notice is prohibited during the omen mode, the player does not know the existence or the possibility of the existence of this secure stop before reaching the ceiling game. This is because even if the high expectation pending change notice indicating that the game is not displayed, the player will not be particularly disadvantaged if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached. In addition, if the pre-reading notice itself during the omen mode is completely prohibited, it also leads to a reduction in the effect control load.

FIG. (H-2) is a configuration example in which, unlike the above-described FIG. (H-1), the suspension change notice for the ceiling is preferentially executed by setting a part of the period in the precursor mode as the look-ahead prohibited section. FIG. (H-2) shows, as a representative example, an example in which the maximum number of held balls before the ceiling game (the interval between the 996th and 999th games) is set as the look-ahead prohibition interval. In the case of this example, the pre-reading notice is completely prohibited in the section from the 996th to the 999th game. However, instead of completely prohibiting the pre-reading notice in the section, it may be configured to "prohibit part of the pre-reading notice" as shown in (α) in the above diagram (H-1).

In addition, all of (A), (B), (Ha-1) and (Ha-2) in FIG. The number of remaining games up to can be configured to be able to be notified. Here, the countdown display itself does not give notice of the degree of expectation of winning, but merely informs the remaining ceiling game, and does not fulfill a notice function such as a look-ahead notice. However, it is also possible to announce the degree of expectation for winning by using the effect mode of the countdown display, that is, to inform the possibility of the existence of this reservation. For example, in the case of preferential execution of the ceiling pre-reading notice in Figure (Ha-1) or (Ha-2), the operation hold ball (1-2 Each time an item) is digested, a special countdown display (for example, a difference in display color or a difference in display size) that is different from the normal countdown display (display mode when this reservation does not exist) is performed to May indicate the existence of a hold. For example, if the normal countdown display uses a white number image, the special countdown display may change the number image to a color other than white (red) or make the number image larger. be.

The present embodiment can include, for example, the following configuration regarding pre-reading notice.
Acquisition means (S301, S302 in FIG. 10, S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring predetermined game information based on the establishment of the starting condition (initiated by the detection of the game ball by the starting means);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) for executing a lottery related to winning based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) for performing a variable display operation of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of symbols;
Reservation storage means (reservation storage area of RAM 203) for reserving and storing the game information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined maximum reservation storage number as the upper limit until the game information is provided for the variable display operation of the game patterns in the symbol display means. , S311 to S314 in FIG. 10) and
a prefetch determination means (S318 in FIG. 11) for prefetching and determining a lottery result of at least the lottery means before the variation display operation of the game symbols based on the reserved memory is executed;
Prefetching notice effect control means (production control unit 24, S1008 in FIG. 19) configured to be capable of controlling the execution of prefetching notice that notifies information related to the result of prefetching determination by the prefetching determination means;
pre-reading notice prohibition control means (FIG. 32) for prohibiting the execution (display) of the pre-reading notice based on a predetermined prohibition condition;
Ceiling privilege control means (S420, S421, S412 in FIGS. 7 and 12, FIGS. 13 to 15, etc.) for granting a ceiling privilege more advantageous than a normal state (executing and controlling the ceiling privilege) based on a predetermined granting condition. and,
The above-mentioned ceiling privilege is granted (for example, the ceiling game is imminent, or the ceiling privilege is granted within the existing number of balls with pending operation, or the pattern variation display game related to the target ball with suspended operation ceiling privilege advance notification control means for executing and controlling a ceiling pre-notification effect (for example, ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) in FIG. 32) that gives advance notice that a ceiling privilege will be given if executed); , and a plurality of types of game states (game modes) can be configured to be controllable. The pre-reading notice prohibiting means prohibits execution of the pre-reading notice during the entire period or a part of the period during the specific game mode (Fig. 32 (b) (Ha-1) (Ha-2)). The specific game mode is, for example, a game mode before reaching the ceiling game (before shifting to the ceiling mode). Further, the ceiling privilege control means, specifically, after a predetermined start condition is established (for example, after the end of the power support or after the jackpot game, or after transition to a game state with a low probability state, etc.), the winning game is not generated (or the jackpot is not won), and the number of symbol changes (number of games) executed in a game state with a low probability state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (number of ceiling games) It works as a functional part that controls the ceiling privilege (privilege game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state.

(Game mode related to latent state)
In the case of providing the latent definite state, for example, as shown in FIG. 28, different data values may be set for the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) corresponding to the other game state and the game state judgment number YJ. A game mode corresponding to the latent certainty state may be provided as a "latent certainty mode", and a performance mode related to the latent certainty mode may be provided as a "latent certainty performance mode". In addition, all the ST modes according to the present embodiment have been described as game modes corresponding to the "variable probability state", but all or part of the ST mode can be treated as a game mode corresponding to the "potential state". In addition, the variable state under the latent probability mode (latent probability state) is explained in the above “(7-5-1. Variable state related to heaven mode) “In the case of infinite or finite probability given””. Similarly, it is preferable to have the same or substantially the same fluctuation state as the normal mode, or at least a slower fluctuation state than the time saving mode (a fluctuation state in which the average digestion time is relatively long).

<Processing on main control unit side: FIGS. 8 to 18>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 18, game operation processing on the side of the main control unit 20 of this embodiment will be described. The processing on the main control unit 20 side consists of an infinite loop main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 8) and a timer interrupt processing (main control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 9) and are centrally configured.

<12. Main processing on main control side: Fig. 8>
Main processing (main control side main processing) on the main control unit 20 side will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the details of the main processing on the main control side. When the main processing on the main control side is started, the watch dog timer (WDT) function is exhibited and the CPU is forcibly reset (WDT reset). In either case, when the main control side main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes the initial setting process necessary for starting the game operation as part of the power-on process (step S011). ).

After completing the initial setting process in step S011, it is then determined whether or not it is in a setting change mode transition state in which setting values can be changed (step S014). In this embodiment, the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned ON when the power to the game machine 1 is turned off and the door is opened (the door opening sensor 61 is ON (open detection)). When the gaming machine 1 is turned on while the operation is continued (both the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal are ON), the setting change allowable state in which the setting value can be changed is assumed to be satisfied as the setting change mode transition condition is satisfied. (setting change mode transition state).

If it is in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: YES), a setting change process for managing the change operation of the setting values (steps 1 to 6) is executed (step S023). In this setting change process, first, whether the set value Nc (set value data) stored in the set value storage area of the internal RAM is an abnormal value (a value other than 00H to 05H corresponding to settings 1 to 6). determine whether or not If the game operation is normal, the set value data (set value Nc) of one of '00H to 05H (normal value)' corresponding to the settings 1 to 6 is stored in the set value storage area. However, it is possible that the set value data is corrupted due to some trouble, and a value that does not correspond to any of the settings 1 to 6 is set (setting error). Therefore, when the set value Nc is not a normal value, the set value storage area is cleared to zero to return to the initial value of 00H (here, setting 1).

If the initial value is restored or if the value is normal, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 97 . After that, the ON/OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 is monitored, and the current set value Nc is changed (updated) each time the setting change switch 95 is turned ON. As described above, the setting value during setting change (during setting change operation) is cyclically switched in the range of setting 1 to 6 each time the setting change switch 95 is operated, and the setting is changed on the setting display 97. The current setting value in the middle is displayed. Then, when it is confirmed that the setting change completion switch 96 has been turned ON, the current setting value Nc (setting work value) is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203 assuming that the setting value is confirmed. This exits the setting change process. Then, the processing state is shifted to the intra-area RAM clear processing (step S031) described later.

Alternatively, the RAM clear switch 98 may function as the setting change switch 95 without providing the setting change switch 95 . Each time the RAM clear switch 98 is pressed, one of setting values 1 to 6 can be selected. Alternatively, the setting key switch 94 may function as the setting change completion switch 96 without providing the setting change completion switch 96 . In this case, the setting change operation can be terminated by turning off the setting key switch 94 .

On the other hand, if it is not in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine whether there is an abnormality (step S015). Specifically, it checks whether the set value data (set value Nc) in the set value storage area is a normal value, whether the checksum value at the time of backup is a normal value, and the like. If there is an abnormality in the contents of the RAM (step S015: YES), a process of waiting for power-on again (step S020) in the event of a RAM abnormality, which will be described later, is executed.

If the contents of the RAM are normal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether or not the backup flag BF is ON (5AH) (step S016). This backup flag BF is set to "5AH (normal value)" in the BF flag storage area of the internal RAM when the backup process is executed normally in the power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 9), which will be described later. is set to Therefore, in normal operation, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, the backup flag BF may not be a normal value (≠5AH) due to some trouble. Therefore, if the backup flag BF is not in the ON state (step S016: NO), the process of waiting for power-on again is executed (step S020).

In the process of waiting for re-turning on of the power in step S020, control is performed to a game stop state in which progress of the game process is forcibly stopped. When this power reactivation waiting process is executed and the game is stopped, the power of the gaming machine 1 is reactivated, and when the power is reactivated, the setting change mode transition state is set. Unless the above-described setting change process (step S023) is executed, the currently occurring RAM error state cannot be resolved. In the present embodiment, after the setting change process (step S023) is executed (after the setting value storage area is cleared in the case of a setting error), the area RAM clearing process of step S031, which will be described later, is executed. As a result, substantially the entire area of the RAM 203 (except for the RAM area related to performance display (outside RAM area)) is cleared. As a result, the RAM 203 is returned to its initial state, and the RAM error is resolved.

If the backup flag BF is ON (step S016: YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025). In this embodiment, the setting key switch 94 is turned off (not operated to the setting change mode side) while the power to the game machine 1 is turned off, and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on (setting key switch signal is turned off). , RAM clear signal ON) When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, it is determined that the RAM clear transition condition is satisfied, and is controlled to the RAM clear mode transition state.

If it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: YES), the in-area RAM clear processing is executed (step S031). In this area RAM clearing process, at least the storage areas of the RAM 203 excluding the outside RAM area related to the performance display and the setting value storage area of the inside RAM area are cleared. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF and the checksum value set at the time of power shutdown are both cleared to zero in this process. Also here, various commands necessary for clearing the RAM (for example, a "RAM clear command" indicating that the RAM is cleared, a "customer waiting command", etc.) are sent to the effect control unit 24. When the performance control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, it executes the initialization notification performance for notifying the RAM clear, and sets the performance mode to "normal performance mode" as the performance mode in the initial state. That is, when the area RAM clearing process is executed, the game mode is set to the normal mode of the initial mode, and the production mode is also a normal production mode related to the normal mode (for example, normal (normal A production mode), simple (normal B effect mode) or premium mode (normal C effect mode)).

When the RAM clearing process in the area in step S031 is finished, the initial setting process (initial data setting process at power-on) at the time of RAM clearing is executed (step S032). In the power-on initial data setting process, for example, 30000 ms is set in the timer for transmission of the RAM clear signal (one of the security signals), and the special symbols to be displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (special symbol 1 stop symbol, As the special figure 2 stop design) data, set the losing design data. Then, a CTC setting process (step S036), which will be described later, is executed.

Returning to the description of step S025, if it is not in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: NO), then it is determined whether or not it is in the setting confirmation mode transition state (setting confirmation allowable state) in which the current set values can be confirmed. (Step S026). In the case of this embodiment, in the state where the power to the gaming machine 1 is off, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned OFF (setting key switch signal ON, RAM clear signal OFF). When the power to the machine 1 is turned on, it is determined that the setting confirmation mode transition condition is satisfied, and is controlled to the setting confirmation mode transition state (see steps S014 to S026).

If it is in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: YES), setting confirmation processing (step S027) is executed to control the setting confirmation state in which the current setting values can be confirmed. Then, a backup return process (step S028) is executed to restore the game process from the backup data backed up at the time of power failure. In the setting confirmation process of step S027, a display process for displaying the current setting values on the setting display 97 (setting confirmation display) is performed. The display of the setting values is terminated when the setting key switch is turned off. After the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the backup recovery process is performed, and the CTC setting process (step S036), which will be described later, is performed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: NO), that is, if the game machine 1 is simply turned on, the backup recovery process (step S028) is performed, and the game at the time of backup is executed based on the backup data. Restore processing.

After executing any one of the setting change process (step S023), the area RAM clear process (step S031), the setting confirmation process (step S027), and the backup restoration process (step S028), the CTC setting Processing is executed (step S036). Here, a CTC setting process is executed for periodically generating a timer interrupt every 4 ms. As a result, an interrupt request signal is periodically output to the interrupt controller thereafter, and the main control side timer interrupt processing (4 ms interrupt processing) shown in FIG. 9 is executed.

Then, assuming that the game-startable state is ready, the firing control signal (fire permission signal ES) for permitting the firing operation of the firing device 32 is set from the OFF state (fire prohibited state) to the ON state (fire permitted state), and the game is played. A start command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 . This permits the shooting operation of the game ball from the shooting device 32 . Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, it performs an initial operation (initialize operation) regarding the movable accessory. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decoration lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is exclusively an operation check when power is turned on for the movable accessory.

It should be noted that, after the execution of the backup restoration processing of step S028, before executing the CTC setting processing of step S036, it is necessary to execute the confirmation operation of whether or not the performance indicator 99 is operating normally. The "operation check setting process" may be configured to be executable. In the confirmation operation of the performance indicator 99, for example, the display mode of the four 7-segment indicators 99a to 99d is cyclically repeated for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) by completely lighting and completely extinguishing. display (operation confirmation display)” mode (operation confirmation display processing). This makes it possible to check defects such as missing segments. In this case, the display processing related to the operation confirmation is performed in the performance display monitor processing (step S102: outside area program) during the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Since the display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control side timer interrupt process after the CTC setting process in step S036, the setting change process (step S023 ) or during the setting confirmation process (step S027), the display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is not executed at this stage. Using this point, at least one of the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance indicator 99 is configured to be usable as the setting indicator 97, and the performance indicator 99 is temporarily used as the setting indicator 97. It may be configured to function. In this case, the performance indicator 99 can be substituted for the setting indicator 97, which contributes to reduction of control burden and cost.

After completing the series of power-on processes, an infinite loop process of steps S040 to S045 relating to normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled in a game-startable state in which the game can be progressed. When the loop process is entered, first, the CPU is set to the interrupt disabled state (step S040), and various random number update processes are executed (step S041). In this random number update processing, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating within a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, random numbers for special design determination used for symbol lottery, random numbers related to subsidized lottery Random number) used to change the initial value (start value) (initial value random number for special pattern judgment, initial value random number for auxiliary hit judgment, etc.), random number for variation pattern used for selection of variation pattern, etc. Update.

When the various random number updating processes (step S041) are finished, the performance display monitor tally division process of the out-of-area program is then executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor aggregate division processing, processing necessary for calculating the base value to be displayed on the performance display device 99 is executed.

When the performance display monitor tabulation division process of step S043 is completed, the interrupt permission state is set (step S045), the process returns to step S040, and thereafter the processes of steps S040 to S045 are repeatedly executed (main loop process). . The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number updating processes and performance display monitor tallying and dividing processes, except during timer interrupt processes that are executed intermittently.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 9>
Next, timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing main control side timer interrupt processing. This main control side timer interrupt processing is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the main control side main processing.

In FIG. 9, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the power failure check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, the level of power supplied from a power supply board (not shown) is monitored. A checksum operation (here, 8-bit addition operation processing for the RAM in the area) for calculating , and backup processing including storage of the operation result are performed. The power failure check process functions as backup means for retaining data in a predetermined area of the RAM even after the power is turned off.

Then, timer management processing is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (time) used for game operation control of the gaming machine 1 are updated here.

Next, an input management process is executed (step S083). In the input management process, based on detection information from various sensors and switches provided in the gaming machine 1, various counters (for example, winning counters for counting winning balls provided for each winning hole) are updated. Also here, based on the input information of the status signal from the payout control board 29, the input data is created. If any of the status signals indicates an abnormality, predetermined error processing is performed in error management processing (step S089), which will be described later.

Next, a setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting error check process, it is determined whether the set value data is a normal value (a value indicating settings 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the set value data, and a setting error is detected. Set the flag to the ON state (5AH). Then, a set value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the setting abnormality check process is exited. In addition, when the effect control unit 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, the effect means is used to execute setting abnormality error notification (RAM error notification). If the setting error flag is ON when the setting error check process is executed again, nothing is done and the process is exited.

Next, a timer interrupt internal random number management process is executed (step S085). In the timer interrupt random number management process, the random numbers for each variable display game are updated periodically. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, for the random number for special symbol determination and the random number for auxiliary hit determination, update the random number (add 1 for each interrupt), and the random number counter goes around Each time, the start value of the random number counter is changed. The random number for internal lottery (random number for judging a big hit) is generated by the random number generating circuit, so it is not updated here.

Then, error management processing is executed (step S089). In this error management process, based on detection information related to various switches and sensors, status signals from the payout control board 29, etc., it is monitored whether an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation. In that case, an error command capable of identifying the error type is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and error processing corresponding to the error type is executed. Also, when the error is canceled, an error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and error cancellation processing is executed.

Next, a prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this winning ball management process, the winning counter is checked, and if there is a winning, a payout control command designating the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29 . When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, it controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute the payout operation of the designated number of prize balls.

Then, normal design management processing is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, necessary processes are executed for the normal symbol variation display game (normal symbol variation display operation). Here, it is monitored whether or not the game ball is detected by the normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, and when the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for auxiliary hit determination) necessary for the auxiliary winning lottery is generated. Acquire (general figure random number acquisition process), hold and store the game information up to the maximum number of reserved memories (here, 4) as reserved data (normal figure operation reserved ball) (normal figure reserved storage process). Then, when the predetermined fluctuation display start condition is satisfied, an auxiliary winning lottery based on the normal pattern operation reserved ball is performed, and the selection of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern based on the auxiliary winning lottery result and the normal pattern stop display mode (normal stop design). Further, here, in order to operate the variable display of the normal symbols, LED display data for variable display is created if it is in the process of changing, and LED display data for stop display is created if it is not in the process of changing (normal pattern display data update process).

Then, a normal electric accessary product management process is executed (step S092). In this normal electric accessary product management process, a process necessary for executing the normal electric open game is executed. Here, when the lottery result of the auxiliary winning lottery is a hit, the process of setting solenoid control data for the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c is executed. The solenoid control data set here is converted into an excitation signal in the solenoid management process of step S100, which will be described later, and the excitation signal is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c. Thereby, the opening/closing operation pattern of the opening/closing lid 47 is controlled.

Next, a special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, a process relating to a special symbol variation display game is executed. In this special symbol management process, a big hit lottery is mainly performed in a look-ahead determination or a special symbol variation display game, and based on the lottery result, a special symbol variation pattern (a look-ahead variation pattern, a variation pattern at the start of variation) or a special stop Decide on patterns, etc. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a special electric accessary product management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessary product management process, mainly based on the jackpot lottery result, execution control of the winning game according to the winning win, setting processing of the transition destination game state after the jackpot game, etc. necessary for the winning game processing. The special electric auditors management process works as special game control means for controlling the execution of a winning game according to the winning type. The details of the special electric accessary product management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a right hitting notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, when it is under a "right-handed advantageous" game state (during a winning game, during a state with an electric sapo (time-saving state or variable probability state)), the right-handed display device 39b is lit. is created, and in the case of a game state (normal state) in which "left-handed is advantageous", LED data for extinguishing the right-handed display device 39b is created.

Next, an LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) to various LED display devices such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the right-handed display device 39b is executed. The control signal based on the LED display data created in the normal symbol management process (step S091), the special symbol management process (step S093), the right-handed notification information management process (step S097), etc. is output in this LED management process. be done.

Next, an external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various outer end signals are created through the frame external terminal board 21, and output control is executed for an external device such as a hall computer HC.

Next, a solenoid management process is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, based on the solenoid control data set in the normal electric auditors management process (step S092) and the special electric auditors management process (step S094), the normal electric auditors solenoid 41c and the big winning opening solenoid 52c output control of the excitation signal is executed. As a result, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b are driven and controlled, and the opening and closing operations of the lower start opening 35 and the big winning opening 50 are realized.

Next, all registers are saved (step S101), performance display monitor processing belonging to the program outside the area is executed (step S102), and then all registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor processing, necessary processing regarding calculation of a base value to be displayed on the performance display device 99 and display control is executed.

Next, the WDT count value is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset for each interrupt and the count value is returned to the initial value.

After completing the processing of steps S081 to S104, the timer interrupt processing is terminated, and the main control side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<19. Special Symbol Management Processing: Fig. 10>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first performs "special figure 1 start opening check processing" on the special figure 1 side (upper start opening 34 side) (step S301), then special figure 2 side (lower start opening 35 side) Executes the "special figure 2 start opening check process" (step S302). The details of this special figure 1 starting opening check processing and special figure 2 starting opening check processing will be described later in FIG.

After finishing the start opening check process of steps S301 to S302, the state of the small hit flag is determined (step S303). This "small hit flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not a small win game is being played, and when the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that a small win game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the small winning game is not in progress. In addition, in the present embodiment, a small hit is not provided, but in the following description, it is assumed that the hit type includes a "small hit".

When the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S303: ≠5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a big win game is in progress. is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

During the small winning game (step S303:=5AH), or when the big winning game is in progress (step S304:=5AH), the processing relating to the variable display operation of the special symbols in steps S306 to S308 is not performed, and step S309 is performed as it is. Proceed to the special symbol display data update process. Therefore, during either the small winning game or the big winning game, the variable display operation of the special symbols is not performed. That is, during the winning game, the stop display mode of the special symbols is held while being confirmed and displayed as the small winning symbols or the big winning symbols.

On the other hand, in step S304, if the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S304: ≠5AH), that is, if neither a small winning game nor a big winning game is being played (step S303: ≠5AH, and step S304: ≠ 5AH), processing according to the special symbol operation status (00H ~ 03H). It should be noted that the "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol.

In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S305, depending on whether the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", "varying (02H)", or "confirming (03H)". Then, one of steps S306 to S308 is executed. Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)", the special symbol variation start process (step S306) is performed. When the symbol fluctuation process (step S307) is "confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and "during fluctuation" means that the behavior of the special symbol is fluctuating (variation display). The above-mentioned "confirming" means that the variation of the special symbols is finished and the stop (fixed) display is in progress (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, the variable display operation of the special symbols (the display operation of setting the start of variation and the stop of variation) is realized. The details of the special symbol variation start process (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308), which are deeply related to the present invention, will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 16A to 16B.

After completing any one of the above steps S306 to S308, the special symbol display data update processing of step S309, which will be described later, is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. ), and if the special symbols are not fluctuating, data for stop display (data for 7-segment flashing display during stop display) is created. The display data of the special design created here is output as LED data in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. . When the special symbol display data update process is finished, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special electric accessary product management process of step S095 in FIG. 9 is executed.

<11. Special figure 1 starting port check process: Fig. 11>
With reference to FIG. 11, the special figure 1 start opening check process (step S301 in FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 1 start opening check process. This special figure 1 start opening check process plays a role as winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is mainly a process related to reserved storage when a game ball wins in the upper start opening 34. and processing related to look-ahead determination. In addition, the special figure 1 start opening check process and the special figure 2 start opening check process are the only differences in whether the processing contents are related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side, Substantially, the contents of the processing are the same. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplication description, it will be described focusing on the special figure 1 start opening check process.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a prize (winning ball) has been detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When the winning of the upper starting port 34 (special figure 1 side starting port) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 operation pending balls is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is less than the maximum reservation memory number (here, 4 pieces). In addition, when there is no winning detection of the upper starting port 34 (step S311: NO), nothing is done and the special figure 1 starting port check process is exited.

If the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 operation is 4 or more, that is, if over winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved storage occurs (step S312: YES), an over winning command specifying over winning (in the case of special figure 1 B006H, B106H in the case of special figure 2) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number is not 4 or more, that is, if it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), add 1 to the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number (+1) (step S313), step S314 proceed to the processing of

When proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation pending ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the random number for big hit determination, the random number for special symbol determination, and the random number for variation pattern are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number is stored in the reserve storage area of the area RAM. This reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the symbol variation display game as activated reserved balls (reserved data). 1 variable display operation (until special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the symbols are retained and stored in the order in which the starting conditions are met (in the order of prize winning). In addition, in the above-mentioned reservation storage area, the reservation storage area corresponding to the special design 1 side and the special design 2 side (the special design 1 reservation storage area (first reservation storage area) corresponding to the special design 1, the special design 2 corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation storage area (second reservation storage area)) is provided, and it is possible to store the reservation data for the maximum number of operation reservation balls.

Next, prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") for prohibiting prefetching determination is obtained from the command data (winning command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the above "reserved addition command" (step S315), Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the "prefetch prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). This "pre-reading prohibition condition" is a condition that prohibits pre-reading judgment for the special figure 1 operation holding ball side (prohibits pre-reading notice) during special figure 1 start opening check processing (special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition ), and in the case of special figure 2 start opening check processing (not shown), the condition for prohibiting the look-ahead judgment for the special figure 2 operation holding ball side (prohibition of look-ahead notice) (special figure 2 look-ahead prohibition condition ). In this embodiment, if the special figure 2 operation holding ball can occur with a higher probability than the special figure 1 operation holding ball "game state with electric sapo (time saving state or variable state)" Special figure 1 Pre-reading is prohibited ', and on the contrary, if it is a `` game state with no electric sapo state (normal state or latent state) '' where the special figure 1 operation holding ball can occur with a higher probability than the special figure 2 operation holding ball For example, 'special figure 2 prefetching is prohibited'. Therefore, in the determination process of step S316, when the current gaming state is the time saving state or the probability variable state, the determination result becomes 'YES' as the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is established. Moreover, as a prefetching prohibition condition, it is possible to prohibit prefetching during a specific game mode (for example, during the portent mode).

Here, in this embodiment, the current game mode can be specified by the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) type (see Tcode column in FIG. 28), so when determining the game mode, the variation pattern selection mode ( Tcode) value can be determined, but separately from the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), an identifier that can identify each game mode itself (for example, game mode determination number YM) is provided, thereby, the current You may determine a game mode. For example, when "general mode A" and "general mode B" are provided as game modes belonging to the general mode, these have the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), but are different game modes. It is a case that you want to manage. In any case, when performing some processing based on the current game state (internal game state or game mode) (when performing game processing that requires information about the game state), the current internal game state, the current variation pattern Selected mode or an identifier that can identify the current game mode (game state determination number YJ, variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode, above-mentioned game mode determination number YM, etc.) One or more identifiers are used as appropriate, and the game operation is performed It may be configured to be capable of processing. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the game mode can be specified by the value of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode).

If the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), skip the prefetching determination processing (steps S317 to S321) and proceed to the processing of step S322 described later. In this case, the look-ahead determination for this special figure 1 operation hold ball is not executed, and a hold addition command with look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") will be created (see step S322 described later) ). As a result, the execution of the pre-reading notice of the current operation-reserving ball is controlled to be prohibited (the pre-reading notice targeting the current operation-reserving ball is not executed).

If the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). If the setting error flag is ON (step S317:=5AH), that is, if a RAM error (setting error) has occurred, the processing related to prefetch determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and step S322 described later is skipped. Proceed to processing. In this case as well, the look-ahead determination for the current operation-holding ball is not executed, and a hold addition command with look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, whereby the look-ahead notice is not executed. In other words, the prefetching prohibition data (9FH) can also be said to be data designating that the processing related to prefetching determination (steps S318 to S321) has not been executed.

If the setting error flag is not ON (step S317: ≠5AH), the "setting value command" is transmitted, and then random number determination processing is executed (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as part of the 'prediction determination' process, and here, the "win-lose lottery at the start of fluctuation (described later Step S410 in FIG. 12)” is performed in advance.

(Set value command)
The "setting value command" contains information that can specify the current setting value, and is used by the effect control unit 24 to control the appearance of the advance notice effect (setting suggesting effect, which will be described later) based on the setting value. be done. This set value command is transmitted each time an operation pending ball is generated in the starting port check process. As a result, on the effect control unit 24 side, based on the correct set value information, it is possible to control the appearance of the notice effect related to the operation reserve ball (for example, the setting suggestion effect related to the look-ahead notice effect).

In the random number determination process of step S318, first, a "hit random number determination table (not shown)" is obtained, and a random value for big hit determination is obtained. Then, based on the acquired random number value for judging a big hit and the winning random number judging table, a winning lottery (prefetching winning judgment) is executed for the current operation reserve ball, and the lottery result (forereading winning result) is acquired.

The hit random number determination table includes a hit random number determination table (special figure 1 A per random number determination table, a per random number determination table for special figure 2) are provided. During the special figure 1 start opening check process, the "special figure 1 hit random number determination table" is referred to, and during the special figure 2 start opening check process, the "special figure 2 hit random number determination table" is referred to. This hit random number determination table is also used when performing a win-lose lottery in the "random number determination process for special electric role product operation determination (step S410 in FIG. 12)" described later.

These hit random number determination tables include a determination area (determination value) for determining the type of hit/loss (whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss) for each jackpot lottery probability state (high probability and low probability), It is determined in association with the random number for judging a big hit (the size of the random number for judging a big hit: 65536). to be determined.

In the case of this embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a hit determination table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table with at least a different jackpot lottery probability depending on the settings 1 to 6). It is In addition, in the case of this embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability (probability increase rate: high probability / low probability) is the same for each set value, and the ratio is 10. set to a value that cannot be exceeded. For example, setting 6 "low probability 1/189, high probability 1/63", setting 5 "low probability 1/198, high probability 1/66", ..., setting 2 "low probability 1/ 231, 1/77 at high probability", setting 1 "1/240 at low probability, 1/80 at high probability". Note that the probability increase rate may be different for each set value.

After completing the random number determination process of step S318, the special stop symbol data creation process is executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the 'prefetch determination' process, and here, the "variation start symbol A lottery (step S411 in FIG. 12 to be described later) is performed in advance.

In the above special stop symbol data creation process, a "symbol table (not shown )”. Then, the random number value for special symbol determination obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired random number value for special symbol determination, a symbol lottery (read-ahead Design judgment) is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading design result) is acquired.

The "symbol table" includes a "jackpot symbol table", a "small win symbol table", and a "losing symbol table" for determining the jackpot type, minor win type, and loss type, and each symbol table is a special symbol. It is provided corresponding to the type. These symbol tables are also used when the symbol lottery at the start of variation is performed in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12), which will be described later.

In the symbol table, the determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type (symbol type) and the random number for special symbol determination (for example, the size of the random number for special symbol determination: 200) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, depending on whether the random number for special symbol determination belongs to any judgment value, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate, and the special symbol is used as data indicating the lottery result. Judgment data and a special stop symbol number are obtained. In this embodiment, in the case of a big win, one of the big wins is determined according to the symbol lottery rate shown in FIG. In addition, although not shown, the loss type on the special figure 1 side is provided with loss A and loss B, and the symbol lottery rate is 95% for loss A and 5% for loss B. . When losing B is selected, reach other than N reach (for example, SP reach or more reach) is selected with a high probability (see FIG. 26). In addition, the loss type on the special figure 2 side is one type of loss A. The type of failure is not particularly limited, and one or a plurality of failures can be provided.

The above-mentioned "special symbol determination data" is data that identifies the winning type (type of winning: big hit type, small hit type, and losing type). This is data for identifying which one of jackpots 1 and 2) and a loss type (loss A, loss B) (not shown) was won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S412 of FIG. 12 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413, a process related to the execution control of a big hit game (Special electric accessary product management processing in FIG. 17), etc. The above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data specifying the special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and the main control It is used when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the part 20 side.Like the special symbol, the normal symbol is provided with normal symbol determination data and a normal stop symbol number.

In addition, although a common pattern table may be defined for all settings, a pattern table may be defined according to the settings. For example, it can be configured as shown in (A) and (B) below.
(A) In some or all of the set values, one or more winning types have different symbol selection rates. For example, the symbol lottery rate for the probability variable jackpot 1 can be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability.
(B) In all or part of each set value, the probability variable entry rate (at least the combined symbol lottery rate of the jackpot with a high probability state (variable probability jackpot and/or latent probability jackpot)) is different. For example, the probability variable rush rate on the special figure 1 side is 50% (see the pattern lottery probability of the probability variable jackpot 1 to 3 in FIG. 4), but for example, the variable rush rate of settings 1 to 6, for example, "40%, 42 %, 44%, 46%, 48%, 50%", and so on, so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability (easier to enter into a definite variable). In addition, the same applies to the time-saving rush rate (total symbol selection rate of the time-saving jackpot).
In any case, the higher the setting, the better the payout performance (machine discount) for the player.

When the special stop symbol data creation process of step S319 is completed, then, the start opening winning random number determination process is executed (step S320). This random number determination process at the time of winning a prize at the start is also performed as part of the 'prediction determination' process, and here, the "variation pattern at the start of variation" when the operation suspension ball this time is subjected to the variation display operation is determined. 'Look-ahead variation pattern determination' is performed in advance. Specifically, the result of the "special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413)" shown in FIG. 12 described later is read ahead and determined.

Specifically, the result of the look-ahead design determination obtained in the special stop design data creation process (step S319) (at least the winning/losing lottery result obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) and the variation pattern obtained in step S314 A random number (magnitude of random value: 10000) is used to foresee and judge the "fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation" related to the current operation suspension ball. In addition, since the look-ahead pattern determination is to determine the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation in advance, a separate "look-ahead judgment table" that has the same basic configuration as the fluctuation pattern distribution table used at the start of fluctuation Refer to However, in the case of this embodiment, in order to reduce the program capacity, the fluctuation pattern allocation table shown in FIGS. At both the time and the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern allocation table is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is prefetched and determined based on the random number value for the fluctuation pattern obtained in the process of step S314.

The look-ahead determination regarding the variation pattern at the start of variation will be described using the "hit variation pattern distribution table" in FIG. The notation of "probability" shown in FIG. 24 means the probability variable jackpot, the notation of "time" means the time-saving jackpot, the notation of "probability 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7" indicates the probability variable jackpot 1 to 7, "Time 1, 2" means 1, 2 short-time jackpots. Referring to FIG. 24, for example, the current look-ahead symbol result is "probability variation jackpot 1 (probability 1)", the current game state (variation pattern selection mode Tcode is "general mode (00H)", variation pattern If the random number belongs to the judgment value (judgment range 0 to 49) of "normal variable direct hit", EVENT 1 "21H" shown in the figure is acquired (see the EVENT 1 column of "normal variable direct hit" ).The Arabic numerals shown in the figure indicate the judgment value (the size of the judgment area) (the same applies to FIGS. 25 to 27), and for example, when the random number for the fluctuation pattern belongs to the judgment value 0 to 49, "Normal fluctuation direct hit "Hit" is selected (selection rate: 50/10000), and if it belongs to the judgment value 50 to 129, "Normal medium N reach B" is selected (selection rate: 80/10000), If it belongs to the judgment value 130 to 209 "Normal medium SP reach A" is selected (selection rate: 80/10000), ..., "Special reach" is selected if it belongs to the judgment value 9850-9999 (selection rate: 150/10000) It has become.

The above "EVENT1" is data (win command data 1) used for creating a pending addition command, and is data of the second byte (lower byte) of the pending addition command. As a result, the prefetching prohibited data "9FH" obtained in step S315 is updated to a data value specifying the content of the prefetching variation pattern in this process, and the prefetching variation pattern is specified. The data of the 1st byte (upper byte) of the pending addition command (data relating to the number of active pending balls) is obtained in step S322, which will be described later.

It should be noted that, in the look-ahead variation pattern determination, the number of pending balls in operation at the time of look-ahead determination is not considered. The reason is as follows. In the step of determining the variation pattern at the start of variation, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of pending balls in operation (for example, see the columns of the number of pending balls in FIGS. 26 and 27). However, at the time of look-ahead determination, the number of suspended balls in operation at the time of look-ahead determination does not necessarily match the number of suspended operations at the start of variation, so it is not possible to accurately determine the variation pattern (detailed pattern) at the start of variation. Therefore, in the look-ahead variation pattern determination, the variation pattern type (basic pattern), which is the skeleton of the variation pattern at the start of variation, is determined without considering the number of balls withheld in operation at the time of look-ahead determination. For example, if you refer to the columns of normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s and normal middle N reach A in the "losing fluctuation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. Different data (refer to the column of COM2 (variation pattern specification command data)) are acquired in order to specify whether it is a variation or normal medium N reach A, but at the time of prefetching determination, regardless of the number of balls that are held in operation , normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s and normal middle N reach A common data (EVEN1 "01H") are acquired.

After completing the random number determination process at the time of start-up winning in step S320, next, the winning command data 2 (MODE) on the upper byte side is acquired based on the current number of operation pending balls and the special symbol type. Here, "B6H-B9H" is obtained according to 1 to 4 special figure 1 operation reservation balls, and "BBH to BEH" is acquired according to 1 to 4 special figure 2 operation reservation balls.

Then, the acquired winning command data 2 (MODE: the number of pending balls in operation (the number of pending balls in operation including the balls that have : look-ahead fluctuation pattern information), create a "suspended addition command" (step S322), without storing it in the RAM 203 (because data related to the pending addition command is unnecessary), the effect control unit 24 (step S323). In addition, in this embodiment, the look-ahead variation pattern information and the number of operation pending balls (number of operation pending balls and special symbol type information) at the time of look-ahead determination are transmitted with one command (holding addition command). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The look-ahead variation pattern information, the number of pending balls in operation and the special symbol type information may be transmitted by separate commands. Specifically, it is configured to transmit a first command (winning command) capable of specifying the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information and a second command (holding addition command) capable of specifying the number of pending balls in operation and special symbol type information. good too. In this case, the effect control unit 24 may be configured to be able to execute effect processing (such as a pre-reading notice lottery, which will be described later) regarding the pre-reading notice when the first command and the second command are received.

If prefetching is prohibited or if an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the prefetching prohibition data "9FH" is maintained as it is, so a pending addition command with "prefetching prohibition data" is sent to the effect control unit 24. (See the processing route of steps S315→S322 or S316→S322).

When the pending addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 that receives the command determines whether or not the prefetching notice can be executed if the information included in the pending addition command is "other than the prefetching prohibition designation". A lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) is conducted for the ball, and when the lottery is won, a performance scenario of the pre-reading notice is created, and based on the scenario, the appearance of the pre-reading notice targeting the current operation holding ball is controlled. On the other hand, if it is 'pre-reading prohibition designation', the pre-reading notice lottery is not executed, or the pre-reading notice lottery is executed, but the lottery result is forcibly treated as a loss, and the occurrence of the pre-reading notice is prohibited. In this embodiment, a pending addition command specifying prefetching prohibition is transmitted both when prefetching is prohibited and when a setting error occurs. The reason for this is as follows. .

In the case of this embodiment, even if a setting error occurs, the game operation is not forcibly stopped. The first reason is that, as already explained, the setting error can be resolved by changing the settings. There is a high possibility that it will fall under the prohibited item. Secondly, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when a setting error occurs, the player will feel distrustful of the sudden stop of the game. For example, when the pattern variation display game in progress is executed during normal operation, or when a jackpot game is in progress, an abnormal setting error occasionally occurs, and the game is controlled so that the game cannot be played immediately. If it is put away, the profit that the player should originally be able to obtain disappears, causing the player's sense of distrust. In consideration of such circumstances, when an abnormal setting error occurs, only an error notification is given, and although the game progress itself is conditional, the game proceeds as it is. The reason why the expression "conditionally" is used is that when a setting error occurs, the advance notice is prohibited or the result of the symbol variation display game is forcibly lost (see FIG. 11). Step S317 (=5AH), see the processing route of step S409 (=5AH) in FIG. 12 described later).

As described above, the special figure 1 starting opening check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 starting opening check process (step S302) is executed.

<21. Special symbol variation start process: Fig. 12>
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) in FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of special-figure 2 operation pending balls is zero (step S401), and if the number of special-figure 2 operation pending balls is not zero (step S401: NO), the special FIG. 2 executes the process (steps S403 to S416) at the time of start of fluctuation targeted for the number of balls to be held in operation. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S401: YES), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S402), special figure 1 operation reservation ball If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process (steps S403 to S416) at the start of fluctuation for the special figure 1 operation pending ball number is executed. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, which of the special figure 1 operation reservation ball and the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is preferentially used for the fluctuation display operation (which operation reservation ball is digested) "Priority "Variation order" is determined. In this embodiment, if there is an operation holding ball in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested.

In addition, when the number of operation reservation balls of both the special figure 2 operation reservation number and the special figure 1 operation reservation number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of "no operation reservation ball" becomes. This state of "no operation pending ball" is a state in which the special symbol is on standby and there is no pending memory. Therefore, if it becomes "no operation pending ball", the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the above "no operation pending ball" state ( step S417).

If the special symbol operation status is "waiting (01H)" when the above "no operation pending ball" state is reached (step S417: NO) (process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 16A described later) See step S472 in), switch the special symbol operation status to "waiting (00H)" (step S418). Then, as an effect control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. When the effect control unit 24 receives the customer waiting command, a "customer waiting effect (demonstration display)" is played based on a predetermined execution condition to explain or introduce a game related to the gaming machine 1 or to introduce (demonstrate) a demo movie. )” appears. Specifically, after receiving the customer waiting command, a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed without the game being started, that is, without generating the operation pending ball (without receiving the pending addition command). When the time has elapsed, a customer waiting effect is made to appear. Until the standby time (180 seconds) until the start of the customer waiting effect elapses, the display state of the decoration stop pattern that was stopped after the end of the current pattern variation display game continues to be displayed, and the decoration lamp 45 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. Then, the speaker 43 displays a "demonstration start waiting effect" in which the sound is muted (predetermined sound effects may be executed), and this state is maintained until the customer waiting effect starts. In addition, the performance control part 24 ends the customer waiting performance and shifts to the "power saving mode" when a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode shifting condition) is satisfied after the customer waiting performance (demonstration display) is started. In the case of this embodiment, after the start of the customer waiting effect (demonstration display), when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses without the operation pending ball occurring and without switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). , the production mode is shifted to the power saving mode, a power saving screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, the text "Power saving" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen), and a part of the decoration lamp 45 and other production LEDs or Control to turn off all lights (power saving control).

If the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number or the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), step S403 to S416 are executed sequentially. In addition, regarding the method of processing steps S403 to S416 described below, the only difference is whether the special figure 1 operation reservation ball is targeted or the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is targeted, and the content is substantially is the same as Therefore, in order to avoid duplication of description, unless there is a particular need, the description will be made without distinguishing which of the operation retention balls is the target of the processing.

When proceeding to step S403, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation pending balls on the side of the special figure to be used for this variable display operation (step S403), and a "reservation subtraction command" including the operation pending ball number information after the subtraction is sent to the effect control unit 24. (step S404).

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information that specifies the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side this time, and if the special figure 1 is the fluctuation start side, "00H", If the special figure 2 is the fluctuation start side For example, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 and S407, the pending data stored in the pending storage area (holding 1 storage area) corresponding to the pending storage number n=1 is read out and stored in the judgment random number storage area of the internal RAM. , the pending data stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to the pending n storage areas (n=2, 3, 4) are stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and 4 Clear the storage area to provide an empty area (step S407). As a result, the order of starting the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number n of operation pending balls (n=1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation pending ball acquired at the time of winning the starting gate wins any of the pending memories. It is specified whether it corresponds to the area, and it is possible to store a new suspended ball for operation.

Next, a game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a “game state designation command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 . The game state specifying command here includes game state information that can specify the game state at the start of the game. When the game state designation command is received, the performance control unit 24 grasps the game state based on the information contained therein, and manages the performance mode in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. do. The game state information to be included in the game state designation command may be the minimum necessary information when performing the target game process. information including "distribution designation number Tcode". In addition, as a game state designation command, it is possible to transmit an "internal game information command" that can identify the game state determination number YJ and / or a "distribution mode designation command" that can identify the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode). can do.

Also here, if necessary, information on the special pattern time saving number counter (time saving number of times information) including "time saving number command" and information on the special pattern probability variable number counter (ST number information) "ST number command" including sent. Based on the information included in these commands, the effect control unit 24 grasps the remaining time saving number of times and the remaining ST number of times, and notifies the remaining time saving number of times or the remaining ST number of times to produce a "remaining number of times display effect (for example, countdown display)" can be controlled to appear. Specifically, as the remaining number of times display effect, if it is in the time saving mode, the "remaining time saving number display effect" appears, and if it is in the ST mode, the "remaining ST number display effect" appears. In addition, since the time reduction command and the ST count command transmitted in this process are transmitted with the counter value from which the current game is not subtracted (the counter subtraction process is the special During the symbol confirmation time process (S479, S484)), the effect control unit 24 appropriately decrements the grasped counter value, and is configured to be able to display the remaining number of times display effect (described later). The same is true for the ceiling count command). However, in the case of this embodiment, the time saving number command is transmitted when the special pattern time saving number counter is other than zero (the time saving number counter ≠ 0), and the ST number command is also the special pattern probability variable number counter Non zero (The probability variation counter value ≠ 0) is transmitted. Of course, even if a counter value is zero, it is good also as a structure which transmits the number-of-time commands and ST number-of-times command containing the information which is zero.

In addition, depending on the game state, it is possible to determine whether to send only the time saving command, only the ST number command, or to send both commands. However, if an infinite ceiling privilege is granted, specifically, "infinite short time" with no limit on the number of times of time saving, "infinite probability change" or "infinite latent" without limit on the number of STs, or practically If the number of times (such as 65536 times) is set and the number of times of time reduction and ST number can be regarded as "infinite number of times", infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation, or infinite probability is granted, the game state according to the privilege (Heaven mode in this embodiment) In order to reduce the control load, the time saving command and the ST number command may not be transmitted. In addition, when the time saving state or probability variable state given by winning the jackpot continues until the next big win, similarly, the time saving number command and the ST number command may not be transmitted.

Further, the above-mentioned "remaining number display effect" can be configured to appear in any of the game modes of the time saving mode, the ST mode and the heaven mode. In addition, it is preferable that the remaining number of times display effect related to the infinite system is an effect mode informing that the remaining number of times is infinite. For example, if it is an image display effect, it is "remaining ∞ times" or "continue until the next big hit".

(Regarding the remaining ceiling count display effect)
In addition, in the gaming state information transmission process of step S408, a "ceiling count command" including remaining ceiling game number information (information relating to a ceiling counter, which will be described later) is also transmitted. Based on the information included in the number-of-ceilings command, the effect control unit 24 grasps the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached, and controls the appearance of the "residual number-of-ceilings display effect". In the case of this embodiment, the remaining ceiling count display effect appears in the form of a countdown display during the omen mode (omen effect mode).

The above-mentioned "residual ceiling number display effect" can appear during all or part of the monitoring target (counting target) period of the ceiling game. In this embodiment, it can appear "during normal mode" and/or "during precursor mode". Further, when the remaining ceiling count display effect is displayed in the normal mode, different effects can be provided in the general mode and the portent mode. For example, during general mode, the number of remaining peaks is displayed in a small display area in the corner of the LCD screen (the countdown display is displayed in a small size). It can be notified (large countdown display).

(Processing route when setting values are normal: Processing route following S420)
Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is ON (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not ON (step S409: ≠5AH), the "setting value command" is transmitted to the effect control section 24, and then the ceiling function management process shown in FIG. 13 is executed (step S420).

<13. Ceiling Function Management Processing: FIG. 13>
The ceiling function management process (step S420) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing details of the ceiling function management process (step S420). This ceiling function management process is mainly a process for managing the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games.

In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the "ceiling counter" is zero (step S901). This ceiling counter is a counter for managing (monitoring) the number of remaining ceiling games. Steps S903 to S904 (the ceiling flag is turned ON), which will be described later, and step S915 in FIG. 15 showing the details of the game state transition preparation process (step S412) in FIG. 12). The "ceiling counter" functions as counting means for counting the number of executions, establishments, or occurrences of a specific event, and functions as a functional unit that monitors the arrival of a ceiling trigger opportunity (ceiling privilege provision trigger). The "specific event" referred to here means execution of a symbol variation display game (hit variation or loss variation), winning of a big or small win or loss, transition to a specific game state (transition to a specific game mode or specific transition to a variation pattern selection mode, or transition to a specific internal game state), execution of a big hit game or a small hit, and specific events such as establishment of specific conditions related to games. In this embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter is monitored to determine the arrival of the ceiling function activation trigger. Such counting means can be used, for example, in Modified Example 1 and Modified Example 2 (FIGS. 33 and 34, granting modes (α) to (μ)) of the privilege granting mode to be described later. It is used as a functional unit for monitoring the arrival of a trigger.

If the ceiling counter is zero (step S901: YES), the process exits the ceiling function management process without doing anything. The ceiling counter is set to the initial value when the RAM is cleared by clearing the RAM within the area (step S031) during the main control side main processing shown in FIG. This is the case of shifting, that is, the case where the internal game state shifts to the normal state (see steps S481 and S486 in FIG. 16B described later).

On the other hand, if the ceiling counter is not zero (step S901: NO), the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S902). If so (step S903: YES), the ceiling flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S904). This ceiling flag is a flag for designating whether or not the ceiling counter has reached zero, and is used in the game state transition preparation process at step S412 (see step S915 in FIG. 15). As a result, the ceiling function management process is exited.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again, when the ceiling function management process of step S420 is completed, then the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric auditors product is executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process, using the big hit determination random number value, the "win-lose lottery at the start of variation" is executed for the operation suspension ball used for the current variation display operation. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the random number determination process in step S318 of FIG. 11, which has already been described.

In the random number determination process for this special electric accessory operation determination, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, the hit random number determination table for this processing target side (for example, if the special figure 1 side is the target of processing, the hit for special figure 1 random number table). Next, the random number for judging a big hit stored in the random number storage area for judging is obtained, and a lottery is executed based on the random number for judging a big hit and the random number judging table. If the result of the lottery is "big win" winning, the big win determination flag is set to "5AH", and if the "small win" win, the small win determination flag is set to "5AH", and "big win" and "small win" are set. If none of the "hit" is won, that is, in the case of "losing", "00H" is set to both the big-hit determination flag and the small-hit determination flag.

Next, the ceiling activation management process shown in FIG. 14 is executed (step S421).

<14. Ceiling Activation Management Processing: Fig. 14>
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing details of the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in FIG. In this ceiling activation management processing, necessary setting processing relating to ceiling privilege provision is performed.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the big hit determination flag is ON, that is, whether or not the current game result is a "big hit" (step S920).

If the jackpot determination flag is not ON (step S911: ≠5AH), then it is determined whether or not the ceiling activation flag is ON (5AH) (step S921). This "ceiling activation flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not to activate the ceiling function (whether or not to give the ceiling privilege), and when the flag is ON, the ceiling privilege is given. If the flag is in the OFF state, it is specified that the ceiling privilege will not be given. The ceiling activation flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when the ceiling counter reaches zero in the game state transition preparation process of step S412 described later (the step in FIG. 15 showing details of the game state transition preparation process). (See S915-S916). If the ceiling activation flag is ON, it is determined that the ceiling activation opportunity has arrived in the current game (step S921:=5AH), and the processing necessary to provide the ceiling privilege (steps S922 to S925) is performed. executed. On the other hand, if the ceiling activation flag is not in the ON state (step S921: ≠5AH), it is assumed that the ceiling activation trigger has not arrived, and the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything.

If the ceiling activation flag is ON (step S921:=5AH), a process necessary for granting the ceiling privilege (ceiling activation) is executed. Here, first, the value of each state buffer set in the later-described game state transition preparation processing (step S412) is set to the corresponding state flag and counter (step S922: state flag setting processing). Thereby, it is controlled to the designated ceiling privilege state. In the case of this embodiment, a finite time saving (time saving state of 100 times of time saving) is specified, and the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "01H" in the omen mode to "06H" in the ceiling mode. It's becoming Then, as the end processing for granting the ceiling privilege, each state buffer is cleared (step S923: various setting processing for ceiling activation), and then the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H) (step S923). S924-S925). Next, the game state information transmission process (step S926) is executed, and the ceiling activation management process is exited. In the game state information transmission process here, a game state designation command including finite time reduction (time reduction state) information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 . As a result, the current game (1000th game) is controlled to a finite time-saving state with the start of the game, and a special symbol variation pattern based on the ceiling mode is selected in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) described later, and the ceiling production mode. The production below will appear.

Returning to the description of step S911, when the jackpot determination flag is ON (step S911:=5AH), the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything. Therefore, when a big win is won, even if it is a ceiling game, the control is made to the "ceiling activation inhibited state", and the process when a big win is won is preferentially executed. Therefore, in order to give the ceiling privilege, it is a condition that the player has been addicted to the game for 1000 games. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of addicting games (the number of consecutive failures) is monitored during 1000 games in the normal mode (normal state), and if the game is addicted during this game, the ceiling privilege is given. ing.

(Modified example 1 of the generation timing of the ceiling privilege)
Incidentally, when a big hit is won, a ceiling privilege may be provided without controlling the ceiling function to be in a prohibited state. However, in this case, the ceiling privilege is only for this game (only for one game). This is because the jackpot game is started after the end of the current game. However, even if it is a ceiling privilege for one game only, if a time-saving state or a variable state with an electric sapo is given, the benefit of the electric sapo will be available until the end of this pattern change display game. Can receive. Specifically, there is an advantage that winning to the lower starting port 35 becomes easier, and the operation holding ball on the special figure 2 side is easier to occur. When a game state with an electric sapo is provided as a ceiling privilege, in this game, at least a "right-handed instruction image 779" shown in FIG. preferable.

(Modified example 2 of the generation timing of the ceiling privilege)
In the present embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a ceiling privilege is provided upon game start, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which a ceiling privilege is provided upon game termination. In other words, the configuration is such that the timing of the end of the ceiling game is used as the ceiling activation trigger. In the case of this modification, the ceiling privilege is awarded immediately after the pattern variation display game ends. For example, when the ceiling privilege is limited time reduction, it can be in the time reduction state immediately after the end of 1000 games. Further, when the ceiling privilege is "forced win", after 1000 games are completed, a big win game (forced win game) by forced win is started. Note that when the end of the game is set as the ceiling activation trigger, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) is performed, for example, during the special symbol confirmation time process (FIG. 16B), which will be described later, related to the process at the end of the symbol variation display game. It may be executed after the process of step S495.

(Modified example 3 of the generation timing of the ceiling privilege)
Further, in the present embodiment, it is explained that the ceiling privilege is given in the 1000th game, but the present invention is not limited to this. Benefits may be given. For example, when addicted to 1000 games (the first granting condition is met), the right to grant the ceiling privilege is established, and the ceiling privilege is granted after a predetermined number of premonitory games are played (granting of the ceiling privilege is temporarily suspended and multiple games are played). scheduled ahead). In this case, it is possible to provide a plurality of numbers of precursor games (for example, 1 to 16 games) and determine the number of precursor games by lottery (lottery for the number of precursor games). When the number of precursor games is determined by lottery, the lottery probability for each number of precursor games may be the same for all settings (settings 1 to 6), but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the more likely a relatively small number of games will be selected, and the lower the set value, the more likely a relatively large number of games will be selected. If so, it is possible to give the player an element of guessing the settings based on the difference in the number of games played. Also, when a specific number of precursor games (for example, 7 games) is selected, it is possible to determine the lottery probability according to the set value, such as high setting confirmation or setting 6 confirmation.

(Modified example 4 of the generation timing of the ceiling privilege)
In the above-described modification 3, an example has been described in which the right to grant the ceiling privilege is once suspended until the predetermined number of precursor games are completed, that is, the example in which the right suspension period depends on the number of times the game is executed. However, the right reservation period may not depend on the number of game executions, but may depend on the passage of time. For example, it is a "time-limited" ceiling grant form in which a ceiling privilege is awarded when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the ceiling game. Specifically, the ceiling privilege is given at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game related to the ceiling game. In this case, by using the interval time from the start of the ceiling game to the start of the ceiling privilege, an effect to notify in advance that the finite time reduction will soon occur, for example, a "right-handed instruction image 779" shown in FIG. It is possible to urge the player who is hitting to the left to hit to the right and prevent wasteful hitting.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again, after finishing the ceiling activation management process of step S421, the special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the "symbol lottery at the start of variation" is executed using the win/lose lottery result of step S410 and the random number for special symbol determination. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) shown in FIG.

Here, first, a symbol table (any one of a big win symbol table, a small winning symbol table, and a losing symbol table) is selected according to the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type) and the win/lose lottery result of step S410. For example, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the big hit determination flag is 5AH, that is, if the current fluctuation start side is 'special figure 1 side' and the winning lottery result is 'big hit', 1 jackpot symbol table" is selected. Then, the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired, a symbol lottery is executed based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination, and the special symbol determination which is the result of the lottery is executed. The data and the special stop symbol number are stored in corresponding areas of the intra-area RAM.

After finishing the special stop symbol creation process of step S411, next, a game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412).

<15. Game state transition preparation process: Fig. 15>
The game state transition preparation process (step S412) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process.

In this game state transition preparation process, when a big win is won, data for designating the transition destination game state after the big win game (see FIG. 4) is stored in a predetermined buffer (state buffer). (Steps S911 to S914), and processing for storing data for designating a ceiling privilege in a predetermined buffer (steps S915, S916, and S917) when the ceiling flag is in an ON state because of the failure. ing. First, the processing contents of the former "when winning a jackpot" will be described.

(If you win the jackpot)
When the jackpot determination flag is ON (step S911:=5AH), the "game state transition table selection table" shown in FIG. 22 is acquired (step S912). Next, with reference to the acquired game state transition table selection table for big win, the current game state (game state at the time of winning (game state determination number YJ in this embodiment)) and hit type (special symbol determination data) Acquire the game state transition table (any of JTTBL-1 to 5) corresponding to (step S913), and store the data specified in the acquired game state transition table in various state buffers (step S914: state buffer setting process). The game state transition table defines various data for transitioning to a desired game state. The gaming state transition table according to the present embodiment is provided with JTTBL-1 to 5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, JTTBL-1 is "time saving A" and JTTBL-2 is "time saving B". , JTTBL-3 is "variable probability A", JTTBL-4 is "variable probability B", and JTTBL-5 is "variable probability C".

The value stored in the state buffer is read in the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 18 (see step S509 in FIG. 17 and step S592 in FIG. (Flag memory area or counter memory area corresponding to each state buffer), thereby specifying the game state after the jackpot game (the transition destination game state in FIG. 4).

The roles of the various status buffers are as follows.
(α) "General electric role open extension transition state buffer, normal symbol time reduction transition state buffer, normal symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time reduction state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer"
ON/OFF designation data for each function for designating an internal game state is set. Specifically, the general electric goods open extension state flag that specifies the operating state of the open extension function, the normal design time saving state flag that specifies the operating state of the normal design time saving function, the normal design normal that specifies the operating state of the normal design variable function Data for a special symbol probability variation state flag, a special symbol probability variation state flag specifying the operation state of the special symbol probability variation function, and a special symbol probability variation state flag specifying the operation state of the special symbol probability variation function are set.
(β) “Special pattern time saving counter buffer”
Data (data for special symbol time saving number counter) for designating the number of times of working hours (number of times of electric support) is set (see steps S478 to S481 in FIGS. 16A to 16B).
(γ) “Special symbol probability variation counter buffer”
Data for designating the ST number (data for the special symbol probability variation number counter) is set (see steps S483 to S486 in FIG. 16B).
(δ) “Special symbol variation counter 1 to 3 buffers”
Data for designating the number of continuations of a specific variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) (data for a special symbol variation number counter) is set.
(ε) “Variation pattern distribution designation number 1 to 3 buffers”
When a predetermined update condition is satisfied, data (data for variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode) specifying a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to be updated is set.

For example, if the current gaming state is "normal state (YJ = 00H)" and "variable probability jackpot 2 (5R variable probability ST75)" is won, based on the game state transition table selection table shown in FIG. 21, "JTTBL -4”, that is, the game state transition table for variable probability B (see FIG. 22) is obtained. In this case, "5AH (ON designation)" is set for each of the general electric role open extension transition state buffer to the special pattern probability variation transition state buffer, and "100 times (electric support number 100 times)" is set to the special symbol time saving counter buffer ” is set, and “75 times” is set in the special symbol probability variation counter buffer. As a result, the transition destination game state after the big hit game is specified as "75 times of ST + 25 times of time reduction" (after completion of 75 times of probability change state, shift to 25 times of time reduction state). Also, as the game mode transition designation data, "02H (ST early stage designation)" is set in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number 1 buffer, and "25 times (ST early stage mode continuation number)" is set in the special symbol fluctuation counter 1 buffer. is set, and "02H (ST middle stage designation)" is set in the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number 2 buffer, and "50 times (ST middle stage mode continuation number)" is set in the special symbol fluctuation counter 2 buffer. be. As a result, the game mode transition form of "25 times in ST early stage mode 50 times in ST middle stage ⇒ time saving mode" is specified.

(S. Modified example of ST number / time saving number: case where ST number or time saving number differs depending on the setting value)
In this embodiment, it is assumed that the same game state transition table is selected regardless of the set value when the same jackpot is won. That is, even if the current setting is any one of 1 to 6, for example, when winning the variable probability jackpot 1, the state is shifted to the variable probability state (variable probability A (ST100 mode)) specified by JTTBL-3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the same jackpot is won, it may be shifted to a variable probability state with different ST times or to a time saving state with different times of time saving according to the set value. In this case, at least the data values related to the special symbol probability variation number counter and/or the special symbol time reduction number counter may be configured to be able to select different game state transition tables according to the set values.

In the above description, the case in which the same jackpot wins was explained, but it is also possible to focus on different jackpots and make the following configuration. For example, depending on the set value, the presence or absence of a specific number of STs or the presence or absence of a specific number of times of reduced working hours may be determined. Specifically, in the case of the first set value, there is a specific jackpot giving a specific number of STs, and in the case of the second set value, the specific jackpot does not exist. That is, in the case of the first set value, the big win lottery targets include the "specific big win", but in the case of the second set value, the big win lottery targets do not include the "specific big win".

With the above configuration, when winning a specific probability variable jackpot (may be a latent probability jackpot) or a specific short-time jackpot, the following (SA) and (SB) create game characteristics described below. be able to.

(SA) For example, when winning a specific variable probability jackpot, each setting value (settings 1 to 6) may set a different number of STs (each is shifted to a variable state with a different number of STs), or at least A different number of STs may be set for one setpoint (at least one setpoint is shifted to a variable state with a different ST number than the other setpoints). As a representative example, in the former example, if the same probability variable jackpot is won, for example, "ST number of settings 1 to 6 is 100 times to 105 times" case). In the latter example, if you win the same probability variable jackpot, for example, "Settings 1 to 5 are 100 ST times, setting 6 is 101 times" (a case where setting 6 is confirmed with 101 ST times) or " Settings 1 to 4 are 100 ST times, settings 5 and 6 are 101 times" (case where high setting is confirmed after completing 101 ST times), "At least the first setting value is 100 ST times, and the second setting value is 105 times" and so on.
In addition, in the case of focusing on a different probability variable jackpot, for example, if you win the first prize among the hit types that are subject to the jackpot lottery, the 1st number of times (for example, ST 100 times) is set, and if you win the second prize is set to a second ST number (for example, 105 times) different from the first ST number, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second hit is not included.
In the case of these configurations, when a certain probability variable jackpot is won, the number of STs differs depending on the set value, so setting suggestions can be made according to the number of STs. Specifically, if it is a specific ST number, one of the settings 1 to 6 can be found, or in a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, setting 1 denied, setting 6 confirmed, etc.) It turns out that there is. In other words, it is possible to create novel game characteristics such as creating the function (setting suggestion) of the setting suggestion effect by using the "number of STs".

(SB) Similarly, when winning a specific time-saving jackpot, each setting value (settings 1 to 6) may set a different number of times of time-saving, or set a number of times of time-saving with a different setting value of at least 1 You may Also, in the case of focusing on a different probability variable jackpot, for example, if you win the first hit among the hit types that are subject to the jackpot lottery, it will be the first time-saving number of times (for example, time-saving 100 times), and the second hit will be won. When it does, it is set to the second number of times of time saving (for example, 105 times) different from the first number of times of time saving, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second hit is not included. In these cases as well as the configuration of (SA) described above, when it is a specific time saving number of times, it is one of the settings 1 to 6, or a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, It is possible to make setting suggestions according to the number of times of saving time, such as setting 1 denial, setting 6 confirmation, etc.), and the novelty of creating the function of setting suggestion production (setting suggestion) using "time saving number" A certain game property can be created.

It should be noted that the particular jackpot in this example may be one or more jackpots. The specific jackpot is preferably a jackpot with the lowest symbol lottery rate (for example, variable probability jackpot 1) or a jackpot with the lowest degree of advantage (profit status). The reason is as follows. A jackpot with the lowest symbol lottery rate is positioned as a "rare jackpot" that is rarely won. Therefore, when winning the jackpot, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information such as "suggestion of settings" as a privilege. In addition, the jackpot with the lowest degree of advantage (profit status) has a low profit even if the player wins the jackpot with great effort, and the player is disappointing with the jackpot, and there is a fear that the player's willingness to play will decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information such as "suggestion of settings" when the player wins the jackpot, thereby preventing the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

The configuration of (SA) above can be, for example, the configuration of (SA-1) below.
(SA-1)
A lottery means for executing a lottery for a plurality of types of hits when the starting means detects a game ball;
a symbol display means for performing a variable display of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stationary display mode of the symbols;
a winning game execution control means for controlling execution of a winning game when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning;
After the winning game is over, until the number of times the pattern changes reaches a predetermined upper limit, the lottery probability of winning is a high probability state (specifically, a high probability). A game state with a probability state: a probability variation state or a probability state) is provided,
A gaming machine having different probabilities that the result of the winning lottery will be a predetermined result according to a set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages,
The setting values that can be changed in multiple stages include at least a first setting value and a second setting value,
The stochastic variation control means is
When the set value is the first set value, when the first winning is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the set value is the second set value, when the first win is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is maintained until the second upper limit number of times different from the first upper limit number of times is reached. can be configured to control

Also, the above (SA-1) may be configured as the following (SA-2).
(SA-2)
The stochastic variation control means is
When the first win is won by the lottery means, control to the high probability state until the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the second win is won by the lottery means, control to the high probability state until the second upper limit number of times different from the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the set value is the first set value, at least the second win may not be included in the results of the lottery by the lottery means.

In addition, in the case of the above (SB) configuration, instead of the probability variation control means, "a ball entry advantageous state (electric support state) in which the ball entry state to the starting means is more advantageous than the normal game state (normal state) Advantageous game state control means for controlling to an advantageous game state (time saving state) accompanied by "is provided. and,
The advantageous gaming state control means is
When the set value is the first set value, when the first win is won by the lottery means, the advantageous game state is controlled until the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the set value is the second set value, when the first win is won by the lottery means, the advantageous game state is maintained until the second upper limit number of times different from the first upper limit number of times is reached. It should be configured to control.

(If the jackpot is not won (losing) and the ceiling flag is ON)
Returning to the description of FIG. 15 again. If the jackpot determination flag is not ON (5AH) (step S911: ≠5AH) and the ceiling flag is ON (step S915:=5AH), ceiling activation preprocessing (preprocessing for giving a ceiling privilege) , the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S916). The ceiling activation flag set to the ON state in this process is confirmed in the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in the next game.

Next, the “ceiling game state transition table” shown in FIG. 23 is acquired (step S917). In FIG. 23, JTTBL-6 to JTTBL11 (limited time reduction to infinite potential) are exemplified as ceiling game state transition tables corresponding to various ceiling benefits. In practice, a necessary ceiling game state transition table may be provided according to the type of ceiling privilege.

Next, the data determined in the obtained game state transition table for the ceiling are stored in the above-described state buffer (step S914: state buffer setting processing). The values stored in these state buffers are read out in the ceiling activation management process (step S421, see step S922 in FIG. 14), and are stored in predetermined storage areas of RAM 203 (each flag storage area and counter storage area corresponding to the status buffer). As a result, the gaming state relating to the ceiling privilege is specified. Note that "* (times)" and "* (H)" shown in the figure are arbitrary data values, meaning that appropriate values can be set according to the playability and design values. For example, in the case of the present embodiment, "Limited time reduction (time reduction number of times 100)" is representatively described as the ceiling privilege, so in this case, the data value as shown in the illustrated "Limited time reduction" column is determined. It is

When both the big hit determination flag and the ceiling flag are in the OFF state (00H) (step S911 is ≠5AH and step S915 ≠5AH), nothing is done and the game state transition preparation process is exited.

Returning to the description of the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 12 again. After finishing the game state transition preparation process of step S412, next, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, at least the variation pattern allocation table (FIGS. 24 to 27) corresponding to the current game state and the symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data) of step S411 is acquired, and the acquired variation A variation pattern is determined based on the pattern allocation table and the random number for the variation pattern (variation pattern lottery). In the case of this embodiment, the current set value, the current variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the pattern lottery result, and the number of operation pending balls (existing operation pending balls excluding the The number of balls is 0 to 3: see step S403). .

(Variation pattern allocation table: Fig. 24 to Fig. 27)
24 to 27 show fluctuation pattern distribution tables. Figure 24 shows the per variation pattern allocation table for "general use, omen use, ceiling use, time saving use, heaven time saving use", and Figure 25 shows each per variation for "ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST end stage" Figure 26 shows each losing variation pattern sorting table for "general use, omen use, ceiling use, time saving use, heaven time saving use", and Figure 27 shows ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST end stage It shows each "losing variation pattern distribution table" for. In addition, "FB1 to FB17" shown in Figures 24 and 25 are hit fluctuation pattern distribution table types selected when winning, and "FH1 to FH22" shown in Figures 26 and 27 are hit fluctuations selected when losing. Indicates the pattern distribution table type.

In addition, about the "heaven time saving" (refer to the "time saving/heaven time saving" column) of the variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG.24 and FIG.26, it is a common table with the time saving mode. The reason for using a common table is to reduce the control load. When the same game state as the ceiling privilege is provided, a variation pattern distribution table common to the ceiling privilege and the game state can be provided. Of course, a dedicated variation pattern distribution table may be provided according to the ceiling privilege. For example, in the case of finite time reduction and infinite time reduction, "variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heaven time reduction", in the case of finite probability variation and infinite probability variation, "variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heaven probability variation", finite probability and infinite probability In the case, it is a "variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heavenly probability".

Further, although not shown, the variation pattern apportionment table is provided with variation pattern apportionment tables corresponding to set values (settings 1 to 6). That is, depending on the setting value, the probability of drawing one or more specific variation patterns may differ. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 27, in each variation pattern distribution table, one or more types of variation patterns are included in the game state (variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)), the number of pending balls (currently used for the variation display operation), It is determined in association with the number of existing operating pending balls (excluding the operating pending balls), the symbol lottery result, and the random number for the fluctuation pattern. As for the types of variation patterns, various variation patterns are provided as illustrated. The relationship between the high and low of the winning expectation is as follows. The relationship between the reaches of the same kind is "N reach A<N reach B" between N reaches, and "SP reach A<SP reach B<SP reach C" between SP reachs. The relationship between different types of reach is the relationship of "N reach A<N reach B<SP reach A<SP reach B<SP reach C<special reach". In addition, "flicker reach" is mainly provided as a special reach that is selected when there is a prize at the lower start port 35, which is the special figure 2 side start port, in the normal mode.

It should be noted that, when a pseudo series or other advance notice effects are executed in a complex manner, the degree of expectation for winning may change. For example, even with SP reach A, which has a relatively low winning expectation, such as "SP reach B < pseudo 3 + SP reach A", when pseudo-relationships are involved, winning expectations are higher than SP reach B and SP reach C. may be higher. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, when pseudo 4 is involved, the occurrence of SP reach B or more is determined. In addition, in the figure, N reach is "no pseudo-run", but in reality, N reach with pseudo-run, for example, pseudo 2-3 + N reach A, pseudo 2-3 + N reach B, etc. When accompanied by 3 or more, the occurrence of SP reach is determined.

The special symbol variation pattern creation process is basically the same as the start-up winning random number determination process (step S320 in FIG. 11), which is the look-ahead variation pattern determination process described above. Here, the variation pattern distribution table is referred to, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number value is determined (the variation pattern designation command data COM2 shown in FIGS. 24 to 27 is obtained). When the variation pattern is determined, the corresponding variation time is determined (see the "TIME" column in the drawing). This variable time (execution time of the symbol variable display game) is set in the "special symbol role product operation timer" which is the timer management area of the RAM in the area. Then, in order to notify the content of the determined variation pattern to the performance control unit 24 side, a "variation pattern designation command" including variation pattern information capable of specifying the content of the variation pattern is created as a performance control command, and this is subjected to performance control. It transmits to the part 24 side. Specifically, in the special symbol variation pattern creation process, the following (A) to (D) processes are included as processing related to determining the "variation pattern specification command" for specifying the variation pattern at the start of variation. It is

(A) "Variation start fluctuation pattern distribution table determination processing" for determining the "fluctuation pattern distribution table";
(B) With reference to the "variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 24 to 27)" determined in (A) above, the number of balls withheld in operation and the random number for the variation pattern acquired in the process of step S314 "Variation pattern specification command data acquisition process" (variation pattern lottery process) for determining the variation pattern and acquiring the command data (COM2) of the corresponding variation pattern specification command,
(C) "Variation time setting process" to determine the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process and set it in the "special symbol role product operation timer" which is the timer management area of the RAM in the area ,
(D) includes a “command transmission process” for transmitting the variation pattern designation command acquired in (B) above to the effect control unit 24 .

The information about the variation pattern determined in this manner includes at least another win/loss lottery result (in the case of this embodiment, detailed pattern lottery result information is included in the decorative pattern designation command), It can include current game state, variable time information, execution designation information of specific notice effect (presence or absence of reach effect and its type, pseudo consecutive designation information, etc.). The main control unit 20 transmits to the production control unit 24 a "variation pattern designation command" whose contents can be specified. It is used to determine the production scenario related to the display game (variation display of decorative patterns, various advance notice effects, setting suggestive effects during fluctuation, etc.).

(Regarding characteristic elements related to fluctuation patterns)
Here, the characteristic elements related to the variation pattern will be described, focusing on having multiple types of ST modes and having a ceiling function.

(About fluctuating state)
The fluctuation states (high speed, medium speed, low speed fluctuation states) in each game mode are realized exclusively by the fluctuation pattern group and its selection rate defined in the losing fluctuation pattern allocation table shown in FIGS. For example, if you refer to the "losing variation pattern distribution table for ST medium" shown in FIG. The shortest variation pattern (ST early stage normal variation 2s) with the shortest variation time of 2s (seconds) is selected with a high probability. In addition, in the middle of ST and the end of ST, a variation pattern with a longer variation time (ST middle stage normal variation 3s, ST end stage normal variation 4s) is selected with a high probability. Realize a state or a slow varying state. Also, as shown in FIG. 27, at the time of losing, the reach fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected in the order of "ST end, ST middle, ST early stage" mode (in this embodiment, the selectivity of the reach fluctuation pattern during the ST early stage zero), and its fluctuation time is also relatively long. Also from this point, the average duration of the symbol variation display game is relatively long in this order of ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage mode.

In addition, in the ST early stage mode, only normal variation types (ST early stage normal variation 2s, 8s) are selected at the time of loss. In other words, during the early stages of the ST (within 1 to 25 games), when the reach hits, it becomes "accurate" (when the jackpot is won, "direct hit reach" is selected (see FIG. 25)). In this embodiment, when winning in the ST early stage mode, regardless of the hit type, the common variation pattern distribution table "FB9" is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, As in the ST middle stage mode and the ST final stage mode, a configuration may be adopted in which different variation pattern distribution tables are selected according to the hit type.

Also, by utilizing the fact that there are a plurality of types of ST modes, the following configuration (I) or (II) is possible.
(I) A configuration may be adopted in which a Tcode dedicated to the final round of the ST mode is provided, and a specific fluctuation pattern (final swing fluctuation) can be selected for the final round. The Tcode dedicated to the final round can be provided in at least one ST mode of the ST early stage mode, the ST middle stage mode, and the ST final stage mode. For example, "ST early final stage A, ST middle stage final stage A, ST final stage final stage A" shown in notes 2 to 4 in FIG. ST early stage final stage B, ST middle stage final stage B, ST end stage final stage B" and so on. In this case, the following effects can be produced. Representatively, taking the final game of ST early stage mode (25th game in ST) as an example, in the final game, "ST early stage final fanning A" is selected at the time of the big hit, and "ST early stage final fanning A" is selected at the time of loss. B" is selected. At this time, in both of the symbol variation display games related to the final ST openings A and B, a common specific effect is displayed for a predetermined time from the start of the game (until the predetermined variation time elapses from the start of the game). , a loss or a big hit is hidden for a while to arouse the player's sense of tension. If the game is lost, the game is stopped at the ``losing pattern (loose pattern)'' without applying the reach, and if the game is a big hit, the game is stopped at the ``matching pattern (hit pattern)'' after applying the reach. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, during the early stages of the ST, it will be accurate when the "Reach" is applied. It is possible to incite the player's sense of tension and expectation of winning. It should be noted that the fluctuation time of the final blow A (at the time of winning) and the final blow B (at the time of loss) may be the same fluctuation time, but the fluctuation time at the time of the big hit is set to be longer than at the time of loss, and after the reach production, the winning is decided. Appears a specific production such as a blessing production to bless, a promotion display from even pattern matching to odd pattern matching, or a non-promotion display from even pattern matching to even pattern matching depending on the jackpot type won. It is preferable to let

(II) When the winning jackpot type (one or more specific jackpot types may be used) is kept in a hidden state for the purpose of production, and the transition destination game state is kept in a hidden state (in the production during the symbol variation display game and the production during the winning) , When the winning jackpot type is hidden), for example, in the final game of the ST early stage mode (ST 25th game), at the time of losing, the ST early stage final incitement is used to determine whether the ST mode ends or continues Let Kano's "continuous fanning production" appear. For example, when the current game mode is the ST25 mode, as a result of the continuous fanning performance, a continuation failure performance for informing ST non-continuation appears, and when the current game mode is ST75 or ST100 mode, ST continuation is reported. Continuing success performance is made to appear.

Both of the configurations (I) and (II) described above can increase the player's sense of tension in the ST final game and improve the fun of the game in the ST mode. Further, the above-mentioned "final swing variation" may be configured to be selectable in all ST modes or part of ST modes. However, in the ST mode, which has a "high-speed fluctuation state" such as the ST early stage mode, it is preferable to configure the final swing fluctuation to be selectable. In the case of the "high-speed fluctuation state", if the game continues to lose without winning a big win, the ST (probability change state) will end in a blink of an eye, and the player's disappointment will increase. Therefore, it is preferable to allow the player to select the "final swing change" in the final round so as to maintain the player's sense of tension in order to improve the fun of the game. In addition, it is also possible to continuously select the "final hype" from the game one or more games before the final game, not limited to the final ST game. For example, during the three games from ST23 to ST25, the "Final Encouragement" is continuously selected.

(Regarding the fluctuation pattern related to the ceiling mode)
Also, referring to the losing fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, in the ceiling mode, as shown in the "ceiling" column of the illustration, regardless of the special figure type and the number of operation pending balls, common "ceiling fluctuation" is selected. However, in the case of this embodiment, since there are multiple types of loss types, "common ceiling fluctuation" is selected regardless of "special figure type, number of balls in operation, and loss type". The reason for doing so is as follows. First, at the time of reaching the ceiling, it is preferable to make a common ceiling effect appear regardless of at least the special figure type and the number of operation pending balls, and to notify the ceiling activation (granting of the ceiling privilege). Secondly, preparing a plurality of types of variation pattern distribution tables for one ceiling game (one rotation only) and presenting effects based on them increases the control load and reduces the control load. This is because it is not preferable from the viewpoint of Also, in the case of winning, as in the case of "losing" described above, the following configuration is adopted from the viewpoint of performance and control load reduction. As already explained, in the ceiling game (the 1000th game), when the jackpot is won by chance, the effect related to the ceiling effect mode is not displayed, but the normal effect mode (for example, the general mode It is preferable to display the effect at the time of winning (in the medium mode or the omen mode) (see the above description of “7-4-1. About the effect during the ceiling mode”). Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in the "ceiling" column of the losing variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. "FB2" is selected from among the distribution tables FB1 to FB4. Any of FB1 to FB4 may be used instead of "FB2".

(Regarding fluctuation patterns related to omen mode)
Also, focusing on the "precursor mode" of the losing fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. , the game mode with the fastest average digestion time). This takes into consideration the state of mind of the player. It is thought that many of the players, when approaching the ceiling, have a strong desire to "get to the ceiling as soon as possible" and "want to get the ceiling privilege as soon as possible." Therefore, in this embodiment, the average digestion time during the precursor mode is sped up. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, when the jackpot is won in the omen mode, the hit variation pattern distribution tables FB1 to FB4 common to the general mode are adopted. Not limited to this, a hit variation pattern allocation table dedicated to the portent mode may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a "forecast hit variation" as a winning variation exclusively for the omen mode (see Note 2 "Omen hit variation" in FIG. 24).

Also, if the final game in the Omen Mode is "losing", select a specific variation pattern (a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time) in order to make the above "preliminary launch guidance notification effect" appear. It may be a possible configuration (see Remark 2 “precursor final fluctuation” in FIG. 26). This pre-launch guidance notification effect is an effect that instructs "how to hit" in the game before the game in which the state with electric sapo occurs. Or a game that causes a reduction in time), or instructing "left hitting" in the game without an electric sapo, that is, the actual presence of an electric sapo. It is different in character from the notification effect that instructs how to hit in the game in which none occurs. In this respect, the pre-launch guidance notification effect is a unique effect of a gaming machine equipped with a ceiling privilege.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again. After finishing the special symbol variation pattern creation process of step S413, next, the in-varying flag corresponding to the current variation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above "fluctuation flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is fluctuating, and when the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is fluctuating, and the When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, "special symbol 1 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special figure 1 and "special symbol 2 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special figure 2 are handled. For example, if the special figure 1 side is the current processing target (variation start side), the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is set to ON, and the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative design designation command capable of specifying the design lottery result information obtained in the special stop design preparation process of step S411 is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative design specification command includes information about the special design type and winning type (design lottery result) on the fluctuation side. This decorative pattern designation command is mainly composed of a combination of decorative patterns when forming a ready-to-win state (symbol types with ready-to-win patterns as constituent elements), a combination of decorative patterns to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern), It is used when determining the notice effect corresponding to the type of winning in the symbol variation display game. Upon receiving the variation pattern designation command and the decorative design designation command, the performance control unit 24 starts the current decorative design variation display game based on the information included in these commands, and performs various performances during the design variation display game. Appearance control.

Then, as the fluctuation start time setting processing, the special symbol operation status is switched to "varying (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the judgment random number storage area (cleared to zero) (step S416). ).

As described above, when this special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started. As a result, the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessary product management process (step S095) of FIG.

(Regarding the case where a setting error occurs: processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination process in step S409, if the setting error flag is ON (5AH) in step S409, that is, if a setting error is occurring (step S409:=5AH), the special electric role in step S410 The random number determination process for object operation determination (win-lose lottery) is skipped, and the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is executed. That is, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the win-lose lottery at the start of fluctuation is not executed, and the win-lose lottery result of this time is always processed as "losing" (forced losing control). In the case of a setting abnormality error, it is preferable to provide and select an error-specific variation pattern, but it may be configured to select an existing specific variation pattern. When selecting an existing variation pattern, consider that a serious error called "setting error" has occurred, and do not select a reach variation pattern type that inflames the expectation of winning, only a normal variation pattern type is preferred. In addition, under the situation of forced loss, it is preferable to select the long fluctuation pattern type because it does not make sense of the game anymore, more preferably the longest normal fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 16s in this embodiment) select only. Further, in the case of a setting abnormality error, it may be configured such that "the game cannot be continued" and the symbol variation display game itself is not started (the symbol variation is not started). In this case, the error notification is continued until the power of the game machine is turned off. In this embodiment, until the setting change process (step S023) shown in FIG. 8 is executed and the setting error is cleared, the error notification continues even if the power is turned on again.

<A. Processing during special symbol fluctuation: Fig. 10>
Next, the processing during special symbol fluctuation (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be described.

In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time T set in the special symbol role product operation timer has elapsed. If the variation time T has not passed (variation time T≠0), the special symbol is in the process of being varied, so nothing is done and the processing during special symbol variation is exited. When the fluctuation time T of the special symbol has passed (variation time T=0), a "variation stop command (BF01H)" indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the production control unit 24 as the production control command. . When receiving the variation stop command, the performance control part 24 grasps that the special symbol variation display game has ended after the variation time of the special symbols has passed, and stops and displays (determines) the decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, when the special symbol variation display game is terminated, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated.

Next, as a setting process when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (eg, 100 ms) and the confirmation display time (eg, 500 ms) are stored in the corresponding area of the area RAM, and the special symbol operation status is set. Switch to "confirming (03H)" (store 03H in the special symbol operation status) and store the OFF state in the special symbol fluctuating flag. Then, when the setting process at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol is finished, the process during the special symbol fluctuation is exited. The above-mentioned "special symbol determination signal output time" is a margin time for ensuring output time of the special symbol determination signal for notifying that the special symbol has been determined and displayed from the frame external terminal board 21 to the hall computer HC. is. Further, the "fixed display time" is the time (stop display time) during which the stop display is maintained when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

After exiting the above special symbol changing process, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessary product management process of step S095 of FIG.

<16. Special symbol confirmation time processing (fluctuation stop processing): FIGS. 16A and 16B>
Next, the processing during the special symbol confirmation time (step S308) will be described. 16A and 16B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) in FIG.

In FIGS. 16A and 16B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero (step S471). In the special symbol role product operation timer here, "fixed display time" is set (see step S307 of the above special symbol fluctuation process). Until the special symbol role product operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), nothing is done and the special symbol confirmation time processing is exited.

If the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), it is assumed that this special symbol variation display game is over, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" (special symbol operation 01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the current game state information is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM (step S473).

Next, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(If the jackpot judgment flag is ON)
When it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S474:=5AH), various setting processes at the time of stopping the big hit pattern are performed (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, the jackpot determination flag is set to the OFF state (00H), and the condition device operation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) assuming that the jackpot has been won. Set stateless state (clear various flags and counters). Also, the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H), and the ceiling counter is cleared (00H).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is in the OFF state)
In the determination of step S474, if the big hit determination flag is OFF (00H) (step S474:≠5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). If the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476: ≠5AH), that is, if it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the process proceeds to step S478.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S476:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the small hit design is stopped (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small-hit determination flag and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small-hit medium flag as various setting processes (processing before the start of the small-hit game) when the small-hit symbols are stopped. After completing the various setting processes at the time of stopping the small winning symbols, the process proceeds to step S478.

When proceeding to the process of step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time saving number counter (remaining time saving number) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time saving number counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483.

On the other hand, if the special symbol time saving number counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time saving number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479), and the special symbol time saving number counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether or not it is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time saving counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), since the special symbol time saving state end count has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), it is assumed that the number of times the special symbol time saving state ends has been reached, and setting processing at the time of time saving end is performed (step S481).

(Setting process at time of time saving end: step S481)
Here, as the setting process at the time of the time saving end, the electric chew support function (normal pattern probability variable function, normal pattern time saving function, and open extension function) is set to OFF state (general electric role open extended state flag, normal pattern time saving Set the state flag and the normal symbol probability change state flag to 00H respectively), and set the transition to the "no electric sapo state". Also, in order to terminate the operation of the special symbol time saving function, the special symbol time saving function is set to the OFF state (set the special symbol time saving state flag to 00H), and the game state notification LED output number (state notification of the composite display device 38c Data) stores 00H that specifies a non-special symbol time-saving state (in the case of "01H", special symbol time-saving state designation).

The case where the "setting process at the end of the time saving" of step S481 is executed is the case where the game mode shifts from the "time saving mode" to the normal mode (general mode), specifically, the internal game state is the "time saving state". This is a case of transition from to "normal state". Therefore, here, as the game shifts to the normal state (general mode) from the next game, an initial value (999 times) is set in the ceiling counter so as to start counting the number of remaining ceiling games. In this embodiment, the game in which the ceiling counter value becomes zero is the game immediately before the ceiling game (the 999th game). , in the gaming state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12), the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), and data for designating the ceiling privilege is stored in each state buffer (FIG. 15 steps S915 to S917, S914). Then, in the ceiling activation management process (step S421 in FIG. 12) at the start of the next game (ceiling game), the data in the state buffer is read out and set to various flags and counters related to game state designation. (S921 to S926 in FIG. 14). As a result, the ceiling privilege is given when the ceiling game starts. In addition, the ceiling counter may be set to "1000" as an initial value. For example, it is possible to directly set specified data related to the ceiling privilege to various flags and counters without going through the state buffer.

(Control processing in the case of granting the ceiling privilege with the end of the game as a trigger)
Here, in the case of providing the ceiling privilege at the end of the game (when the symbols are stopped), as already described, the subroutine "ceiling activation management process (step S421)" After the final processing (step S495 described later) of the special symbol confirmation time processing related to the end of the display game, the ceiling activation management processing (step S421) may be executed. In this case, when the ceiling counter is set to 999 as in the present embodiment, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of 999 games, and when 1000 is set to the ceiling counter, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of 1000 games. In any case, the specific event related to the game (here, the number of times of loss in the normal state) is counted, and when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, zero), the ceiling function activation trigger or ceiling privilege It may be configured so that it can be given. By adopting the processing method of the present embodiment (see FIGS. 12 to 16B), it is possible to set the ceiling trigger to be triggered at the end of the game, whereas the old model used the trigger to trigger the ceiling at the start of the game. There are advantages in that design changes can be made easily and compatibility between old and new models can be improved.

When the setting process at the end of the time saving in step S481 is finished, then the game state update process is executed (step S482). Here, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "05H" of the time saving mode to "00H" of the general mode. The updated game state information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by a game state designation command in step S495 described later. Therefore, when the setting process at the end of the time saving of step S481 is executed, the game state designation command transmitted in step S495 described later includes information designating the "general mode", and by this game state designation command The effect control unit 24 grasps that the time saving mode (time saving state) has ended in the current game, and grasps that the next game will be shifted to the general mode (normal state). As a result, in the next symbol variation display game, a special symbol variation pattern based on the "general mode" is selected, and an effect under the "general effect mode" is displayed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation number counter (remaining ST number) is zero (step S483). When the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability variation number counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S484), and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction It is determined whether or not the number counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), since the ST number has not ended, the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. However, when the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the number of times of ST has ended, and the setting process at the time of probability variation end is executed (step S486). Here, as a setting process at the time of ending the variable probability state, the function related to the variable probability state is set to the OFF state to end the variable probability state. However, the processing contents differ according to the value of the special symbol time saving number counter. Details will be described below.

(1) "When the special symbol probability variable number counter after subtraction is zero and the special symbol time saving number counter is not zero", in this case, the ST number becomes zero in this game and the ST mode ends, Since the number of times of time saving remains, it is a case where it is shifted to the time saving mode from the next game. That is, when 25 ST times are completed during the ST25 mode, or when 75 ST times are completed during the ST75 mode ("JTTBL-4, 5" in the game state transition table shown in FIG. 22 is reference). Therefore, in this case, only the special symbol probability variation function is set to the OFF state (00H) (00H is stored in the special symbol probability variation state flag) to set the transition from the probability variation state to the time saving state, and the game state determination number YJ is set to " 02H (time saving state)”. When this process is executed in ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated in subsequent step S491.

(2) On the other hand, "when the special symbol probability variable number counter after subtraction is zero and the special symbol time saving number counter is also zero", in this case, the ST number becomes zero in this game, and the time saving number This is a case of zero, that is, a case where the ST100 mode is stayed, but the ST100 mode ends in the current game (see "JTTBL-3" in the game state transition table shown in FIG. 22). Therefore, in this case, as a process required to end the probability variable state, the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability variable function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function) is set to OFF state (normal electric role open extension state flag, 00H is stored in the normal symbol time saving state flag and the normal symbol probability change state flag), and the special symbol time saving function and the special symbol probability change function are turned off (00H is stored in the special symbol time saving state flag and the special symbol probability change state flag respectively. ), the game state notification LED output number 00H is stored, the initial value is set in the ceiling counter, and the game state judgment number YJ is updated to "00H (normal state)". It should be noted that the same applies to the case of ending the latent certainty state (when a finite latent certainty jackpot is provided). As a result, the ST100 mode (probability variable state) is ended, and the next game is shifted to the normal mode (general mode). In addition, in the case of ST100 mode, if the special symbol probability variable number counter becomes zero, the special symbol time saving number counter will also be zero (if the ST number is zero in this game, the time saving number will also be zero ), In the above "setting process at the end of time saving (step S481)" that is executed when the special symbol time saving number counter reaches zero, the function related to the time saving state such as the electric chew support function is set to OFF Therefore, in this process, only the special symbol probability variation function is turned off, and all functions related to the probability variation state (special symbol probability variation function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function) may be set to OFF. Also, for setting the ceiling counter, the initial value (999 times) may be set in the "setting process at the time of time saving end (step S481)", or may be set in this process.

When the setting process at the end of probability variation in step S486 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S488). The determination processing of the special symbol variation number counter here is mainly monitoring of the switching game (update game) of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) in the ST mode.

If the special symbol variation number counter is zero (step S488: YES), nothing is done and the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S488: NO), 1 is subtracted from the special symbol variation counter as part of the current variation (step S489), and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction. is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol variation count counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is determined that it is not an update game of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and nothing is done, and the process during the special symbol confirmation time is exited.

When the special symbol variation count counter after the subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that an update game of variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and game state update processing is executed (step S491). Here, update processing of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) in the ST mode is performed. The fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated when (α) ST early stage mode ends, (β) ST middle stage mode ends, (γ) ST final stage mode ends, etc. . More precisely, update processing is performed according to the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes.

In the case of ST25 mode, since it shifts to the time saving mode when the ST early game mode ends, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "02H" of the ST early game mode to "05H" of the time saving mode.

In the case of the ST75 mode, when the ST early stage mode ends, it is shifted to the ST middle stage mode (first update), so at this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from "02H" in the ST early stage mode to ST middle stage mode to "03H". Then, when the ST middle stage mode ends, it shifts to the time saving mode (second update), so at this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "03H" in the ST middle stage mode to "05H" in the time saving mode. do.

In the case of the ST100 mode, when the ST early stage mode ends, the mode is shifted to the ST middle stage mode (first update). ” to “03H” in ST middle stage mode. After that, when the ST middle stage mode ends, the transition is made to the ST end stage mode (second update). update to. Then, when the ST endgame mode ends, it shifts to the ST endgame mode (third update), so at this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from "04H" in the ST endgame mode to "00H" in the general mode. Update.

The process of step S491 described above works as a variation pattern mode update means for updating (changing) the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of the predetermined change condition.

Next, when the gaming state update process of step S491 is finished, next, a special figure fluctuation number counter update process is performed (step S492). Here, (1) processing to set the duration of the ST middle stage mode (ST number of times 50 times) after the ST number of times 25 times of the ST early stage mode is digested (processing of setting the value of the special symbol variation number counter 2) , (2) After 50 times of ST in the ST middle stage mode are digested, the process of setting the duration of the ST end mode (25 times of ST) (processing of setting the value of the special symbol variation counter 3) is performed. (For the value of the special symbol variation counter to be updated, refer to the special symbol variation counter 1 to 3 buffer columns of the game state transition table in FIG. 22). In this embodiment, the ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage modes are realized by the processing of steps S488 to S491.

Next, a portent mode transition management process is executed (step S493). In the portent mode transition management process, the ceiling counter is checked to determine whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is the portent mode transition trigger game number. In the case of this embodiment, since the portent mode is entered from the 990th game (see FIG. 7), when the ceiling counter N indicates the 989th game in the current game (ceiling counter N=10), the transition to the portent mode is made. Perform setting processing. Specifically, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "00H" of the general mode to "01H" of the precursor mode. As a result, the game is shifted to the portent mode from the 990th game of the next game, the variation pattern of the special symbols based on the portent mode is selected, and the performance under the portent performance mode is displayed.

When the portent mode transition management process of step S493 is completed, next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S495). This game state information transmission process transmits a game state designation command, like the game state information transmission process (step S408) during the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. However, the game state designation command transmitted here is information regarding the game state at the end of the game, that is, information including the contents updated in steps S482, S491, S494, and the like. Therefore, according to the game state designation command transmitted in this process, the effect control unit 24 can grasp whether or not the game state transition occurs, and control the transition of the effect mode at the end of the current game. For example, even if the 989th game is not started after the 989th game is finished, it is possible to switch and display the daytime background of the general presentation mode to the night background of the omen mode immediately after the 989th game is finished.

When the game state information transmission process of step S495 is completed, the special symbol confirmation time process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited. Then, the process proceeds to the special electric accessary product management process (step S095) in FIG.

<23. Special electric accessory management process: Fig. 17>
Next, the special electric accessary product management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing details of the special electric accessary product management process in step S095.

In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the flag during a small hit (step S501). When the small hit medium flag is ON (step S501:=5AH), small hit processing is performed (step S504), and this special electric auditors product management processing is exited. In this small-hit process, necessary processing for controlling the small-hit game operation is executed.

When the small hitting flag is OFF (step S501: ≠5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). If the condition device operation flag is OFF (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not during the small winning game (step S501: ≠ 5AH) and it is not during the big winning game, so do nothing and this special electric accessory Exit management processing.

When the conditional device operation flag is ON (step S502:=5AH), the processing corresponding to the special electric auditors product operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric auditors product status branching process). It should be noted that the "special electric role product operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 52, this status value is changed according to the processing state, the special electric role product operation status storage area of the area RAM stored in In the special electric accessary product operation status, "Start processing (00H)" which designates that it is in a standby state before the start of the big hit game, "In operation start processing ( 01H)", "in operation (02H)" to designate that the round game is being executed, and "continuing determination (03H)" to designate that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. , and "during jackpot end processing (04H)" which designates that the end processing is in progress at the end of the jackpot game.

In the special electric auditors product operation status branching process of step S503, the special electric auditors product operation status value is "starting processing (00H)" "operation start processing (01H)" "operating (02H)" "continuing determination ( 03H)” and “during jackpot end processing (04H)”, one of steps S505 to S509 is executed depending on whether the status value is one of these. These processes are processes for controlling the execution of a big hit game, and through the processes of steps S505 to S509, a winning game corresponding to various hits is realized. The processing contents of steps S505 to S509 will be described below.

<Big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Jackpot Start Processing)
The "jackpot start process" in step S505 will be described. At the start of the jackpot game, the special electric accessary product operation status is set to the initial value "in process of starting (00H)". Therefore, when a "jackpot" is achieved, this "jackpot start process" is executed first.

When entering the jackpot start process, the CPU 201 first sets the accessory continuous operation device operation flag to the ON state as a setting process (setting process at the start) necessary when starting the jackpot game. As a result, the continuous operation (round game) of the special electric accessory becomes a permissible state. Then, the special electric accessary product operation status is updated to "operation start processing (01H)", and 01H that specifies the first 1R is set to the "continuous number counter" that counts the number of rounds. Next, according to the hit type (special symbol determination data) won this time, "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to this big hit is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and "start interval time" is added to the special symbol accessory operation timer. set. "Start interval time (start INT)" means that after the special symbol confirmation display time has passed (see step S471 in FIG. 16A) and the jackpot is confirmed, until the special variable winning device 52 operates (1R round until the start of the game), and refers to the time width that defines the opening effect section.

Next, a "jackpot start command" is transmitted to the performance control unit 24, and the jackpot start process is exited. In addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening production, the "jackpot start command" includes information that can specify the type of this jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. It is also used when determining a series of hit effects (opening effect, round effect, round end effect, ending effect, etc.) corresponding to each jackpot type. Thus, a jackpot game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessories operation start processing)
Next, the "special electric accessary product operation start process" of step S506 will be described.

When entering the special electric role product operation start process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol role product operation timer is zero. The interval time before round start is set in the special symbol role product operation timer here. As this interval time, in the first round (1Rth), the "start interval time (start INT)" set in the "jackpot start process (step S505)" is monitored, but after the 2Rth, this process is monitored. When passing (step S506), the "interval time before opening", specifically, the interval time between rounds (INT between R) from the end of the current round game to the start of the next round game be monitored. Since the current round game has not ended until the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero, nothing is done and the special electric role product operation start processing is exited.

On the other hand, if the special symbol role product operation timer is zero, that is, the interval time before opening (in the case of the 1Rth, the start interval time) has passed, the jackpot type (special symbol determination data) and the current round number (continuous number counter value) to set the opening/closing operation pattern of the large winning opening 50 (large winning opening opening/closing operation setting process). Here, the large winning opening opening and closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the large winning opening solenoid 52c Winning gate opening/closing operation pattern data) is set.

In addition, along with the operation for starting the opening of the big winning opening, a command to open the big winning opening is transmitted to the effect control section 24. - 特許庁This "big prize opening opening command" includes the current round number information, and is used in the effect control section 24 to display the mid-round effect corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the special electric role product operation status is switched to "in operation (02H)", and this special electric role product management process is exited. As a result, the big winning opening 50 is opened up to the upper limit of the opening/closing operation time of the big winning opening, and the current round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessories)
Next, the "special electric accessary product in operation process" of step S507 will be described.

When entering the special electric role product in operation process, the CPU 201 first monitors whether the number of winning balls into the big winning hole 50 has reached the maximum number of winning prizes, and if the maximum number of winning prizes has been reached, a special symbol combination Clear the object operation timer to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the "special electric accessory operation start process (step S506)" is forcibly set to zero, and the maximum winning number is reached, so the large winning opening 50 that is open will be closed. Also, here, every time a prize is won in the special prize opening 50, a “special prize prize prize command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24.例文帳に追加The special prize opening winning command includes information on the occurrence of prizes for the special prize opening and information on the number of prize balls (set value information may also be included), and a prize to notify that the player has won the special prize opening 50. In addition to being used for production, it is also used for appearance control of setting suggestion production using prize winning production. For example, when there is an over-win that exceeds the maximum number of wins, a special over-win-win effect is displayed instead of the normal over-win-win effect according to the appearance rate determined according to the set value.

In addition, until the special symbol role product operation timer becomes zero, that is, until the large winning opening operation time (maximum opening time) elapses or the maximum number of winnings is reached, do nothing, It exits the processing during special electric accessory operation as it is.

If the maximum winning number is reached or the maximum opening time has passed and the special symbol accessory operation timer has become zero, this round game is considered to have ended, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to "continuing determination (03H)", and stores the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) in the special symbol role product operation timer. This "remaining ball ejection time" refers to the extra time for discharging the remaining balls inside the large winning opening after the closing of the large winning opening. In addition, an inter-round interval command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 along with the closing of the big winning opening (end of the round game). This "inter-round interval command" includes round game end information and current round number information, and the effect (inter-round interval effect) during the inter-round interval (R-interval INT) until the next round is controlled by the effect control unit 24. Used when manifesting. By the above, this special electric accessary product in operation processing is exited.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation determination process)
Next, the "special electric auditors product operation continuation determination process" of step S508 will be described.

When entering the special electric auditors product operation continuation determination process, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after the closing of the big winning opening is set in the special symbol role product operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not this remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. be done. Until the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero, nothing is done and the special electric role product operation continuation determination process is exited.

When the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time elapsed), the value of the continuous number counter is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, as a process for continuing the round game, add 1 (+1) to the continuous number counter, store the "interval time before opening" in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and special electric role The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)".

On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, as a setting process at the end of the final round, the "end interval time (end INT)" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory is stored. The operation status is switched to "finishing (04H)". The above-mentioned "end interval time" is an interval period from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has passed, and refers to the time width that determines the ending effect period. .

Then, a "jackpot end command" instructing the start of the ending production is transmitted to the production control unit 24, and the special electric accessary product operation continuation determination process is exited. Thereby, the round game of the maximum round number is ended. The above-mentioned jackpot end command includes information about the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information capable of specifying the game state after the jackpot game is finished. It is also used when determining the production mode of.

(9-5. Jackpot ending process: Fig. 18)
Next, the "jackpot ending process" in step S509 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot ending process.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero (step S591). Since the end interval time (end INT) is set in the special symbol role product operation timer here, it is determined here whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero (step S591: NO), nothing is done, and this big hit ending process is exited.

On the other hand, if the special symbol auditors product operation timer becomes zero (elapsed end interval time) (step S591: YES), the state flag setting process is executed (step S592). Here, each value of the state buffer set in the "game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12)" already described is set in the flag area or counter corresponding to the state buffer. Thereby, the game state after the jackpot game is designated.

Next, various setting processes at the end of the jackpot are executed (step S593). Here, various data used during the big hit game control process (for example, flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, the game state notification LED output number is updated, and the special electric auditors product operation status is Switch to "Start processing (00H)".

When the big-hit ending process is finished, a series of control processes relating to the big-hit game is finished, and the current big-hit game is finished. It should be noted that the series of control processing relating to the jackpot game explained above is the same when a "forced hit" is given by the ceiling privilege.

<19. Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 19 to 20>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 20, the effect control processing on the side of the effect control unit 24 of this embodiment will be described. The processing on the production control unit 24 side mainly includes predetermined main processing (production control side main processing: FIG. 19) and timer interrupt processing (production control side timer interrupt processing: 20).

<19. Effect control side main processing: Fig. 19>
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the main processing (production control side main processing) on the production control section side. The effect control unit 24 starts main processing on the effect control side shown in FIG.

In the main process of the effect control side, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first performs necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S1001). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, starting point return processing of the movable body role, initial setting of CTC, permission of timer interrupt, initial setting of register values inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

After the initial setting process is finished, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1011 is performed every predetermined time (16ms) as the process during normal operation, and otherwise the effect software random number update process of step S01012 is repeatedly performed.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle (counter value>15) that triggers execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the later-described effect control side timer interrupt process executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 20). In this embodiment, the main loop processing is performed every 16 ms or so. In the determination processing of step S1002, the main loop update counter value is determined, and if the value is greater than "15" (step S1002: YES), assuming that the execution timing of the main loop processing has come, the processing of steps S1003 to S1011 is executed. The lottery random number is updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update cycle has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, the setting of the effect scenario for the error notification during the error, the error cancellation processing when the error is canceled, and the like are executed. Errors relating to the rendering means (movable body accessory error, voice IC error, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, a demonstration/power saving mode process is executed (step S1005). In this demonstration/power-saving mode process, setting processes necessary for the demonstration start waiting effect, the customer waiting effect, and the power saving mode are executed.

Then, effect switch input processing is executed (step S1007). In this production switch input process, the operation state of the operation means (production button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, production control processing corresponding to the operation is executed. The input state of the operating means is monitored in the button input state update process (step S1052) in FIG. 20, which will be described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1008). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read, and effect processing corresponding to the read effect control command is executed. do. When an interrupt based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs, command reception interrupt processing (not shown) is executed. By this command reception interruption processing, the production control command is acquired, the data is housed in the command reception buffer of RAM243.

In the command analysis process, for example, when a variation pattern designation command is received, the contents of the command are first analyzed, and the variation pattern information of the special symbol, which is the contents thereof, is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 . The effect during the pattern variation display game is not yet determined at this time, and is determined when the decorative pattern designation command sent following the variation pattern designation command is received. That is, based on the variation pattern information stored here and the information (symbol lottery result information) included in the decorative symbol designation command, the effect scenario (decorative symbol variation display) during the symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display game) , advance notice effects, etc.) are determined. For example, when a variation pattern specification command and a decorative pattern specification command are received, in the command analysis process, based on the information (variation pattern information and winning type information) included in these commands, one or more types of production patterns decide. The production pattern determined here works as a "parts production" as an element constituting the production scenario. Subsequently, a time schedule is determined as to when the determined production pattern (parts production) is to be displayed and with what duration of production time, and a production scenario is constructed according to this. The production scenario data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM243. Various production patterns (parts production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or a plurality of them simultaneously, thereby realizing a "production scenario" in a broad sense. In this embodiment, the effect scenario during the pattern variation display game is determined based on the information contained in the variation pattern specification command and the decorative pattern specification command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the variation pattern specification command can be determined based on the information contained in Since the variation pattern specification command includes winning/losing information and variation pattern information, if the winning type (symbol lottery information) itself is not required, the variation pattern specification command can be used as the basis of the variation pattern specification command during the symbol variation display game. It is also possible to compose a production scenario.

Also, for example, when a "hold addition command" is received, it is decided by a pre-reading notice lottery whether or not to execute a pre-reading notice (holding change notice and / or pre-reading notice during fluctuation), and when executing a pre-reading notice determines the effect scenario, stores the data of the effect scenario in the corresponding area of the RAM 243, and appropriately uses it when executing the pre-reading notice. Similarly, when another pre-reading notice, for example, a ceiling change notice (FIG. 32) is to be displayed, when the ceiling change notice is executed, the effect scenario data is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 243. Stored in , and used as appropriate when executing the pending change notice for the ceiling. This realizes the appearance of normal pre-reading notice (suspension change notice, pre-reading notice during fluctuation) and pre-reading notice exclusively for the ceiling (hold change notice for ceiling).

After the command analysis process is completed, scenario update process is executed (step S1009). In this scenario updating process, the content of the timer required for executing the production scenario is updated, and the process of progressing the production scenario based on the timer value is executed. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule regarding the generation timing of effects. For example, within the fluctuation period (decorative design fluctuation period) in which the decorative design is variably displayed, which is substantially the same period as the fluctuation period (special design fluctuation period) in which the special design is variably displayed, that time This timer manages a temporal schedule as to what effect pattern is to be displayed on the axis, with what time width, and by what effect means. Such a production scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1011) and the production accessory action update process (step S1053), which will be described later. Here, the effect scenario timer is monitored, and when the generation time of one effect arrives, the sound data for the speaker 46 and the liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243. . Note that the LED data for the optical display device is created in the LED drive data update process (step S1011) described later, and the motor control data for the movable accessory is created in the performance accessory operation update process (step S1053) described later. be.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1010). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, phrases, volumes, etc. are changed based on the sound data set for each sound channel. The data is output to the sound control unit (sound source LSI), and a sound effect is produced from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit. As a result, a sound effect in line with the effect scenario is realized.

Next, LED drive data update processing is executed (step S1011). In this LED drive data update process, based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer, LED data for the light display devices such as the decorative lamp 13 and various LEDs for various performances is created, and the decorative lamp unit 45 and Lights up and blinks the LED. As a result, a light effect in line with the effect scenario is realized.

After the main loop processing is finished as described above, the performance software random number update processing of step S1012 is performed until the next main loop update period arrives.

<31. Production control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 20>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the effect control side timer interrupt processing. This effect control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (1 ms), and is executed by interrupting during execution of the effect control side main process.

In FIG. 20, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register to the stack area (step S1051), and then executes button input state update processing (step S1052). In this button input state update process, the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (the effect button 13, the direction key 75) is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in the RAM 243 as a predetermined value. Store in the area. This operation detection information is used in the scenario updating process (step S1009) in FIG. 19 when displaying player participation type effects, menu screens, information related to menu items, and the like. In this embodiment, it is also possible to detect a single press, a long press, repeated presses, and the like.

Then, a performance accessory operation update process is executed (step S1053). In this performance accessory operation update process, a process of creating motor control data for a movable accessory is performed based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer.

Next, SOL/MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL/MOT output process, the control data for the movable accessory created in the effect accessory operation update process is output to the drive control unit. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable body role product motor of the movable body role product to be operated to control the operation thereof. As a result, a movable object production using the movable object (clock-type object 80, flower-type object 90, etc.) in accordance with the production scenario is realized.

Next, liquid crystal command transmission processing is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission processing, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update processing (step S1009) of FIG. Execute display control. As a result, an image effect is realized in accordance with the effect scenario.

Next, RTC information acquisition processing is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) clocked by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when presenting an effect based on the RTC information.

Next, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main processing on the effect control side described above, and is incremented in this processing. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is one of 0-15.

When the processing of step S1057 is completed, the content of the saved register is restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt processing is terminated, and the effect control side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

[Modified Example 1 of Privilege Grant Form: Fig. 33]
In the above embodiment, when a predetermined number of games are executed without winning a jackpot in the normal mode (at least when the internal game state is normal), the ceiling privilege is given. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following application forms (α) to (ζ) can be applied.

<Grant form (α): Fig. 33 (a)>
(α) When the number of executed games is counted regardless of the game mode or internal game state, and the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning a jackpot. (see FIG. 33(a)). In the case of this configuration, not only the normal mode (normal state) but also the number of games executed during the time saving mode (time saving state) and the probability variable mode (variable probability state) are counted. Therefore, the ceiling privilege can be given purely according to how many games the player has been addicted to since the big hit this time.

<Grant form (β): Fig. 33 (b)>
(β) Count the number of games in the "game state with a low probability state (low probability game state)", and if the number of games counted is a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning a big hit ) is reached, a ceiling privilege is given. In the case of this example, the number of games executed during a game state accompanied by a high probability state (high probability game state) is excluded from the count target. Here, the "game state with a low probability state" corresponds to "normal state" or "time saving state" when focusing on the internal game state, and "normal mode" or "time saving state" when focusing on the game mode mode” applies.

FIG. 33 (b) typically shows a time saving jackpot 1 (shift destination game state is time saving A), a probability variable jackpot 3 (shift destination game state is ST25 mode (probability change C)), and a probability variable jackpot 2 (shift destination game The state is ST75 mode (variable probability B)) and the variable probability big hit 1 (shift destination game state is ST100 mode (variable probability A)) are shown in this example (given form (β)). In the illustration, for easy comparison of the three, all of them show "a big hit that gives 100 electric sapots". For each jackpot, the number of games required from the end of the electric support (101st game) to the ceiling game (1000th game) (referred to as "required number of games X" in this example) is as follows.

With reference to FIG. 33 (b), in the case of time saving A jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed, the state is shifted to a time saving state of 100 times of time saving, and this 100 times of time saving is counted. Therefore, the required number of games X is "900 games" (see "Time reduction A" in FIG. 33(b)).
On the other hand, in the case of the ST mode shift trigger jackpot, the number of games from the end of the power supply until reaching the ceiling differs depending on the ST mode. Specifically, referring to "ST25", "ST75", and "ST100" in FIG.
In the case of the ST25 mode (25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving), 75 times of time saving after completion of ST25 are counted, so the required number of games X is "925 games".
In the case of the ST75 mode (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), 25 times of time saving after completion of ST75 are counted, so the required number of games X is "975 games".
In the case of the ST100 mode (100 ST times), the 100 games are in the ST mode until the end of the electrical support, so these 100 games are excluded from the count. Therefore, the required number of games X is 1000 games. In the case of the ST mode, the number of games required from the end of the electrical support until the ceiling number of games decreases as the degree of profit is relatively low in the ST mode.

To summarize the relationship shown in the figure, the above-mentioned "required number of games X" has a relationship of "time saving A (time saving number of times: 100 times)<ST25 mode<ST75 mode<ST100 mode". That is, the more you shift to a game mode (internal game game state) with a relatively lower profit level, the more the number of games required to reach the ceiling after the end of the electric support (the number of games required in normal mode (normal state)). It becomes a peculiar relationship that it decreases. This "reduced number of games to be executed in the normal mode (normal state)" can be said to be a rescue function with a different character than the ceiling privilege.

<Grant form (γ): Fig. 33 (c)>
(γ) The number of games in a specific variation pattern selection mode (specific Tcode) is counted, and if the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games without winning a jackpot, a ceiling privilege is awarded. In order to facilitate understanding of this example, as a virtual game machine, two games of "normal A mode" and "normal B mode" with different variation pattern selection modes are used as game modes corresponding to the normal mode. A gaming machine capable of transition control of a plurality of types of gaming machine modes including modes will be described as an example. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(C), for example, the number of executed games in the "normal B mode" is counted. In this case, since the games executed in the "normal A mode" are not counted, the ceiling bonus will not be awarded no matter how many games are executed in the normal A mode, but the games executed during the "normal B mode" will not be awarded. A ceiling privilege can be provided when the number of games played reaches a predetermined number of games. It should be noted that the conditions for transitioning between the "normal A mode" and the "normal B mode" (conditions for transitioning to the variation pattern selection mode) include, for example, "causing a mode transition when winning a small prize" or "the number of games played ( change the number of times). Using this example, it is possible to create a game property such as the following (A) or (B).

[(A) A case in which the shift of the variation pattern selection mode is caused due to the small winning]
A case will be described in which the transition to the variation pattern selection mode is caused due to a small hit. As an example of this case, for example, if a small hit (winning probability 1/50) is provided on the special figure 1 side, and a small hit (promotion lottery) is won during the "normal A mode" regarding the transition to the variation pattern selection mode Then shift to "normal B" (shift to normal B mode after playing a small win game), and if you win a small win again during "normal B mode" (drop lottery), switch to "normal A mode" Shift (shift to normal A mode after small winning game). Regarding the provision of the ceiling privilege, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 70 games) are played without winning a small win or a big win in the "normal B mode" (70 games in a row during the normal B mode) case) Give the ceiling privilege. In this case, the ceiling privilege is not given no matter how many games are played in the normal A mode, but the ceiling privilege is given when 70 games are played in the normal B mode. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game property in which the normal B mode functions as a "ceiling privilege giving chance period", that is, a "chance zone", which is advantageous to the player. A plurality of small wins may be provided, for example, when the first small win is won in the normal A mode, the mode is shifted to the normal B mode, and when the second small win is won in the normal B mode, the normal A is selected. You can switch to mode. In this case, the winning probabilities may be different between the first minor win and the second minor winning, or may be the same. In addition, it is possible to determine the odds of winning a small prize according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the first small win (the small win that triggers the transition to the normal B mode (chance zone)), and the second small win (the chance to shift to the normal A mode). If the probability of winning a small win is set low, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of falling from the normal B mode. In other words, it is possible to create a game feature in which the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of granting the ceiling privilege is. Incidentally, the odds of winning a small prize, the variation pattern selection mode to be counted, and the number of games to be given the ceiling privilege can be appropriately determined in consideration of the playability.

[B: A case where the change pattern selection mode is caused to change due to the number of fluctuations]
Next, a case will be described in which the transition to the variation pattern selection mode is caused due to the number of variations. As an example of this case, for example, regarding the transition to the variation pattern selection mode, when the first number of games (for example, 50 games) are executed in the normal A mode, the transition is made to the "normal B mode", and the "normal B mode" When the second number of games (for example, 40 games) are executed during the game, the mode is shifted to the "normal A mode". Then, when the number of games in the normal B mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 400 games), a ceiling privilege is given. In this example, 400 games, which is the number of games that reach the ceiling, can be reached by switching to the normal B mode 10 times. In addition, instead of fixing the number of games to reach the ceiling, a plurality of types of game numbers such as 400 games, 600 games, and 800 games are provided, and any number of games can be determined by lottery. may In this case, the number of games to reach the ceiling is randomized, and the fun of the game can be improved. Also, the higher the set value, the more likely a relatively small number of games (400 games) will be selected, and the lower the set value, the more likely a relatively large number of games (800 games) will be selected. If the lottery probability is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Also, depending on the number of games that reach the ceiling, it is possible to give the player an element of guessing the settings.

Further, instead of counting the number of games in a specific variation pattern selection mode, "the number of transitions to a specific variation pattern selection mode" may be counted. In this case, when the number of transitions to a specific variation pattern selection mode (normal B mode in this example) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the ceiling privilege can be given. Further, a plurality of types of the number of transitions may be provided (for example, 7, 8, 9, 10, etc.), and any number of transitions may be determined by lottery (lottery for the number of transitions). In this case, the higher the set value, the more likely a relatively small number of transitions (for example, 7 times) will be selected, and the lower the set value, the more likely a relatively large number of transitions (for example, 10 times) will be selected. If the lottery probability of the number of transitions is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with setting guessing factors depending on the number of games that reach the ceiling.

<Grant form (δ)>
Also, instead of counting the number of times the special symbol variation display game is executed (the number of variations of the special symbol), (δ) "the number of times the normal symbol variation display game is performed (the number of times the normal symbol changes)" is counted. good too. In this case, it is preferable to count the "number of normal symbol fluctuations" during a game state involving a low probability state (normal state and/or time saving state). For example, by counting the number of executions of the normal pattern variation display game in the normal mode (normal state), when a predetermined number of games (for example, the 2000th game) is reached, a ceiling privilege can be given.

<Grant form (ε)>
In addition, (ε) the number of winning times of "minor wins" in which the condition device does not operate is counted, and when the number of times of winning reaches a predetermined number of times without winning a big win, a ceiling privilege can be given. For example, if the odds of winning a small win are set to 1/100 and the winning of a small win reaches 10 times, a ceiling privilege is given. In addition, instead of the number of times the "small win" is won, the number of times the special electric accessory is activated (the number of times the small win game is executed) when the small win is won may be counted. Further, a plurality of types of winning times may be provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, and 10 times), and any number of times may be determined by lottery (ceiling shift winning times lottery). In this case, the higher the set value, the more likely a relatively small number of wins (for example, 7) will be selected, and the lower the set value, the more likely a relatively large number of wins (for example, 10) will be selected. If the lottery probability of each number of times of winning is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Also, depending on the number of games that have reached the ceiling, it is possible to give the player a set speculation element (the same applies to the "given form ζ" described below).

<Grant form (ζ)>
In addition, the number of winning times of (ζ) “subsidiary win” can be counted, and when a predetermined number of times of winning has been reached, a ceiling privilege can be provided. In this case, it is preferable to count the number of wins in the game state (normal state and/or latent probability state) with at least the auxiliary winning lottery probability low probability state (normal symbol probability variation function non-operation). It should be noted that instead of the winning times of the "subsidiary hit", it is possible to count the number of times of execution of the general electric open game.

The granting modes (.epsilon.) and (.zeta.) are characterized in that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege does not depend on the number of executions of the symbol variation display game (the number of symbol variations).

It should be noted that, regarding the above embodiment, grant mode (α) and grant mode (β), it was explained that the ceiling privilege is given when a predetermined number of games (ceiling game number) is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this, As in the provision mode (γ), the ceiling game number may be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling game number lottery). Specifically, a plurality of ceiling game numbers (for example, 500 games, 700 games, and 1000 games) can be provided, and any ceiling game number can be determined by lottery. In this case as well, the higher the set value is, the easier it is for a relatively small number of games to be selected, and the lower the set value is, the easier it is for a relatively large number of games to be selected. can be determined by

[Modified Example 2 of Privilege Grant Form (Split Privilege Grant Form): Fig. 34]
In the above-described embodiment and Modified Example 1 of the privilege giving mode, the ceiling activation trigger is explained once (the ceiling privilege is given at the 1000th game), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, multiple (at least two) times (at least two times) of privilege activation opportunities (small privilege grant opportunities) can be set, and major benefits (e.g., profits equivalent to ceiling benefits) can be granted by the small benefits granted by each privilege activation opportunity. It can be configured (divided privilege provision form). In this modified example 2, in terms of using the privilege activation opportunity multiple times, rather than the purpose of ``giving a privilege to save the player from being hooked,'' a specific game state (for example, a normal state ( The purpose of "base up in normal mode))" is strong.

As a representative example of this modified example 2, for example, an upper limit is set for the number of times of time saving to be given between big hits, and the number of times of time saving of the upper limit is divided into a plurality of times and given. Specifically, the “large privilege (equivalent to the ceiling privilege)” of a limited time reduction of 100 times is divided into four times by a “small privilege” of a limited time reduction of 25 times (divided grant). is. Therefore, this modification satisfies the following relational expression (10).

The upper limit of the number of times of saving time to be given (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times of saving time") is X times, the number of times of giving is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit number of times of saving time is divided (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times of saving time") is Zk times (k = 1 to Y: hereinafter may be simply referred to as "Z"),
"ΣZk=X k=1 to Y" (10)
meet. For example, if the upper limit number of times of shortening time X is 100 times and the number of times of splitting Y is 4 times, the total number of times of splitting time when giving 4 times before winning the next big hit (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4) is 100 of the upper limit number of times of shortening time A time saving state is given so that it becomes times (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4 = 100). Note that the number of divided time reductions Zk may be the same or substantially the same number of divided time reductions, or may be at least one different number of divided time reductions. That is, the configuration may be such that the small benefits with the same or substantially the same benefit are divided and given, or the configuration is possible that different small benefits are divided and given. As an example of the former, for example, the number of times of time reduction is divided into 4 times and the maximum number of times of time reduction is given to 100 times (the same number of times of time reduction is given). Let the number of times of reduced working hours be “20 times, 20 times, 20 times, and 40 times” (the number of times of reduced working hours that are partially different), “15 times, 35 times, 20 times and 30 times” (each of which is different number of times) and so on. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which gives a small privilege with a relatively high degree of profit, so that the number of addictive games becomes relatively large. For example, the number of divided time reductions from the first time to the fourth time can be "10 times, 20 times, 30 times and 40 times".

It should be noted that the upper limit number of times of shortening of working hours X, the number of times of giving Y, and the number of times of dividing shortening of hours Z can be determined as appropriate in consideration of game characteristics and the like. For example, the upper limit number of times of saving time X can be set to the number of times (for example, 300 times) that satisfies the relationship of "upper limit number of times of saving time X>maximum number of times of saving time by big hit". However, in order not to give excessive benefits, the upper limit of the number of times of saving time X is at least the relationship that satisfies the "maximum number of times of saving time X ≤ maximum number of times of saving time by jackpot (100 times)" or "minimum number of times of saving time by jackpot (50 times) ≤ upper limit It is preferable to have a relationship that satisfies the number of times of time saving X<maximum number of times of time saving by big hit (100 times).

In addition, it is sufficient if there are a plurality of privilege triggers (grant number Y). It is also possible to appropriately determine the number of games in the state to be given, and the number of games to be given in a specific game state.

In addition, after the number of times of shortening of working hours (great privilege) for the maximum number of times of shortening of working hours is given, no more shortening of working hours is given, and the privilege is not given until the next big hit. After giving the big privilege, it is considered that sufficient privilege has been given, in other words, the relief function has been fulfilled, and the privilege is not given until the next big win. However, a ceiling privilege (FIGS. 7 and 23) may be given separately. For example, after finishing giving the split privilege, if the player has played 1000 predetermined games without winning the next jackpot, the ceiling privilege can be given. Further, it is possible to construct a setting suggesting effect to appear in at least one of a plurality of privilege activation opportunities. In this case, when the privilege activation opportunity (privilege granting game) arrives, setting suggestion information can be obtained in addition to privilege granting, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Moreover, here, although the structure which gives a finite reduction in working hours as a special privilege was demonstrated, it is needless to say that it can apply also to finite probability variation or finite probability. In this case, if the above-mentioned "time saving number" is replaced with "ST number" and "time saving state" is appropriately read as "variable state" or "potential state", the finite probability variation (great privilege) is divided and granted (small privilege It is self-evident that it is a concept of a configuration in which a finite probability variation is granted multiple times) or a configuration in which a finite probability (large privilege) is divided and granted (a small privilege finite probability is granted multiple times). For example, the upper limit number of times of shortening of working hours X may be read as "the number of times of upper limit of ST", and the number of times of dividing shortening of working hours Z as "number of divided STs". As an example, in the above formula (10), the upper limit of the number of STs to be given (upper limit ST number) is X times, the number of times to be given is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit ST number is divided (divided ST number) is Zk times (k=1 to Y) can be read as satisfying "ΣZk=X k=1 to Y".

(Specific example of modification 2: FIG. 34)
This modification (modification 2) can be broadly classified as a "periodic grant form" that grants benefits periodically (regularly), such as "a small privilege is granted each time a predetermined number of games are played". ”, and an “aperiodic provision form” in which division is not provided periodically. First, the periodic application mode will be described with reference to FIG. 34 .

[Periodic application form]
<A. Specific example 1 of periodic application form (application form (κ)): FIG. 34 (a)>
FIG. 34(a) shows an example of the cyclic application form (application form (κ)). FIG. 34(a) shows that every time the symbol variation display game is executed for a predetermined number of games (here, 100 games) during the normal state (normal mode) after the end of the power supply due to the big hit (p0 in the drawing) ( p1, p3, p5, and p7 of illustration), "the limited time reduction of the number of times of time reduction 25 times (25 times of divided time reductions)" of a small privilege is given. Here, the number of grants is set to 4 times, and by granting a total of 4 small benefits, the grant of the major benefit “Limited time reduction of 100 times (maximum time reduction of 100 times)” is completed. case is shown.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), after the end of the power supply (p0), the 100th game from the 1st to the 100th game (p1) is controlled to the normal state (period without division), and the 101st game When the first privilege activation opportunity (privilege grant opportunity) arrives, a finite time reduction of a small privilege (time reduction number of times 25 times) is granted, and the 25 games from the 101st to 125th games (p2) are controlled in a time reduction state. (Controlled to a time-saving state by the first small privilege).
Next, the 100 games from the 126th to the 225th game (p3) are controlled again to the normal state (period without division), and the second privilege activation opportunity arrives in the 226th game, and the limited time of the small privilege ( Time saving number of times 25 times) is given, and 25 games from 226th to 250th game (p4) are controlled to a time saving state (controlled to a time saving state by the second small privilege).
Then, the 100 games from the 251st to the 350th game (p5) are controlled again to the normal state (period without division grant), and the third privilege activation opportunity arrives in the 351st game, and the finite time reduction of the small privilege ( Time saving number of times 25 times) is given, and it is controlled to the time saving state from the 351st to 375th game (p6) (controlled to the time saving state by the third small privilege).
Then, the 376th to 475th games (p7) are controlled again to the normal state, and the final (4th) privilege activation opportunity arrives in the 476th game, and the limited time reduction of the small privilege (time reduction number of times 25 times). Granted and controlled to a time-saving state from the 476th to the 500th game (p8) (controlled to a time-saving state by the fourth small privilege), and with the above, the great privilege “Limited time-saving of 100 times” is completed. do. That is, periodically (every 100 games), a small privilege (25 times the number of times of time reduction) is divided into 4 times and given, and if you get addicted to 500 games after the end of the electric support, all of the upper limit of 100 times of time reduction will be given. Become. In other words, such a form of granting is the same phenomenon as granting a maximum of 4 sets, with a game period of ``100 games executed during normal state + 25 times of time saving'' as one set, and the limiter function. It can also be said that it has a privilege granting function. In addition, although illustration is omitted for production mode, as in the above embodiment (FIGS. 6 and 7), if it is a normal state (normal mode), it is normal production mode, and if it is a time saving state (time saving mode) If, like the reduction in working hours production mode (air combat mode), it may be configured so that the transition to the production mode according to the game state can be controlled.

(In the case of granting infinite benefits)
In the above example, the configuration for dividing and giving a finite reduction in working hours as a great benefit has been described, but the upper limit number of times of reducing working hours is infinite, that is, it can be configured to divide and give "infinite reduction in working hours". If the major privilege is "infinite reduction in working hours", for example, a predetermined number of divided times (small privilege) may be permanently given every 100 games until the next big hit is won. In addition, like FIG. 34 (a), the number of times of dividing time is given 25 times every 100 games, but in the 476th game (p7 of the last given time), an infinite number of times of time saving may be given as the number of times of division. In this case, the time saving state can be continued even after the 501st game. Of course, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which an infinite probability change or an infinite probability with an infinite maximum number of STs is given in a divided manner. In this case, in the same manner as already described, the above-mentioned "number of times of time saving" should be appropriately replaced with "number of times of ST" and "time saving state" with "variable probability state" or "potential state".

<B. Specific example 2 of periodic application form (application form (κ)): Fig. 34 (b)>
In the above-described provision form (κ), a periodic provision form of "dividing and giving ceiling benefits" has been described. Next, as other periodic grant forms, the profit state granted by winning the jackpot is "infinite time reduction", "limited time reduction", "infinite probability change", "finite probability change", "infinite probability", or "finite A configuration (granting form (λ)) for splitting and granting "latency" etc. with a plurality of privilege activation triggers will be described.

In this example, benefits such as time-saving state (infinite time-saving, finite time-saving), probability variable state (infinite probability change, finite probability change), potential probability state (infinite probability, finite probability), etc., given by winning the jackpot, multiple times It is a configuration that divides and grants according to the privilege activation opportunity. In other words, as in the above embodiment (see FIGS. 4, 6 to 7, etc.), instead of immediately giving the total time reduction number and the total ST number after the big hit game, it is given in small amounts over a long game period. It is a composition. In this example, in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the number of time-savings granted by the jackpot corresponds to the "maximum number of times of time-savings" (great privilege), and the number of times of time-savings to be split is equivalent to the above "number of times of splitting time-savings" (small privilege). do. In addition, in the case of a variable hit or latent hit, the number of STs given by the big hit corresponds to the "maximum number of STs" (great privilege), and the number of STs given separately is the above "divided ST number" (small privilege). corresponds to FIG. 34(b) shows a specific example thereof.

FIG. 34 (b) is a representative example of this example (given form (λ)), time-saving jackpots α to γ with different times of time-savings (limited time-savings jackpot with 50 times of time-savings, finite time-savings jackpot with 100 times of time-savings, A case of winning the infinite short-time jackpot) is illustrated. Figure (A) shows a case of normal granting in which the number of times of time saving is given without dividing when the time saving jackpot of 50 times of time saving (equivalent to time saving jackpot 2 in FIG. 4) is won. If you win a time saving jackpot of 100 times (equivalent to time saving jackpot 1 in Fig. 4), the 100 times of time saving is divided into 2 times and given (50 times of time saving is divided into 2 times). Case of split grant), Figure (C) shows that if you win a time-saving jackpot that grants an infinite number of times of time-saving (including the number of times that is virtually infinite), the number of times of time-saving is given 50 times for the first time, and the second time. It shows the case of giving an infinite number of times to .

With reference to FIG. 34 (B), as shown in FIGS. (A) to (C), if any of the time-saving jackpots α to γ is won, no matter which jackpot is won, the number of times of time-saving first 50 times are provided, and after that, different game transitions are traced according to the jackpot type won. Here, as shown in the figure, when it is determined that the production mode is made common, it is possible to create the following game characteristics.

(Time-saving secret game)
When the time-saving jackpots α to γ are won, the jackpot types won in the performance during the pattern variation display game (announcement performance including the decoration stop pattern, etc.) and the performance during the winning are hidden. And the production mode after the jackpot game is also a common time-saving production mode (air battle mode: see FIGS. 29 to 31) up to the first 50 times (between 1 and 50 games) ), and the subsequent 51st game to 150th game are also in common normal effect mode (for example, general effect mode) (p0 to p1 section in the drawing). Therefore, the type of winning big win is hidden from the performance until the 150th game is over, and during this time, the player enjoys the game while expecting to win the time-saving big win β or time-saving big win γ. Here, if the jackpot won this time is the time-saving jackpot α, the normal production mode is continued after the 151st game (after p1), so at this time, the jackpot won this time was the time-saving jackpot α. It will become clear. However, if the winning jackpot is the time-saving jackpot β or the time-saving jackpot γ, the time-saving state occurs in the 151st game, and the mode is shifted to the time-saving production mode again. Which one of γ is elected is kept secret. Therefore, the player enjoys the game while hoping that the time-saving state will not end at 200 games (p2 in the figure) (expecting the winning of the time-saving jackpot γ). If the time-saving state continues after the 201st game, it is determined that the winning jackpot is the time-saving jackpot γ, that is, the time-saving infinite, and the player can proceed with the game under the high-base state until the next big win with peace of mind. can be done. In this way, by gradually revealing the number of time reductions in the hidden state, the player's expectation for the continuation of the electric support, the tension of the end of the electric support, and the exhilaration when the continuation of the electric support is revealed. It is possible to create such a game property (time saving secret game). In addition, under the time-saving state after the 201 game where the infinite time-saving is known, the normal time-saving production mode (air combat mode) may be used, but as shown in the figure, a special time-saving production mode different from the normal time-saving production mode (for example, , a background display (not shown) different from that in the air battle mode) may be displayed to deterministically notify that the time was infinite.

In the above, the time-saving jackpot α ~ γ (time-saving number 50 times finite time-saving jackpot, time-saving number 100 times finite time-saving jackpot, infinite time-saving jackpot) were explained, but at least the number of time-saving times If there are two different time-saving jackpots, the time-saving number of times secret game as described above can be realized. In the example of FIG. 34 (b), the time saving jackpots α to γ with different number of times of time saving were explained, but a plurality of probability variable jackpots with different ST numbers (for example, finite probability variable jackpot α with ST number 50 times, ST number 100 The same phenomenon applies to the finite probability variable jackpot β and infinite probability variable jackpot γ).

[Aperiodic application form]
<Grant form (μ)>
In the above-described provision forms (κ) and (λ), a form in which a small privilege is given periodically has been described, but a form in which a small privilege is given aperiodically may be used (aperiodic provision form). For example, the privilege activation timing is the 200th game, the 350th game, the 600th game, and the 800th game. In the case of an aperiodic provision form, a plurality of privilege activation opportunities may be determined by lottery, or a plurality of privilege activation scenarios (scenarios in which the number of privilege activation games is predetermined) may be set. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which one of the privilege activation trigger scenarios can be determined by lottery. Other points (matters related to major benefits, minor benefits, etc.) overlap with those described in the above-described granting modes (κ) and (λ), so detailed description is omitted.

[Other grant forms]
<Grant form (ν)>
In the above-described divided privilege grant form, a mode has been described in which the small privilege is split and granted with the profit of the large privilege as the upper limit. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the profit of the special privilege is not set as the upper limit. For example, a "specific privilege" is given periodically or aperiodically, but the upper limit of the benefit to be given is not set. In short, the major benefits are infinite benefits (infinite time reduction, infinite probability change or infinite latent probability), and the small benefits are finite benefits (time saving state of a predetermined number of times of time reduction, finite probability change of a predetermined number of STs or a predetermined ST It is a configuration in which small benefits are given periodically or aperiodically until the next big win without limitation to the number of times Y given. In this example, there is no limit to the number Y of grants (infinite number of times), which is different from the "divided grant" which has an upper limit. For this example, for example, if you explain using FIG. The grant is not completed at p8 (fourth time), and is permanently granted until the next big hit. Also, for example, if explained using FIG. , and p2 onwards are also given periodically (given every 100 games in the normal state). In addition, when the number of grants reaches a predetermined specified number of times or a specified number of games, the advantage (profit status) of the small privilege may be increased. For example, using FIG. 34 (b), if the number of grants reaches 10 times, the current small privilege "Limited time reduction of 25 times" is relatively more advantageous "Time reduction number 50 times of limited working hours" (medium privilege). A condition for switching from a small privilege to a medium privilege may be a case where a predetermined prescribed number of awards and/or a prescribed prescribed number of games have been reached.

The above embodiment can have the following configurations (1) to (6). Although parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) shooting means (shooting device 13, FIG. 3) capable of shooting game balls into the game area (game area 3a in FIG. 2);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 15) for performing a lottery for a plurality of types of hits, triggered by the detection of the game ball by the starting means (starting ports 34, 35);
Winning game execution control means (FIG. 17) for controlling the execution of a winning game when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win;
A gaming machine comprising symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a and 38b) for performing variable display of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of the symbols,
A game state control means capable of controlling a low-probability game state accompanied by a low-probability state in which the lottery probability of winning is a predetermined normal probability and a high-probability game state accompanied by a high-probability state in which the probability is higher than the normal probability. (S412 in FIG. 12, FIGS. 15, 18, 21, and 22);
After a predetermined start condition is established, the winning game execution control means does not generate the winning game, and the number of symbol variations executed in the low probability game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000 times). Privilege game state control means (FIG. 7 (columns of ceiling mode, heaven mode) for controlling to a privilege game state (ceiling privilege (FIGS. 7, 23)) more advantageous to the player than the normal state when reaching the normal state, FIG. S420 to S421, S412, FIGS. 13 to 15, FIG. 23, FIG. 33, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) Advantageous game state control means (for example, time saving state) accompanied by an advantageous state of ball entry (for example, state with electric sapo) that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the state of ball entry into the starting means ( FIG. 6 (column of time saving mode), S412 in FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 16A to FIG. 16B, FIG. 18, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG.
The advantageous game state control means is configured to be able to control the advantageous game state after the winning game,
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that:
(3) The privilege gaming state and the advantageous gaming state have different advantages for the player (for example, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege and the number of time reductions due to the big hit are different),
The gaming machine according to (2) above, characterized in that:
(4) The advantageous gaming state control means
According to the winning type won by the lottery means, at least a first advantageous gaming state (for example, time saving B) and a second advantageous gaming state having a higher advantage than the first advantageous gaming state (for example, time saving A) configured to control at least the
The gaming machine according to (2) above, characterized in that:
(5) The privilege game state control means
Control to the first advantageous game state as the privilege game state (for example, the case where the number of times of time reduction due to the ceiling privilege is the same 50 times as the time reduction B),
The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that:
(6) The privilege game state control means
Control to the second advantageous game state as the privilege game state (for example, the case where the number of times of time reduction due to the ceiling privilege is the same 100 times as the time reduction A),
The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that:
(7) Further provided with an effect control means capable of controlling a plurality of types of effect modes related to the game state (effect control unit 24), the effect mode related to the privilege game state and the effect mode related to the advantageous game state are different. production mode (for example, time-saving production mode (FIGS. 6 and 29), heaven production mode (FIG. 7)),
The gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above, characterized by:

Further, the above-described embodiment and the application forms (application forms (α) to (μ): Figs. 33 to 34) relating to the modification thereof can be the following (structures A) to (structures G).
(Configuration A)
a launching means capable of shooting game balls into the game area;
A lottery means for executing a lottery for a winning when the starting means detects a game ball;
a symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of the symbol and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of the symbol;
A gaming machine comprising profit state generation means capable of generating a profit state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined generation condition,
The profit state generation means is
Winning game execution control means for controlling the execution of a winning game when the lottery by the lottery means is won;
a first profit state generating means for generating a first profit state after the winning game is over;
a second profit state generating means for generating a second profit state when a specific occurrence condition is established without executing the winning game after a predetermined start condition is established;
A gaming machine characterized by:
(Configuration B)
The first profit state and the second profit state are the same profit state,
The game machine of the above configuration A characterized by:
(Configuration C)
The first profit state and the second profit state are different profit states,
The game machine according to the above configuration A, characterized by:
(Configuration D)
a lower profit position in said second profit position than in said first profit position;
The game machine according to the above configuration A, characterized by:
(Configuration E)
The first profit state ends when a predetermined game period elapses after starting after the winning game ends,
After the second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is established, the second profit state is temporarily terminated when a predetermined game period elapses, and the second profit state is restarted when the specific occurrence condition is established again. ,
The game machine according to the above configuration A or the above configuration B, characterized by:
(Configuration F)
The first profit state ends when a predetermined number of games has elapsed after starting after the end of the winning game,
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is established, and continues until the winning game is won.
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A or the above configuration C, characterized by:
(Configuration G)
The first profit state ends when the first game period elapses after starting after the winning game ends,
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is established, ends when a second game period shorter than the first game period elapses, and ends when the specific occurrence condition is established again. 2 profit status is resumed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the configuration A, the configuration C, and the configuration D, characterized by:

[Second embodiment]
<Ball output performance with electric sapo>
By the way, in recent years, due to legal requirements, it is required to moderately suppress arousal of gambling. In the time saving state or the probability variable state, it becomes a state with an electric sapo, and is controlled under a higher base state than the normal state (low base state without an electric sapo). This state with electric support (high base state) is a game state advantageous to the player, in which the player can aim for the next big win without reducing the number of balls in his possession more than in the normal state. However, if the base value (so-called ball output rate: "safe ball number / out ball number" x 100) is excessively lowered in order to suppress gambling, the player will The speed at which the number of balls in the player's possession decreases is accelerated, which not only reduces the player's desire to play, but also results in an increase in the amount of money spent by the player (amount of money spent). will reduce the desire to play. In particular, when infinite time reduction or infinite probability variation is given as a ceiling privilege, most of the players continue the game until the next big win is won, so the more games are played until the next big win is won, the higher the number of games. The number of balls you have will also decrease. In other words, the player is greatly addicted to the game and faces a situation where the investment amount increases even during the ceiling privilege, and the player's desire to play the game is remarkably reduced. In this way, if the amount of money used increases even if the game is continued to receive the benefits of the special ceiling privilege, the significance of the ceiling function as a relief function for addiction will be lost, and instead it will fuel the gambling spirit. However, there is a problem that it cannot be achieved.

Therefore, it is necessary to devise a method that does not drastically reduce the number of balls held. For example, it is appropriate to set the ball payout rate (base value) in the high base state to at least "100%≦ball payout rate" from the viewpoint of suppressing the player's willingness to play and gambling. Preferably, "100%≦ball output rate≦120% to 130%". A specific configuration for achieving such a high base state ball payout rate will be described in detail below.

In the case of the present embodiment, as already explained, depending on the game state, either "left-handed" or "right-handed" is shot in an advantageous direction. Therefore, there is a winning possibility in the general winning ports 43a to 43d (first general winning means) and the upper starting port 34 (first starting means) belonging to the left flowing path 3b, but belonging to the right flowing path 3c. The general winning opening 43e (second general winning means) and the lower starting opening 35 (second starting means) never win. On the other hand, if it is in a state with an electric sapo, it will be "right-handed advantage", so there is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 43e and the lower starting opening 35 (special figure 2 starting opening) belonging to the right downstream path 3c. , There is no winning in the general winning openings 43a to 43d and the upper starting opening 34 (special figure 1 starting opening) belonging to the left downstream route 3b. In addition, in general gaming machines, the ball output rate (low base ball output rate) in the state without electric support (normal state or latent probability state) is approximately 30% to 40% (at least less than 100%, preferably less than 50%), the ball output rate (ball output rate at high base) in the state with electric support (time saving state or probability variable state) is generally 80% to 95%, both of which are less than 100% ( if you left it on). If the game machine 1 is used to explain, the assumed design value of the ball output rate is, for example, the average number of prizes won per minute in the state without the power supply, and the general prize gates 43a to 43d (three prize balls). are 2, 0.6, 0.4 and 1.04, respectively, and if the upper starting port 34 (4 prize balls) is "5.52", the ball output rate at low base is On the other hand, regarding the average number of prizes won per minute without an electric sapo, the general prize opening 43e (three prize balls) was 12.5, the lower start opening 35 (one prize ball). ) is 58.2, the ball payout rate at high base is 95.7%.

Here, as in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the case of a gaming machine that requires a distinction between “left-handed” and “right-handed” depending on the game state, the above-mentioned ball output rate at the high base is set to In order not to decrease extremely, the arrangement configuration and prize It can be realized by devising the number of balls. Specifically, it can be realized by the following methods (A) to (H).

(A) Increase the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 43e and/or the lower starting opening 35 (starting opening on the side of the normal variable winning device 41 (starting opening with electric chew)). Specifically, the number of prize balls is determined to be larger in the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the right flowing path 3c than in the general winning opening belonging to the left flowing path 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is determined to be larger than the number of prize balls in the general winning port belonging to the left downstream path 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening belonging to the right flowing path 3c and the lower starting opening 35 is determined to be larger than the number of winning balls of the general winning opening belonging to the left flowing path 3b. For example, the number of general prize winning openings 43e is four, or the number of lower starting openings 35 is two.

(B) At least increase the number of general winning openings 43e (increase the number of general winning openings belonging to the right-flowing path 3c from 1 to 2, and increase the number of winnings (number of winnings/minute) for general winning openings when hitting to the right. bottom up). Specifically, the number of general winning openings (installed number) belonging to the right downstream path 3c is larger than the number of general winning openings (installed number) belonging to the left downstream path 3b. In the present embodiment, four general prize-winning openings (general prize-winning openings 43a to 43d) belonging to the left flow path 3b are arranged. For example, it may be 2 to 4, which is more than that.

(C) At least increase the winning rate (ball entry rate) of the general winning hole 43e (for example, increase from 12.5 balls/minute to 20 balls/minute). When providing a plurality of general winning openings 43e, at least one winning rate is increased. Specifically, the ball-entering rate M of the general winning hole belonging to the right-flowing path 3c is determined to be higher than the ball-entering rate N of the general winning hole belonging to the left-flowing path 3b.
In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since a plurality of general prize winning openings 43a to 43d are arranged, the following configuration may be adopted. When the lowest ball-entering rate among the general prize-winning holes 43a to 43d is "Nmin" and the highest ball-entering rate is "Nmax", the following relational expression (Formula 1) or (Formula 2) is satisfied. can do.
(Formula 1) "Nmin<M"
(Formula 2) “Nmax<M”
Also, in the case of this embodiment, there is one general prize winning opening 43e, but if a plurality of general winning openings 43e are provided, the following configuration may be adopted. When the lowest ball-entering rate of the general prize-winning hole 43e among the plurality of general prize-winning holes 43e is "Mmin" and the highest ball-entering rate is "Mmax", the following relational expressions (Formula 3) to (Formula 6) ) can be configured to satisfy either
(Formula 3) "N<Mmin" (when there is one general winning opening belonging to the left downstream path 3b)
(Formula 4) “Nmin<Mmin”
(Formula 5) “Nmax<Mmin”
(Formula 6) “Nmax<Mmax”

(D) Start INT (interval time until start of opening of movable wing piece 47) and/or end INT (interval time until the end of the electric open game after the opening operation of movable wing piece 47 is completed) of general electric open game ) (eg, starting INT and/or ending INT from 500 ms to 700 ms). In this case, it is possible to increase the number of balls in hand (increase the ball output rate) by avoiding wasteful balls (death balls) when hitting and holding, so-called "stopping shots". For example, the ball payout rate (BA) can be about 95% in the case of continuous hitting, and about 120% in the case of stopping shots. This stopping effect is particularly effective when the number of prize balls at the lower starting port 35 is large (for example, about 3 to 4).

(E) Provide one or a plurality of small hits that cause a small hit game operation that does not increase or decreases the number of paid balls during the small hit game (in this embodiment, at least the small hit on the special figure 2 side provided). For example, the opening time of the big prize opening is set to a short time (about 0.1 second to 1 second), and the "start INT and/or end INT (the total time of each INT may be sufficient)", which is the closing period of the big prize opening, is the second. It is a small hit game operation with a long time of order (for example, about 1 second to 5 seconds). Such a small-hit game has a low ball-out performance, and when the game ball is left unattended, the number of balls paid out does not increase (the ball-out rate during the small-hit game is 100%), or the number of balls paid out may decrease. (The payout rate during the small winning game is less than 100%). In this case, as in the case of (D) above, by making full use of the "stopping shot" during the start INT and the end INT, it is possible to increase the number of balls in hand against the ball output performance during the small win game. Therefore, the ball output rate can be improved. In particular, if a small win is won with a high probability (increase the frequency of occurrence of a small win game), for example, at least about 1/5 to 1/20, the effect is further enhanced.

(F) The number of prize balls for the lower starting port 35 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls for the upper starting port 34 . If the number of prize balls on the side of the starting port that can frequently win prizes during the electric sapo is increased, the stopping effect will increase (the degree of technical intervention will increase), and there is a risk of inviting a sense of inequality among players. . Therefore, it is preferable to use a winning opening other than the lower starting opening 35 (particularly, a general winning opening belonging to the right downstream path 3c) as a winning opening that greatly affects the ball payout rate.

(G) The number of prize balls for the lower starting opening 35 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls for the general winning opening belonging to the right downstream path 3c. The number of winning balls in the "lower starting hole 35" where the winning rate differs due to the stopping shot is higher than the number of winning balls belonging to the "normal winning opening (general winning opening 43e) belonging to the right downstream path 3c" where the winning rate does not differ due to the stopping shot. By increasing the number of prize balls, it is possible to reduce the capture factor by stopping shots.

(H) The number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is one, and the number of prize balls in the general winning port belonging to the right downstream path 3c is at least two. When the number of prize balls from the lower starting port 35 is 1, even if the winning rate is 100%, the net increase in number is 0, and how to make full use of the stopping shot by aiming at the opening operation of the lower starting port 35. In both cases, the number of balls possessed by the player does not increase. Therefore, the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is one, and the number of prize balls in the general winning prize port belonging to the right flow path 3c is at least two. It is possible to improve the ball rate.

In the case of (D) or (E) described above, there is a risk of creating a sense of inequality in the profits earned between those who make full use of stopping shots and those who do not. Therefore, it is preferable to employ the configurations (A) to (C) and (F) to (H) described above regarding the general winning openings that do not have the stopping effect. In particular, the configurations of (B), (C), (F) to (H) described above are effective in reducing the stop shot effect and improving the payout rate. Further, the number of the general prize winning openings belonging to the left downstream path 3c and the general winning openings belonging to the right downstream path 3c can be one or more.

(Modified example of model type)
In this embodiment, the ST type model has been described. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the ST type, and may be a model in which the game state transition mode is determined as follows, for example, the following (machine 1) to (machine 3) models.

(machine 1) "V variable type"
A specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when one or more specific jackpots (for example, probability variable jackpots 1 to 7) are won, the game ball can easily pass through the specific area. ), on the other hand, when other jackpots (for example, time-saving jackpots 1 and 2) are won, it is configured to make it difficult or impossible to pass through the specific area, and when the game ball passes through the specific area (so-called " Only for V winning "), it may be a so-called "V probability variation type" model, such as activating a special symbol probability variation function and shifting to a probability variation state or a latent probability state.

(Machine 2) "Fall lottery type"
In the case of a game state with a high probability state (latent probability state or probability variable state), every game, with a predetermined fall probability, a transition lottery (fall lottery) from a high probability state to a low probability state is performed. A "lottery type" model may also be used. In this falling lottery type, when the falling lottery is won, the winning game (falling game) is shifted to a low probability state (at least the special symbol probability variable function is set to OFF), and the jackpot lottery in the winning game is also in a low probability state. It is designed to be selected by lottery. There are the following cases (A) to (C) in the game state transition mode when winning the fall lottery. (A) probability variable state (ST mode) → time-saving state (time-saving mode), (B) probability variable state → normal state (normal mode), (C) potential probability state (potential probability mode) → normal state (normal mode). In such a falling lottery type, the falling game is shifted to a game state involving at least a low probability state. Therefore, when the execution game in the normal state or the time saving state is counted as the ceiling game, it is preferable to count the falling game as the first game. It should be noted that, excluding the falling game, the next game may be counted as the first game.

The ST type model described in the above embodiment and the fall lottery type of this example (machine 2) are mainly based on "presence or absence of a fall lottery (fall lottery means)" and "fall transition control based on the result of the fall lottery ( The only difference is the presence or absence of the falling transition control means). Therefore, regarding the matters related to gaming described in the present embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34), before winning the falling lottery (in the case of a game state with a high probability state) Applicable to embodiments related to ST mode After winning the drop lottery (if you win the drop lottery and transition to a game state with a low probability state), in the embodiment related to the normal state or the time saving state (game state after the fall transition) Applicable.

By the way, the conventional drop lottery type has only one drop probability regardless of the jackpot type (type of winning pattern), and the game tends to be monotonous and lacks interest in the game. Therefore, a plurality of fall probabilities are provided according to the types of big hits. In this case, the fall probabilities may be different for each jackpot, or the fall probabilities may be partially the same or different. Assuming that the game machine 1 according to the above embodiment is a "falling lottery type", for example, the probability of falling is 1/200, 1/150, 1/100, 1/200, 1/150, 1/100 Jackpots 4 to 7 (special 2 side) have different fall probabilities if you win a jackpot belonging to the special 1 side, such as 1/240, and the same fall probability if you win a jackpot on the special 2 side. can be Further, as means for providing a plurality of fall probabilities, it is possible to determine fall probabilities corresponding to set values (settings 1 to 6). In other words, at least the first setting value and the second setting value can be configured to have different fall probabilities. For example, it can be determined that the lower the set value is, the higher the fall probability is.

In addition, the number of STs may be the same number of STs for each big hit, may be different for each, or may be partially different. Also, the number of STs can include not only a finite number of times but also an infinite number of times. For example, like variable probability jackpots 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs may be 25, 75, or 100, or the number of STs for each jackpot may be 100 or infinite. However, in the case of the falling lottery type, if the falling lottery is won before the number of STs is consumed, the state is forcibly shifted to a low probability state (the number of STs is forcibly set to zero). Further, when the falling lottery is won, the setting suggestion effect (the setting suggestion effect at the time of falling) may be executed by the effect means. In this case, it is possible to determine the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect at the time of falling according to the set value.

Regarding the fall lottery type, for example, the following configurations (T1) to (T3) can be used.
(T1)
Acquisition means (for example, FIG. 11 S314: In the case of this example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for judging a special symbol, a random number for a variation pattern, and a random number for judging a fall are configured to be obtainable);
Lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) for executing a lottery for a plurality of types of wins based on the first game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) for performing a variable display operation of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of symbols;
Winning game execution control means (FIG. 17) for controlling the execution of a winning game when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific display mode in the symbol display means (when the lottery result of the lottery means is a win);
After the winning game is finished, probability fluctuation control means (S412 in FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 18) capable of controlling a high probability state in which the lottery probability of winning by the lottery means is higher than a predetermined normal probability. , FIGS. 21 and 22) and
Fall lottery means (main) for executing a fall lottery to determine whether to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state based on the second game information (random value for falling judgment) when the high probability state is in progress. a control unit 20);
A game machine T comprising drop transition control means (main control unit 20) for controlling the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state when the fall lottery is won,
The plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit,
When the first win is won (when the winning game by the first win is executed) and when the second win is won (when the winning game by the second win is executed), the above The fall lottery probability by the fall lottery means can be configured to be different.

(T2)
The game machine T is configured such that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a predetermined result differs according to a set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages. In this case, the set values that can be changed in a plurality of steps include at least a first set value and a second set value, and the fall probability is different between the first set value and the second set value. be able to.

(T3)
The game machine T is configured such that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery results in a predetermined result differs according to a set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages,
The plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit,
The setting values that can be changed in multiple stages include at least a first setting value and a second setting value,
The drop lottery probability by the drop lottery means is different between when the first win is won and when the second win is won,
When the set value is the first set value, at least the second win may not be included in the lottery results of the lottery means.

In addition, the game machine T is configured to be able to control a plurality of types of game states (at least two game states including the variable probability state and/or the latent probability state among the variable probability state, the latent probability state, the time saving state and the normal state). can do. Further, in the above ((T1) to (T3), when the fall lottery by the fall lottery means is won, a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value can be further provided. .

(Machine 3) "Limiter mounted type"
When a jackpot is won (or when a specific jackpot is won), it has a limiter function that limits the number of times that the probability fluctuation control means shifts to a high probability state to a predetermined upper limit number of times (limit number of times). The model may be a "limiter-equipped type" model. This limiter-equipped type corresponds to, for example, the so-called "limiter machine (set type)" disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 5075301, and the like.

In the case of the limiter type, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a game state with a high probability state ( transition to a definite variable state or latent definite state). For example, when the limit number of times is 5 times, the game state after the big win game is controlled to a high probability state from the first big win to the fourth big win, and the big win lottery benefits under the high probability state until the maximum four big wins. It is now possible to receive However, when the fifth big hit is won, the "limiter function" starts operating as the limit number of times has been reached (limiter function ON), and the game state after the jackpot game ends is a game state with a low probability state (time saving state or normal state). When a big win is won during the operation of this limiter function, the limiter function in operation is canceled (limiter function OFF), and the game state after the end of the big win game shifts to a game state with a high probability state until the limit number of times is reached again. be done. In this respect, a limiter machine with a limit number of times of 5 is also called a "five-pack machine".

By the way, the conventional limiter machine has only one type of limit number, and the game tends to be monotonous and lacks interest in the game. Therefore, a plurality of types of limit times are provided according to the types of jackpots. In this case, the number of limit times may be different for each big win, or the number of limit times may be partially different.

For example, jackpots A to D may be provided, and the number of jackpots A to D may be limited to 2, 3, 4, or 5 times. Also, the symbol lottery rate for each big hit can be determined as appropriate. In addition, depending on which jackpot is won, it is possible to appropriately determine whether to shift to the variable probability state or to the latent probability state. For example, all of the jackpots A to C may be shifted to the probability variable state or the latent probability state, or only one or more specific jackpots may be shifted to the probability variable state (for example, when jackpot A is won shifts to the probability variable state, and shifts to the latent probability state when the other big hits B, C, and D are won). In addition, although the number of STs is preferably infinite, the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, the number of STs may be different, or the number of STs may be partially different. In addition, when the number of STs is finite, even if the number of STs ends and the state is shifted to the normal state or the time saving state, the game state after the big hit game is returned to the high probability state again until the limit number of times is reached. It can be shifted to a game state with In addition, when a specific jackpot is won among jackpots A to D, it may be shifted to a game state with a low probability state (time-saving state or normal state) without shifting to a high-probability state, or to a time-saving state. It can be determined as appropriate whether to shift to the normal state or to shift to the normal state.

In the case of the limiter machine as well, regarding the game characteristics described in the present embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34), the game state involving a high probability state before reaching the limiter count is applied to the ST mode embodiment. It is possible, and regarding the game state with a low probability state after reaching the limit number of times, it is applicable to the embodiment regarding the normal state and the time saving state (game state after reaching the limit number of times).

(Appearance of gaming machine seen from the front: Fig. 35)
For easy understanding, the appearance of the gaming machine of the present invention when viewed from the front will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 35, a frame 1010 is the same as the front frame 2 (hereinafter simply referred to as "frame") arranged openable and closable on the front side of the outer frame 4, and is composed of an upper frame portion 1011, a middle frame portion 1012 and a lower frame portion 1013. It is configured and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be viewed. The frame 1010 here roughly depicts the shape and size visually recognized when the gaming machine is viewed from the front (front). Various shapes and sizes are used for the front frame 2, and it is free to adopt any shape and size. The frame 1010 here has an upper frame portion 1011 made of a horizontal member located at the top, a frame middle portion 1012 made of vertical members located on both left and right sides, and a panel-shaped frame lower portion 1013 located on the lower side, It is in the shape of a rectangular frame that forms a generally rectangular viewing window.

1020 is the game board explained as the game board 3 in FIG. ). That is, the game board is attached to the game board storage frame (hereinafter referred to as "main body frame") regardless of whether it is attached to the front frame 2 side or the outer frame 4 side. The game board 1020 attached to the main body frame 1020 has a game area 1021 (game area 3a in FIG. 2) where game balls flow down inside the guardrail and a non-game area outside the guardrail when viewed from the front of the game machine. 1022 (four corners of the game board 3 in FIG. 2).

The game board 1020 is provided with a main liquid crystal display device 1031 (liquid crystal display device 36 in FIG. 2) in the center of the game area 1021 when viewed from the front, and a sub liquid crystal display device 1032 is provided below the game area. . 1023 denotes a starting opening (upper starting opening 34 in FIG. 2), and 1024 denotes a big winning opening (large winning opening 50 in FIG. 2).

The relationship between the game board 1020 and the frame 1010 is such that the frame 1010 is positioned in front of the game board 1020 when viewed in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the game board is partly covered with the frame 1010 . That is, the game board has a part that is covered by the upper part 1011, the middle part 1012, and the lower part 1013 of the frame and cannot be seen from the front side. The main liquid crystal display device 1031 has a rectangular display surface, and is provided so that the entire display surface can be seen from the front side through the viewing window. In other words, the main liquid crystal display device 1031 is provided in such a size, shape and arrangement that its display surface is not hidden by the frame 1010 . A sub-liquid crystal display device 1032 positioned below the main liquid crystal display device 1031 in the game board surface is provided in a state where the lower part of the display surface thereof is covered with a lower frame portion 1013 .

However, the main liquid crystal display device 1031 can also be provided such that a portion thereof is covered by a portion of the frame 1010 . Also, the sub-liquid crystal display device 1032 can be provided so that the entire display surface can be seen through the viewing window, that is, no part of the display surface is covered by the lower frame portion 1013 . A liquid crystal display device 1030 including the main liquid crystal display device 1031 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 functions as image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image. The sub liquid crystal display device 1032 can be omitted as appropriate.

The frame lower portion 1013 corresponds to the front operation panel 7 in FIG. 1, and is composed of an upper tray 1013a corresponding to the upper tray unit 8, a lower tray 1013b, and a base portion 1013c when viewed from the front. The upper tray 1013a is a front view of the upper receiving tray unit 8 in FIG. As the lower operation means 1041 of the operation means 1040 , the production button 13 is provided on the upper plate 1013 a , and the production button is provided in the middle part 1012 of the frame as the upper operation means 1042 .

A base portion 1013c of the lower frame portion 1013 corresponds to the lower portion of the front operation panel 7 in FIG. 1, and is provided with a handle 1050 (firing operation handle 15) when viewed from the front.

In pinball game machines, identification information consisting of characters, graphics, symbols, three-dimensional shapes, combinations of these, or combinations of these and colors (marks of Article 2 of the Trademark Law) are placed outside the screen of the liquid crystal display device. is displayed. FIG. 36A shows an example in which the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is attached as identification information to the game board surface, more precisely, the game area 1021 of the game board. This is an example with "Fujimaru-kun" attached.

<Other Embodiments 1 to 4>
<1. Alternative Embodiment 1: Displaying Identification Information on LCD Screen>
(1-1: Conventional problems)
By the way, in recent gaming machines, there are various problems other than the problems that may impair the player's interest as explained above. This point will now be described in detail.

Compared to the machines that were introduced to the market more than 10 years ago, today's machines have various changes. size expansion”. Until now, we have seen the increase in liquid crystal size, board size, and operation devices (operating means such as buttons and levers). size) did not change significantly.

One of the reasons why the size of the main body of the gaming machine did not change significantly is that the space in which the gaming machine can be installed is limited (that is, the appropriate size is fixed). If the manufacturer of the game machine ignores this point and sets the size freely, there will be a problem that the machine will not fit in the installation space even if it is delivered to the game hall (pachinko hall) and installed.

Amusement arcades have facilities for installing game machines, and the number of machines to be installed in a line is determined taking into consideration the space between game machines. In addition, a data display machine (a display machine showing the number of big hits and the current number of revolutions, for example, the data counter DT shown in FIG. 3) is installed on the upper part of the gaming machine. Therefore, since it was believed that the size of the gaming machine could not be increased any further in the left-right direction and the upward direction, the size of the gaming machine main body did not change so much.

However, as mentioned above, the situation has changed in the past few years. In some cases, game machines have been put on the market, such as a movable object that protrudes so as to cover the data display, or a structure that protrudes upward enough to hide the data display in the standby state. there is

All of these were made for the purpose of "increasing the decorative effect". And while it can be evaluated that the effect is actually manifested (there are a certain number of players who prefer luxuriously decorated gaming machines), "the data display machine should be visible to the player" There is also a view that the existing unspoken rules such as "Left and right parts of the main body should not be in the way of opening and closing the front door of the game machine" have been broken.

In this way, when a part or all of the gaming machine reaches a turning point, there are quite a few cases where the effects that have been achieved in the past are reduced or completely lost as compensation.

What will be explained below is a new configuration adopted to achieve a certain purpose (in the above example, a configuration in which the size of the main body of the game machine is increased to enhance the decorative effect), as described above. If the effect achieved in the past (in the above example, the data display machine was easily visible because the upper part of the game machine was not protruded) was lost, a new configuration I will explain in detail what to do after adopting it, that is, what to do to achieve the effects that have been acquired in the past while acquiring new effects.

First, as an adverse effect of the expansion trend of gaming machines, the reduction in the identification power of "identification information" will be cited as a problem, and the means for solving this problem will be described. Various types and purposes of identification information have conventionally been attached to game machines, as shown below.
(i) For example, "model name (model name)", "jackpot probability", "probability variable entry rate", "number of winning balls", etc. are written and attached on stickers outside the game area on the game board.
(ii) For example, outside the game area on the game board, "variation state of special symbols", "number of activated balls with special symbols (reserved number)", "variation state of normal symbols", "activated retained balls with normal symbols""number","jackpot round number", etc. are displayed by a plurality of LEDs.
(iii) For example, inside or outside the game area, "model name (subject)", "model name (subtitle)", "faces and names of characters appearing in the game machine", "right-hand shots, aiming, etc." Identification information such as "instruction content", "game method (game explanation)" is arranged as a structure (movable or non-movable), printed on the game board surface or game parts, or written on a sticker and attached I'm in the middle of the day.

Conventionally, in a game machine, for example, a pinball game machine, when a ball is entered into a start hole, an internal lottery for a big hit is performed and a symbol variation display game is performed. Various forewarning effects reflecting the results of the above are displayed to entertain the game. In addition, among this type of gaming machines, there are also known gaming machines in which the model name, manufacturer name, etc. JP 2001-259169, JP 2018-175949)

However, due to the recent expansion of gaming machines and the excessive pursuit of decorative effects, it has become possible to place a large number of identification information. identification information is misidentified as different identification information, or the purpose of displaying identification information is not accurately communicated to players, traders or third parties).

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that solves the problem of displaying identification information.

A specific solution will be described later, but this makes it possible to provide a game that can solve the problem of displaying identification information.

Looking at the problem in a little more detail, conventionally, for example, a logo representing the model name is often placed near the liquid crystal display, indicating to players and traders that it is the model. While having the effect of a "mark" or "service mark", it also played a role as a "directive means" by moving or emitting light at a predetermined timing (such as when a notice effect with high expectation of winning) occurred. .

However, in the example of the prior art document (for example, FIG. 1 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-175949), as a result of the increase in the degree of freedom of placement, the logo is placed in the frame (that is, it is displayed larger at a higher position). Although the effect as a trademark and service mark has increased compared to before, the effect as a means of presentation has increased because the distance from the display means has increased (that is, it has fallen out of the player's point of view). has become low.

(Solution)
As means for solving the above-described problems (problems), different embodiments 1 to 4 are shown below. According to the different embodiments 1 to 4, while ensuring the function as identification information having the function of identifying own and other products, the function of displaying the source, and the function of displaying other performance and characteristics, the identification information can be appropriately used as necessary To provide a game machine having a performance effect by displaying in a display mode.

(1-2: Specific example of another embodiment 1)
38 to 43A and 43B show examples in which various identification information is written on the gaming machine. For the sake of explanation, the diagrams are divided for each type of identification information, but in an actual game machine, different types of identification information may be mixed.

(Purpose of displaying identification information)
When a player who has entered a game parlor selects a table on which to play, what is the basis for selection differs between players. An example that may serve as a basis for selection is as follows.
(i) Amusement machines that have just been introduced or installed in amusement arcades,
(ii) a game machine that is a fan of the original work that is the motif;
(iii) A gaming machine that has a performance that one likes (hard to hit a big hit but a large number of jackpot balls, or a small number of jackpot balls to easily hit a jackpot, etc.). Of course, there are other reasons for choosing a game machine for each person.

There are various reasons why various types of identification information are attached to gaming machines. It is possible to improve the ability to discriminate what kind of model the model is. If the model name is not described, it is difficult for the player to find the desired gaming machine, or at least it is difficult to say that it is easy.

In addition, when the type of identification information is "performance display", one of the reasons why the identification information is attached is to improve the ability to identify to the player what the performance of the model is. be done. If the performance indication is not described, it is difficult, or at least not easy, to identify what kind of performance the model has.

In any case, when a player selects a gaming machine, he/she at least recognizes whether or not it is the intended gaming machine by confirming some identification information displayed on the gaming machine, and , confirms whether any of the above conditions (selection grounds) is satisfied.

38 to 43A and 43B, the types of identification information and the display position, display size, etc. suitable for each identification information will be described below.

(1-2-1: Type/category of “identification information other than liquid crystal”)
(b) Model name First, the model name will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 38, on the upper part of the front frame 1010 of the gaming machine 1, there is a three-dimensional structure with a model name "Fujimaru-kun" attached (model name logo: model name display item, logo accessory, etc.). ) 1090 is arranged. In this logo accessory (model name logo) 1090, each character is framed with a plated member, and a light emitting means (full color LED, etc.) is arranged inside each character, and a translucent member is arranged on the front side thereof. there is Each character has a display area of approximately 10 cm long by 10 cm wide. A first font (here, a POP font) is used as the font (character style) with the intention of giving a soft and friendly impression. As shown, the model name is written in a conspicuous position (upper part of the board surface, upper part of the frame 1011, etc.) in a conspicuous size (for example, a person with a visual acuity of about 0.7 can distinguish characters even from a few meters away). preferably.

The term “logo” (mark) here is a concept that includes both a “logotype” consisting of characters and a “logomark” consisting of symbols and patterns. Alternatively, it may consist of both a logotype and a logomark. In addition, although the logotype refers to stylized or decorated characters or character strings, it also includes characters or character strings using very common fonts.

In addition, the arrangement and size suitable for (a) whether it is desired to be conspicuous to the "person who is selecting the gaming machine" or (b) to be conspicuous to the "currently playing the game". is different. If it is the former (a), it is easy to see from a distance if it is "up", "front", and "side" as much as possible, and if it is the latter (b), it is as close to the liquid crystal (around the liquid crystal) as possible. "Inside" makes it easy to see.

Next, a sticker 1061 on which the model name is written is arranged at the bottom of the game board surface. More precisely, on one sticker,
(b) P: A mark indicating that the aircraft is compliant with the new regulations that came into effect in February 2019;
(B) Mr. Fujimaru: "Theme (main title)" in the model name,
(C) ~ Save Fujika-chan ~: "Subtitle" in the model name,
(d) [with 6 settings]: a description indicating that it has a 6-step setting function;
(e) jackpot probability: setting 1 to setting 6 (1/300 to 1/240): description indicating the jackpot probability at the lowest setting and the highest setting,
(f) Probable variable rush rate: 65%: description indicating the probable variable rush rate,
(g) Number of Prize Balls: 4 & 1 & 10 & 15: A description indicating the number of prize balls at the time of winning the starting hole 1 & starting hole 2 & other winning holes & large winning holes is added.

A player can know both the model name and the performance display by looking at this. On the other hand, there is also a drawback, since the display area (size of the sticker) is small, the contents cannot be identified unless you are very close.

In addition, if the display area is enlarged to solve the above-mentioned difficulties, the size of the sticker will increase and the cost will increase, and if the sticker with a large amount of information is enlarged, the place where it can be placed will be limited. It is also necessary to recognize that there is a problem that Since the notation by this sticker is not intended to give softness and friendliness to the player, the font of the characters adopts the second font (gothic type here).

Further, as shown in FIG. 43A, a liquid crystal display device 1030 (a liquid crystal display device, which is a display means) (because the description is given by dealing with one liquid crystal display device, the sub-liquid crystal display device 1032 is simply referred to as the liquid crystal display device 1030 hereinafter.) ), the model name 1080 “Fujimaru-kun ~ Save Fujika-chan ~ [with 6 settings]” is displayed at predetermined display timings (for example, “waiting for customers”, “playing a big hit”, “ During a specific notice performance", etc.). Liquid crystal displays have a certain degree of freedom of expression, such as changing colors, emitting light, and enlarging (or reducing) the display size. Here, the main title is displayed in the first font (POP type) like the logo accessory described above, and the subtitle is also displayed in the first font (POP type) accordingly. Since it is not a model name, it is displayed in the second font (gothic). Information with settings is highlighted in red because it is important information for the player.

(b) Function name Next, the function name will be explained.
The “function” in the function name refers to structural functions such as “handle”, “electric chew”, “attacker (big prize opening)”, and control such as “big hit game”, “variable game”, and “small hit rush”. In a broad sense, it refers to the functions that make up the game machine, such as the functional function, “3D sound”, “full color LED” and other quality functions. Furthermore, among these function names, terms that are widely used among those skilled in the art (generic names) are defined as general function names (regular function names and non-special function names are also acceptable), and model-specific names are defined as The set items (such as "Daikichi RUSH" and "DANGER SOUND" to be described later) may be called separately from the special function names. Reasons for setting a model-specific name include, for example,
(i) To impress the player with the model image,
(ii) In order to impress the player with the amount of benefits,
(iii) To make an impression of product features (selling points), and the like.

As shown in FIG. 39, on the game board surface 1020 of the game machine 1 is written a function name 1070 consisting of characters "MAX BONUS". Among the notation of "5R", "7R", and "10R" in the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 and time-saving jackpots 1 to 2 in the column of "hit content" in Figure 4, the maximum number of rounds is the largest "10R jackpot (variable Jackpot 4)” has the greatest advantage. However, there are cases where there are only "4R jackpot" and "8R jackpot" in other models. Therefore, even if "8R jackpot!" is displayed on a gaming machine that is seen for the first time, it is difficult to know whether or not that is the maximum advantage for that model.

Therefore, in this game machine, this 10R jackpot is called "MAX BONUS", and by emitting light during the 10R jackpot, it is recognized that this 10R jackpot is the maximum advantage in this model. In addition, it gives the player a feeling of premier (special feeling).

Subsequently, a function name 1070 consisting of characters "Great Good Luck RUSH" is written on the lower right of the game board surface 1020 . In this game machine, the variable probability state (ST mode) is called "Daiyoshi RUSH", and a light emitting means is provided so that the characters of Daikichi RUSH emit light during the variable probability state. The characters Daikichi RUSH are not designed to be individually lit one by one, and it is only necessary to distinguish between the lit state (or specific color lit state) and the non-lit state (or non-special color lit state). In this respect, it is different from the logo accessory 1090 indicating the model name. In addition, when controlling the character of Daikichi RUSH to the lighting state, it may be the lighting state in all ST modes. Either one or only the ST100 mode, which has the highest degree of advantage, may be controlled to be in the lighting state. Also, the LEDs may be lit in different colors depending on the ST mode.

In addition, in the game machine, the "variable probability state" is displayed on the game board as a function name in this way, but not limited to this, for example, for a special function called so-called "small hit rush" A predetermined name may be provided. In any case, the purpose and effect are the functions of the gaming machine (jackpot game, small win game, time saving state (time saving game), probability variable state (probability variable game), small hit rush, AT (assist time) game, RT (replay time) game, ART (assisted replay time) game, chance mode (advantageous state in which it is easy to win AT games, etc.), and other privilege games that are advantageous to the player), and actually function is turned on (a state in which a privilege game is awarded), the light emission state (lighting/non-lighting, specific color lighting/non-specific color lighting, blinking/lighting or extinguishing = the former is function ON). can indicate the function ON.

Next, in the lower part 1013 of the game machine frame 1010, a function name 1070 "DANGER SOUND" is arranged in a three-dimensional structure display mode. This is a function name displayed for the purpose of clearly conveying the function of the speaker to the player. The direct translation is "dangerous sound", but of course, the sound does not pose any danger to the human body, and it conveys that the deep bass that is often used for sound effects in so-called "horror movies" is easy to hear. In addition, the same frame is often used for several years in order to establish the manufacturer's image and to suppress cost increases. Therefore, the game machine frame used for the horror game and the game machine frame used for the romance drama game may be the same. Therefore, when displaying the function name in the game machine frame like "DANGER SOUND", it should be displayed on the edge of the game machine (for example, the bottom end as shown in the figure) or the outer surface (top surface or left and right outer surface) as much as possible. preferably. As a result, even when "DANGER SOUND" is displayed on a model of a romantic drama, for example, it is difficult for the player to see it, so that the sense of discomfort is reduced. Similarly, the display color is less conspicuous than the model name, and "DANGER SOUND" has a color similar to the color of the gaming machine frame.

(C) Performance display (jackpot probability, ball output, presence or absence of setting function)
Next, the performance display will be explained.
The performance display in a game machine, especially a pinball game machine, is "jackpot probability (low probability, high probability)", "number of prize balls", "number of counts", "probability variable entry rate & continuation rate", "setting Presence or absence of functions”, etc. In other words, it is information that serves as an index when a player selects a gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 40, a performance display 1071 of “setting 1 to setting 6, 1/199 to 1/149” is displayed on the upper left outer surface of the gaming machine frame 1010 as a printed matter (cell sheet). In addition, a performance display 1071 reading "probability variable entry rate & continuation rate, 85%" is also displayed in the form of a printed matter (cell sheet) on the upper right outer surface of the gaming machine frame. All of them are written in large characters (the size of the display area is 10 cm long and 20 cm wide, and the size of the characters is the size that can be written in the entire display area) so as to be conspicuous to the player. In order to enhance the appeal to the player, the font is written in the first font (POP type), and only the numbers are red with a black border.

The purpose of displaying these performance displays 1071 in the gaming machine frame 1010 is for a player who has not yet decided (has no idea) which model to play, and which model has a specific performance (for example, a model with a high probability variable continuation rate). Also, for a player who wants to hit a model with a jackpot probability higher than 1/200 (middle spec, sweet digital type, etc.), by displaying the performance of the model in a more conspicuous position. is to increase the possibility of being selected.

In addition, on the upper part of the gaming machine board surface 1020, a setting machine mark (mark) 1081 "with setting" is displayed as a sticker. This sticker can be used not only for the model concerned, but also for the next model (meaning the next model developed and sold by the relevant manufacturer) and later models, which can reduce waste in terms of cost. Furthermore, there is an advantage that the player can easily understand the meaning of the mark (that the machine is a model with settings) by using it for a long period of time. The font is the third font (Mincho typeface), assuming that it will be commonly used by multiple models.

Furthermore, as already described with reference to FIG. 38, a sticker 1061 on which the model name is written is arranged at the bottom of the game board surface. As mentioned above, this sticker not only lists the model name, but also details the performance of the model. Also, as already mentioned, the font of the characters is the second font (gothic).

Therefore, the gaming machine must have a performance display that appeals to the player who is selecting the gaming machine (a standing player) and a player who has decided on the gaming machine (a seated player). Performance indications that can be confirmed are displayed accordingly, and it can be seen that they are displayed in positions, sizes, and fonts suitable for achieving each purpose.

(d) Warning signs (warning signs, anti-fraud measures completed signs)
Next, warning display will be described.
Warning displays in gaming machines all have in common that they give attention to the person who sees the display, but they are roughly divided into two types depending on the target person. These two are a case where a player is targeted and a case where a store clerk (person involved in amusement arcade) is targeted. In the case of the latter type of store clerk, examples of warning signs include the installation method (assembly method, etc.) of the game machine and signs that warn of places where injuries are likely to occur (hands are likely to be pinched). Applicable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, an example of warning display for the player will be described. Warning displays for players can be further classified into several types. The first is a ``warning display for matters affecting the player (in other words, ``attention display''), and the second is a ``warning display for matters affecting the gaming machine (in other words, a ``warning display''). )”. The third is "warning display (in other words, "advisory display") for matters that affect the game".

At the top of the game board surface 1020, "Do not play continuously for a long time, take a moderate break" and "Please be careful as the top of the board protrudes. (Blowing) Be careful of the wind." A warning display 1072 stating "Beware of (strong) sound and light" is displayed. Also, a warning display 1072 is displayed near the upper plate of the game machine frame, saying "Be careful not to pinch your hand in the (pop-up) button". These correspond to the above-mentioned "warning display".

Although we call attention to the lowest level of possible risk, if the text is too long to completely eliminate all risks, people will not read it. Regarding the warning display for the operation method, we did not describe all possible risks (hand pinching, pointing, dropping an object placed on the button, dropping a cigarette in surprise), but at least Considering the importance of things such as things that generally have a high probability of occurrence and things that have a low probability of occurrence but would cause great damage if they do occur, we are trying to display only the necessary alerts. In addition, each of the warning displays has a display area of only about 2 to 4 cm in length and 3 to 10 cm in width, the font of the characters is the second font (gothic), and the color of the characters is black. be.

Subsequently, at the lower left of the game board surface 1020, there is displayed a warning display 1073 consisting of the characters "Equipped with fraud detection system!". This corresponds to the above-mentioned "warning display". Types of illegalities on gaming machines include "radio waves", "magnets", "dotsuki", and "big ball". Measures such as a thread cutting structure are taken. Therefore, it indicates that anti-fraud measures have been taken in advance, and enhances the crime prevention effect.

Since this "warning display" is preferably a display that is conspicuous to the player (more precisely, a person who tries to cheat), in FIG. . The base background color is yellow, the character color is red, and the base portion is bordered in black.

Finally, on the upper left side of the gaming machine frame 1010, there is a description that "Pressing the [release button] when the character is movable allows the character to be retracted." 1074). That is, even if the player is unaware of it, the player will not be injured or the gaming machine will not malfunction, but one option that the player can select is displayed.

(e) Intellectual property license (copyright, patent right, trademark right, etc.)
Next, the intellectual property license will be explained.
Most of the gaming machines of recent years are based on famous copyrights (for example, cartoons, animations, dramas, movies, novels, athletes, entertainers, etc.). In this case, there is an individual or corporation that manages the copyright, so when using it, development starts after signing a license agreement. You will have to repeat the work to be confirmed. The license contract number and the fact that the approval has been officially completed are the intellectual property license (copyright license). In some cases, an identification number is attached by a combination of

In addition, when using music other than that, it is often the case that a license number is displayed after signing a contract with a corporation that comprehensively licenses the use of music.

Furthermore, if you want to use intellectual property rights (patent rights, trademark rights, etc.) that are not covered by the copyright holder, you will need to enter into a license agreement with the right holder. Identification information (marks) similar to public property licenses will increase.

Looking at FIG. 42, a sticker (license certificate sticker) that reads "JoyForJoy" Interesting "Iloilo. License certificate 123456" is placed on the lower right of the game board surface 1020, more strictly outside the game area on the game board surface (outside the outer rail). 1062 is attached. This indicates that a company "JFJ" has issued a license certificate as the copyright holder of the gaming machine, and the license number is "123456". In addition, "'Funny' Sai Iloilo." indicates the corporate slogan of "JFJ."

Since this mark (license certificate sticker) 1062 is issued by the copyright holder, the font for the part indicating the company name is displayed in a special font (4th font: original font) specified by the company, and the license certificate number is displayed. The indicated part is displayed in a general-purpose second font (gothic).

Subsequently, a sticker (property certificate sticker) 1063 "(C mark on circle) supervised by JFJ" is attached to the upper left of the game board surface 1020, more precisely outside the game area (outside the outer rail) on the game board surface. The aforementioned license certificate is proof that the use of the copyright has been granted comprehensively, and this proof of suitability seal is proof that the above-mentioned approval work has been properly completed. Since the certificate of fitness sticker is prepared by the developer side, the font is displayed in the general-purpose second font (Gothic typeface).

Furthermore, in liquid crystal display device 1030, predetermined timings (for example, during "waiting for customers ("demo start waiting effect" or "customer waiting effect (demonstration display)"), "during jackpot games (for example, during start INT, end During INT)”, “during a specific advance notice effect (for example, during reach effect)”, etc.), a suitability certificate display 1064 of “(C mark on circle) JFJ” is performed. This indicates to the player that intellectual property rights have been appropriately handled in the gaming machine. As mentioned above, the sticker is displayed outside the game area, but since there is a possibility that you may not notice it due to the display position and display size, it is displayed at a predetermined timing as a reminder. . In addition, the second font (gothic) and the fourth font (company original font) are preferable for fonts, and at least fonts such as the first font (POP) that destroy the image of the company or give a wrong image are I don't like it.

(f) Other indications (slogan, good and bad)
Finally, other displays will be explained.
It should be noted that "other display" means that the mark does not belong to the above-mentioned (a) model name to (d) warning display, and "other display" does not belong to the category to which the mark belongs.

As shown in FIG. 43A, above the gaming machine frame 1010, a catch phrase 1065 is displayed that reads, "It's funny!" This catchphrase 1065 does not indicate the model name, but rather the catchphrase of the company that developed the game machine. Assuming that the company that developed the game machine uses (continuously) multiple models and is recognized by the players to some extent, it is placed in a conspicuous position above the game machine frame. However, the display size is smaller than the model name. The font is the fourth font (original font).

Next, on the upper right of the gaming machine frame 1010 , “Fujimaru-kun” is arranged as a resin-molded figure (three-dimensional model) 1066 . Although there is no textual information, the mark (figure) is placed in a position that is easy to see even from a distance, so it is positioned as the "face" of the game machine.

Next, "Fujika-chan" is arranged as a movable accessory 1067 near the center of the game board. In the standby state (initial position, standby position), since the game ball overlaps the rollable stage, it is possible to see above the eyes, and the hand is also lowered (invisible). . When the predetermined effect is generated, the area below the mouth (the lower half of the face) can be seen by moving upward, and the hand jumps upward while making a peace sign.

Next, on the left side of the game board 1020 is printed an idiom display 1068 consisting of the characters "encourage good, punish bad." Since the game machine is based on the concept of Fujimaru-kun punishing evil, a four-letter idiom that clearly shows the concept is written on the game board. The display size is relatively large (compared to the copyright license seal and performance display seal), but smaller than the model name. Also, the font of the characters is the third font (Mincho).

Here, FIG. 43B shows an example in which substantially the same contents as those indicated by the marks shown in FIG. 43A are displayed on the display means (liquid crystal display device) 1030. FIG. A square frame in FIG. 43B represents the outer frame of the display means 1030 . The display means 1030 displays a catchphrase display 1065b, a character A (boy character) 1066b, a character B (girl character) 1067b, and an idiom display 1068b. The various marks displayed on the game board surface and the frame of the game machine are at a certain distance (separate) from each other, but are displayed simultaneously and close to each other on the display means to form a single image. ing. That is, the model is a "historical drama" with the concept of "rewarding good and punishing evil" (common word display 1068b), and a boy character (character A) and a girl character (character B) appear as main characters (characters 1066b, 1067b). ), and as a slogan, the image of being "a model that is a bit different (a different model from other models)" (a slogan display 1065b) is planted.

As described above, there is a relationship between the content indicated by the mark in FIG. 43A and the displayed object displayed on the display means in FIG. 43B. there is For example, the mark placed on the game board displays the four-letter idiom ``Kanshin Jaku Eku'', but the display on the display means adds the information ``Kanzen Jaku Eki Jidaigeki''. In addition, although the mark arranged in the game machine frame shows "Fujimaru-kun's face", the displayed object on the display means shows a character in which "Fujimaru-kun is deformed".

When displaying a mark on a game board surface or a game machine frame, there are impediments that prevent the pursuit of sophistication in all aspects, such as the display size and the reproducibility of the original (the appearance of the character and the touch of the picture). In that case, the mark on the game board surface and the game machine frame should have the minimum necessary display size (and/or amount of information) and the minimum necessary reproduction of the original, and it should be complemented. By displaying on the display means 1030, it is possible to convey to the player the original font, color tone, touch of the picture, accurate information, etc. of each mark.

(1-2-2: Arrangement of “identification information other than liquid crystal”)
The above is the description of the types of various marks (identification information). As explained above, it has become clear that the optimal display method (suitable display position, suitable display size, suitable font, etc.) differs depending on the type of mark. Next, the optimal display method based on the "display position" of the mark will be explained instead of the optimal display method based on the "type" of the mark.

(b) The mark is in the frame First, the mark in the frame can make the mark stand out (the first thing that catches the eye) when viewed from a distance (viewed from a position where the entire gaming machine can be seen). . However, in order to satisfy the requirement, it is necessary to have a certain size (display size) or more, and as a single requirement, it is preferable to have at least a display size of 10 cm long x 10 cm wide. Also, as a composite requirement, it is preferable that the display size is at least equal to or larger than that of the mark placed outside the frame (that is, on the game board surface, etc.). This point will be described later in detail.

In addition, if the mark in the frame is used continuously across multiple models, the display position can be fixed and/or the display method (sticker, print, logo, or other display method) can be standardized. Therefore, an imprinting effect on the player can be expected, and a cost reduction effect can be expected.

In addition, since the mark on the frame has large unevenness compared to the game board surface, it is relatively difficult to secure a flat area when viewed from a close distance. Therefore, since it is a position that is difficult (or invisible) for a seated player to see, such as the upper end (upper surface, upper outer side), which is a flat area, and the left and right outer sides, other than the seated player (for example, It is preferable to place a mark directed toward a player who is selecting a gaming machine, a person involved in an amusement arcade, or the like.

(B-1) The mark is on the game board surface and within the game area In a narrow sense, the mark in the area inside the outer rail and the area where the game ball can roll) can make the mark conspicuous to the seated players. However, in order to satisfy the requirement, it is still necessary to have a certain size (display size), and as a single requirement, it is preferable to have at least a display size of 10 cm in length × 10 cm in width. Also, as a composite requirement, it is preferable to have a display size that is at least equal to or larger than that of the mark placed in the frame. This point will be described later in detail.

Also, the mark in the game area 3a can serve not only as a simple mark, but also as an effect means. However, in order to satisfy the requirements, a combination with light emitting means or a combination with display means such as a liquid crystal display device is required. In addition, if the role of the means of presentation is strengthened, there is a risk that the mark will not be able to fulfill its role sufficiently, so a balance is required. This point will be described later in detail.

(B-2) The mark is outside the game board surface and the game area It is characterized by being visible only to people who bring their faces close to each other). In the first place, since the area outside the game area (non-game area) itself on the game board surface is not so large, it is difficult to arrange a mark of a large display size. The advantage of arranging it in the non-game area is that the player cannot touch it (because there is a glass door 6 (transparent glass)), and because it is not an area where the game ball rolls, The point is that there is no rubbing. However, since the non-game area is rarely intentionally illuminated, the mark in the non-game area rarely serves as the above-described effect means.

(C-1) The mark is immovable in the frame A mark that is immovable in the frame is basically a non-detachable attached logo, sticker, printed material, etc., so it is a movable object. It is assumed that the degree of unevenness is small compared to . However, if it is a movable body, it is necessary to have a mechanism around it to make it move, so the placement and size will be slightly restricted, but if it is a non-movable body, you will have to worry about that. Since it is not necessary, the two-dimensional display size can be made larger than in the case of the movable body.

(C-2) The mark is immovable on the surface of the game board Various possibilities are conceivable for the mark that is immovable on the surface of the game board. Since the front surface is covered with glass, there is no possibility that it will be touched by a player, so the mounting strength need not be so high.

(D-1) The mark is movable on the frame etc.). However, if it is a movable body, it is necessary to provide a mechanism to move it around, so the arrangement and size are somewhat restricted. Also, since most of the items on the frame can be touched by the player, this point can be said to be one of the differences from the mark on the game board. If the player can touch it, there is a risk that it will be touched (hit) hard intentionally or accidentally, so strength is required. A movable body tends to be weaker in strength than a non-movable body, so it is necessary to consider this point when arranging.

(D-2) The mark is a movable object on the game board surface.
The marks on the game board as movable bodies are expected to play a role as means of presentation. That is, at the first timing (standby state), the role as a mark is emphasized, and at the second timing (drawing state), the role as a rendering means is emphasized. Care must be taken depending on how the movable body is moved (whether the mark moves together or whether the mark moves in two or more parts). Details of this point will be described later.

(e) the mark is above or below the position displayed on the display means;
The mark positioned above the display means on the game board is close to the player's line of sight, so it is expected to play a role as a means of presentation, and is intended to convey a message such as calling attention. It is a mark that is In addition, since the mark positioned below the display means on the game board surface is slightly out of line of sight of the player, it is not suitable to place the mark that would be overlooked.

In addition, above the display means, a planar area (area connected to the ground) of about 5 to 10 cm in length × 10 to 15 cm in width can be secured between the display means and the outer rail, but below the display means, the display means and the It is difficult to secure a flat area because there are functional structures such as a starting port, an electric chew, and a large prize winning port between the outer rails. Therefore, when arranging a large mark as a group, it is preferable to place it above the display means.

(f) the mark is larger or smaller than that displayed on the display means;
A mark displayed on the game board surface and having a display size larger than that displayed by the display means is a mark having a higher display size among the marks displayed on the game machine. For example, model names and main character emblems fall under this category. Further, among the marks displayed on the game board, various marks correspond to the marks whose display size is smaller than the mark displayed by the display means. In addition, when the same mark as the mark displayed on the game board (or a mark that is partially common, or a mark showing similar content) is displayed on the display means, it is not necessary to always make it stand out for the purpose. However, it is a mark that needs to be conspicuous at a predetermined timing. Specific examples of this include alert displays and performance displays.

(g) Behind the ball rolling surface of the game board.
FIGS. 44(a) and (b) show an example where a mark (here, a movable body 4402 imitating a specific character) is on the back side of the game ball rolling surface on the game board. The movable body 4402 is moved by a pair of left and right movable body driving means a and b (not shown), for example, while maintaining a substantially horizontal state and moving to a lower position on the lower front side of the display means 1030 (FIG. 44(a)). ) and an upper position on the front side of the vertical intermediate portion (FIG. 44(b)). The lower position of the movable body 4402 is the origin position, and predetermined timing (for example, "waiting for customers", "during a jackpot game", "during a specific notice effect (for example, at the end of reach)", etc.) can be displaced to an upper position at . Also, when the movable body 4402 is displaced to the upper position during the pattern variation, the decorative pattern during the variation is retracted to a position not overlapping the movable body 4402, such as the upper right or upper left, and displayed small (retracted display) (FIG. 44). (B)). It should be noted that the operation of the operation means by the player may be used as a trigger for the displacement of the movable body 4402 .

In this embodiment, when the movable body 4402 is at the upper position, the entire face of the specific character depicted on the movable body can be viewed from the front side. Most of the face of the specific character is hidden behind the central display frame unit, and only a part of the upper side is visible from the front side.

In this way, the specific character represented on the movable body 4402 can be in a completely visible state in which the main parts (“face” in the above example) are entirely visible, or in an incompletely visible state in which at least a part is invisible (or difficult to be visually recognized). In this embodiment, it is possible to temporarily switch from the incompletely visible state to the fully visible state during the ready-to-win effect.

(h) Located in front of the ball rolling surface of the game board.
Note that as shown in FIG. 44, the appearance of a particular mark differs between when it is in the first display mode (or first position) and when it is in the second display mode (or second position). (Visible area changes, visible and invisible are switched, etc.) Examples are not limited to this. may apply.

Specifically, it is known that the front side of the display means 1030 and/or the front side of the nail is called a light guide plate (illumination panel), and when light is irradiated from a predetermined angle, the predetermined mark can be easily recognized. . By using this, it is possible to make the mark inconspicuous except when necessary.

(1-2-3: Luminous mode of various marks on the frame or game board)
Next, FIG. 45A shows an example in which various symbols (various identification information) displayed on the game machine frame 1010 or the game board 1020 change their light emitting modes in various colors.

(b) Symbols are stopped (during non-demonstration) ~ (f) Symbols fluctuate ~ stop (when symbols are stopped)
FIGS. 45A (a) and (b) both show display examples during symbol stoppage. In the example of FIG. 45A (b), immediately after the power is turned on (after the initial setting period has ended) or after the player has finished the game, the decorative pattern 1033 is stopped (in the figure, part of the lost pattern corresponding to "634" (unbroken stitches). At this time, the model name logo 1090 is uniformly illuminated in a reddish color.

When this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), the display state shifts to the display state of FIG. At this time, the model name logo 1090 emphasizes the function as a part of the production means rather than appealing the model name 1080, and each character, which is the component 1081 of the model name 1080, has a different color ( Here, each character of "Fujimaru-kun" is blinking in red, blue, green, and pink).

When a new player starts a game and a game ball enters the starting hole, the symbols start to change, and the display state shown in FIG. 45A (c) is obtained. At this time, the model name logo 1090 again blinks in a reddish color at a low speed (a light emission mode in which high-luminance light emission and low-luminance light emission are switched at a low speed). Because of the size (display size) of the model name logo 1090, if the lighting mode is changed rapidly, the user's eyes will be drawn to it. Recklessly flashing at high speed or emitting light in various colors may cause the player to misunderstand that "the probability of winning in this variation may be high". Therefore, during fluctuations, except when a specific advance notice is generated, it is preferable that the lighting mode is inconspicuous, such as lighting in the same system color, slow blinking, or turning off.

Next, FIG. 45A (d) shows a display example when a specific notice (here, "Fujimaru-kun's appearance notice") is generated while the symbols are changing. At this time, the entire base portion of the model name logo 1090 emits blue light to appeal the occurrence of the specific notice to the player. This specific notice includes, for example, a high-expectation notice effect, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting 6 confirmation suggestion), and the like.

FIG. 45A (e) represents a state in which a ready-to-win effect (for example, SP reach) is executed after the state of FIG. 45A (to-d). Here, a mobile artillery battery is displayed as an ally side, and a flying object (disk) is displayed as an enemy side (for example, a mobile artillery battery 911 and a disk 913 in FIG. 85(c) described later). This is the flow. At this time, the model name logo 1090 is the image color of the ally side (the color of the ally side character, the color of the wearable item, the color of the aura rising from the body, etc. that makes it easy for the player to distinguish between the ally and the enemy). Assuming that the color is red and the enemy's image color is blue, "Fujimaru (two characters)" and "Kun (two characters)" are divided into red and blue, respectively, and emit light, representing a situation of equality. there is

It should be noted that, at an intermediate stage until the result is obtained, the dominant situation may be represented by a large ratio of light emission in red (the number of characters, the light emission area, etc.). In this case, conversely, if the rate of blue light emission is high, it may indicate that the teammate side is outnumbered, and the former light emission mode (light emission pattern) may indicate a higher winning expectation than the latter.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45A (f), when the flying object is successfully shot down, the symbols are stop-displayed in a state in which the symbols are aligned (jackpot symbols). At this time, each character of the model name logo 1090 emits light in various colors, and the light emission mode is such that the overall color is rainbow.

In FIG. 45A, the luminescence mode of the model name logo 1090 during a so-called "non-jackpot" period during symbol stoppage or pattern variation has been described. , will be described.

(B) During the jackpot (start interval) ~ (F) During the jackpot (end interval 3)
FIG. 45B (a) shows an example of the display screen of the display means (liquid crystal display device) 1030 and the light emission pattern of the model name logo 1090 during the start INT (start interval) during the jackpot game.

During the start INT, that is, during the opening period, as shown in FIG. A direction notification image 4612 is displayed on the display means 1030 . This function name logo image 4611 includes the same "MAX BONUS" characters as the emblem 3911 representing the function name 1070 shown in FIG. there is

Also, at this time, the electric decorations on the front side of the game machine frame 1010 and the front side of the game board 1020 and the model name logo 1090 are all lit in a specific color (for example, blue). Note that the shooting direction notification image 4612 may start to be displayed in the middle of the start INT. In this case, after the launch direction notification image 4612 starts to be displayed, for example, the lights on the front side of the game machine frame 1010 and the front side of the game board 1020 may emit light so as to flow rightward as indicated by the launch direction notification image 4612 .

During the jackpot round, as shown in FIG. 45B (b), a shooting direction notification image 4612, a round number notification image (not shown) indicating the round in progress, and an obtained ball number notification indicating the number of obtained balls in the jackpot game. In addition to the image (not shown), a big hit effect image 4613 such as a character is displayed on the display means 1030 . At this time, the electric decorations on the front side of the game frame 1010 and on the front side of the game board 1020 emit light with rainbow color gradation (rainbow light emission). Also, at this time, the model name logo 1090 emits light in different colors (for example, red and blue) from the surroundings, switching sequentially so as to flow "wisteria", "circle", "ku", and "n". In addition to this, the same system color may be emitted substantially uniformly, or may be extinguished, or the game machine frame 1010, the game board 1020, and the model name logo 1090 may integrally emit rainbow light.

It should be noted that FIG. 45B (ha) is a model that has a function of "probably variable entry if V wins", a so-called "one type and two type mixed type" model (for example, described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236851 A game machine) shows the light emission mode and the display mode at the moment when the V prize is won. "One type and two types mixed type" is specifically, a specific area (V area) that allows game balls to pass through in the big winning opening, and when a big hit is won (a special symbol display device stops displaying the big winning symbol ), a big win game is performed as "one kind of win", and on the other hand, when a small win is won (when a small win pattern is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device), a big winning opening is opened for one round, and during this time, if the game ball passes through the V area (V winning), it becomes a "two-type hit", and the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are activated. , It is a type of model in which a winning game (V winning game) similar to the one type is performed. Here, three fighter planes are lined up in a V-shape, and an image 4613a is displayed in which the letter V is superimposed on them, and the model name logo 1090 shows how the player is blessed with rainbow light emission. .

Next, FIG. 45B (d) shows the end INT (end interval) period after the jackpot round is finished. Here, a winning ball number display image 4614 displaying the number of balls won in this big hit is shown, and the model name logo 1090 emits rainbow light.

Then, in FIG. 45B(e), a model name display 4615 representing the official name of this model is displayed on the display means 1030 as in the demonstration effect. The model name display 4615 (second mark) corresponds to the model name logo 1090 (first mark). The official name of this pachinko machine is "Fujimaru-kun ~ Save Fujika-chan ~", and in the model name display 4615, the first component 4615a (Fujimaru-kun) and the second component 4615b (~Save Fujika-chan~) ), but the model name logo 1090 is displayed only in the first component.

In this way, the model name display image (second mark) 4615 displayed on the display means 1030 is replaced by the model name logo 1090 (first mark) displayed in the gaming machine frame 1010 with new information (here, the second mark). Since the chapter (subtitle) "~ Save Fujika-chan~") is added (image 4614a + image 4614b), the information to be included in the model name logo 1090 is kept to a necessary minimum, and display means is used as necessary. It is possible to supplement missing information on the 1030 side. Note that "with setting", which is additional information indicating that the setting change function is installed, may be displayed together.

In the model name display image 4615, the characters of “Fujimaru-kun” (image 4614a) common to the model name logo 1090 are configured in the same first font as the model name logo 1090 (here, POP). In addition, the same first font as the model name logo 1090 is also used for “~Save Fujika-chan~” (image 4614b) other than “Fujimaru-kun” in the model name display image 4615 . However, the subtitle uses a smaller font size than the main title "Fujimaru-kun".

Of the model name display image 4615, the portion (image 4614a) that is common to the model name logo 1090 is commonly displayed in the first font, and the portion that is not common (here, subtitle: image 4614b) is displayed using the first font. It is preferable to display at least part of it in a font different from the model name logo 1090 (for example, Mincho font or semi-cursive font). The reason for doing this is, as already mentioned, the common part "Fujimaru-kun" is used across multiple models (new and old models) (main title part in the series), and the series model "Fujimaru-kun" However, "Fujimaru-kun 1 (the model of the previous work)", "Fujimaru-kun 2 (the model of the previous work)", and "Fujimaru-kun 3 (the latest model)", which are sold at different times, were sold at the same time. It may have been installed in In that case, the subtitle needs to stand out in order to differentiate. Therefore, differentiation can be realized by using a different font from the common part (one or more of the font used, the size of the characters, the color of the characters, etc. is different). In addition, there is an advantage when selling sequel models and remake models in the future.

Also, when this model name display image 4615 is displayed on the display means 1030, the model name logo 1090 on the front side of the gaming machine frame 1010 is displayed in a substantially uniform color similar to the display color of "Fujimaru-kun" in the model name display image 4615. It can be made to emit light. In this case, it is desirable that the model name logo 1090 emit light in a color different from that of the illumination of the gaming machine frame 1010 and gaming board 1020 located in the vicinity.

In this way, by displaying the model name display image 4615 including "Fujimaru-kun", which is the same as the model name logo 1090, on the display means 1030 during the end INT (jackpot end interval), the gaming machine is hard to enter the player's field of vision. Even though the model name logo 1090 is positioned on the upper side of the frame 1010, the mark of "Fujimaru-kun" used in the model name logo 1090 can effectively function as a means of presentation. be.

FIG. 45B (f) shows an example in which the game state (probability variable state, time saving state, normal state, etc.) that shifts after the end of the jackpot game is named as a function and displayed in the end interval period. It should be noted that, here, the "variable state" is referred to as "Fujimaru Time", which is a model-specific function name.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example (during waiting for customers) in which the "luminescence mode of the model name logo" changes according to the progress of the game. First, the "customer waiting period" will be described. When the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, until a predetermined time (15 seconds in the figure) elapses after the pattern change for the last number of balls that have been activated and the pattern is stopped, (a) the demonstration starts. The symbol stop display is continued as the waiting effect period. During this period, the game machine cannot accurately determine whether the player has finished playing the game or is trying to take money out of the wallet or light a cigarette, so the so-called judgment is suspended. is.

(a) When the pre-customer waiting period continues for a predetermined period of time, the period shifts to (b) the customer waiting period. As shown in FIG. 46, the display means 1030 displays an effect display for lively purposes (in the figure, a display of fighter planes crossing) and operation means (effect button 13, cross key 75), and adjusts volume and light amount when operated. A display is made to the effect that it is possible to open the menu screen. Further detailed game settings can be made by operating the button to open the menu screen.

(b) When the customer waiting period continues for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in the figure), the process shifts to (c) the demonstration effect period. The demonstration effect period is a period during which the player is considered to be away from the seat after the periods (a) and (b) have passed, and a demonstration effect is performed to attract new players. If we subdivide this demo production period, (C-1) Demo movie period (model image production period), (C-2) Model name display period, (C-3) Other display period (company logo display, immersion prevention display) and warning display such as prevention of forgetting to take a prepaid card).

After this (c) demo effect period is performed for a predetermined time (90 seconds in the figure), the process shifts to (b) the customer waiting period again, and thereafter (b)→(c)→(b). . . is repeated. Since it is assumed that the player has left the seat at the time the demonstration effect is performed, the transition is not made before (b) waiting for the customer. Also, in FIG. 46, each period is defined as 15 seconds, 30 seconds, and 90 seconds, but it is not limited to this. If the machine designer determines, the customer waiting time may be longer than the demonstration performance time, or at least substantially the same time or more.

In addition, the transition timing of each state starts counting from the final symbol stop, "shift to (b) after 15 seconds", "shift to (c) after 45 seconds", "shift to (c) after 135 seconds" ), or reset the counter each time it transitions to each state and send a state designation command each time, or use two or more counters.

The conditions for resetting the counter are "when the handle touch sensor is turned ON", "when one of the plurality of operating means provided in the game machine frame is operated", and "when any of the operation means provided in the game machine frame is operated". When a specific operation means is operated (when a valid operation is performed)", "When a game ball is shot", "Any one of a plurality of game ball detection means provided on the game board is turned ON" Any one or a plurality of conditions may be set out of "when the game ball detection means provided at the special figure start port is turned ON (when pattern variation starts)".

As described above, even in the period of "symbols stopped and non-jackpot game in progress", (a) (b) (c) or further subdivided into (a) (b) (har 1) (har 2) It can be divided into the period of (Ha 3). Therefore, each can be specified as a first period, a second period, and a third period (which may be further subdivided). Based on this assumption, if we look at the luminescence mode of the title logo (Fujimaru-kun) of each period, (Har 1) is also the most distinctive, colorful and individual luminescence that matches the demo movie. There are cases where the color is changed or the blinking cycle is different during other periods, but basically the colors of "wisteria", "circle", "ku" and "n" emit light in almost the same color. There is.

This is because a player looking at the gaming machine from a distance sees only a specific portion (for example, "Maru-kun") of the model name logo 1090 shining (or shining in a different color). , to avoid mistaking the name of the gaming machine as "Maru-kun". It should be noted that since the demonstration movie is originally performed to attract the player, it is assumed that the player's line of sight is directed toward the display means 1030, and the title logo 1080 is also used as the production means at this timing. plays the role of

In this way, the period in which the model name logo 1090 plays the role of indicating the model name ((A) (B) or (A) (B) (Ha-2) (Ha-3) in FIG. 46) is defined as the first period. , the period in which the title logo 1080 plays a role as a rendering means ((C) or (H-1) in FIG. 46) is defined as a second period, and depending on each period, the light emission mode is mainly individual light emission or unified light emission ( You may make it differ whether main light emission) is carried out.

(1-2-4: Various marks on the frame or game board are also displayed on the display means)
Specific examples of displaying various marks (various types of identification information) on the display means 1030 are shown below. It should be noted that the various marks shown below are based on the premise that marks having the same or similar content are displayed in a place other than the display means 1030 (the game machine frame 1010 and each part of the game board 1020).

That is, the meaning (purpose, effect) of displaying various marks having the same or similar content on the display means 1030 at a predetermined timing even though they are always visible on the display means other than the display means 1030 will be explained.

(A) Timing and specific display mode for displaying various marks on the display means (Fig. 47).
(B) Model name FIG. 47A is an example in which the model name is displayed as an image on the display means 1030 . The display timing includes "Demonstration effect", "Notice effect", "Big hit", and the like. 4711 (“Fujimaru-kun”), subtitle 4712 (“~Save Fujika-chan~”), and a mark indicating whether or not there is a setting function (setting function display mark) 4713 (“ with 6 levels of setting") is displayed. Both the main title 4711 and the subtitle 4712 are displayed in substantially the same font as the model name logo 1090 . Note that the display size of the model name logo 1090 is larger.

(b) Function name FIG. 47(b) is an example in which the function name is displayed as an image on the display means 1030. FIG. The display timing (depending on what function name is displayed) includes "at the time of symbol stop (in the case of a big hit)", "during a big hit (start interval period)", and the like. As shown in the figure, the mark (second mark) 4714 that indicates that the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage among multiple types of "MAX BONUS" at the start of the jackpot (for example, the 10R variable jackpot) has been won. It is displayed in the second font (gothic). Although not shown, other function names (for example, "Fujimaru time entry confirmed!") may be displayed at the same timing. In either case, the font is preferably substantially the same font as the mark (first mark) displayed on the game board surface 1020 . This makes it easy for the player to grasp which function has been activated (appearance, activation, start, etc. are synonymous).

(C) Performance Display FIG. 47(C) is an example in which the performance display is displayed as an image on the display means 1030 . The display timing includes "demonstration during demonstration", "during pattern change (information notice, etc.)", and the like. As for the display mode, the performance display 4731 (“probability variable rush rate 85%”) is displayed in a large size on the display means 1030 as shown in the figure. As for the display size, the performance display 4731 (second mark) displayed on the display means 1030 is larger than the performance display (first mark) displayed on the game board. However, this is an example of a case where the performance indication can become a product feature (a selling point when returned). If it becomes necessary to do so, identification information indicating the value) is not intended to be appealing, so the minimum necessary display size is fine.

Also, based on the same idea, if the purpose of displaying the performance display 4731 (second mark) is to appeal to players, the font (font, color, etc.) for the second mark should be more conspicuous than the first mark, If the purpose is not to appeal to players, even if the marks have the same nature (here, "performance display"), such as using substantially the same font for the second mark and the first mark, the purpose The fonts of the first and second marks may be the same, one of them may stand out, or they may be different.

(d) Warning Display FIG. 47(d) is an example in which the warning display 4741 is displayed as an image on the display means 1030 . The display timing includes "during demonstration effect", "when error occurs (when abnormality is detected)", and "during jackpot (end interval period)". As for the display mode, a large notice (warning display) is displayed on the display screen of the display means 1030 . Note that the warning displayed on the game board 1020 is "Equipped with fraud detection system!". In this way, when writing on the game board 1020, if all the information is to be packed, the character size becomes small, making it difficult to convey the content to be conveyed. Therefore, while the amount of information on the game board 1020 is kept to a minimum, it is possible to increase the amount of information when displaying on the display means 1030, enlarge the display size, or make the display color or font stand out. desirable.

(E) Intellectual Property Right-Related Display FIG. 47(E) is an example in which an intellectual property-related display 4742 is displayed on the display means 1030 as an image. The display timing includes "during a demonstration effect", "during a big hit (end interval period, etc.)", and the like. As for the display mode, the notation "(C mark on circle) JFJ" is displayed at the lower right of the display means 1030, as shown in the figure. It should be noted that the timing of displaying this intellectual property-related display (synonymous with copyright license certificate, copyright license number, etc.) 4742 on display means 1030 is the period during which the target indicated by the display becomes clear (musical copyright It is more preferable that the right license number is displayed at least during the period when the corresponding music is playing, and at least the period during which the model name is displayed if the copyright license certificate is the motif of the game machine.

(f) Other display FIG. 47(f) is an example of displaying the other display 4743 not included in the above (a) to (e) as an image on the display means 1030. FIG. Therefore, the display timing depends on the content to be displayed. For example, the illustrated "It's funny" that is different from human beings!" is a corporate slogan of the manufacturer that manufactured and sold the game machine, and the timing of displaying is mainly "Demonstrating during demonstration", "During big hit", etc. be done. As shown in the figure, the mark (the second mark) that reads, "It's a strange 'funny'!"
When the same mark (first mark) is displayed on the gaming machine frame 1010, that is, when the mark is arranged as a molded product, changing the color of each character requires a considerable cost. Therefore, the first mark is a mark consisting of one color or at most two colors, and the second mark is displayed colorfully on the display means 1030 so that the original color (meaning the correct color scheme when used as a corporate slogan) is displayed. ) can be communicated to the player.

<Embodiment in which the fonts of various marks displayed on the display means differ according to the progress of the game>
48(a) to (d) show a mark (second mark) 4811 including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) on the display means 1030, and at least two In the case of having the above display timings, an example is shown in which at least one of the display size, display color, and font of the marks is made different from each other.

In FIG. 48(a), the first model name display 4811 (second mark) is displayed in the "demonstration being performed". To be more specific, during the demo production, the original song of the model, "Soreike Fujimaru-kun," is played, and the chorus of the song has the lyrics "Oi, Fujimaru-kun." "Fujimarukun♪" is displayed on the display means 1030 in accordance with the lyrics. This includes the meaning of conveying the lyrics and the meaning of conveying the model name of the model. In this way, in the case of conveying the model name (that is, displaying the one whose display intention overlaps with the first mark), if the notation font of the model name logo 1090 is displayed as it is, it is not possible to convey the lyrics. do not have. Therefore, when the First Mark is displayed on a display means to match lyrics or for other purposes, the Second Mark may be displayed in a different font or size than the First Mark for those purposes. , may be displayed in a different arrangement.

In addition, in FIG. 48(b), a second model name display 4812 (third mark) is displayed as a preliminary effect during "symbol change". To be more specific, Fujimaru-kun's character display and Fujimaru-kun's character display as a pseudo-continuous pattern (a pattern that makes it appear as if the fluctuation starts again from the beginning when the pattern stops. A character name display indicating that this character is Fujimaru-kun is displayed. Here, these two (character display + character name display) are collectively referred to as a second model name display 4812 (third mark). This third mark includes the meaning of conveying the character name and the meaning of conveying the model name of the model. In this way, in the case of conveying the model name (that is, displaying the one whose display intention overlaps with the first mark), displaying the model name logo 1090 in the font as it is may convey the character name. I can't tell. Therefore, in order to make it easy to understand that it is a character name, it is displayed near the object (character display), or its display size is matched to the object. may be displayed in a font different from that of the first mark, a different size, a different arrangement, or the like.

It should be noted that when the model name is used as the advance notice effect, it is almost useless (unusable) if the shape, arrangement, color scheme, etc. of the model name are used without disturbing them at all. For example, if it is used as a pseudo-continuous pattern, a circular or square shape is easier to use as a pattern, but if a horizontally long arrangement is used as it is, it is difficult to use it as a pattern.

In this way, when a mark that is the same as or similar to the mark (first mark) displayed on the gaming machine frame 1010 or the game board 1020 is displayed on the display means 1030 at two or more timings, at least one timing is preferably used in a different font than the first mark.

FIGS. 48(C) and (D) show an example in which the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is used as a jackpot name, and the function name "Fujimaru-kun BONUS" is provided.

FIG. 48(c) is an example used as the "next notice (high expectation notice)" during pattern variation. There are multiple patterns of variations in the "next notice", such as "next time, XX reach" and "next time, intense heat!" set to different degrees. The third model name display 4813 (fourth mark) of "next time, Fujimaru-kun BONUS" is positioned at the top and directly suggests a big hit. Since this is one of the happiest moments for players, this fourth mark is displayed colorfully (so-called rainbow). In this way, when displaying something that overlaps with the model name, if the font for the model name logo 1090 is displayed as it is (for example, black characters are displayed in a single color), the player cannot feel that he or she is being blessed. . Therefore, when granting benefits, or when granting a benefit with a high degree of advantage among multiple benefits, the 4th mark should be different in font, size, or size from the 1st mark, depending on the purpose. You may make it display by a different arrangement|sequence.

FIG. 48(d) shows an example of displaying as the fourth model name display (fifth mark) when "Fujimaru-kun BONUS" described in FIG. 48(c) is about to start.

Here, the font is different from that of the first mark for the same purpose as in Fig. 48(c). The feature is that the font is different from the 5th mark.

The reason (intention, effect) is that when the notice occurs during the pattern fluctuation, the display size may be limited due to the display of the pattern, the pending display, the background display, and other objects, but at the start of the jackpot Because there is no display, the display size is almost unrestricted. In addition, what is customary in the industry is to make people aware that ``if a rainbow is displayed, it is almost a big hit'', and when used as a notice effect (Fig. , When used at the start of the jackpot (Fig. 48 (d)), if it is displayed in rainbow, it has another meaning (for example, it tells you that there is a further jackpot hidden in the hold, or in the case of pachinko with a setting function, the highest setting , etc.), the player may misunderstand the intention of the display. Therefore, even if the mark is the same, depending on the display timing, the second mark may be displayed in a different font, different size, different arrangement, etc. from the first mark, depending on the purpose.

Although not shown, other examples of different fonts are shown below.
For example, when displaying the same "Fujimaru-kun" emblem as the model name logo 1090 on the display means 1030 during the preview effect as a pre-reading preview image, this pre-reading preview image (second emblem) is the same as the model name logo 1090. It is assumed that characters of "Fujimaru-kun high probability zone" including "Fujimaru-kun" are arranged in a horizontal line. The characters of “Fujimaru-kun” in this pre-reading preview image may be composed of the same first font (here, POP font) as the model name logo 1090 and may be smaller than the model name logo 1090 . Note that the same first font as the model name logo 1090 is used for the characters in the "high probability zone" other than "Fujimaru-kun" in the pre-reading preview image.

On top of that, among the pre-reading preview images, the "Fujimaru-kun high probability zone" bearing the same "Fujimaru-kun" as the model name logo 1090 is the same first font as the model name logo 1090, and the other "normal high probability zone" ”, such as using other fonts, the first effect (here, “Fujimaru-kun high probability zone”) and the second effect (here, "Normal high probability zone"), the font may be made similar to the announcement bearing the same or similar name as the model name logo 1090. FIG.

For convenience of explanation, all of the 1st Marks are unified as "model name", but not limited to this, the 1st Marks are not limited to "function names", "performance indications", "warning indications", and "intelligence" property-related indication” or “other indication”. In this case, the display timing and display size of the 2nd to 5th marks can be changed accordingly, and at least the 1st mark and the 2nd to 5th marks should have different fonts.

<Example of changing the font according to the winning expectation>
FIGS. 49(a) to (d) show winning expectations when a mark (second mark) including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) is displayed on the display means 1030. An example in which the font is changed according to the degree is shown.

In FIG. 49 (a) and (d), when the same type of notice effect (here, pseudo consecutive notice effect) is executed, the winning expectation is relatively high (here, 50 %), a font different from the model name logo 1090 (for example, an original emphasized font) is used for the font of the pseudo-ren design 4911 (Fig. 49 (a)), and the winning expectation is relatively low (here, 25%). In this case, a predetermined font (for example, Mincho font) is used for the font of the pseudo-ren design 4911 (FIG. 49(b)). Note that one of them may use the same first font (for example, POP font) as the model name logo 1090 .

In addition, in FIG. 49 (ha) and (d), when executing a specific notice effect (here, the next notice effect), according to the probability change expectation degree for each notice effect, for example, the probability change expectation is relatively high (here 80%) In the case of the notice effect, a font different from the model name logo 1090 (for example, the original emphasized font) is used for the font of the next notice image 4911, and the degree of probability change expectation is relatively low (here, 25%) Notice effect In the case of , a predetermined font (for example, Mincho font) is used for the font of the next notice image 4912 (FIG. 49(b)). Note that one of them may use the same first font (for example, POP font) as the model name logo 1090 .

In this way, when the mark (second mark) including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) is displayed on the display means 1030, the character style is changed according to the degree of winning expectation. may In the example of FIG. 49 as well, similar to FIG. 48, the first mark is used as the model name, but this is not the only option.

<Example of displaying the second mark according to the degree of advantage of the player>
Fig. 50 (A-1) to (I-2), (B-1) to (B-2) are marks (first 2 mark) is displayed on the display means 1030, an example is shown in which whether or not to display the second mark is divided according to the degree of advantage of the player.

FIG. 50 (i-1) shows, in the case of a 10R jackpot, which has a higher advantage for the player than a 4R jackpot, for example, a "Fujimaru-kun bonus" including the characters "Fujimaru-kun" which is the same as the model name logo 1090 at the start INT. etc., and FIG. 50 (E-2) shows, in the case of one 4R jackpot, for example, a "regular bonus" that does not include the characters "Fujimaru-kun", which is the same as the model name logo 1090, at the start INT. ” shows an example of displaying a function name display image 5012 .

In addition, FIG. 50 (B-1) shows, in the case of a probability variable jackpot that has a high degree of advantage for the player compared to the non-probability variable jackpot, for example, at the start INT, the character “Fujimaru-kun” that is the same as the model name logo 1090 is included. A function name display image 5011 such as "bonus" is displayed, and in FIG. 50 (b-2), in the case of one non-probability variable jackpot, for example, the starting INT does not include the characters "Fujimaru-kun", which is the same as the model name logo 1090. An example of displaying a function name display image 5012 such as "regular bonus" is shown.

Thus, whether or not to display the mark (second mark) corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) on the display means 1030 may be changed according to the degree of advantage of the player. .

<Example of displaying a second mark with information added to the first mark>
51(a) to (d) show the amount of information when the mark (second mark) including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) is displayed on the display means 1030. shows an example configured to display a second mark with the addition of

In FIG. 51(a), of the second mark displayed on the display means 1030, the same font as the first mark is used for the characters that are common to the first mark, but the characters that are not common to the first mark are used. An example is shown in which at least part of the is configured to use a font different from that of the first mark.

FIG. 51(b) shows an example of a model name display image 5121 (second mark) displayed on the display means 1030 in the demonstration effect. In the model name display image 5121 shown in FIG. 51(b), the characters "P Fujimaru-kun" including "Fujimaru-kun" common to the model name logo 1090 (the first emblem) are the same as the model name logo 1090. A font (here, POP typeface) is used, but the second font (here, Gothic typeface) different from the model name logo 1090 is used for the other characters of "~Save Fujika-chan~". The first font (here, POP) is used for only the characters "Fujimaru-kun" that are common to the model name logo 1090, and the other characters "P" and "~Save Fujika-chan~" are used. , a font different from that of the model name logo 1090 may be used.

<5. Another Embodiment 5>
(5-1: Appearance of gaming machine seen from the front: Fig. 35)
FIG. 35 shows the appearance of the gaming machine of the present invention when viewed from the front. In FIG. 35, a frame 1010 is the same as the front frame 2 (hereinafter simply referred to as "frame") arranged openable and closable on the front side of the outer frame 4, and has an upper frame portion 1011, a middle frame portion 1012 and a lower frame portion 1013. It is composed of and has a viewing window that makes the game area visible. The frame 1010 here roughly depicts the shape and size visually recognized when the gaming machine is viewed from the front (front). Various shapes and sizes are used for the front frame 2, and it is free to adopt any shape and size. The frame 1010 here has an upper frame portion 1011 made of a horizontal member located at the top, a frame middle portion 1012 made of vertical members located on both left and right sides, and a panel-shaped frame lower portion 1013 located on the lower side, It is described as having a rectangular frame shape that forms a rectangular viewing window as a whole.

1020 is the game board explained as the game board 3 in FIG. ). That is, the game board is attached to the game board storage frame (hereinafter referred to as "main body frame") regardless of whether it is attached to the front frame 2 side or the outer frame 4 side. The game board 1020 attached to the main body frame 1020 has a game area 1021 (game area 3a in FIG. 2) where game balls flow down inside the guardrail and a non-game area outside the guardrail when viewed from the front of the game machine. 1022 (four corners of the game board 3 in FIG. 2).

The game board 1020 is provided with a main liquid crystal display device 1031 (liquid crystal display device 36 in FIG. 2) in the center of the game area 1021 when viewed from the front, and a sub liquid crystal display device 1032 is provided below the game area. . 1023 denotes a starting opening (upper starting opening 34 in FIG. 2), and 1024 denotes a big winning opening (large winning opening 50 in FIG. 2).

The relationship between the game board 1020 and the frame 1010 is such that the frame 1010 is positioned in front of the game board 1020 when viewed in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the game board is partly covered with the frame 1010 . That is, the game board has a part that is covered by the upper part 1011, the middle part 1012, and the lower part 1013 of the frame and cannot be seen from the front side. The main liquid crystal display device 1031 has a rectangular display surface, and is provided so that the entire display surface can be seen from the front side through the viewing window. In other words, the main liquid crystal display device 1031 is provided in such a size, shape and arrangement that its display surface is not hidden by the frame 1010 . A sub-liquid crystal display device 1032 positioned below the main liquid crystal display device 1031 in the game board surface is provided in a state where the lower part of the display surface thereof is covered with a lower frame portion 1013 .

However, the main liquid crystal display device 1031 can also be provided such that a portion thereof is covered by a portion of the frame 1010 . Also, the sub-liquid crystal display device 1032 can be provided so that the entire display surface can be seen through the viewing window, that is, no part of the display surface is covered by the lower frame portion 1013 . A liquid crystal display device 1030 including the main liquid crystal display device 1031 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 functions as image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image.

The frame lower portion 1013 corresponds to the front operation panel 7 in FIG. 1, and is composed of an upper tray 1013a corresponding to the upper tray unit 8, a lower tray 1013b, and a base portion 1013c when viewed from the front. The upper tray 1013a is a front view of the upper receiving tray unit 8 in FIG. As the lower operation means 1041 of the operation means 1040 , the production button 13 is provided on the upper plate 1013 a , and the production button is provided in the middle part 1012 of the frame as the upper operation means 1042 .

A base portion 1013c of the lower frame portion 1013 corresponds to the lower portion of the front operation panel 7 in FIG. 1, and is provided with a handle 1050 (firing operation handle 15) when viewed from the front.

FIG. 36A shows an example in which the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is attached as identification information to the game board surface, more precisely, the game area 1021 of the game board. This is an example with "Fujimaru-kun" attached.
(5-2: Conventional problems)
Conventionally, in a pinball game machine, characters, graphics, symbols, three-dimensional shapes, combinations of these, or combinations of these and colors (marks of Article 2 of the Trademark Law) are placed outside the screen of the liquid crystal display device. Displaying identification information is performed. For example, there was a case where the model name was placed as a logo on the frame or board. It is also known that the model name logo has various lighting modes corresponding to the advance notice effect and the ready-to-reach effect. Furthermore, there is also known a device in which a model name logo is movable (or deformed/combined) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-175949).

When displaying identification information composed of characters, graphics, symbols, etc. on a game machine, it is basically free to arrange the constituent elements of the identification information. In addition, recent game machines have an increased displayable area when viewed from the front, and accordingly, the degree of freedom in arranging identification information is also increased. As a result, there is a strong tendency to use a display mode that emphasizes the effect as a means of presentation, and functions as original identification information (for example, trademark-like functions (self-other product identification function, source display function derived from the right function, quality Guarantee function, advertising function, etc.)) has deteriorated or disappeared. Also, depending on the mode of use, there is a risk of violating other laws such as the Unfair Competition Prevention Act.

Therefore, in the case of displaying the identification information on a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device of the pinball game machine, in another embodiment 5, by devising the "arrangement" of the elements constituting the identification information, and in another embodiment 6 , by devising the "lighting method" (such as the timing conditions for lighting) of the elements that make up the identification information. 8 solves this problem by devising the display mode of the specific identification information.

(5-3: About “Arrangement” of Elements Constituting Identification Information (Another Embodiment 5), FIGS. 52 and 53)
(Problems to be solved by the fifth embodiment)
The degree of identification power exhibited by the identification information differs depending on where it is arranged in the gaming machine. In addition, the identification information exerts its original identification power by being displayed in a continuous display mode of characters, figures, etc., and the arrangement and/or Depending on the luminescence mode (including color), there is a possibility that the intended distinguishing power cannot be exhibited. Conversely, depending on how the characters and the like that make up the identification information are arranged and/or how the lighting mode is added, there is a possibility that the display may be misidentified as displaying identification information different from the intended one.

The display form in which the identification information is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device is not very suitable as a location for arranging the identification information, because the identification information cannot effectively demonstrate its discriminating power unless it is displayed. Therefore, first, a display mode (another embodiment 5) in which the "arrangement" of the constituent elements constituting the identification information is appropriately arranged when the identification information is arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device will be described.

(5-4: Specific example of another embodiment 5)
FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b) exemplify a case where "Mr. Fujimaru" is arranged as identification information in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device (game board 1020 in this example). Of these, (a) is an example of a display mode in which the identification information is considered to exhibit the intended discriminating power, and (b) is an example of a display mode in which it is considered that the intended discriminating power cannot be exhibited.

In FIG. 52(a), each character of "Mr. Fujimaru" is arranged in one line as a series and displayed. Each character of "Mr. Fujimaru" is located at a position protruding forward from the game ball rolling surface of the game board when viewed in the front-rear direction of the game machine. Each character, which is the constituent element of "Mr. Fujimaru", has the same character size and the same font and is arranged at equal intervals. For this reason, "Fujimaru-kun sensei" is evaluated as a united and orderly one. Therefore, it is considered that FIG. 52(a) exhibits the discriminating power intended by the discriminating information "Mr. Fujimaru". In this sense, "OK" is written in FIG. 52(a).

On the other hand, in FIG. 52(b), "Fujimaru-kun teacher" is separated into two character strings, "Fujimaru-kun" and "Sensei", which are arranged in two stages. Moreover, the character string "Fujimaru-kun" in the upper row is arranged diagonally upward to the right, and the upper and lower character strings are not parallel to each other. For this reason, the character string "sensei" is in a state of being seen as completely "independent" from other character strings. In addition, the character string of "Sensei" is divided into single characters of "General" and "Army", and the character size of each character is increased. In addition, each character is at a position protruding forward from the game ball rolling surface of the game board when viewed in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the character string "Sensei" is in a state of being able to be recognized as being completely separate from the character string "Fujimaru-kun".

In addition, the character string “Fujimaru-kun” is displayed on the game board as a printed matter (cell sheet), the character string “Sensei” is provided in the center case, and a three-dimensional structure (logo) with a predetermined gap and distance from the game board ). Therefore, the character string "Sensei" and the character string "Fujimaru-kun" can be recognized as not being a continuous piece of identification information.

When the character string of "Fujimaru-kun" and the character string of "Sensei" are separated into a plurality of character strings as shown in FIG. The following problems may arise.
(i) The discriminating power of the whole "Mr. Fujimaru" is not functioning normally. For example, if this character string were identification information indicating the manufacturer or seller of the game machine, it would mean that the trademark function is not functioning properly (the intended identification power would not be exhibited obtain).
(ii) If there is another person's right regarding "Fujimaru-kun" or "Sensei" alone (for example, rights stipulated by law regarding intellectual property or rights related to legally protected interests), it is possible to infringe those rights. and the risk of sales, etc. increases. Therefore, for example, even if you are a person who has a legitimate right to use "Mr. should be avoided as much as possible because the risk of conflict with In this sense, "NG" is indicated in FIG. 52(b).

From the above, the following can be said. (i) Even if the intended specific identification information is displayed, if its constituent elements are divided into two or more lines, it will be difficult to evaluate the display as the intended specific identification information (original identification information). (ii) Even if the intended specific identification information is divided into two or more lines, and they are not parallel to each other, the display and evaluation of the original intended specific identification information It becomes difficult to be (iii) Therefore, in order to be evaluated as a display of the intended specific identification information (original identification information), it is preferable to write the components of the identification information in one line. If the identification information is displayed on more than one line, each string should be parallel to each other. In this way, it is preferable to adopt a display mode that takes the above points into consideration in order to prevent deterioration of distinguishability and infringement of rights of others.

FIG. 53 exemplifies a case where "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun" is arranged as identification information in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device (in this example, the upper part of the frame 1011). Of these, FIG. 53(a) is an example of a display mode in which it is considered that the identification information is capable of demonstrating the intended discriminative power, and FIG. For example.

In FIG. 53(a), each character of "AIUEO Fujimaru-kun" is displayed side by side in one line as a series. Each character, which is the constituent element of "Mr. Fujimaru", has the same character size and the same font and is arranged at equal intervals. For this reason, "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun" is evaluated as a united and orderly one. Therefore, it is considered that FIG. 53(a) demonstrates the intended identification power of the identification information "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun". In this sense, "OK" is written in FIG. 53(a).

On the other hand, in FIG. 53(b), "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun" is separated into five character groups of "a", "i", "u", "e", and "o Fujimaru-kun". It shows a visible example. The reason why it looks like that is that the spaces between the letters are not even, the longest between ``a'' and ``i'', the longest between ``i'' and ``u'', and between ``u'' and ``e''. and "ofujimaru-kun" are the second longest, and the character spacing of the characters forming "ofujimaru-kun" is the shortest. Only the character "a" exists on the left side, and the characters "i", "u", "e", and "O-Fujimaru-kun" on the right side are recognized as a cohesive group. In other words, ``a'' is excluded from recognition items as something else, and ``Iueo Fujimaru-kun'' is read as a meaningful group.

When the character strings are arranged discretely as shown in FIG. 53(b), the character strings "Iueo Fujimaru-kun", which are relatively close to each other, are displayed in an orderly manner. It will be evaluated as Therefore, the evaluation of the display of "Iueo Fujimaru-kun" changes to an evaluation of something different from the identification power that was intended to be exhibited by the identification information of "AIUEO Fujimaru-kun". In this case, the intended identification power cannot be exhibited, resulting in an inappropriate display mode. Therefore, the display mode as shown in FIG. 53(b) should be avoided. In this sense, "NG" is indicated in FIG. 53(b).

The above explanation was about the case where the character spacing of the characters that make up the identification information is not equal, but if the character size of the characters that make up the identification information is not equal size, etc.), if the fonts of the characters that make up the identification information are not unified (for example, only "A" is POP font, and the others are Gothic), and if the character colors are not unified ( For example, only "A" is red and the others are blue), similarly, the intended identification power cannot be exhibited, resulting in an inappropriate display mode.

From the above, the following can be said. (i) Even if the intended specific identification information is displayed, it is difficult to evaluate the display as the intended specific identification information (original identification information) if the character spacing, which is a constituent element of the display, is not equal. (ii) Even if the intended specific identification information is displayed, it is difficult to evaluate the display as the intended specific identification information if the sizes of the characters that are its constituent elements are not equal. (iii) Even if the intended specific identification information is displayed, if the fonts of the constituent characters are not the same, it will be difficult to evaluate the display as the intended specific identification information. (iv) Therefore, in order to be evaluated as a display of the intended specific identification information (original identification information), the character spacing of the characters, which are the components of the identification information, should be uniform. Unify the size of characters for specific identification information. Unify the font of characters for specific identification information. It is preferable to use a display mode that takes these points into consideration.

As described above, when identification information consisting of letters, figures, symbols, etc. is attached to a place other than the liquid crystal display device, such as a game board or a frame, it is possible to devise the arrangement of the constituent elements of the identification information. , it is possible to prevent misidentification of the identity, that is, the intended identity being evaluated as being another identity.

(5-3: Configuration Example 1 of Another Embodiment 5)
The fifth embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53 can be configured as described in (1) to (14) below. In that case, either of the following features (i) or (v) can be included.
(i) A gaming machine in which the first identification information representing at least part of the model name and the second identification information representing at least part other than the model name are arranged at positions visible to the player,
The first identification information is arranged in a three-dimensional shape, and the second identification information is arranged in a planar shape.

As a result, at least the first identification information, in the case where one or more of the character size, character spacing, and font is used as the criterion for judgment, even if there is a slight difference, the decoration of the same type of "three-dimensional shape" ( By having the common point that the first identification information is subjected to molding, processing), an effect can be expected that the risk that the one first identification information is divided into two or more pieces of identification information and read can be reduced. As a premise, it is divided into "model name" and "other than model name", but "model name (subject part)" is the first identification information, and "model name (subtitle part)" is the second identification information. A similar effect can also be expected.
(ii) In the gaming machine, all of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column, and the second identification information are arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns.
As a result, by arranging the second identification information in two or more rows or two or more columns, the degree of freedom of arrangement is increased, while the risk of being read by dividing the first identification information into two or more pieces of identification information can be reduced. expected to be effective.
(iii) In the gaming machine, the first identification information has substantially the same character spacing, and the second identification information has at least part of the character spacing different. As a result, the second identification information can be arranged more freely, while the first identification information can be divided into two or more pieces of identification information to reduce the risk of being read.
(iv) In the gaming machine, the first identification information has substantially the same character size, and the second identification information has at least part of the different character size.
As a result, the second identification information can be arranged more freely, while the first identification information can be divided into two or more pieces of identification information to reduce the risk of being read.
(v) In the gaming machine, the first identification information has substantially the same character font, and the second identification information has at least part of the character font different.
As a result, the degree of freedom of expression (variety of display modes) of the second identification information can be increased, and the risk of reading the first identification information as two or more pieces of identification information can be reduced.
As effects common to the above (i) to (v), “identification information with high importance (in identifying gaming machines)”, “identification information with low degree of freedom of expression (in relation to copyrights, trademarks, etc.) ”, “Identification information with high visibility (from the player’s point of view)”, etc. are maintained with high identification power by the above configuration, while other identification information is displayed in a different display mode (character size, character spacing, character color etc.), it is possible to maintain a high degree of freedom in arrangement and expression.

Specifically, it can be configured as follows.
(1) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
with
In a gaming machine in which first identification information representing at least part of the model name and second identification information representing at least part of the performance of the gaming machine are arranged at positions visible to a player,
The first identification information is information to be made more conspicuous than the second identification information,
The first identification information is arranged on the front frame,
The second identification information is arranged on the game board,
The first identification information is provided as a non-movable body (e.g., a logo) whose constituent elements are displayed in a row,
A gaming machine characterized by:
As a result, at least the first identification information is "displayed continuously (decoration, molding, By having the common point of being "processed", it is possible to expect an effect that the risk of reading the one piece of first identification information by dividing it into two or more pieces of identification information can be reduced.
(2) The game machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged as a movable body (button or other gimmick) of the front frame.
As a result, at least the first identification information, in the case where one or more of the character size, character spacing, and font is used as the criterion for determination, even if there are some differences, the "same base body (in the above example, the operation By having a common point that it is displayed (decorated, molded, processed, printed) in "means, etc.)", it is possible to reduce the risk that the one first identification information is divided into two or more pieces of identification information and read. expected to be effective.
(3) The game machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged on the front frame in the form of a plane (for example, printed matter).
(4) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged three-dimensionally (for example, as a three-dimensional structure) with respect to the front frame. In the configuration of (4), the second identification information may be arranged in a plane (feature (i) above).
(5) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged (arranged with unevenness) on the projecting portion of the front frame in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.
(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein all of the constituent elements of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column. In the configuration of (6), the second identification information may be arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns (feature (ii) above).
As a common effect so far, at least the first identification information has common points (three-dimensional/planar, molding/printing, written on the same base body, written in one row or one column) This can contribute to the reduction of marketing risks (for example, trademark risks) related to intellectual property rights.
(7) The first identification information is aligned arrangement (the upper line and the lower end line of the component row are substantially parallel), and the second identification information is the non-aligned arrangement (the upper end line and the lower end line of the component row are non-parallel). ), the game machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6). In the configuration of (7), in relation to the above (6), all of the components of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column, and the second identification information is arranged in two or more rows or two columns. It can be arranged in rows or more (feature (ii) above).
(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, wherein the first identification information has two or more lines, and the lines are arranged parallel to each other.
(9) The first identification information is unified so that intervals between its constituent elements (character intervals when the first identification information consists of character strings) are the same or substantially the same. The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8) above. In the configuration of (9), the second identification information may be configured such that at least some of the constituent elements have different intervals (feature (iii) above).
(10) The first identification information is unified so that the sizes of its constituent elements (the character sizes when the first identification information consists of character strings) are the same or substantially the same. The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (9) above. In the configuration of (10), the second identification information may have a configuration in which at least a part of the components of the second identification information have different sizes (feature (iv) above).
(11) The first identification information has the same or almost the same attributes related to the shape, pattern, and color of its constituent elements (the character size in the case of a character string, and the color and color scheme in the case of a non-character string). The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (10) above, characterized in that it is unified so that In the configuration of (11), the first identification information and the second identification information are composed of character strings, all the character fonts of the first identification information are substantially the same, and the second identification information is at least A part of the character fonts may be different (feature (v) above).
(12) The second identification information is common identification information at least partially common to the first identification information, and the common identification information is displayed on the image display means, but is displayed on the game board ( The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (11), characterized in that it is not arranged.
(13) The second identification information is common identification information at least partly in common with the first identification information in the arrangement of its constituent elements, and the common identification information is displayed on the image display means, The game machine according to any one of the above (1) to (11), characterized in that it is not displayed (arranged) on the game board surface.
(14) In the first identification information, at least a part of the arrangement of its constituent elements is arranged in the front frame as a movable body, and the first identification information is arranged in the first specific period (during the customer waiting demonstration presentation period). are in a position where the constituent elements are grouped together, and the first identification information can be moved to a position where the first identification information is separated during the second period (during the reach effect, during the advance notice effect). (13) The gaming machine according to any one of the items.

(5-4: Configuration example 2 of another embodiment 5)
In the configuration example 1 of the fifth embodiment, it is assumed that the first identification information is arranged on the front frame, but the first identification information is arranged on the center case (center decoration 48), that is, on the game board surface. can also be placed. This configuration is described as follows.

(1) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a center case provided on the game board;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
with
In a gaming machine in which first identification information representing at least part of the model name and second identification information representing at least part of the performance of the gaming machine are arranged at positions visible to a player,
The first identification information is information to be made more conspicuous than the second identification information,
The first identification information is arranged on the center case (game board surface),
The second identification information is arranged on the game board,
The first identification information is provided as a non-moving body (for example, a grounder) whose constituent elements are displayed in a row.
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) The game machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged as a movable body of the center case.
(3) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged two-dimensionally with respect to the center case (for example, the model name is printed).
(4) The game machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged three-dimensionally (for example, as a three-dimensional structure) with respect to the center case. In the configuration of (4), the second identification information may be arranged in a plane (feature (i) above).
(5) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged on a projecting portion of the center case in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.
(6) The above ( 1) The gaming machine according to any one of (5).
(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein all of the constituent elements of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column. In the configuration of (6), the second identification information may be arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns (feature (ii) above).
(7) The first identification information is aligned arrangement (the upper line and the lower end line of the component row are substantially parallel), and the second identification information is the non-aligned arrangement (the upper end line and the lower end line of the component row are non-parallel). ), the game machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6). In the configuration of (7), in relation to the above (6), all of the components of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column, and the second identification information is arranged in two or more rows or two columns. It can be arranged in rows or more (feature (ii) above).
(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, wherein the first identification information has two or more lines, and the lines are arranged parallel to each other.
(9) The first identification information is unified so that intervals between its constituent elements (character intervals when the first identification information consists of character strings) are the same or substantially the same. The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8) above. In the configuration of (9), the second identification information may be configured such that at least some of the constituent elements have different intervals (feature (iii) above).
(10) The first identification information is unified so that the sizes of its constituent elements (the character sizes when the first identification information consists of character strings) are the same or substantially the same. The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (9) above. In the configuration of (10), the second identification information may have a configuration in which at least a part of the components of the second identification information have different sizes (feature (iv) above).
(11) The first identification information has the same or almost the same attributes related to the shape, pattern, and color of its constituent elements (the character size in the case of a character string, and the color and color scheme in the case of a non-character string). The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (10) above, characterized in that it is unified so that In the configuration of (11), the first identification information and the second identification information are composed of character strings, all the character fonts of the first identification information are substantially the same, and the second identification information is at least A part of the character fonts may be different (feature (v) above).
(12) The second identification information is common identification information at least partially common to the first identification information, and the common identification information is displayed on the image display means, but is displayed on the game board ( The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (11), characterized in that it is not arranged.
(13) The second identification information is common identification information at least partly in common with the first identification information in the arrangement of its constituent elements, and the common identification information is displayed on the image display means, The game machine according to any one of the above (1) to (11), characterized in that it is not displayed (arranged) on the game board surface.
(14) In the first identification information, at least part of the arrangement of its constituent elements is arranged in the front frame as a movable body, and during the first specific period (during the customer waiting demonstration presentation period), the first identification information are located at a position where the constituent elements are grouped together, and the first identification information can be moved to a position where the first identification information is separated during the second period (during the reach effect, during the advance notice effect). (13) The gaming machine according to any one of the items.

<6. Another Embodiment 6>
(6-1: “How to Illuminate” Elements Constituting Identification Information (Another Embodiment 6), FIG. 54)
Next, a display mode (another embodiment 6) in which the "lighting method" of the constituent elements of the identification information arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device will be described.

(6-2: Problems to be solved by another embodiment 6)
First, there is the problem to be solved by the sixth embodiment. However, depending on the arrangement of characters and/or the lighting mode (including color) of the identification information, the intended identification may not be achieved. Conversely, depending on how the characters and the like that make up the identification information are arranged and/or how the lighting mode is added, there is a possibility that the display may be misidentified as displaying identification information different from the intended one.

In another embodiment 5, a means for solving the problem concerning the "arrangement" of the identification information has been described. To go.

In FIGS. 54(a), (b) and (c), when "Mr. Fujimaru" is placed as identification information in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device, some of the elements constituting the identification information are illuminated. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining under what environment or conditions it is appropriate to make a display mode. Here, "shining" does not only refer to cases in which light is emitted by itself, but may also be a concept that includes cases in which light is reflected and shines. The same applies to the expression "light up" by the light emission control means.

Furthermore, a part of the elements constituting the identification information (for example, a first element) is replaced with another element (for example, a second element) that also constitutes the identification information. The third component and below may be defined) and the expression "differentiate the way they shine" refers only to the state in which both are illuminated, for example, one is in a red light emission mode and the other is in a white light emission mode. Instead, it may include a state in which one is illuminated and the other is extinguished.

Further, even when the first component and the second component in the above example are in the same system color (for example, white), one of them has a higher luminance or illuminance than the other. It can mean state. Furthermore, when expressing the difference in how the first component and the second component are illuminated by terms indicating brightness such as luminance, illuminance, and brightness, the difference in the number of LEDs used to express the light emission mode ( The first component is N, the second component is M, N<M or N>M) and the difference in the type of LED used (the first component is a full-color LED, the second component is a single-color LED ) and the like.

As an example, when expressing that "the first component is made brighter than the second component by the light emission control means (or effect control means)", as a specific means, (i) the first component The number of LEDs located on the back side of the second component (LEDs include bullet-shaped LEDs, surface-mounted LEDs, chip-on-board, etc., but in this case refers to the number of LED chips) located on the back side of the second component (ii) the first component is a monochromatic (white) LED and the second component is a full color (RGB) LED;

Although the brightness depends on the performance difference of the LED, if the LED is almost the same (same price), the luminous efficiency of white light is "blue LED + yellow phosphor (= single color LED)" > "red LED + green LED+blue LED (=full-color LED)”>“near-ultraviolet LED+three-color phosphor (=composite LED)”. If the price difference is corrected as the penetration rate of LEDs changes in the future, it may be possible to appropriately select whether to use single-color LEDs or full-color LEDs as a method of "making bright light emission mode."

FIG. 54(a) is an example of a display mode in which the identification information is considered to exhibit the intended identification power, and has the same contents as in FIG. 52(a). That is, on the surface of the game board 1020, the identification information "Mr. Fujimaru" is displayed in a display mode in which the constituent characters are connected. However, in FIG. 54(a), the identification information is displayed while waiting for customers (demonstration waiting for start of demonstration or "customer waiting presentation (demo display)", especially during customer waiting presentation (demonstration display)). are dealing with That is, the pinball game machine shifts to the period of "demonstration display" on the condition that a certain period of time has passed since the symbols stopped. FIG. 54(a) differs from FIG. 52(a), which shows the display mode in the normal game state, in that it deals with the display after transitioning to this "demonstration display" period. However, the period of "demonstration display" is a period in which no game is played, and it is considered that the evaluation of the display of identification information is not much different from that in the normal game state. Considering the above points, FIG. 54(a) describes "(Demonstration) OK".

Next, FIG. 54(b) is a display example in which the identification information does not exhibit the intended identification power, in other words, it may be recognized as different identification information. FIG. 54(b) also deals with the display after shifting to the period of "demonstration display" as in FIG. 54(a). 54(a), the characters constituting the identification information ``Mr. However, in the case of FIG. 54(b), the character part of "sensei" in the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" emits light in a different color from the other character parts, and the other character parts emit light. It shines brighter than the letters. In this respect, it differs from FIG. 54(a).

There are various ways to brighten up the part that says "Sensei", but here we use a semi-transparent synthetic resin character plate ("Fujimaru-kun" character plate) placed behind it with a lamp (including LEDs). ), the brightness of the character portion of “Sensei” is higher than that of the character portion of “Fujimaru-kun”, and the luminescent color is different, so that the “Sensei” portion shines brightly. In addition, the example which employ|adopts LED is as having mentioned above.

The period during which the teacher's character is "shining" brighter than the Fujimaru-kun's character is the "demonstration display" period, that is, the period in which the design is stopped without the game being played (non-game period). Therefore, it is relatively long. In addition, the period of "demonstration display" may be a period in which the transition is made several times in a day, that is, it is a period of high frequency.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54(b), if the character part of "sensei" in the character string of the identification information "Mr. , the character part of this "sensei" is emphasized and recognized as existing alone. In other words, there is a strong possibility that the display of "teacher" will be judged and evaluated as "using it as a trademark." Considering that it is impossible to completely eliminate the possibility that others have rights to "teacher", the display mode as shown in FIG. 54(b) should be avoided. In this sense, "(Demonstrating) NG" is written in FIG. 54(b).

Next, the display example of FIG.54(c) is demonstrated. FIG. 54(c) is also the same as FIG. 54(b) in that the characters constituting the identification information "Mr. Fujimaru" are displayed as a "continuous" character string. 54(b) is also the same as that of the character string "Mr. However, in the case of FIG. 54(d), the identification information consisting of a character string in which the part of "Sensei" in "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is highlighted may not be displayed during the period of "demonstration display". It is different from FIG. 54(b) in that it is displayed during the period of "in progress of foretelling effect".

Consider the case where the character string "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" with the part of "teacher" shining is displayed around the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1030 so as to cover the upper side as the "preliminary effect" during the ready-to-win effect period. View. The purpose of displaying such a notice effect is to convey the "expectation of winning" to the player, and the main role of the notice effect is to implicitly notify the magnitude of the expectation of winning. Therefore, in the "notice production", rather than the meaning of "Fujimaru-kun teacher", (i) whether a character string with a shining part appeared, , (ii) what color the shining part was (whether it was blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern color, gold, or iridescent) is important. The former point (i), ``whether or not a character string with a shining part appears,'' regards the shining part of ``sensei'' as a mere light-emitting means. In addition, the latter point (ii) ``what color was the part that was shining?'' is that the part of the ``teacher'' that is emitting light is viewed as a means for announcing colors, and blue, yellow, green, red, and so on. Expectations increase in the order of D pattern color, gold color, and rainbow color.

In this way, during the "notice production", even if the character string in which the "teacher" part of "Fujimaru-kun teacher" is shining appears, the shining part indicates the expectation of winning. As a result, attention is directed to its existence and color, and attention is directed to the content itself of ``meaning the teacher'', and the shining part is no longer recognized. For this reason, even if a character string with a part of it glowing appears as a "notice effect", it is considered that the identification power of the character string will not become a problem. In this sense, FIG. 54(c) shows "(notice effect) OK".

From the above, the following can be said. (i) If only part of the specific identification information is lit or extinguished for a long time (or frequently), the part that is lit or extinguished will be emphasized, and will be evaluated as the identification information for only that part. . (ii) Turning off only part of the specific identification information or lighting it in a different light-emitting mode during the demonstration (during the customer-waiting demonstration stage) is different from turning on or off for a long period of time (or frequently) as described above. Not much difference. For this reason, it is evaluated as identification information for only the relevant part, and the degree of evaluation as a trademark-like usage mode increases. Therefore, it should be avoided that only a part of the specific identification information is extinguished or illuminated in a different light-emitting manner during the "demonstration (during the period of the customer-waiting demonstration)". (iii) In order to be evaluated as being the display of the intended specific identification information (original identification information) during the “demonstration (during the customer waiting demonstration stage)”, all of the specific identification information must be the same system. It is important to light (or turn off) the color. (iv) Under conditions such as cut-in notice during the ready-to-win effect period, under the condition that a specific effect occurs during pattern fluctuation, even if some of the constituent elements of the specific identification information are illuminated individually, the trademark for that part The threat of being seen as a mode of exploitative use diminishes. Therefore, under the condition that the specific effect is generated during the pattern variation, it is possible to individually light up some of the constituent elements of the specific identification information and display them. In addition, when the condition of when the specific effect occurs is eliminated, that is, when the specific effect does not occur, all of the specific identification information can be illuminated (or extinguished) in the same system color. identification information) is required to be evaluated as a display.

As described above, when identification information consisting of letters, figures, symbols, etc. is attached to a place other than a liquid crystal display device, such as a game board or a frame, a display in which a part of the elements constituting the identification information is illuminated When it is used as a mode, by devising the "lighting method" in the sense of under what conditions it is illuminated, it is possible to misidentify the identification information, that is, the intended identification information is evaluated as different identification information. can be prevented.

(6-2: Configuration example of another embodiment 6)
Another embodiment 6 described in FIG. 54 can be configured to include the following features (i) or (ii).

(i) A gaming machine in which first identification information composed of two or more characters and representing at least part of the model name and other second identification information are arranged so as to be visible to the player,
The first identification information is
The visibility changes depending on the light emitting means,
At least in the first period during the non-gaming period, all of the first identification information is made visible in the same system color,
The second identification information is
Visibility is changed by the light emitting means,
Part of the second identification information is visible in a system color different from that of the second identification information, at least in the first period during the non-game period.

As a result, when the first identification information and the second identification information are configured to be able to change their light emitting modes, the second identification information mainly plays a role and effect as a "drawing means" at least in the first period. However, it is expected that the first identification information is a "continuous" identification information, and the risk that one piece of first identification information is divided into two or more pieces of identification information and read can be reduced. can. In addition, although the light emitting modes of the first identification information and the second identification information in the first period are shown above, the light emitting modes of the first identification information may be divided between the first period and the second period. For example, with respect to the first identification information, which is the model name, the first period (for example, during symbol changes) is set to an individual light emission mode, so that it mainly serves as a "drawing means", and the second period (for example, during symbol stop). ) may be made to play a role of mainly "self-other product identification function" by adopting a unified light emission mode. As a premise, the "model name" is used as the first identification information, but the "model name (subject only)" may be used as the first identification information, or the "function name" may be used as the first identification information to achieve the same effect. can be expected.

(ii) in the gaming machine,
The first identification information is visible in the same system color during the reproduction of the first BGM,
At least part of the second identification information is visible in a different system color during reproduction of the first BGM.

As a result, when the first identification information is configured to be able to change its light emission mode, it mainly plays a role and effect as a "drawing means" at least in the second period, and at least in the first period, An effect of reducing the risk that the single first identification information is divided into two or more pieces of identification information and read can be expected. In the above description, the light emission modes of the first identification information and the second identification information during the reproduction of the first BGM (first period) are shown. The light emission modes during reproduction (second period) may be divided. For example, for the first identification information, which is the model name, the first period has an individual light emission mode (for example, if the pattern is changing and the theme song is playing, the light emission mode is in tune with the song). Plays a role as a "directive means", and in the second period (for example, when the pattern is stopped), it has a unified lighting mode (lighting mode that is not synchronized with the music), mainly serving as a "self-other product identification function". You may do so. As a premise, the "model name" is used as the first identification information, but the "model name (subject only)" may be used as the first identification information, or the "function name" may be used as the first identification information to achieve the same effect. can be expected.

Specifically, in addition to the features of configuration example 1 or configuration example 2 of the fifth embodiment, or as independent features, the following configuration can be provided.
(1) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
and
Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information when the starting means detects the game ball;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate a winning game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of game symbols and notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of the game symbols;
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, variation pattern determination for selectively determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns including a reach variation pattern for specifying a reach effect for notifying the lottery result via a reach state. means and
a symbol display control means for controlling the variation display operation of the game symbols in the symbol display means based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means;
A gaming machine configured to be capable of executing and controlling the winning game after the game symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific display mode on the symbol display means,
It has identification information arranged and visibly displayed on the front frame or the game board surface (center case),
having identification information light emitting means capable of lighting all or part of the constituent elements of the identification information;
The identification information light-emitting means causes the components of the identification information to illuminate in the same system color during a first period (during non-demonstration performance) during which the variable display operation of the game symbols is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) the identification information includes first identification information composed of two or more characters and representing at least part of a model name, and other second identification information;
The visibility of the first identification information is changed by the light emitting means, and all of the first identification information is visible in the same system color at least in the first period during the non-game period,
Visibility of the second identification information is changed by the light emitting means, and part of the second identification information is visible in a system color different from the second identification information at least in a first period during the non-game period. (feature (i) above),
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that:
(3) On condition that the variable display operation of the game symbols is not performed for a predetermined period of time or more, the image display means shifts from the first period during which the symbols are stopped to the second period of the customer waiting demonstration effect mode. It has a demo production mode transition means that makes the screen of the demo display,
The identification information light emitting means individually illuminates the constituent elements of the identification information during the second period (during the customer waiting demonstration mode) while the symbols are stopped, or emits one or more of the constituent elements of the identification information. The gaming machine according to (2) above, characterized in that the lights are individually illuminated.
(4) The identification information emitting means emits the identification information during a period other than the period during the ready-to-win effect (during the specific effect during the variation of the variable display operation of the game symbols) (for example, during the non-variable display operation). The game machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, characterized in that the constituent elements are illuminated in the same system color.
(5) The identification information light emitting means, during the ready-to-win effect (during the specific effect during the variation of the variable display operation of the game symbols), individually illuminates one or more of the constituent elements of the identification information. The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that:
(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, characterized in that the identification information light-emitting means illuminates the components of the identification information in the same system color while the winning game is occurring.
(7) having sound effect means for reproducing a sound effect (BGM) under a predetermined condition during the winning game;
The identification information light emitting means illuminates the game symbols according to the melody of the sound presentation during the reproduction of the sound presentation (BGM), and the constituent elements of the identification information are the same after the end of the sound presentation (BGM). The game machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6), characterized in that the game machine is illuminated in a system color.
In the configuration of (7), the first identification information is visible in the same system color during reproduction of the first BGM, and at least a part of the second identification information is visible in a different system color during reproduction of the first BGM. It can be configured as

<7. Example of another embodiment 5, 6>
55 and 56 show examples (a) to (g) of the fifth and sixth embodiments in list form. FIGS. 57 to 62 and 63 are enlarged views of examples (a) to (g). In these, "Fujimaru-kun" is treated as an example of specific identification information (first specific identification information).

In the examples (a) to (g), three cases (a) (b) ( c) is shown. In case (a) of "○ column", it is thought that "Fujimaru-kun" plays a role as identification information, and in case (b) of "△ column" it is judged whether it plays a role as identification information. The case (c) in the "x column" is considered not to play a role as identification information.

(7-1: Spacing (Embodiment (a), FIGS. 55 and 57)
Example (a) (see FIG. 57) illustrates how to set the "interval" between the characters of the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun".

In the embodiment (a), (a) shows the case where the characters of the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" are arranged at equal intervals (each character has the same size and font). Since the character spacing is the same, "Fujimaru-kun" in (a) is recognized as a continuous character string. Therefore, (a) is considered to play a role as identification information, so it belongs to the "○ column".

FIG. 57(b) shows an example in which the character spacing between "Fujimaru" and "kun" is widened in the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun". This results in the same result as when ``fujimaru'' is set as the first display part and ``kun'' or ``ku'' is set as the second display portion, and is intentionally divided. It is no longer recognized as a cohesive character string "Fujimaru-kun", and "Fujimaru" is barely evaluated as meaningful.

FIG. 57(c) shows an example in which the character spacing between the characters "FUJIMARU-kun" and "Maru-kun" is widened in the character string that constitutes "FUJIMARU-kun". It is not recognized at all as a cohesive character string "Fujimaru-kun". The result is the same as if "Fuji" was the first display part and "Maru-kun" was the second display part, and they were divided in a meaningless manner.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (a), when the components (character strings) of the specific identification information are divided into the first display portion and the second display portion, the display areas of the first display portion and the second display portion length (or number of characters) should be the same or nearly the same. Further, even when the first display portion and the second display portion are divided, the character spacing of the first display portion and the character spacing of the second display portion must be should be approximately the same.

(7-2: Regarding how to divide when making two or more lines (Example (b), Fig. 55, Fig. 58)
Example (b) (see FIG. 58) exemplifies how to divide the character string constituting "Fujimaru-kun" into two or more lines.

In the embodiment (b), in (a), the character string constituting ``Fujimaru-kun'' is divided in the middle into ``Fujimaru'' and ``Kun'', which have the same number of characters, and are arranged in two upper and lower rows on the same game board. (Each letter has the same size and font). Therefore, although "Fujimaru-kun" in (a) is arranged in two lines, it is recognized as a group of characters that are coherent as a whole. Therefore, (a) is considered to play a role as identification information, so it belongs to the "○ column".

In FIG. 58(b), the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" is divided into "Fujimaru" and "kun", and while "Fujimaru" is arranged in the front frame, "kun" is arranged on the game board. That is, the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" is arranged across the front frame and the game board surface. Therefore, "Fujimaru" and "kun" are emphasized as separate characters, and the character string "Fujimaru-kun" is not recognized as a united character string.

In FIG. 58(c), the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" is divided into "Fujimaru-ku" and "N", and "Fujimaru-Ku" is arranged on the front frame and "N" is arranged on the game board. This is also an example of arranging the character strings that make up ``Fujimaru-kun'' across the front frame and the game board surface, so ``Fujimaru-kun'' and ``N'' are emphasized as different things, and ``Fujimaru-kun'' is used. It is not recognized as a cohesive string.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (b), when the components (character strings) of the specific identification information are divided into the first display portion and the second display portion, they are arranged so as not to straddle the front frame and the game board surface ( placed on either side). If it is necessary to divide the elements (character strings) of the constant identification information into the first display section and the second display section and arrange them so as to straddle the front frame and the game board surface, the first display section and the second It is necessary that the sizes (or the number of characters) of the display areas of the two display units are the same or substantially the same.

(7-3: Sense of distance when using two or more lines (Example (C), Figs. 55 and 59)
Example (c) (see FIG. 59) exemplifies the sense of distance when the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" is made up of two or more lines.

In the embodiment (c), in (a), the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are divided into "Fujimaru" and "kun", which have the same number of characters, and are arranged in two upper and lower rows on the same game board (each same size and font). Specifically, “Fujimaru” and “Kun” are placed above the same liquid crystal display device 1032 . Therefore, the distance between "fujimaru" and "kun" is relatively short, and the visual sense of distance is also recognized as coherent between the two lines. Therefore, (a) is considered to play a role as identification information, so it belongs to the "○ column".

FIG. 59(b) divides the character string that constitutes "Fujimaru-kun" into "Fujimaru" and "kun", with "Fujimaru" on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1032 and "kun" on the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 1032. placed inside. Because they are placed in different materials, the sense of distance between "Fujimaru" and "Kun" is strengthened. Therefore, "Fujimaru" and "kun" are emphasized as separate characters, and the character string "Fujimaru-kun" is not recognized as a united character string.

FIG. 59(c) divides the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" into "Fujimaru" and "kun", with "Fujimaru" on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1032 and "kun" on the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1032. are placed in Since they are arranged apart from each other on both sides of the liquid crystal display device 1032, the sense of distance between "Fujimaru" and "kun" is very long. Therefore, it will not be recognized as a cohesive character string "Fujimaru-kun".

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (c), when the components (character strings) of the specific identification information are divided into the first display unit and the second display unit, the upper side and the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1032 (or the liquid crystal display device) 1032 (left side and right side of 1032). In addition, in order to make it easier to recognize as a whole, it is not divided into two-dimensional notation (for example, printing on the surface, attachment of printed matter) and three-dimensional notation (structure), but unified into one of them.

(7-4: Parallel feeling when using two or more lines (Example (d), Fig. 56, Fig. 60)
Example (d) (see FIG. 60) exemplifies parallelism when the character string constituting "Fujimaru-kun" has two or more lines.

In the embodiment (d), in (a), the character strings forming ``Fujimaru-kun'' are divided into ``Fujimaru'' and ``kun'', and ``Fujimaru'' is arranged in an inclined manner on the same game board surface, and ``kun'' is displayed. is placed in the same direction as the slant of "Fujimaru" (the size and font of each character are the same). For this reason, the two character string portions of "Fujimaru" and "Kun" are recognized as being cohesive. Therefore, (a) is considered to play a role as identification information, so it belongs to the "○ column".

In FIG. 60(b), character strings forming "Fujimaru-kun" are arranged in an arch shape (along the arc of the launch rail) on the game board surface. Therefore, the degree to which ``Fujimaru'' and ``kun'' are recognized as separate characters is weakened, and the character string ``Fujimaru-kun'' is likely to be recognized as a coherent character string.

In FIG. 60(c), the character strings forming "Fujimaru-kun" are divided into "Fujimaru" and "Kun", and "Fujimaru" is placed obliquely on the same game board. It is arranged in a different direction from the slope. Specifically, "Fujimaru" is arranged in an arched manner (along the arc of the launch rail) and inclined, and "Kun" is arranged laterally, that is, at an angle of inclination of zero. Therefore, the sense of parallelism between "Fujimaru" and "kun" is lost, and the character string "Fujimaru-kun" is not recognized as a united character string.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (d), when the components (character strings) of the specific identification information are divided into the first display section and the second display section, they need to be arranged in parallel with each other. In other words, when it is desired to arrange the device in an inclined manner, the first display portion is arranged in an inclined manner, and the second display portion is inclined in the same direction as the inclination of the first display portion. Alternatively, the first display portion and the second display portion may be inclined in an arch shape, that is, along concentric circles.

(7-5: Character Size (Embodiment (E), Figs. 56 and 61)
In FIG. 61(a), for "Fujimaru-kun" placed in the front frame, the size and spacing of the characters forming "Fujimaru-kun" are made the same to give a sense of unity.

In FIG. 61(b), the character size is gradually reduced in the order of "wisteria", "circle", and "kun", and the character spacing also changes from large to small in this order. Therefore, the sense of unity is weakened.

In FIG. 61(c), the character size of "Wisteria" is large, and the character size of "Maru-kun" is reduced to about 1/2 of "Wisteria" in vertical size. If the character sizes are extremely irregular like this, the character string "Fujimaru-kun" will not be recognized as a cohesive character string.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (e), it is necessary to unify the size of each component (character) that constitutes the specific identification information. Moreover, when changing the size of each component (character) which comprises specific identification information, they are made small or large at equal intervals.

(7-6: Regarding Character Fonts (Example (F), Figs. 56 and 62)
In FIG. 62(a), regarding "Fujimaru-kun" placed in the front frame, the font (character style) and color of the characters constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are made the same to give a sense of unity. Any font can be used. For example, the font shown in FIG. 79 can be used.

FIG. 62(b) displays "Fujimaru-kun" in two lines by using a bold font for "Fujimaru" and a thin font for "kun". In other words, although the font style and color are not unified like in (a), a line (frame line) is placed around the entire two lines so that the two lines can be seen as a unit in order to give a sense of unity. ing. A sense of unity can be produced by providing the enclosure in this way.

FIG. 62(c) displays "Fujimaru-kun" in one line by using a thin font for "wisteria", a bold font for "round", and a thin font for "n". As in (a), uniformity of character style and uniformity of color is not achieved. Also, there is no enclosing line (frame line) for giving a sense of unity.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (f), in order to create a sense of unity, it is necessary to unify the character style and color of each component (character) constituting the specific identification information. If the character style or color of some of the constituent elements (characters) that make up the specific identification information is different, (i) Enclosing lines (including solid lines or boundary lines due to unevenness of structures) ), (ii) the same background color, and (iii) the same decoration (for example, each character is silver-plated).

(7-7: Regarding light emission mode (Example (G), Fig. 56, Fig. 63)
Example (g) (see FIG. 63) exemplifies the lighting mode when the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" is illuminated. The term "luminescence mode" used herein includes a form that emits light by itself and a form that is brightly illuminated from another source.

FIG. 63(a) deals with the display during the "normal game state" period or the "demonstration display" period. The identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is displayed in the front frame as a continuous character string.

FIG. 63(b) deals with display during the period of "during advance notice effect" (during symbol fluctuation). That is, FIG. 63(b) illustrates a situation in which the character portion of "kun" in "Fujimaru-kun" shines brighter than the other character portions of "Fujimaru" during the period of "prediction effect in progress". ing. The purpose of the notice effect is to convey the ``expectation of winning'' to the player, and when the character part of ``kun'' shines, attention will be directed to the shining itself and the color, and ``kun'' Consciousness does not go to the meaning of. Therefore, there is no fear that it will be recognized as a trademark usage mode.

On the other hand, FIG. 63(c) deals with the display after shifting to the period of "standby", ie, "demonstration display" (symbols stopped ≠ jackpot). The character part of "kun" in "Fujimaru-kun" shines brighter than the other character part of "Fujimaru". Since this "demonstration display" period is a non-game period, there is a risk that the use of the character "kun" will be recognized as a trademark usage mode.

From the above, the following can be said. (i) At a predetermined timing, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the entire specific identification information emits light in the same system color. (ii) It is possible to adopt a display mode in which the entire specific identification information is lit (or extinguished) at a predetermined timing. Here, the "predetermined timing" refers to a timing with a certain width, which may be during symbol stoppage (not during the jackpot) or during symbol variation. That is, while the pattern is stopped (not during the jackpot), it refers to the period that occupies at least half of the time (that is, the timing with a width), and during the pattern fluctuation), the period that occupies at least half of the time. (that is, timing with a width). (iii) Specifically, the entire specific identification information can be uniformly lit while the symbols are stopped, and at least part of the specific identification information can be blinked (or lit in a different color) while the symbols are changing.

<8. Other Embodiments 7 and 8>
(8-1: Conventional problems)
Conventionally, in some pinball game machines, the model name is arranged as a logo on the front frame or the game board surface. It is also known that the model name logo has various lighting modes corresponding to the advance notice effect and the ready-to-reach effect. Furthermore, there is also known a device in which a model name logo is movable (or deformed/combined) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-175949).

When displaying identification information composed of characters, figures, symbols, etc. on a game machine, where to place the identification information, whether to place two or more pieces of identification information, and how to display it is free. In addition, in recent gaming machines, the displayable area when viewed from the front is increasing, and along with this, the degree of freedom in the arrangement position and the number of pieces of identification information is also increasing. As a result, depending on the arrangement location, the number of arrangements, or the display mode, the function as the original identification information may be weakened, and there is a risk of being misidentified as different identification information.

Therefore, in another embodiment 7, by making the specific identification information arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device of the pinball game machine conspicuous, and in another embodiment 8, in addition to the specific identification information, a non-specific identification This problem is solved by making the non-identifying information less prominent when the information is present.

(8-2: Evaluation criteria)
First, let's talk about what can be the criteria for evaluation.

(Priority of location)
As shown in FIG. 36(A), when the frame 1010 is viewed from the side, the frame upper portion 1011 protrudes toward the front side with respect to the frame middle portion 1012 and the frame lower portion 1013, and the frame upper front surface 1011a It is positioned so as to protrude forward from the front surfaces of the frame middle portion 1012 and the frame bottom portion 1013 . As a result, the gaming machine strongly asserts the existence of its own gaming machine to the player by projecting the frame upper part 1011 and making the frame upper front face 1011a approach the player side.

FIG. 36(A) shows the height position A of the person's line of sight when the trader or player stands near the gaming machine, and FIG. It shows the height position B of the player's line of sight when the player is sitting. When a trader purchases a game machine, it is common for the game machine to be placed in the test room in the same manner as the hall, and the game machine is selected while standing, and the player sits down to test the game. Similarly, when a player plays with a game machine in a hall, he/she selects a game table while standing and starts playing while sitting. Since the situation in this area is the same between the trader and the player, the explanation below will focus on the case where the game machine is seen from the player's point of view.

When a player searches for a gaming machine in a hall, the player observes and confirms the gaming machine while standing. At this time, the player's line of sight is at position A in FIG. 36(A). This line-of-sight height position A is particularly close to the frame upper portion 1011 of the frame 1010 of the gaming machine. Therefore, when looking at the game machine in a "standing state", the degree of stimulus that stimulates the player's eyes is the highest, since the frame 1010, which is easily visible even from a distance, especially the upper part of the frame 1011, is easily noticeable. Become. In addition to this point, in the case of the frame upper part 1011 shown in FIG. 36(A), the frame upper part front face 1011a is structured to protrude to the front side. In the case of a game machine with this structure, the frame upper front face 1011a, which projects forward, is particularly noticeable among the front faces. Therefore, the upper frame portion 1011 having a structure in which the upper frame front portion 1011a protrudes has a higher degree of stimulation than the upper frame portion 1011 having a structure in which the frame upper portion front portion 1011a does not protrude.

Viewed from the line-of-sight height position A, the next eye-catching part is the middle part 1012 of the frame, and furthermore, the area of the game board 1020 which is the inner part surrounded by the frame 1010, the main liquid crystal display device 1031, and the sub-liquid crystal display. It is assumed that it will be directed to the display surface of device 1032 .

Next, when the player sits down, the player's line of sight is at height position B (FIG. 36(B)) facing the game board 1020 . At this time, the frame upper front face 1011a becomes invisible. The part that draws attention is the middle of the front of the game machine, and the display area of the frame middle part 1012 and the area of the game board 1020 that is the inner part surrounded by the frame 1010, that is, the game area 1021 and the non-game area 1022 are eye-catching. Furthermore, the display on the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 becomes easy to see, and furthermore, the surfaces of the lower operation means 1041 and the upper operation means 1042, which are the operation means 1040, are easy to see. It is presumed that it will be easy to attach to

On the other hand, there are cases where it is desired to arrange or display identification information consisting of letters, graphics, or symbols so as to stand out on the gaming machine. This is not only the case of displaying the "model name, manufacturer name, etc." It also includes the case of displaying "the name of a premium character or the main character of a story" that seems to be, and the case where the display mode can be seen as a design to decorate an article.

Whether or not the part of the game machine that is suitable as the “placement location (placement or display location)” of such identification information is easy to see at the line-of-sight height position A in the standing position (the player's eyes (1) frame 1010 (frame upper part 1011, frame middle part 1012, frame lower part 1013), (2) game board 1020 (game area 1021, non-game area 1022), (3) liquid crystal Display device 1030 (main liquid crystal display device 1031, sub liquid crystal display device 1032), (4) operation means 1040 (lower operation means (effect button) 1041, upper operation means 1042), (1) (2) (3) In the order of (4), the "identification information transmission power (power equivalent to trademark index power)" becomes stronger. In other words, in the order of frame>game board>liquid crystal display device>operation means, the ability to transmit the identification information becomes stronger, and the "predominance" as the arrangement position becomes higher.

(order of magnitude)
Next, consider from the viewpoint of the “size” of the identification information, that is, the display size. The identification power or information transmission effect of identification information (the degree of self-appeal of identification information) becomes stronger as the identification information is displayed in a larger size. Therefore, regarding "size", the larger the size, the higher the "predominance". For example, if the size is classified into three categories of "large", "medium", and "small", the identification information has stronger identification power as the size is described earlier. That is, the degree of self-appeal of the identification information increases in the order of small<medium<large size, and the "predominance" in determining the display mode increases.

(Priority of display period)
Next, consider from the viewpoint of the “display period” during which the identification information is displayed. Considering the degree of identification power or information transmission effect (degree of self-appeal of identification information) of identification information in terms of the length of the "display period", the longer the displayed period, the stronger the degree of self-appeal of identification information. Therefore, when determining the display mode with respect to the "display period", the longer the displayed period, the more advantageous, that is, the higher the "predominance".

In the case of a gaming machine, there are two modes of displaying identification information: one in which the identification information is displayed "always" for a display period, and the other in which the identification information is displayed "temporarily" under specific conditions. Comparing the two, the degree of identification is stronger when the identification information is displayed "always" than when it is displayed "temporarily".

The former case of "constant" display includes a static display mode and a dynamic display mode as follows. (a) "Static display mode" in which the identification information is drawn two-dimensionally or three-dimensionally so that it exists constantly, (b) When the identification information is illuminated by a built-in lamp or emits light by itself "Static display mode" in which the identification information is lit and the identification information is continuously brightly displayed (continuous lighting); Examples include a “dynamic display mode” that is displayed intermittently.

In the latter case where identification information is displayed "temporarily" under specific conditions, there is a case where identification information is displayed on the screen of image display device 1030 for a predetermined period under predetermined conditions. For example, (a) on the condition that the lottery is won during the ready-to-win effect period, during the ready-to-win effect, the identification information is displayed as a specific effect with an extremely high expectation of winning, or (b) the game is played for a certain time. On the condition that the identification information is displayed on the demonstration screen generated on the image display device 1030, or (c) during the opening period or ending period during the jackpot game, the identification information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 1030. Information may be displayed.

As for the "display period" of the identification information, the degree of "temporary" display, that is, the higher the display frequency, the stronger the degree of self-appeal of the identification information. In other words, the degree of self-appeal of identification information becomes stronger when the degree of “temporary” display is higher than when it is displayed less frequently, and the degree of self-appeal of identification information becomes highest when it is displayed “always”. Become stronger. Therefore, regarding the “display period” of the identification information, the order of precedence is always>temporary (high frequency)>temporary (low frequency).

In the case of "temporary" display by the image display device 1030, the identification information is displayed as an image on the screen, so the identification information does not necessarily have to maintain the same display mode during the displayed period. . For example, if the identification information consists of a plurality of characters, it is possible to have a ``static display mode'' in which those characters are displayed ``temporarily'' while maintaining a certain size, arrangement, and shape, or `` Although it is a "temporary" display, it may be a "dynamic display mode" in which the size, shape, etc. change during display.

In short, the degree of self-appeal of the identification information is stronger when it is displayed "always" than when it is displayed "temporarily". As for the period during which the identification information is displayed, the more the degree of “temporary” display (display frequency), the stronger the degree of self-appeal of the identification information. The degree of appeal becomes the strongest.

(Summary of evaluation criteria)
To summarize the above-mentioned arrangement location, size, and display period, when it is desired to provide identification information on a game machine and make it stand out, the priority of the display mode is where and how the identification information should be displayed effectively and advantageously. , the following three evaluation criteria (judgment scales) 1 to 3 are considered (see the description at the bottom of FIG. 36(A)).
(Evaluation Criteria 1: Location)
As for the "arrangement location" of the identification information, the degree of self-appeal of the identification information increases in the order of frame>game board>liquid crystal display>operation means, and the priority also increases in this order. This order of precedence is followed when determining the display mode of the "arrangement location".
(Evaluation Criteria 2: Size)
As for the "size" of the identification information, when the display size is classified into "large", "medium", and "small", the degree of self-appeal of the identification information increases in the order of large>medium>small. Therefore, when determining the display mode for the "size" of the identification information, this order of precedence is followed.
(Evaluation criteria 3: display period)
As for the "display period" of the identification information, the degree of self-appeal of the identification information becomes stronger as the degree of display increases, and becomes the strongest when the identification information is displayed "always". Therefore, regarding the "display period" of the identification information, the degree of self-appeal increases in the order of constant>temporary (high frequency)>temporary (low frequency). obey.

(8-3: Embodiment in Which Specific Identification Information Arranged in a Place Other than the Screen of the Liquid Crystal Display Appears Conspicuous (Another Embodiment 7), FIGS. 64 and 65)
A description will be given of a display mode (another embodiment 5) in which the identification information arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device is conspicuous by appropriately arranging it. This section deals with specific identification information (low trademark risk) and non-specific identification information (high trademark risk or unknown trademark risk). Trademark risk refers to the degree of fear of trademark infringement due to being evaluated as trademark use. Both specific identification information and non-specific identification information are types of identification marks, and the only difference is the trademark risk. Therefore, "specific identification information and non-specific identification information" can also be referred to as "first specific identification information and second specific identification information".

In the example of FIG. 64, for ease of understanding, the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is used as the first specific identification information, and the subtitle "Kanshin-juku" is used as the second specific identification information. However, due to the difference in trademark risk, it is also possible to treat the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" as specific identification information and the subtitle "Kanshin-juku" as non-specific identification information.

In FIG. 64(a), the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun", which is the first specific identification information, is arranged in the upper part of the frame 1011, and the subtitle "Kanshin-juba", which is the second specific identification information, is arranged on the game board. ing. The subtitle "Rewarding the Good and Punishing the Bad" is arranged below the liquid crystal display device 1032 by dividing it into "Rewarding the Good" and "Rewarding the Bad". In the example of FIG. 64(a), the model name ``Fujimaru-kun'' is above the subtitle ``Kanshin-juku''. is large, so "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is easily recognized as the model name.

On the other hand, in FIG. 64(b), the arrangement relationship of the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information is reversed, and the second specific identification information, which is the subtitle "Kanshin, Puba", is displayed in the upper part of the frame 1011. The model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun", which is the first specific identification information, is arranged on the game board surface, precisely above the liquid crystal display device 1032 . In addition, since the size of "Mr. Fujimaru" is smaller than that of "Kanshin Jaku", it is difficult to recognize "Mr. Fujimaru" as a model name.

Therefore, when arranging the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information, it is necessary to display the first specific identification information to be conspicuous above and larger than the second specific identification information. Also, when arranging the identification information and the second specific identification information, it is necessary to display the first specific identification information to be conspicuous above and larger than the second specific identification information.

In FIG. 65(a), the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun", which is the first specific identification information, is arranged in the upper frame 1011, and the non-specific identification information "fate" is arranged on the game ball rolling surface of the game board surface. ing. Then, by providing the second specific identification information "Horror Hell Demon" on the surface of the game board that is three-dimensional and bulging forward, it is positioned closer to the front than the non-specific identification information "fate". are placed. The frame that surrounds the 'Horror of the Hell Demon God' indicates that it bulges out toward the front. The font sizes are in the following relationship: "Mr. Fujimaru" > "The Phantom of Hell Hell" > "Fate", with "Mr. Fujimaru" having the largest size. Therefore, "Mr. Fujimaru" is likely to be recognized as the model name.

On the other hand, in FIG. 65(b), the arrangement relationship of the first specific identification information, the second specific identification information, and the non-specific identification information is the same as in FIG. > "Fate" > "Horror of Hell Hell", and the size of "Horror of Hell" is smaller than "Fate". The non-specific identification information "fate" is formed on a three-dimensional surface protruding forward, as indicated by a frame, and the second specific identification information is arranged closer to the front. Therefore, if it is one of the identification information, it is difficult for the second specific identification information, "Horror of Hell", to be recognized as identification information.

Therefore, when arranging the first specific identification information, the second specific identification information, and the non-specific identification information, that is, in order for both the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information to be recognized as identification information, It is necessary to make the second specific identification information larger than the non-specific identification information, or arrange the second specific identification information on the front side of the non-specific identification information (for example, to make it three-dimensional).

(8-4: Embodiment in which non-specific identification information is not conspicuous (another embodiment 8), FIG. 66)
A display mode (another embodiment 8) in which non-specific identification information is made inconspicuous for identification information arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device will be described. Here, the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is treated as specific identification information (low trademark risk), and the manufacturer's logo (symbol) is treated as non-specific identification information (high trademark risk or unknown trademark risk). combination of marks and letters, symbol marks only, letters only). The logo used here is a combination of the characters "dot mark" and "FUJI" shown in FIG. 66, but is abbreviated as "FUJI" for convenience of explanation.

66(a) and 66(b), the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun", which is the identification information, is arranged above the crystal display device 1032 on the game board surface, and the logo "FUJI" of the non-specific identification information is placed on the liquid crystal display device 1032. The forms that appear on the screen are exemplified. Family crests and logos of manufacturing companies are often registered as trademarks or other registrations, and if they are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1032 for a long time, it seems that the registered trademarks are being used. . In particular, as shown in FIG. 66(c), when the non-specific identification information has a certain size or more (for example, a diameter of 5 cm or more) and is always visible, or as shown in FIG. When the identification information is arranged on the front frame or when it is represented as a three-dimensional structure, it is likely to be seen as such.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the logo "FUJI" is normally displayed in such a manner that only a portion of it is visible. Then, if necessary, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the area where the logo "FUJI" appears in the screen temporarily increases, and finally the entire logo "FUJI" is visible. Make it possible to change the configuration. If the display of non-identifying information is temporary in this way, even a logo is less likely to be seen as a trademark usage mode.

Therefore, when dealing with specific identification information with low trademark risk and non-specific identification information with high trademark risk, the non-specific identification information should be made inconspicuous. For this purpose, (i) the non-specific identification information is not arranged in the front frame, (ii) the non-specific identification information is arranged in a two-dimensional display mode instead of a three-dimensional structure on the game board, (iii) the game board (iv) The non-specific identification information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1032 without a display mode in which the non-specific identification information is always displayed (arranged as a three-dimensional structure); (v) It is necessary that the non-specific identification information should not be arranged as a complete product, but should be made visible as a complete product during production.

(9: Configuration Examples of Alternative Embodiments 7 and 8)
The seventh and eighth alternative embodiments described in FIGS. 64, 65 and 66 can be specifically configured as follows.

(1) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
It has specific identification information (first identification information) and non-specific identification information (second identification information) that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is arranged in the front frame,
The specific identification information is arranged in the front frame above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) The game machine according to (1) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(3) a body frame that holds a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is arranged on the game board,
The specific identification information is arranged in the front frame above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(4) The game machine according to (3) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(5) a body frame that holds a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is configured to be displayed on the image display device,
The specific identification information is arranged in the front frame above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(6) The game machine according to (5) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(7) a body frame that holds a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
an effect control means for generating an effect on the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is displayed on the image display device,
The specific identification information is arranged in the front frame above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is always visibly displayed, and the non-specific identification information is displayed during the performance generated by the performance control means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(8) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a center case provided on the game board surface;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is arranged in the front frame,
The specific identification information is arranged in the center case above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(9) The game machine according to (8) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(10) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a center case provided on the game board surface;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is arranged on the game board,
The specific identification information is arranged in the center case above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(11) The game machine according to (9) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(12) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a center case provided on the game board surface;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
the non-specific identification information is displayed on the image display means;
The specific identification information is arranged in the center case above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(13) The game machine according to (12) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(14) a body frame that holds a game board having a game area provided on its front surface;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
an effect control means for generating an effect on the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is displayed on the image display device,
The specific identification information is arranged in the center case above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is always visibly displayed, and the non-specific identification information is displayed during the performance generated by the performance control means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(15) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is arranged in a place other than the front frame,
The specific identification information is displayed on the image display means above the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is arranged smaller than the specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(16) The game machine according to (15) above, wherein the non-specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body.

<10. Example 1 of Alternative Embodiments 7 and 8, FIGS. 67 to 70>
Embodiment 1 (FIGS. 67 to 70) shows the case where the first identification information is arranged in the "front frame".

In this example, the "model name (Fujimaru-kun)" of the gaming machine is treated as the identification information (first identification information) that should be most conspicuous. At the same time, identification information other than the model name (manufacturer name, etc.) is also handled. Since it is assumed that the identification information that you want to display most conspicuously is the model name (Fujimaru-kun), make the "model name" stand out more than any other identification information (such as "manufacturer name"). devised to Therefore, in light of the evaluation criteria (evaluation scales) 1 to 3, the one with the highest priority is adopted for each of the model name "arrangement location", "size" and "display period". Specifically, "frame" is selected for "arrangement position" of the model name, "large" is selected for "size", and "always" is selected for "display period".

As a result of this selection, in the examples of FIGS. 35(B) and 36(A), characters "Fujimaru-kun" are three-dimensionally provided as the model name 1080 on the upper frame 1011, or more precisely, on the upper front face 1011a of the frame. (Evaluation Criterion 1: Placement “Frame”). Also, the size of the model name "Fujimaru-kun", which is the first identification information, is set to a size that fills the vertical width of the frame upper front face 1011a or protrudes beyond it, that is, the maximum size (evaluation Criterion 2: size “large”). In addition, the character "Fujimaru-kun" is provided as a physical structure by uneven notation (protruding or recessed), that is, it is provided so that it always exists on the upper front face 1011a of the frame (evaluation criterion 3: display period "always ”). As a result, the characters "Fujimaru-kun" are displayed in the most conspicuous manner, and the fact that the model name of the gaming machine is "Fujimaru-kun" is appealing to the player as much as possible.

FIG. 67 is a list of display modes in the case where the "model name" is attached to the gaming machine as the first identification information and the information "other than the model name" is attached as the second identification information. The left-hand column of FIG. 67 shows an example of the display mode of how "Fujimaru-kun" of the "model name", which is the first identification information, is attached. Also, in the right column of FIG. 67, various display modes of how the identification information (second identification information) "other than the model name" is attached are summarized as a list.

The model name "Fujimaru-kun", which is the first identification information in the "left column" of FIG. 67, is displayed in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. Also in the list in the "right column" of FIG. 67, it is assumed that the first identification information is the same model name "Fujimaru-kun" as that shown in the left column, and the display mode is the same. 35(B) and 36(A) are the same as those shown in FIG. 35(B) and FIG. (duration: "large"), and is provided in a form that always appears (display period: "always").

In this list (on the right side of FIG. 67), "manufacturer name" is handled as identification information (second identification information) of "other than model name". Regarding the method of displaying the "manufacturer name" of this second identification information, there are differences in the arrangement location and differences in size with respect to the first identification information. Characterized. Therefore, these differences are divided into rows (horizontal groups) of (a), (b), and (c) regarding where the second identification information “arrangement location” is to be placed in the game machine, and the second identification information “large The characteristics of the display mode are clarified by combining the columns (vertical groups) of (α), (β), and (γ) regarding how to make the “slowness”.

More specifically, the "placement location" for displaying the name of the manufacturer of the second identification information is divided into three lines: (a) frame, (b) game board surface, and (c) liquid crystal display. Also, regarding the "size" of the manufacturer name of the second identification information in relative comparison between the first identification information and the second identification information, (α) "first identification information (model name )<second identification information (other than model name)”, (β) “first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name)”, and (γ) “first identification information (model name )>Second identification information (other than model name)”. Also, whether the "display period" is set to "normal" or "temporary" is also divided by the division numbers 1 to 6.

In the list (on the right side of FIG. 67), display examples a, b, and c belong to the horizontal group (a) in which the second identification information (other than the model name) is provided in the middle part 1012 of the frame, and display examples d and e. , f belong to the horizontal group (b) in which the second identification information (other than the model name) is provided on the game board surface (game board 1020), and the display examples g, h, and i are the second identification information (other than the model name). belongs to the horizontal group (c) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1030 . Display examples a, d, and g belong to the vertical group of (α) “first identification information (model name)<second identification information (other than model name)”, and display examples b, e, and h belong to (β) “ First identification information (model name)≈Second identification information (other than model name)”, and display examples c, f, and i are (γ) “First identification information (model name)>Second identification information (Other than model name)” belongs to the vertical group.

Display examples a to i will be individually described below.

(10-1: Display example a, Fig. 68)
FIG. 68 is an enlarged view of display examples a, b, and c belonging to the group in the right column (a) row of FIG.

In a display example a in FIG. 68 (row A, column α in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, is the characters "Fujimaru-kun" on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (upper frame front 1011a). Also, the name of the manufacturing company, which is the second identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing the characters of "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." on the surface of the middle part 1012 of the frame. The size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is arranged at the maximum size (size: "Large") with respect to the width (vertical width) of the upper frame 1011 (the upper frame front 1011a). The characters of "Fujishoji Co., Ltd." of the second identification information are provided in a size larger than that of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information. In this display example a, the second identification information “Fujishoji Co., Ltd.” has a size that slightly protrudes from the width of the middle portion 1012 of the frame. However, the magnitudes of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” and the second identification information “Fujishoji Co., Ltd.” satisfy the following relationship: (α) first identification information (model name) < second identification information (other than model name) As long as the size is maintained, either the size within the width of the frame upper portion 1011 or the frame middle portion 1012 or the size protruding from the width can be adopted.

In this display example a, the size of the identification information has a relationship of "(α) first identification information (model name)<second identification information (other than model name)" (α column in FIG. 67), and the model name "Fujimaru The name of the manufacturing company, Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd., is larger than that of Kun. However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (the upper frame front 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). That is, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is higher than the manufacturing company name "Fujishoji Co., Ltd.". Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” is higher than that of the manufacturer name “Fujishoji Co., Ltd.” provided in the middle part 1012 of the frame. In this sense, the display example a is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship. In addition, the first identification information can be arranged as a non-movable object, and the second constant identification information can be arranged as a movable object.

(10-2: Display example b, Fig. 68)
In the display example b of FIG. 68 (row A, column β in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, is the characters "Fujimaru-kun" projected on the surface of the "frame upper part 1011" (frame upper front face 1011a). Alternatively, the second identification information is provided by providing the letters "Fuji Shoji" on the surface of the "middle part 1012 of the frame". It is difficult to tell whether it is the name of the manufacturing company or not, because the letters ``K. It's getting closer to the trademark usage mode by minutes. However, it is the same as the display example a in that the name of the manufacturer is considered to be displayed. Therefore, in the following description, for the sake of convenience, the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" will be described as representing the company name.

However, in display example b, the size has a relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than model name)", and the size of "Fujimaru-kun" in the first identification information On the other hand, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is relatively the same. The display of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” and the second identification information “Fujishoji” maintains the relationship of “(β) first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than model name)” As long as it is not necessarily within the width of the frame upper part 1011 or the frame middle part 1012, any size that protrudes from the width can be adopted.

In this display example b, there is a relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name)", where the model name "Fujimaru-kun" and the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" are established. are almost the same size. However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (the front of the upper frame 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). Also, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is at a higher position. Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is higher than that of the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" provided in the middle part 1012 of the frame. In this sense, the display example b is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-3: Display example c, Fig. 68)
In a display example c in FIG. 68 (row A, column γ in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, has characters "Fujimaru-kun" projected or recessed on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (front front 1011a of the upper frame). Also, the name of the manufacturing company, which is the second identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing characters of "Fuji Shoji" on the surface of the middle frame portion 1012 . The size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is arranged at the maximum size (size: "large") with respect to the width (vertical width) of the upper frame portion 1011 (the upper frame front surface 1011a). Also, the second identification information "Fujishoji" is provided in a smaller size than the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun". That is, the relationship is "(γ) first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name)". This differs from display example b in that the display size of "Fuji Shoji", which is the second identification information, is smaller than that of the model name "Fujimaru-kun".

In this display example c, the second identification information “Fuji Shoji” is within the width of the middle portion 1012 of the frame. However, the size of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” and the second identification information “Fujishoji” is as long as the relationship of (γ) first identification information (model name) > second identification information (other than model name) is maintained. , a size that fits within the width of the frame upper portion 1011 or the frame middle portion 1012, or a size that protrudes from the width.

In this display example c, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (the front of the upper frame 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is higher than "Fujishoji". In addition, there is a relationship of first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name), and the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is larger than the manufacturer name "Fujishoji". Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is higher than that of the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" provided in the middle part 1012 of the frame. In this sense, the display example c is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-4: Display example d, Fig. 69)
In the display example d in FIG. 69 (row α in row B in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, has characters "Fujimaru-kun" projected or recessed on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (front front 1011a of the upper frame). Also, as the manufacturer name, which is the second identification information, the characters "Fuji Shoji" are provided on the game board surface (game area 1021), precisely at a position below the liquid crystal display device. It is As a method of providing the characters of "Fuji Shoji" on the game board surface in this way, there is a method of providing the characters of "Fuji Shoji" on the surface of the game board 1020 by protruding or recessing them. By embedding the characters of "Business", it is provided without steps or with steps. Any method of displaying characters of "Fuji Shoji" on the display sheet may be used.

The electronic paper is provided as a transmissive display device between the front frame 2 and the game board 3 so that the game area 3a of the game board can be seen through from the front side. There are various methods of electronic paper, and any one of a microcapsule method, an electronic liquid powder method, a liquid crystal method, and an electrowetting method can be used. Since these methods are known at present, detailed description of these methods will be omitted.

The size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is arranged at the maximum size (size: "Large") with respect to the width (vertical width) of the upper frame 1011 (the upper frame front 1011a). The second identification information "Fujishoji" is provided in a larger size than the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun". In addition, the characters of “FUJI” are arranged so as to surround the main liquid crystal display device 1031 without forming a straight line. However, the sizes of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” and the second identification information “Fujishoji” satisfy the relationship “(α) first identification information (model name)<second identification information (other than model name)”. As long as it is kept, it does not need to be within the game board surface (game area 1021) and visible from the front. It can be provided in a state where the part is hidden by the frame.

In this display example d, the relationship is "(α) first identification information (model name)<second identification information (other than model name)", and the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" is more important than the model name "Fujimaru-kun". ” is larger. However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (the front of the upper frame 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). Since "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is at a higher position than the first identification information, its self-appeal degree is higher than that of the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" provided on the game board surface (game area 1021). In this sense, the display example d is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-5: Display example e, Fig. 69)
In the display example e in FIG. 69 (row β, column β in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, is displayed with the letters "Fujimaru-kun" projected or recessed on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (front of the upper frame 1011a). In addition, characters of "Fuji Shoji" are provided on the game board surface (game area 1021) as the manufacturer's name, which is the second identification information. This point is the same as the display example d.

However, in display example e, the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji", which is the second identification information, is provided in the upper part of the game board surface (game area 1021), more precisely, above the main liquid crystal display device 1032. Differs from example d.

In display example e, the size has a relationship of (β) first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name). The size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is relatively the same. Also in this display example e, the display of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fujishoji" is as follows: (β) first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name) As long as the relationship is maintained, it does not need to be within the game board surface (game area 1021) and the whole can be seen from the front. It can also be provided partially hidden by the frame if it is legible.

In this display example e, there is a relationship of (β) the first identification information (model name) ≒ the second identification information (other than the model name), and the model name "Fujimaru-kun" and the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" are They are almost the same size. In addition, the manufacturer name "Fujishoji", which is the second identification information, is provided above the game board surface (game area 1021). However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (the front of the upper frame 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). Also, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is at a higher position. Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” is higher than that of the manufacturer name “Fujishoji” provided in the game area 1021 . In this sense, the display example e is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-6: Display example f, Fig. 69)
In the display example f in FIG. 69 (row γ column in FIG. 67 ), the model name, which is the first identification information, has characters “Fujimaru-kun” projected or recessed on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (front front 1011a of the upper frame). In addition, as the second identification information, the name of the manufacturing company, the characters "Fuji Shoji" are provided on the upper part of the game board surface (game area 1021), more precisely, above the main liquid crystal display device 1032. ing. This point is the same as the display example e.

However, in display example f, the size has a relationship of "(γ) first identification information (model name) > second identification information (other than model name)", and the size of "Fujimaru-kun" in the first identification information On the other hand, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is relatively small. In this display example f, the display of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” and the second identification information “Fujishoji” is “(γ) first identification information (model name) > second identification information (other than model name )”, it does not have to be within the game board surface (game area 1021) and the whole can be seen from the front. If the name is legible, it can be provided partially hidden by the frame.

In this display example f, the manufacturing company name "Fujishoji", which is the second identification information, is provided above the game board surface (game area 1021). However, there is a relationship of "(γ) 1st identification information (model name) > 2nd identification information (other than model name)", and the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is better than the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" It's a big relationship. In addition, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (the front of the upper frame 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). Also, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is at a higher position. Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” is higher than that of the manufacturer name “Fujishoji” provided in the game area 1021 . In this sense, the display example f is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-7: Display example g, Fig. 70)
In the display example g in FIG. 70 (row C, column α in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, is displayed with characters "Fujimaru-kun" projected or recessed on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (front of the upper frame 1011a). Also, as the second identification information, the name of the manufacturing company, the letters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1030, in this example, on the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031. It has become so.

Here, it is assumed that the characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed within the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031 or the sub-liquid crystal display device 1032. As an example, the winning expectation is extremely high during the ready-to-win effect. When the characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed as a high specific effect, when the characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed on the demonstration screen generated on the image display device 1030 when the game is not being played, and when the big hit game is played. For example, when the characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed on the screen inside. In either case, the characters "Fuji Shoji" are "temporarily" displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device.

This display example g, together with display examples h and i described later, belongs to the horizontal group (c) as a display example in which the characters "Fuji Shoji" are "temporarily" displayed. In this horizontal group (C), the characters "Fuji Shoji" are "temporarily" displayed, and the horizontal group (A) ( b) (display examples a to f).

"Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is arranged in the maximum size (size: "large") with respect to the width (vertical width) of the upper frame portion 1011 (the upper front surface of the frame portion 1011a). The information "Fujishoji" is provided in a larger size than the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun". Then, the entire arrangement of characters of "Fuji Shoji" fits within the liquid crystal screen and is displayed in a state where the entirety can be seen from the front.

However, the size of the second identification information "Fujishoji" can be accommodated within the LCD screen as long as the relationship of "(α) first identification information (model name)<second identification information (other than model name)" is maintained. It does not have to be displayed in a state where it can be seen in its entirety from the front, and it can be displayed in a state where it is partially hidden by the frame as long as the intended message is conveyed, that is, the name of the manufacturer can be read. can. Also, the size of the characters of the second identification information "Fujishoji" does not always have to be the same size, and can be changed as required, and may be displayed so that each character has a different size.

In this display example g, the relationship is "(α) first identification information (model name)<second identification information (other than model name)", and the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" is more important than the model name "Fujimaru-kun". ” is larger. However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (the front of the upper frame 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). Also, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is at a higher position. Also, the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is only temporarily displayed. Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is higher than that of "Fujishoji" of the second identification information displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In this sense, the display example g is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-8: display example h, Fig. 70)
In the display example h in FIG. 70 (row C, column β in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, has characters "Fujimaru-kun" projected or recessed on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (front of the upper frame 1011a). Also, as the second identification information, the name of the manufacturing company, the letters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1030, in this example, on the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031. be. This point is the same as the display example g.

However, in display example h, the size has a relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than model name)", and the size of "Fujimaru-kun" in the first identification information is On the other hand, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is almost the same. Then, the entire arrangement of characters of "Fuji Shoji" fits within the liquid crystal screen and is displayed in a state where the entirety can be seen from the front.

However, even in this display example h, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" maintains the relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name)". As long as it fits in the LCD screen and is displayed in a state where the whole can be seen from the front, as long as the intended message is conveyed, in other words, if the manufacturer name can be read, a part is hidden in the frame It can be displayed in a state where In addition, the size of the characters of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" does not always have to be the same size, and it is possible to change the size as necessary. good too.

In this display example h, there is a relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name)", where the model name "Fujimaru-kun" and the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" are established. are almost the same size. Also, the manufacturer name “Fuji Shoji”, which is the second identification information, is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1032 . However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (the front of the upper frame 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). Also, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is at a higher position. Also, the second identification information, name of the manufacturing company "Fujishoji", is temporarily displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1032, and is not always displayed. Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is higher than that of the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" provided in the main liquid crystal display device 1032 . In this sense, the display example h is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-9: display example i, Fig. 70)
In the display example i in FIG. 70 (row C, γ column in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, has characters "Fujimaru-kun" projected or recessed on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (front front 1011a of the upper frame). Also, as the second identification information, the name of the manufacturing company, the letters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1030, in this example, on the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031. be. This point is the same as in display examples g and h.

However, in display example i, the size has a relationship of (γ) first identification information (model name) > second identification information (other than model name), and the size of "Fujimaru-kun" in the first identification information is The size of “Fuji Shoji” in the second identification information is relatively small. Then, the entire arrangement of characters of "Fuji Shoji" fits within the liquid crystal screen and is displayed in a state where the entirety can be seen from the front.

In the case of this display example i, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" will be displayed on the LCD screen as long as the relationship of (γ) first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name) is maintained. It doesn't have to be inside and visible from the front, as long as the intended message is conveyed, i.e., if the manufacturer's name is legible, it can be partially hidden by the frame. can be displayed. In addition, the size of the characters of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" does not always have to be the same size, and it is possible to change the size as necessary. good too.

In this display example i, there is a relationship of (γ) first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name). is displayed in a small size on the main liquid crystal display device 1032 of . In other words, the model name "Fujimaru-kun" has a larger relationship than the manufacturer name "Fujishoji". In addition, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (the front of the upper frame 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). Also, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is at a higher position. Also, the second identification information, name of the manufacturing company "Fujishoji", is temporarily displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1032, and is not always displayed. Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is higher than that of the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" provided in the main liquid crystal display device 1032 . In this sense, the display example i is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-10: display period)
In the above display examples a to i, the "display period" column in FIG. Cases of division numbers 2, 4, and 6).

When the placement position of the second identification information is "frame" (horizontal group (a)), one display period is "always" (class number 1) means that the first identification information and the second identification information is always displayed without disappearing, which is the same as already explained. The other display period being “temporary” (section number 2) means that one or both of the first identification information and the second identification information may appear and be displayed temporarily. are doing. For example, an LED, a liquid crystal display device, or the like is provided in a convex shape, a concave shape, or a sheet shape with respect to the frame 1010, thereby forming a character display device. There is a form in which one or both of the identification information are lit as necessary.

For classification numbers 3 and 4, in the display examples d to f above, there are cases where the display period is "always" (case of division number 3) and cases where the display period is "temporary" (case of division number 4). indicates that there is When the location of the second identification information is “game board surface” (horizontal group (b)), one of the display periods is “always” (section number 3) means that the first identification information and the second identification This is the form in which the information is always displayed without disappearing, and is the same as the one already explained. The other display period being “temporary” (section number 4) means that one or both of the first identification information and the second identification information may appear and be displayed temporarily. are doing. For example, the second identification information can be configured as follows. An LED or a liquid crystal display device is provided directly on the surface of the game board 1020 (game area 1021, non-game area 1022) in a convex or concave shape or in a sheet form, or is floated from the game board surface with respect to the game board surface. There is a mode in which transparent liquid crystal sheets are provided in parallel to constitute a character display device, and the second identification information is displayed by lighting as necessary. The form of temporarily displaying the first identification information in this section number 4 may be constructed in the same manner as in the case of section number 2 specifically.

In the display examples g to i above, classification numbers 5 and 6 are divided into cases where the display period is "always" (case of division number 5) and when it is "temporary" (case of division number 6). indicates that there is When the location of the second identification information is “liquid crystal display device” (horizontal group (c)), one of the display periods is “always” (classification number 5) means that the first identification information and the second identification information This is the form in which the identification information is always displayed without disappearing, and is the same as the one already explained. The other display period being “temporary” (section number 6) means that one or both of the first identification information and the second identification information may appear and be displayed temporarily. are doing. For example, in the liquid crystal display device 1030 (main liquid crystal display device 1031 or sub liquid crystal display device 1032), the image display of the second identification information is started at a predetermined timing and continuously displayed, or the image display of the second identification information is fixed. There is a form in which the second identification information is displayed only during the period of , and a form in which the image of the second identification information is displayed across a plurality of liquid crystal display devices (not shown). The form of temporarily displaying the first identification information in this section number 6 may be configured in the same manner as in the case of section numbers 2 and 3 specifically.

(10-11: Effect of Another Embodiment)
According to the above display examples a to i, the model name "Fujimaru-kun" of the first game information to be conspicuous is more conspicuous than the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" of the second game information (arrangement location, size, display period, etc.). ), a trader in the product distribution channel or a player in the hall can easily understand which part of the game machine the identification information is the model name and find the desired game machine. can.

(10-12: Summary)
In the above description, the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is used as an example of the first identification information. In this way, when there is identification information to be most conspicuous, such as the model name "Fujimaru-kun", by treating this in the same way as the first identification information above, evaluation criteria 1 to 3 (arrangement location, (size, display period), by displaying the message at the place with the highest "predominance" in light of the evaluation scale, the message with the identification information is most effectively transmitted from the game machine to the player. can be done. The highest "predominance" means that the first identification information is displayed more conspicuously than the second identification information.

When there is some kind of identification information display (for example, character notation) in the game machine, it is the one that exerts a specific identification power and should be compared as "second identification information". ``Second identification information'' exists, and ``whether or not it stands out'' is determined in the relative comparison between this second identification information and the first identification information. It is not determined as a physical fixed part of the gaming machine.

Also, as long as it has a message to send, it is free to handle what as the first identification information. When it is desired to appeal with a higher priority, the manufacturer name "Fuji Shoji" is the first identification information to be most conspicuous. Other identification information such as the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is treated as the second identification information. Therefore, in the display examples a to i of FIG. 67, the display locations of the model name "Fujimaru-kun" and the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" are switched.

(10-13: Modification)
In the above another embodiment, it is assumed that the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" arranged in the frame 1010 and the second identification information "Fujishoji" arranged on the game board are displayed in a non-deformable display mode. and However, both or one of the first identification information and the second identification information may be displayed in a changing display mode. For example, it is possible to change the size of the characters from small to large, change the shape of the characters, or change only a part of the characters so that the characters are arranged in a non-uniform manner.

<11. Example 2 of Alternative Embodiments 7 and 8, FIGS. 71 to 74>
The second embodiment (FIGS. 71 to 74) shows the case where the first identification information is arranged on the "game board surface".

(11-1: (a) When the second identification information is in the “front frame”, FIGS. 71 and 72)
FIG. 71(a) (see FIG. 72) shows that in the configuration where the first identification information is arranged on the "game board surface", the second identification information "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." This is an example of placement in A has ``Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd.'' in the upper part of the frame, b has ``Fuji Shoji'' in the upper part of the frame, and c has ``Fuji Shoji'' in the middle part of the frame, and the character size is gradually reduced in this order. . The upper part of the frame is an inappropriate example because it is positionally superior to the game board. ``Fujishoji'' in c is provided in the middle part of the frame, and since it is lower than ``Fujimaru-kun'' and is smaller in size, the degree of inappropriateness is reduced.

In short, when the first identification information (model name) is arranged on the game board surface and the second identification information (other than the model name) is arranged in the front frame, the first identification information for the second identification information (other than the model name) The (model name) is larger, and the first identification information (model name) is on the top.

(11-2: (b) When the second identification information is on the "game board", Figs. 71 and 73)
FIG. 71(b) (see FIG. 73) is an example in which the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is arranged on the "game board" in the configuration where the first identification information is arranged on the "game board". In each of a, b, and c, "Fuji Shoji" is provided on the game board below the liquid crystal display device 1032, and the character size is gradually reduced in the order of a, b, and c. In a, "Fujimaru-kun" is located above "Fujishoji", but the size is smaller than "Fujishoji", so this is an inappropriate example. In b, since the character size of "Fuji Shoji" is small, the mismatch is reduced. In c, since the character size of "Fujishoji" is very small, the mismatch is hardly felt.

In short, when arranging the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) on the game board surface, the first identification information (model name) for the second identification information (other than the model name) The first identification information (model name) should be on the top. The first identification information can be arranged as a non-movable object and the second identification information can be arranged as a movable object.

(11-3: (C) When the second identification information is displayed on the “liquid crystal display device”, FIGS. 71 and 74)
FIG. 71(C) (see FIG. 74) shows a configuration in which the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is arranged above the liquid crystal display device on the game board surface, and the second identification information "Fujishoji" is displayed on the liquid crystal display. This is an example of displaying on the device. The first identification information is located above the second identification information "Fujishoji", and the character sizes are smaller in the order of g, h, and i. Since "Fujimaru-kun" is located above "Fujimaru-kun", it is considered that "Fujimaru-kun" is recognized as the model name regardless of the character size.

In short, when the first identification information (model name) is arranged on the game board surface and the second identification information (other than the model name) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the first identification information for the second identification information (other than the model name) is displayed. The information (model name) is larger, and the first identification information (model name) is on top. The first identification information may not be movable (deformed), and the second identification information may be movable (deformed). Also, the first identification information (model name) may be displayed at all times, and the second identification information (other than the model name) may be displayed during presentation.

<12. Contrasting Embodiments 7 and 8, FIGS. 75 to 78>
(A) (B) (C) shown in FIGS. 75 to 78 are the arrangement of the second identification information (Fujishoji Co., Ltd. or Fujishoji) in (A) (B) (C) of FIGS. 71 to 74 While the locations are the same (front frame, game board, liquid crystal display screen), the placement location of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is changed from "game board surface" to "screen of liquid crystal display device". Since the liquid crystal display screen has a low degree of superiority in evaluation criterion 1, it is difficult to make "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information stand out as long as it is displayed here. However, in the case i where the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fujishoji" are displayed on the same liquid crystal display screen, the size should be "Fujimaru-kun">"Fujishoji". So, it is possible to make it stand out, albeit slightly.

(13. Other configuration examples)
As other configuration examples for solving the problems of the above-described different embodiments 1 to 8, the configurations and their effects will be described below.

(1) Approximately the same content as the identification information arranged on the board is also displayed on display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
(1-1)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "warning (attention) display" is placed at a position visible to the player,
The warning display is arranged above and/or below the display means,
While the symbols are stopped, substantially the same content as the warning display is displayed on the display means.

As a result, even though the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the display size is kept to a minimum so as not to impede the degree of freedom in placement. By performing the attention-calling display on the display means (at the end of the big win, etc.), it is possible to prompt the player to pay more attention (warning). It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the contents indicated by the warning display (contents to the effect that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occur (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display will be displayed on the display means even while the pattern is changing. You may

(1-2)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which "function name display" is arranged at a position visible to the player,
The function name display is arranged in the game area,
A display indicating that the function indicated by the function name is enabled is displayed on the display means.

As a result, the game board and/or the game machine frame have "XX mode (variable probability, small winning rush, etc.)", so that the player can use the game machine with its function (variable probability, small winning rush, etc.) It is possible to recognize that there is, and furthermore, the function is actually enabled by displaying "○○ mode entry (probable variable entry, small hit rush entry)" on the display means (or this display effective thereafter) can be recognized.

(1-3)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "performance display" is placed at a position visible to a player,
The performance display is a performance display indicating that it has a setting function,
The performance display is displayed on the display means at a predetermined timing.

As a result, while the performance display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the display size is kept to a minimum, so that the degree of freedom in layout is not extremely hindered. Furthermore, by displaying the performance on the display means at a predetermined timing (for example, during a demonstration performance, during a pattern change, during a big hit, etc.), the performance (the performance display that has a setting function) can be easily conveyed to the player. .

When displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the performance display is more detailed than the performance display arranged outside the display means. For example, when only "with setting function" is displayed on other than the display means, "with 6 levels of setting function" is displayed on the display means.

In addition, when "with setting function" is directly displayed on the display means, the display means indirectly " You may tell that it has a setting function. Regardless of whether it is displayed directly or indirectly, when the player sees the display on the display means, the player first notices that the gaming machine has the performance, and after that, the performance is placed on the game board. It can be said that the effect of the above configuration is that it becomes a lead to notice the performance display, or to check the model guide installed in the store or the pamphlet created and distributed by the game machine manufacturer.

(1-4)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which an "intellectual property-related display" is placed at a position visible to a player,
The intellectual property-related indication is an indication regarding the use of the music, and
The display related to intellectual property is displayed on the display means at least at the timing when the corresponding music is played.

As a result, while displaying the intellectual property-related display on the game board surface or the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is kept to a minimum, so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered. Furthermore, by displaying the intellectual property-related display on the display means at the timing when the corresponding music is played (not only during playback but also immediately before and/or immediately after playback), appropriate rights processing for the player. It becomes easier to convey what is being done to

In addition, when displaying on the display means, the performance display may be more detailed than the performance display arranged other than the display means. For example, if only "license number 123456" is displayed on other than the display means, the display means may display "music name AIUEO, license number 123456" or other lyricist information or composer information. good too. This makes it easier for the player to know what the target indicated by the intellectual property-related display arranged on the game board is.

In addition, if the content indicated by the intellectual property-related indication is not a license for one song, but a comprehensive license for two or more songs, the intellectual property-related indication will be displayed when all the songs are played. Since there is a risk of excessive information being displayed on the means (the player feels uncomfortable), the information may be displayed as a representative at a predetermined timing (during a demonstration performance, for example, at the start of a big win, etc.).

(2) Display substantially the same content as the identification information arranged on the board in substantially the same font on the liquid crystal.
(2-1)
comprising display means,
In a game machine where the "model name display" is placed at a position where the player can see it,
The model name display is arranged above the display means,
Approximately the same content as the model name display is displayed on the display means in approximately the same font.

As a result, the title logo and the font for displaying the model name displayed on the display means are the same, so it is possible to unify the model name (especially the image evoked by the model name). can). If this is not done, the title logo is a pop and fun image, and the model name displayed by the display means is a decayed image that looks like it will collapse at any moment. It may not be possible to comprehend.

(2-2)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which "function name display" is arranged at a position visible to the player,
The function name display is arranged in the game area,
The fact that the function indicated by the function name is enabled is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font.

As a result, the game board and/or the game machine frame have "XX mode (variable probability, small winning rush, etc.)", so that the player can use the game machine with its function (variable probability, small winning rush, etc.) It is possible to recognize that there is, and furthermore, by displaying "○○ mode entry (probable variable entry, small hit rush entry)" on the display means, the function was actually enabled (or this effective after the display) can be recognized. In addition to this effect, it is possible to unify the function names (particularly, the images evoked from the function names) (the unified image can be conveyed).

(2-3)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which an "intellectual property-related display" is placed at a position visible to a player,
The intellectual property-related display is arranged within the gaming area, and
The intellectual property-related display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font.

As a result, while displaying the intellectual property-related display on the game board surface or the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is kept to a minimum, so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered. In addition, since the game board and/or the game machine frame have an indication related to intellectual property (for example, “license number 123456”), the player can confirm that the game machine has been properly processed. Perceivable.

In addition, when displaying on the display means, the performance display may be more detailed than the performance display arranged other than the display means. For example, if only "license number 123456" is displayed on other than the display means, the display means may display "music name AIUEO, license number 123456" or other lyricist information or composer information. good too. This makes it easier for the player to know what the target indicated by the intellectual property-related display arranged on the game board is.

In addition, if the license is not for one song but is a comprehensive license for two or more songs, displaying the intellectual property-related display on the display means when all the songs are played will result in information overload (game Since there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable), it may be displayed only at a predetermined timing (during a demonstration performance, for example, at the start of a big win, etc.).

In performing these displays, by using the same font for the intellectual property-related display arranged outside the display means and the intellectual property-related display displayed on the display means, both are of the same type. It is easy to convey that they are chapters and that the objects indicate the same thing.

(2-4)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "warning display (attention display)" is placed at a position visible to the player,
The warning display is arranged in the game area,
The warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font.

As a result, even though the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not impede the degree of freedom in placement. By displaying the warning on the display means at the end of the jackpot, etc., it is possible to prompt the player to pay more attention (warning).

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the contents indicated by the warning display (contents to the effect that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occur (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display will be displayed on the display means even while the pattern is changing. You may

In performing these displays, by using the same font for the warning display placed outside the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, both are marks of the same type and subject to the same type of mark. It is easy to convey that the two points indicate the same thing.

(2-5)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player,
A first warning content common to the first warning display and a second warning content common to the second warning display are displayed on the display means at different timings and in approximately the same font as each warning display.

As a result, even though the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not impede the degree of freedom in placement. By displaying the warning on the display means at the end of the jackpot, etc., it is possible to prompt the player to pay more attention (warning).

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the contents indicated by the warning display (contents to the effect that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occur (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display will be displayed on the display means even while the pattern is changing. You may

In performing these displays, by using the same font for the warning display placed outside the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, both are marks of the same type and subject to the same type of mark. It is easy to convey that the two points indicate the same thing.

(2-6)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player,
displaying a first warning content common to the first warning display on the display means at a predetermined timing in substantially the same font as the first warning display;
A second warning content common to the second warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font as the second warning display when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, even though the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not impede the degree of freedom in placement. By displaying the warning on the display means at the end of the jackpot, etc., it is possible to prompt the player to pay more attention (warning).

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the contents indicated by the warning display (contents to the effect that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occur (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display will be displayed on the display means even while the pattern is changing. You may

In performing these displays, by using the same font for the warning display placed outside the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, both are marks of the same type and subject to the same type of mark. It is easy to convey that the two points indicate the same thing.

(3) Display substantially the same content as the identification information arranged on the board in a different font on the liquid crystal.
(3-1)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which an "intellectual property-related display" is placed at a position visible to a player,
The intellectual property related display is arranged above and/or below the display means,
On the display means, substantially the same contents as the intellectual property-related display are displayed in a different font.

As a result, while intellectual property-related displays are always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not impede the degree of freedom in placement. Making a clear indication of intention to the player (an indication that appropriate intellectual property processing has been completed) by displaying the attention-calling display on the display means during the jackpot (at the end of the jackpot, etc.) can be done. In addition, by using a different font when displaying on the display means, when displaying on the game board, etc., it is displayed in so-called standard characters, while the display means emphasizes or displays the intellectual property rights holder's request (designated font). display) can be satisfied. On the contrary, it is also possible to display the time of display by the display means in standard characters.

(3-2)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "warning (attention) display" is placed at a position visible to the player,
The warning display is arranged above and/or below the display means,
A warning content common to the warning display is displayed on the display means in a font different from that of the warning display.

As a result, even though the warning display (warning display) is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the display size is kept to a minimum so as not to impede the degree of freedom in placement. By displaying the alert display on the display means during the middle of the jackpot or during the jackpot (at the end of the jackpot, etc.), a clear indication of intention to the player (indication of the intention that appropriate intellectual property processing is being done). It can be carried out. In addition, by using a different font when displaying on the display means, when displaying on the game board, etc., it is displayed in so-called standard characters, while the display means emphasizes or displays the intellectual property rights holder's request (designated font). display) can be satisfied. On the contrary, it may be displayed in standard characters at the time of display by the display means.

(3-3)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player,
At least the warning content common to the first warning display is displayed on the display means in a font different from that of the first warning display.

As a result, even though the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not impede the degree of freedom in placement. By displaying the warning on the display means at the end of the jackpot, etc., it is possible to prompt the player to pay more attention (warning).

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the contents indicated by the warning display (contents to the effect that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occur (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display will be displayed on the display means even while the pattern is changing. You may

In performing these displays, by using different fonts for the warning display arranged outside the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, the display means emphasizes the player. is possible.

In addition, if all warning displays are displayed on the display means, the player may feel that more than necessary warning displays are being displayed. , the player does not feel unnecessarily uncomfortable.

(3-3)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player, at least warning contents common to the first warning display are provided in a font different from the warning display. is displayed on the display means.

As a result, even though the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not impede the degree of freedom in placement. By displaying the warning on the display means at the end of the jackpot, etc., it is possible to prompt the player to pay more attention (warning).

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the contents indicated by the warning display (contents to the effect that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occur (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display will be displayed on the display means even while the pattern is changing. You may

In performing these displays, by using different fonts for the warning display arranged outside the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, the display means emphasizes the player. is possible.

(3-4)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player, the first warning content common to the first warning display and the second warning display common and the second warning content to be displayed on the display means at different timings and in substantially the same font as each warning display.

As a result, even though the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not impede the degree of freedom in placement. By displaying the warning on the display means at the end of the jackpot, etc., it is possible to prompt the player to pay more attention (warning).

Since the content of the first warning and the content of the second warning are displayed at different timings, the player can be notified at the timing corresponding to the content of the warning, so that more appropriate attention can be given. It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the contents indicated by the warning display (contents to the effect that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occur (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display will be displayed on the display means even while the pattern is changing. You may

In performing these displays, by using different fonts for the warning display arranged outside the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, the display means emphasizes the player. is possible.

(3-5)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player,
displaying a first warning content common to the first warning display on the display means at a predetermined timing in substantially the same font as the first warning display;
A second warning content common to the second warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font as the second warning display when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, even though the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not impede the degree of freedom in placement. By displaying the warning on the display means at the end of the jackpot, etc., it is possible to prompt the player to pay more attention (warning).

While the content of the first warning is displayed at a predetermined timing, the content of the second warning is displayed only if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (unless a fraudulent act corresponding to the content of the warning is performed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnecessarily uncomfortable by displaying warning displays more than necessary.

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the contents indicated by the warning display (contents to the effect that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occur (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display will be displayed on the display means even while the pattern is changing. You may

In performing these displays, by using different fonts for the warning display arranged outside the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, the display means emphasizes the player. is possible.

(4) Displaying substantially the same content as the identification information arranged on the board in substantially the same arrangement on the liquid crystal.
(4-1)
comprising display means,
In a game machine where the "model name display" is placed at a position where the player can see it,
The model name display is arranged above the display means,
Approximately the same content as the model name display is displayed on the display means in approximately the same arrangement.

As a result, the arrangement of the title logo and the model name display displayed on the display means are the same, so it is possible to unify the model name (particularly the image evoked by the model name). can). If this is not done, the title logo should be written horizontally in one line, and the model name displayed by the display means should be written vertically in two columns. There is a risk of

(4-2)
comprising display means,
In a game machine where "other display (company catchphrase, etc.)" is placed in a position visible to the player,
The other display is arranged in the game area,
On the display means, substantially the same content as the other display (company catch phrase, etc.) is displayed in substantially the same arrangement.

As a result, the corporate slogan displayed on the game board and/or the game machine frame and the corporate slogan displayed on the display means are the same, so the company slogan (especially the image recalled from the model name) is the same. Unification can be achieved (a unified image can be conveyed). If you don't do this, what kind of image does the company have? may not be accurately conveyed to the player.

(4-3)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which an "intellectual property-related display" is placed at a position visible to a player,
The intellectual property-related display is arranged within the gaming area, and
The intellectual property-related display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same arrangement.

As a result, while displaying the intellectual property-related display on the game board surface or the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is kept to a minimum, so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered. In addition, since the game board and/or the game machine frame have an indication related to intellectual property (for example, “license number 123456”), the player can confirm that the game machine has been properly processed. Perceivable.

In addition, when displaying on the display means, the performance display may be more detailed than the performance display arranged other than the display means. For example, if only "license number 123456" is displayed on other than the display means, the display means may display "music name AIUEO, license number 123456" or other lyricist information or composer information. good too. This makes it easier for the player to know what the target indicated by the intellectual property-related display arranged on the game board is.

In addition, if the license is not for one song but is a comprehensive license for two or more songs, displaying the intellectual property-related display on the display means when all the songs are played will result in information overload (game Since there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable), it may be displayed only at a predetermined timing (during a demonstration performance, for example, at the start of a big win, etc.).

In performing these displays, by arranging the intellectual property-related display arranged outside the display means and the intellectual property-related display displayed on the display means in the same arrangement, It is easy to convey that they are chapters and that the objects indicate the same thing.

(2-4)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "warning display (attention display)" is placed at a position visible to the player,
The warning display is arranged in the game area,
The warning display is displayed in substantially the same arrangement on the display means.

As a result, even though the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not impede the degree of freedom in placement. By displaying the warning on the display means at the end of the jackpot, etc., it is possible to prompt the player to pay more attention (warning).

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the contents indicated by the warning display (contents to the effect that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occur (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display will be displayed on the display means even while the pattern is changing. You may

In carrying out these indications, by arranging the warning indications placed outside the display means and the warning indications displayed on the display means in the same arrangement, both are marks of the same type and subject to the same. It is easy to convey that the two points indicate the same thing.

(2-5)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player,
A first warning content common to the first warning display and a second warning content common to the second warning display are displayed on the display means at different timings and in substantially the same arrangement as the respective warning displays.

As a result, even though the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not impede the degree of freedom in placement. By displaying the warning on the display means at the end of the jackpot, etc., it is possible to prompt the player to pay more attention (warning).

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the contents indicated by the warning display (contents to the effect that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occur (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display will be displayed on the display means even while the pattern is changing. You may

In carrying out these indications, by arranging the warning indications placed outside the display means and the warning indications displayed on the display means in the same arrangement, both are marks of the same type and subject to the same. It is easy to convey that the two points indicate the same thing.

(2-6)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player,
displaying a first warning content common to the first warning display on the display means at a predetermined timing in substantially the same font as the first warning display;
A second warning content common to the second warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same arrangement as the second warning display when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, even though the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not impede the degree of freedom in placement. By displaying the warning on the display means at the end of the jackpot, etc., it is possible to prompt the player to pay more attention (warning).

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the contents indicated by the warning display (contents to the effect that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occur (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display will be displayed on the display means even while the pattern is changing. You may

In carrying out these indications, by arranging the warning indications placed outside the display means and the warning indications displayed on the display means in the same arrangement, both are marks of the same type and subject to the same. It is easy to convey that the two points indicate the same thing.

(5) Do not arrange principal marks indiscriminately.
(5-1)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (model name) and a second mark (warning display) are arranged at positions visible to a player,
The first mark is displayed in one line without wrapping, and the second mark is wrapped and displayed in two or more lines.

As a result, it is possible to prevent damage to the image by wrapping marks such as model names that have a fixed image in a strange place, and to display marks that do not have a fixed image, such as warning signs, by wrapping them. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in placement.

(5-2)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (model name as a structure) and a second mark (model name as a printed matter) are arranged at positions visible to a player,
The first mark is placed in parallel when viewed from the front, and the second mark is placed obliquely when viewed from the front.

As a result, even if the mark with the same content (the model name in the example above) is displayed, it will prevent the wrong image from being given if it is placed diagonally or in a zigzag pattern. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of placement for small-sized marks by displaying them obliquely.

(6) Do not illuminate the main mark separately.
(6-1)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (model name) and a second mark (other than the model name) are arranged at positions visible to the player,
At least the first mark is configured such that the luminescence mode can be changed,
At least during the first period (when the symbols are stopped and the demonstration effect is not generated), the entire first mark is made to emit light in the same system color (in the second period, the light may be emitted separately).

As a result, at the timing when the pattern is stopped and the player is likely to be away from the seat (in other words, at the timing when the player who is looking for the game machine sees it), the model name is made to have a unified lighting mode. As a result, it does not look like a part of the model name is missing (lighting off, lighting in a different color, blinking in a different pattern), so the risk of giving a wrong impression or wrong information to the player can be reduced. On the other hand, as for the mark which is not the model name, it is possible to enhance the effect of attracting the player by prioritizing the performance function as the light emitting means over the identification function as the mark.

(6-2)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (model name) and a second mark (other than the model name) are arranged at positions visible to the player,
At least the first mark is configured such that the luminescence mode can be changed,
At least the first period (while the pattern is stopped in a low probability state) is the light emission mode in the first system color, and the second period (while the pattern is stopped in the high probability state) is the light emission mode in the second system color. Made the entire emblem glow in the same system color.

As a result, in the model name, part of the model name is missing (lights off, different color lighting, blinking in a different pattern), it is possible to reduce the risk of giving a wrong impression or wrong information to the player. Furthermore, by using different lighting modes during the normal game and during the variable probability game, the player or the store clerk can easily determine the game state.

(7) Prominence of principal marks.
(7-1)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (main title of the model name) and a second mark (subtitle of the model name) are arranged at positions visible to the player,
The first mark was a three-dimensional mark (logo accessories, etc.), and the second mark was a two-dimensional mark (printed matter, etc.).

As a result, of the two (or more) marks, the first mark is at least more prominent than the second mark, so that the player may consider the second mark to be a mark with a special meaning (see above). In the example, the risk of misunderstanding that it is the subject of the model name) can be reduced.

(7-2)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (model name) and a second mark (function name) are arranged at positions visible to a player,
For the second mark, it is possible to emit light as a whole, but it is impossible to emit individual light that makes only one character shine,
For the first mark, it is possible to emit light as a whole, and it is also possible to emit individual light that makes only one character shine. (The first mark may be separated by letters and the second mark may not be separated by letters.)

As a result, of the two (or more) marks, the first mark is at least more prominent than the second mark, so that the player may consider the second mark to be a mark with a special meaning (see above). In the example, the risk of misunderstanding that it is the subject of the model name) can be reduced.

(8) Do not conspicuous the caution mark.
(8-1)
The 1st mark (a mark that would not be considered as trademark use) and the 2nd mark (a mark that does not pose a problem even if it is considered as trademark use) in a position visible to the player. In the arranged game machine,
The first mark is configured so that it can transition between an easily visible state (or visible state) and a difficult visible state (or invisible state), and at least while the design is stopped, the proportion of the invisible state is higher. made it

As a result, of the two (or more) marks, the first mark is at least more prominent than the second mark, so that the player may consider the second mark to be a mark with a special meaning (see above). In the example, the risk of misunderstanding that it is the subject of the model name) can be reduced.

(8-2)
The 1st mark (a mark that would not be considered as trademark use) and the 2nd mark (a mark that does not pose a problem even if it is considered as trademark use) in a position visible to the player. In the arranged game machine,
The first mark is placed in at least a smaller display size than the second mark, and
At a predetermined timing, it is displayed on the display means in a size larger than the size arranged on the board.

As a result, of the two (or more) marks, the first mark is at least more prominent than the second mark, so that the player may consider the second mark to be a mark with a special meaning (see above). In the example, the risk of misunderstanding that it is the subject of the model name) can be reduced.

Note that the above "(5-3: Configuration example 1 of another embodiment 5)", "(5-4: Configuration example 2 of another embodiment 5)", "(6-2: Configuration of another embodiment 6 Example)”, “(9: Configuration Examples of Alternative Embodiments 7 and 8)”, and “(13. As for items, information related to setting suggestions may be displayed as at least a part of the identification information (whether the first identification information or the second identification information) displayed on the display means.
When each character of "Fujimaru-kun" constituting the model name logo 1090 is lit or blinked in the same color or different colors, a constituent element (for example, "Maru ”, “Kun”) has a specific color, for example, blue indicates setting 6 definite suggestion, red indicates high setting (setting 4 or more) definite suggestion, green indicates setting 1 negative suggestion Therefore, the first identification information and/or the second identification information may also serve as a setting suggestion effect. In addition, in a form that is written together with the first identification information and / or the second identification information (a certain time scale (specific game period: during pattern fluctuation, during big win game, waiting for customers, etc.) , redundantly, superimposedly, and compositely displayed), and a setting suggestion effect may be displayed.

<13. Another Embodiment 9, FIGS. 80 to 81>
(13-1: Background)

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, various game machines such as a pinball game machine, a reel-type game machine, an arrange ball game machine, and a mahjong game machine are widely known. These machines are manufactured by various manufacturers, and are provided with series model names that have been given to multiple models for many years, such as "Mr. It is juxtaposed to the island facility.

Some of these gaming machines are known to have a so-called “setting function” that allows setting the expected value of the profit to be given to the player in multiple stages (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-26756). . In the current hall, there are a mixture of ball game machines equipped with this "setting function" and game machines without it. Therefore, it is important for players to know the "model name" of the gaming machine as a clue to determine whether or not it is a ball game machine equipped with the "setting function" in the hall.

As a method of giving the model name of the pinball game machine to the game machine so that it can be seen by the player, as described in the above another embodiment, for example, a form in which "Fujimaru-kun" is provided on the front frame 1010 (FIG. 35B, FIG. 69 to 72), or a form in which ``Fujimaru-kun'', ``Mr.

However, since there are many model names for each type of pinball game machine, it may be difficult to determine from the model name alone whether or not the ball game machine is equipped with the "setting function". For this reason, when looking for a game machine with the desired model name in the hall, including determining whether it is equipped with a "setting function", it takes time to find the target game machine, It was not uncommon to search around for one. In addition, even if the player once remembers the installation location of the desired game machine in the hall, when the game machine is rearranged, it takes time to find the game machine with the desired model name again.

Therefore, it is desired to provide a gaming machine which, when installed in a hall, makes it easy to identify whether or not the gaming machine is equipped with a "setting function", and which makes it easy to find a desired gaming machine. ing.

(13-2: Attachment of setting machine information, FIGS. 80 to 81)
FIG. 80 exemplifies an embodiment in which setting machine information 1081 is given to a gaming machine. Here, "setting machine information" is information for identifying whether or not the game machine is equipped with a setting function, and includes characters, graphics, symbols, three-dimensional shapes, combinations of these, or combinations of these and colors. It is identification information consisting of a combination (a mark of Article 2 of the Trademark Law).

In FIG. 80, "composite identification information" obtained by adding setting machine information 1081 to model name 1080 is handled. Specifically, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. "." of the setting machine mark 1081a is added as information, and the whole is configured as composite identification information "Fujimaru-kun.".

In FIG. 80, this composite identification information "Fujimaru-kun." However, it may be provided at other locations on the front frame 1010, or may be provided on the game board surface.

Referring to FIG. 81(a), the composite identification information "Fujimaru-kun." includes model name information and setting machine information. ``Fujimaru-kun'' is smaller in size than ``Fujimaru-kun'', and is only added at the end of the character string of ``Fujimaru-kun''. Appeal is getting stronger. Therefore, the player can recognize "Fujimaru-kun" as the model name. Also, those who know that the "." It can be identified as a game machine equipped with

In FIG. 81(b), following the last character "n" in the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" of the model name 1080, 6 circle-shaped dots are arranged in an F-shape as the setting machine information 1081. An example is shown in which a setting machine mark 1081b consisting of a logo (hereinafter abbreviated as "F") is added, and the entirety is configured as composite identification information "Fujimaru-kun F". The size of the logo "F" is the same as the character string of the model name "Fujimaru-kun", but it is not a letter but a stylized F, that is, a symbol, and at first glance, the two are recognized as different components. can do. Due to this difference, the player can understand that "Fujimaru-kun" is the model name. Also, a person who knows that the logo "F" is a setting machine mark indicating that the game machine is equipped with a setting function should know that the model name is provided with the logo "F" of the setting machine mark 1081b. , it can be identified as a game machine equipped with a setting function.

In the example shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), in the composite identification information "Fujimaru-kun F", the setting machine marks 1081a and 1081b are composed of white dots, but are displayed in the same color as the model name 1080. good too.

(Confirmation of setting suggestion effect: Fig. 82 to Fig. 91)
Next, various setting suggestion effects will be described. We have already explained what the "setting suggestion effect" is, but below we will explain it with more specific examples. Note that any of the various effect means described in the above "<6. and the setting suggestion effect using the light emitting means will be mainly described.

In addition, the "first mark (for example, model name, figure or illustration of the main character, etc.)" provided on the game board surface and / or the game machine frame explained recently, and the second mark displayed on the display means (a mark that is the same as or similar to the first mark, or a mark that is completely different) may well be used for setting suggestive production. Therefore, in the following, while explaining the setting-suggestion effect, we will also explain the relationship between the setting-suggestion effect and various marks.

(Theme)
Most of the time the setting suggestion effect is executed is during a game (during a symbol variation display game or a winning game). Naturally, it is the player who is playing a game on that table. However, the following problems may occur if only setting-suggesting effects appear during the game.

(1) As a first problem, pachinko game machines (ball game machines) differ from slot machines in that the progress of the game is not carried out at the player's own pace, but is controlled by the game machine side. More specifically, in the case of a slot machine, the player hits the starting lever to start the game, and then the player freely presses the stop button to end the game. can. On the other hand, in the case of a pinball game machine, a variation pattern is selected upon winning a prize at the starting gate, and the variation time related to the variation pattern is determined as the execution time of one game, so the game starts to ends. During this period, the player cannot intervene, and everything is entrusted to the gaming machine. That is, in the case of a pinball game machine, unlike a slot machine, the game cannot be terminated at the convenience of the player, and the time schedule relating to the progress of the game is controlled by the game machine. What this means is that the start timing and end timing of appearance (execution) of many of the setting suggestion effects are controlled by the gaming machine side. Therefore, it is quite conceivable that, for example, the setting suggestion effect ends while the player is distracted by the effect on the next table and looks away, or while the player is fiddling with the cellular phone.

(2) Also, as a second problem, a person who starts the game after the execution of the setting suggestion effect is over, for example, after the predecessor who was playing when the setting suggestion effect was executed finishes the game, the game is replaced. The starting player (successor) has no way of knowing the content of the setting suggestion effect issued by the predecessor.

(Solution)
As a means for solving the above problem (problem), there is an "extension (addition) of the appearance period of advantageous information" called setting suggestion effect (information about set values). This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85. FIG.

(A) to (C) of FIG. 82 show an example of effects during a certain symbol variation display game, (D) to (F) show an example of effects during the next symbol variation display game, (G ) to (K) show an example of the effects during the waiting period after the end of the symbol variation display game (“demo start waiting effect”, “customer waiting effect (demonstration effect (demo screen))”). Note that in FIG. 82, a background effect and a plurality of advance notice effects related to the effect mode actually appear, but are omitted for convenience of explanation. Also, for convenience of explanation, the "symbol variation display game" may be abbreviated as "symbol variation display" or "symbol variation".

Referring to FIG. 82, after the current (first time) symbol variation display starts (Fig. (A)), during the symbol variation display, a specific character (Fujimaru-kun) 901 performs a halo effect (halo display). ) 902 (FIG. (B): “halo effect 902+specific character 901”). Here, this effect will be described as "setting 6 (highest setting) fixed effect" belonging to the above "setting N fixed effect". After that, the symbol variation display game execution period (variation time) has passed, and the decorative symbol is stopped at "357" indicating a lost symbol (Fig. (C)).

Subsequently, the operation pending ball is digested, and the next (second) symbol variation display is started (Fig. (D)). In this example, at the start of the next symbol variation display, the "halo effect 902" that appeared in the previous symbol variation and a small specific character 901a on the upper right of the screen are displayed. This specific character 901a is, for example, the specific character 901 that appeared in the previous pattern variation display game reduced in size (so-called chibi character, super-deformed (registered trademark), etc.). It is displayed as a related image (an effect display that appears corresponding to the appearance of a specific setting suggestion effect).

Such a halo effect 902 and the specific character 901a act as a "specific effect (execution confirmation effect)" capable of recognizing (confirming) the execution of the setting suggesting effect. Here, as shown in FIGS. (E) to (F), the halo effect 902 is immediately finished, but the display of the specific character 901a on the upper right of the screen is continued both during the symbol variation display and when the symbol variation is stopped. continuing. That is, when the setting suggestion effect is executed during the symbol variation display, the execution of the setting suggestion effect is recognizable (confirmable) after completion of the symbol variation display. In addition, when the setting suggestion performance is executed during the symbol variation display, the display mode is such that the execution of the setting suggestion performance can be recognized after the symbol variation display is finished and during the symbol variation stoppage.

After that, as shown in FIG. (F), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at a random number of "634", and the result of the symbol variation display game is "Loss". In this example, with the current (second) symbol variation display game, all the existing balls with pending operation are digested and the balls with pending operation become zero (Figures (A), (E) to (F)). (Refer to the pending icon in the pending display area 76).

(Regarding the display of specific characters in the menu screen: Fig. 82 (G) (H) (I))
When the decorative pattern is "634" and the pattern is stopped (remains in the state of waiting for the start of the demonstration), the table becomes empty, and the gaming table is left for a while (a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the pattern was stopped. And/or when the game ball is not fired in the symbol stop state (such as when a predetermined time has passed in the state where the touch sensor is not detected), as shown in FIG. '' and a button image appears, and when the effect button 13 is operated, the notification that the menu screen (game setting screen) can be opened is started. When the player operates the production button 13 in this state, a "menu screen" as shown in FIG. displayed. That is, when a predetermined operation by the operation means is performed by the player under predetermined conditions (for example, the period during which the pattern fluctuation is stopped (during the production before the start of customer waiting or during the customer waiting production, etc.), the specific production is not executed. (non-display, non-notification), and the execution of the setting suggestion effect becomes unrecognizable (unconfirmable).Simply speaking, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect can be recognized during the symbol fluctuation stop, the operation means If a predetermined operation is performed by, the execution of the setting suggestion effect is made unrecognizable.This is because if a specific effect is displayed unnecessarily, the display will be a hindrance. It should be noted that the period during which the execution of the setting suggestion effect cannot be confirmed (the specific effect is temporarily not executed) and the game situation often differ depending on the game characteristics, so it is appropriate You just have to decide.

In addition, the "menu screen" shown in FIG. is shown as an example of the menu items displayed on the game setting screen in which the player can select the settings of his/her preference.Here, as an example of the menu screen, an enemy character to appear in the current production mode is selected. Various items such as "character selection", "volume adjustment", "light amount adjustment", "BGM selection", "return (end menu screen)", etc. are displayed in this menu screen. A cursor (arrow, index) 907 can be moved up and down by operating the direction keys 75 to select a menu item that the player wants to set. When the player presses the effect button 13, the menu item can be determined.

For example, when the item "character selection" in the menu screen shown in FIG. (H) is selected, the "character selection screen" shown in FIG. (I) is displayed. In this character selection screen, a plurality of aliens 903 (characters unrelated to the setting suggestion effect) and an icon image 901b related to the specific character 901 or 901a (specific image related to the executed setting suggestion effect (specific effect) One)) is displayed, and the player who opens the menu screen can also know the execution of the setting suggesting effect, the type of the setting suggesting effect that has been executed, the setting value information, and the like. Here, the specific character 901a displayed in a small size at the upper right of the screen is displayed as an "icon", which is "a small picture that makes it easy to specify and distinguish the target". By looking at this icon image 901b, the player can know the fact that the setting suggestion effect of "setting 6 (highest setting) fixed effect" has appeared. It can be seen that setting 6 is the highest setting.

Further, by moving the cursor 907 to the icon image 901b while the menu screen is being displayed (here, the character selection screen), specific game information related to the state of appearance of the setting suggestion effect can be notified. good too. This "specific game information" includes, for example, "numerical information (occurrence number information)" such as how many times the setting suggestion effect has appeared since the power was turned on today, and what the icon image means. Information related to the setting suggestion effect such as whether to perform, that is, "set value information (suggestion information)" may be configured to be checkable. For example, by displaying a balloon on the right side of the liquid crystal screen, or by selecting and confirming an icon image with the operation means in the same way as selecting and confirming a menu item and displaying another screen (setting suggestion effect information screen), etc. It can be configured so that a person can display the above-described numerical information and suggestive information. Further, it may be possible to select display and non-display (continuation of display/end of display) of the icon image by operating the operation means in a predetermined procedure in the menu screen. As for the suggested information to be displayed (informed), the suggested content of "setting 6 is confirmed" suggested by the setting suggestion effect (here, setting 6 confirmation effect) may be displayed, but the information is ambiguous. For example, information such as setting 4 or higher is likely to be selected (appears easily), setting 4 or higher is confirmed, and the like may be displayed. Also, in the illustration, only the specific character is iconized and emphatically displayed as an image (icon image 901b) related to the setting suggesting effect, but the alien character 903 may also be iconized and displayed.

In addition, FIG. (I) shows an example in which only one icon image 901b as a specific effect is displayed in the liquid crystal screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of setting suggestion effect that appears is shown. It is possible to configure so as to be able to display "a plurality of types of specific effects (specific images)" according to the conditions. In other words, "a plurality of setting suggestion effects that appeared in the past appear at the same time" (more precisely, specific effects related to the setting suggestion effects that appeared in the past appear at the same time), (The same applies to FIGS. 83 and 84 described later).

Such a display can be said to be a useful display mode when a player guesses settings or selects a gaming machine. However, since the display area is limited, if many display types are provided, for example, a specific image that cannot be displayed on the screen (a non-display state A specific image) may be displayed, or a sub liquid crystal display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device for displaying a menu screen) may be provided and displayed thereon (the display method is not particularly limited). Further, although the specific character 901b is displayed as an icon, its display mode is not particularly limited, and for example, the same or similar to the specific character 901a may be displayed. Also, in this example, the specific character is displayed in the character selection screen, but it may be configured to be displayed in one or more other menu items. In addition, the display of multiple types of specific images (specific effects) is not limited to the specific menu items (character selection screen) shown in FIG. It is also possible in periods such as K) see). In this case as well, it is possible to use a scroll display or a sub-liquid crystal display device to display a plurality of types of specific effects (the same applies to FIGS. 83 to 85, which will be described later).

In addition, FIG. (G) shows an example in which the specific character 901a is continuously displayed even after the second symbol variation display is completed. After that, the specific character 901a may be temporarily erased from the screen. The erasing timing includes, for example, when the symbol variation display ends, at a predetermined timing before the start of the customer waiting effect (during the demonstration start waiting effect) (for example, at the start of the menu display possible notification effect 905), and when the customer waiting effect starts. For example, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the previous state. In this case, the specific character 901a is displayed on the menu screen (Fig. (H)), when a specific menu item is selected and determined (Fig. (I)), or during customer waiting effects shown in Figs. (J) and (K) to be described later. It can be displayed (redisplayed) in the middle (demonstration screen) or the like.

(Regarding the display of a specific character in the demo screen (during the customer waiting effect): Fig. 82 (G) (J) (K))
Returning to the description of FIG. 82(G), if left as it is in the symbol stop state (after the symbol variation display game is over), as already described, a predetermined condition (for example, "predetermined time from symbol stop (for example, 180 seconds) elapses” and/or “a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses of the symbol stop state and non-detection state by the touch sensor”) is satisfied, and a “demo screen (demo movie)” is started. Figure (J) illustrates part of the first half of the demo movie, and Figure (K) illustrates part of the second half of the demo movie. A series of demo movies are played back and displayed repeatedly to effectively appeal the appeal of the gaming machine. In FIG. (J), the name of the gaming machine (“CR Fujimaru-kun Senki”) and an effect in which a plurality of fighter planes (demonstration screen characters) fly around in the sky are displayed. is displayed. Also, in FIG. (K), the name of the gaming machine is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and a specific character 901a is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. In other words, it is possible to recognize the execution of the setting suggestion effect during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect (demonstration effect).

Here, the characteristic point is that the display of the specific character 901a is continued even after the demonstration screen display is started, and the demonstration screen character (for example, an effect in which a plurality of fighter planes fly in the sky) appears in the demonstration screen display (for example, For example, it is designed not to interfere with the display of the group of fighter planes shown in FIG. The appearance of the specific effect on the demo screen in this way is suitable for the player who is in the process of selecting a gaming machine because it is a situation in which useful information (advantageous information) for choosing a gaming machine is announced. is.

In the previous example (FIGS. 82(D) to (F)), "character display + backlight display (specific character A)" is performed during symbol variation display, and "character display only (specific effect A)" is performed during demo screen display. )”. However, it is not necessarily limited to this display mode. For example, when "specific character A" or "specific character B (character display + character display)" is displayed as a setting suggestion effect during symbol variation display, when the next symbol variation starts or during the next symbol variation display At a predetermined timing, each individual specific effect (specific effect A for specific character A, specific effect B for specific character B) may be executed. effect" (common specific effect C for both specific character A and specific character B) may be executed.

In the case of the above-mentioned "common specific effect", it is preferable that the contents suggested by the setting suggesting effects are similar at a certain level or more. For example, if there is a "setting suggestion effect A" that is likely to be setting 1 (lowest setting) and a "setting suggestion effect B" that is likely to be setting 6 (highest setting), one setting suggestion After the performance is executed, if the common specific performance (specific character) is executed, it is not possible to know at all whether the set value is "high or low", that is, the fact that the setting suggestive performance has appeared is notified. However, it means that information that is useless as a setting inference element can be reported. In that case, there is no point in performing a specific effect (execution confirmation effect).

Therefore, for example, we focus on "setting suggestion effects of the fixed system" such as "setting 6 confirmed" setting suggestion effect (setting N fixed effect) and setting suggestion effect of "setting 4 or more confirmed" (specific range suggestion effect), then A specific effect (execution confirmation effect) may be executed. Specifically, among the definite setting suggestion effects, the setting suggestion effect may be narrowed down to the setting suggestion effect in which the intermediate setting range (setting values 3, 4) or more is determined, or preferably the setting suggestion effect in which the high setting range is determined. (For example, setting N or more is confirmed (N=4, 5), or setting N is confirmed (N=4, 5, 6)), and then a specific effect is executed, more preferably, the high setting range is confirmed Of the setting suggesting performances to be set, the setting suggesting performances for which the setting of 5 or more is decided are narrowed down, and then the specific performance is executed. Moreover, focusing on the viewpoint of machine division, it is also possible to narrow down to those for which set values exceeding 100% of machine division are fixed.

When narrowing down to a specific setting suggestion effect as described above, there are two effects. The first effect is the simplification of the display contents due to the aggregation of information. If a specific image is blindly displayed according to the type of setting suggestion effect that has been executed, and the appearance of many setting suggestion effects is individually indicated, the display area will be insufficient, and the displayed objects will be complicated and unintelligible. it gets harder. However, by appropriately consolidating and displaying the information, not only does the appearance become neater, but also setting suggestion effects of the same level are aggregated, so there is an effect of increasing the accuracy of the information.

The second effect is obscuring of suggested settings due to aggregation of information. This "vagueness of setting suggestions" seems to go against the first effect of the former (increase in accuracy of information), but that is not the case. Details are given below.

For example, in the first setting suggestion effect, “setting 4 or more confirmed effect” appears, in the second setting suggestion effect, “setting 5 likely effect” appears, and in the third setting suggestion effect, “setting 1 It is assumed that a denial effect (setting 2 or more confirmed effect)” appears. In this case, as a specific effect that aggregates the appearance of the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect as effects of the same level, the "icon (specific effect) indicating that the effect with a high possibility of setting 4 or higher has appeared" is displayed. It is displayed, and it is possible to know that it has appeared twice on the menu screen.

However, since the third setting suggesting effect "'effect denying setting 1'" is not at the same level, it is not aggregated. As the first effect, "accuracy of information is increased" is the portion of "appearing twice" with a high possibility of setting 4 or higher. Naturally, appearance twice rather than appearance once increases credibility as a setting speculation element.

And, as the second effect, "ambiguity of setting suggestions" is because even though the first setting suggestion effect is "setting 4 or more fixed effect", the specific effect is "setting 4 or more" This is the part where the icon is displayed.

As a result, the player (predecessor) who has actually confirmed the first setting suggestion effect can recognize that "4 or more settings are confirmed", while the player who has not confirmed the first setting suggestion effect (successor It is possible to provide a difference in the amount of information such that the person (person) can only grasp that "the setting is likely to be 4 or more". In other words, the player who was able to confirm the setting suggestion effect (first advantageous information) with a high setting guess factor (in the above case, the predecessor who confirmed the setting of 4 or more was confirmed) was able to clearly confirm the setting value. You can carry the game to your advantage.

On the other hand, other players (in the above case, we have not confirmed that the setting is 4 or more, but there is a high possibility that the setting is 4 or more (the second advantageous information, which is less valuable as game information than the first advantageous information) A successor who is able to confirm the information) may enjoy the game with more anxiety than the predecessor. This means that a player who has confirmed a setting-suggestion effect with a high setting-speculation element can have useful information that only he or she can know, and other players cannot actually confirm the setting-suggestion effect. The above has the significance of "equalizing the provision of information" that provides a certain amount of useful information without giving information of equivalent value. By such "vagueness of suggested setting content", it is possible to provide a difference in the amount of information between the former and the latter, so as not to give a sense of inequality or dissatisfaction.

In addition, if the "setting 6 confirmed effect" that definitely informs the highest setting 6 appears even once, the "icon indicating setting 6 confirmed" will be displayed as a specific effect, and after that, other icons will be displayed. It may be set so as not to be performed (counting is performed but not displayed, or counting is not performed in the first place). This is because, when the maximum setting of 6 is determined, there is no meaning in displaying other specific effects.

In addition, from the viewpoint of "ambiguity of setting suggestion content" described above, for "setting 6 confirmation effect", instead of displaying "icon indicating setting 6 confirmation", for example, "setting 5 is likely" or By displaying an icon indicating "set 4 (or 5) or more confirmed", only the player who can actually confirm the setting 6 confirmation effect can know that the setting is 6 as a privilege. good too.

Also, it is not necessary to execute a corresponding specific effect (execution confirmation effect) after execution of all setting suggestion effects. As described above, when an ambiguous setting suggestion or a setting suggestion effect that a low setting is more likely to be selected appears, performing a specific effect after that will have the opposite effect (reduced desire to play). In addition, in the case of a gaming machine in which setting suggestion effects are executed at multiple times, preparing specific effects for all of them leads to a control burden. It can be said that it is preferable to execute the specific effect targeting the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, the start timing (specific effect start condition) of the specific effect (execution confirmation effect) can be appropriately determined according to the nature of the game. Typically, it is during the symbol variation display game after the next time, during the menu screen, during the demo screen, etc., as described with reference to FIG. The meaning of "the next and subsequent symbol variation display games" includes displaying in the game following the game in which the setting suggestion effect has appeared (at the start of variation, at a predetermined timing during variation, at the end of variation, etc.), The concept also includes displaying after a plurality of games without displaying in the next game, without displaying in the next game in which the setting suggestion effect appears.

Also, the period (specific effect end condition) in which the specific effect (execution confirmation effect) can be confirmed can be appropriately determined. Typically, for example, one or a plurality of periods (A) to (K) below can be employed. (A) Until the next or multiple jackpot wins (start or end of the jackpot) (specific jackpots may be counted), (B) The number of times the symbol variation display game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times N (1≤N). (Γ-1) until a predetermined time elapses from a specific timing (end timing is managed by RTC), (Δ) until a specific time arrives (end time is managed by RTC), (E) menu screen (Ζ) until the number of times the demo screen (demo movie) is displayed reaches a predetermined number of times X (1 ≤ X), (Η) the demo screen (demo movie) Until a predetermined time (eg, 30 minutes to 1 hour) has passed since is displayed, (Ι) the number of out balls (the number of out balls in normal conditions and/or the number of out balls in all states) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 shots). Until (managing the display end timing by the number of hit balls), (K) until the power of the gaming machine is turned off, (Λ) until the setting value is changed (including changing the same setting), etc. ( The same applies to examples of effects shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, which will be described later).

Regarding the specific effect (execution confirmation effect), not only the image display effect is used, but also the light effect (lighting the LED in a specific light emission pattern), the sound effect (outputting a specific sound effect, normal BGM Instead, one or a plurality of rendering means may be used, such as changing to a specific BGM, or a movable body accessory (moving in a specific action pattern). For example, when using a light effect, a specific LED (or a dedicated LED) may emit light in blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow colors, etc., depending on the type of setting suggestive effect that appears. It can be done (the same applies to the example of effect shown in FIG. 83, which will be described later).

It is also conceivable to use a mark displayed on the game board surface and/or the game machine frame as the specific effect. In this case, the effect of displaying in the same display mode, the effect of displaying in a different display mode, etc. are as described above.

In addition, regarding the above-mentioned specific effect (execution confirmation effect), the player can indicate what kind of effect mode the setting suggestion effect that appeared in the past is, what the setting value information (suggestion information) is, etc. It is preferable to use a presentation mode in which is easy to understand. For example, when a character-based setting suggestive effect including "specific character 901 (Fujimaru-kun)" shown in FIG. It is preferable to display a reduced or iconized version of the character (which can be easily recognized as Fujimaru-kun) (see figures (D) to (G), (I), (J), (K), etc.) . In addition, it is preferable to make the character information related to the appearing setting suggesting effect appear as the specific effect in terms of the effect mode that is easy for the player to understand. For example, if the appearing setting suggesting effect suggests "setting 4 or more confirmed", text information of "setting 4 or more confirmed!" can be displayed as a corresponding specific effect (described later. The same applies to the specific effect in FIG. 83).

Of course, it does not necessarily have to be an easy-to-understand presentation mode, and characters (for example, lover character Fujika-chan, nemesis character) and Fujimaru-kun who have some kind of relationship (for example, conceptual relationship, design relationship, etc.) with Fujimaru-kun Items related to Mr. Fujimaru may be displayed, or other characters (for example, fighters and discs) and items that have nothing to do with Mr. Fujimaru may be displayed (for specific effects in FIG. 83 described later). as well).

Also, a display mode (for example, a display mode with different colors and/or shapes) may be used according to the type of setting suggestion effect or its suggested content (the same applies to the specific effect shown in FIG. 83 described later). For example, if the setting 2 or higher confirmed effect appears, the item image (blue magatama) attached to blue, if the setting 3 or higher confirmed effect appears, the yellow magatama, if the setting 4 or higher confirmed effect appears, the green color Magatama, rainbow-colored magatama when setting 6 confirmed effect appears (same for other setting suggesting effects (even number setting suggesting effect, odd number setting suggesting effect, low setting suggesting effect, high setting suggesting effect, etc.).

In addition, the setting suggesting effect that appears during the symbol variation display may belong to the setting suggesting non-announcement effect during variation, or may belong to the setting suggesting notice effect during variation. (The same applies to the setting suggestion effect in FIG. 83, which will be described later).

(Production example 2: Fig. 83)
FIG. 83 shows a case in which the setting suggestion effect appears during a specific advance notice effect (for example, during the ready-to-win effect) as another effect example in which the setting suggesting effect appears during the symbol variation display.

In the production example of FIG. 83, after the symbol variable display is started (FIG. (A)), the reach performance is started at a predetermined timing during the variable display (FIG. (B)). In the reach production here, as shown in FIG. (C), the mobile artillery 911 appears as an ally character and the disk 913 appears as an enemy character, and a story is created in which a battle unfolds between the mobile artillery 911 and the disk 913. It is a production of. When the ready-to-reach production starts, a mission "Shoot down the saucer!" It is displayed to notify that the result of this game is a big win. However, if the disc 913 cannot be shot down, it becomes "Mission failed", and a lost pattern is displayed to notify that the current game result is lost.

The place where the production branches after FIG. (C) indicates that there are multiple types of ready-to-win production scenarios. In this example, representatively, two scenarios are shown, namely, an effect scenario in which the effect on the (D1) side is developed and an effect scenario in which the effect on the (E1) side is developed. Which scenario is to be executed is determined by a predetermined effect lottery based on variation pattern information and set value information.

In the production scenario in the above diagram (D1), "Fighter 917 (normal support character)" appears during the battle as a reinforcement for the allied character side, and the fighter 917 supports the attack by the mobile battery 911. It is the content of the production that is performed. In the production scenario on the other side of FIG. (E1), a "specific character 919 (special support character)" appears as reinforcements for the allied characters, and the specific character 919 (hereinafter referred to as "Fujimaru-kun 919") provides support. In the form of an attack by the mobile artillery battery 911, it has a production content.

Here, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot differs depending on the characters appearing in the reinforcements, and in this example, "fighter plane 917 (normal character)<Fujimaru-kun 919 (specific character)". The result is "losing" (see Figure (D2) or Figure (E2)). It is possible that the fighter 917 will be selected with all settings 1 to 6, but Fujimaru-kun 919 will only be selected with settings 4 or higher, that is, the setting suggestion effect of "setting 4 or higher is confirmed". Therefore, in the production scenario on the side of (E1), although the result of this game is "losing", it becomes clear that the setting is "4 or higher" when Fujimaru-kun 919 appears.

In the example of FIG. 83, the four sides of the liquid crystal display device 36, as shown in FIG. is displayed as if it were bordered by In this example, as the specific image, a rainbow-colored effect image 920 is displayed in the form of a frame, with four sides highlighted. This rainbow-colored effect image 920 functions as a specific effect (execution confirmation effect) in the same manner as the specific character 901 described in FIGS.

FIG. (E3) shows an example in which the effect image 920 is continuously displayed even after the current symbol variation display game is over (for example, during the next and subsequent symbol variation display games (not shown)). Here, the display of "Menu screen display ⇒ + button image" shown in FIG. As the condition for ending the display of this effect image 920, for example, one or more of (A) to (Λ) described above with reference to FIG. 82 can be employed.

Therefore, even if the player misses the appearance of Fujimaru-kun 919 for some reason, he or she can notice that by the effect image 920, and even if the player quits due to time constraints or the like. , the subsequent player (successor) can quickly recognize this situation (the situation where it is found that the setting is 4 or higher). Note that the specific image (effect image 920) described above is merely an example, and with respect to the specific image (specific effect), if it is possible to confirm (recognize) the fact that the setting suggestion effect has appeared, the effect mode can be determined as appropriate.

Instead of (or in addition to) the effect image 920, "Monochrome Fujimaru-kun 919b" may be displayed. In this case, for example, if "Color Fujimaru-kun 919a" is displayed, setting 6 is confirmed, and if "Monochrome Fujimaru-kun 919b" is displayed, setting 4 or higher may be confirmed. In this way, when marks (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) created based on the same mark (Illustration image of Mr. Fujimaru) are displayed on the display means, the colors, sizes, fonts, etc. It is possible to vary the setting suggestion degree by setting the

(Production example 3: Fig. 84)
FIG. 84 shows, as another example of the effect, a case in which the setting suggesting effect appears during the jackpot game. Here, as a representative example, an example in which the above-mentioned "variable V probability type" is adopted will be described. FIG. 84(B1) and FIG. 84(C1) exemplify a V-winning performance (blessing performance) that appears when a V-winning is achieved during a big hit.

Figure (A1) shows the effect during the round during the big hit, here, the specific area (V winning area) in the big winning opening is opened on the 6th round, and the game ball wins in the V winning area described as a thing.

When a V prize is won, normally, "V display (V image 931) only" (normal V prize effect (effect not accompanied by setting suggestion effect)) shown in FIG. (B1) is displayed. If it is satisfied (for example, if you win the appearance lottery of the setting suggestion effect, etc.), for example, as a “high setting (setting 4 or more) fixed effect”, “V display (V image 931) + specific character (disk 932 )” (V winning effect with setting suggestion (effect accompanied by setting suggestion effect)) is displayed. When this "V display + specific character" appears, as shown in Fig. (C2), even after the big hit ends and the next game starts, the specific character related to the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the upper right of the liquid crystal screen. (disk 932) is displayed in a reduced form (disk 932a shown). The specific character may be displayed only in the next game (that is, the first game after the end of the big win), or may be displayed until the next big win. Alternatively, it may be a time management such as 3 minutes, or a number of hit balls such as 300 total out balls. Λ) can be employed.

In this example, the V probability variable type gaming machine has been described as an example, but the model of the gaming machine is not particularly limited as long as the gaming machine is capable of displaying the setting suggestion effect during the big win. For example, when passing through a specific area during a small hit (when V wins), a so-called “one type and two types mixed type” may be used, or a special figure 1 and a special figure. 2 may be a so-called "simultaneous variable type" capable of variable display in parallel. Moreover, it may be a game machine such as the above-described "ST type", "falling lottery type", or "general probability variable type". Further, the setting suggestion performance appearing during the big win game may belong to the non-fluctuation setting suggestion non-announcement performance or the non-fluctuation setting suggestion non-announcement performance.

(Interconnected setting suggestion production)
82 to 84 (the specific character 901a in FIG. 82, the effect image 920 in FIG. 83, the disk 932a in FIG. 84, etc.). When performing a specific effect (execution confirmation effect) related to the appearance of or a setting suggestion effect that spans multiple rotations ("setting suggestion effect + setting suggestion effect" or "setting suggestion effect + specific effect (execution confirmation effect)"), In addition to simply lengthening the period in which the setting suggesting effect appears, the player may have an expectation that the setting suggesting effect will continue after this. For example, "on the condition that the first setting suggestion effect appears (executes), the second setting suggestion effect ``Linked setting suggestion effect'' having a relationship of ``main'' for the first setting suggestion effect and ``subordinate'' for the second setting suggestion effect (specific effect (execution confirmation effect)). may be adopted. In the case of displaying such a "linkage-type setting suggesting effect", for example, (I) a first lottery is executed to determine whether or not the first setting suggesting effect is to appear, and the first lottery is won. If so, that is, when the first set suggestion performance is to appear, a second lottery is executed to determine whether or not the second set suggestion performance is to appear. Then, when the second lottery is won, the second setting suggestion effect can be displayed. In addition, for example, (II) as a setting suggestion production scenario, "no setting suggestion effect appears", "only the first setting suggestion effect appears", "first setting suggestion effect + second setting suggestion effect"Appear" and "Do not show setting suggestion effect" are provided, and one of these can be determined by lottery.

Also, when the "linkage type setting suggestion effect" is to appear, the setting value information suggested by the second setting suggestion effect is more beneficial than the setting value information (suggestion information) suggested by the first setting suggestion effect. It is preferable to set a prohibition rule regarding suggestive information so that it is information. In this case, the first setting suggesting effect that appears earlier suggests, for example, "setting 4 or more is confirmed", and the second setting suggesting effect that appears later suggests "setting 2 or more is confirmed". If this is the case, the player will be provided with useless set value information. Of course, it is not necessary to provide the prohibition rule mentioned above. This is because the greater the number of appearances of the setting suggestion effect, the more accurate the information as the setting guess element can be. For example, if the first setting suggestion effect suggests "even number setting" and the second setting suggestion effect also suggests "even number setting" (when setting suggestion effect of the same level appears), linked setting It is possible to obtain the information that "the possibility of setting an even number has increased" by the appearance of the suggestive effect once. In addition, even if at least a part of the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect are different in the effect mode, and the set value information corresponding to the effect mode of the second setting suggesting effect which comes later can be notified. good.

In addition, when distinguishing setting suggestion production (production determined by referring to the setting value) and production that does not correspond to it (production determined without referring to the setting value), "setting suggestion production and non-setting suggestion In addition to giving a specific name such as "performance", it can be divided by numbers such as "first performance and second performance (either can be the first setting suggestive performance)", or "special performance and normal performance (which is special performance You can also divide by terms such as In addition, alphabets, symbols, hiragana, katakana, kanji, Roman numerals, etc. may be used, and any code may be used as long as it is a code for distinguishing between them.

Also, as described above, there can be multiple types of setting suggestion effects (this does not mean that there are always multiple setting suggestion effects in one game machine, but there are multiple setting suggestion effects as options that can be installed in the game machine. Therefore, when multiple setting suggestion effects are installed in one gaming machine, one of them is designated as the "first setting suggestion effect", and a different setting suggestion effect is designated as the "second setting suggestion effect". , ``third setting suggestive effect'', and ``fourth setting suggestive effect'' (hereinafter continued). It may be individually referred to as a "first setting suggestion effect", and the others may be collectively referred to as a "second setting suggestion effect". Also, any one of them may be individually referred to as a "second setting suggestion effect", and the others may be collectively referred to as a "first setting suggestion effect".

In addition, among the setting suggestion effects, the setting suggestion effects having at least one common feature are divided into categories, and each category is divided into "first setting suggestion effect", "second setting suggestion effect", and "third setting suggestion effect" ( hereinafter) may be used. Examples of categories include (1) those classified by means of presentation used for setting suggestions (eg, display means, movable objects, LEDs, speakers, etc.), and (2) timing at which setting suggestions are made (eg, design stoppage). Time/during display of symbol variation/during jackpot, further subdivided during display of symbol variation (for example, before reach, during reach, after reach, etc.), (3) Specificity of setting suggestion (for example, selection (4) Rendering time of setting suggestive rendering (for example, less than 5 seconds) / 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds / 15 seconds or more, etc.).

In addition, the setting suggesting effect and the specific effect have been described in the above example as being "displayed" in an easy-to-understand manner, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The setting suggestion effect using at least one effect of the sound effect, the light effect, the movable body effect, and the image display effect has already been described. It may be one that uses directing. Examples of alternatives to the icon display (for example, the icon display character 901a shown in FIG. 82(I)) include a specific sound from a dedicated or dual-purpose speaker, or a specific light emission from a dedicated or dual-purpose lamp (such as an LED for performance). You can In addition, each effect means (liquid crystal display device 36, speaker 46, decorative lamp (LED) 45, movable body accessories 80, 90, other display means, etc.) for both the setting suggesting effect and the specific effect can be used independently or compositely ( concurrently).

[Another specific example of setting suggestion effect]
<Concrete Example 1 of Setting Suggestion Rendering: Mode of Setting Suggestion by Color of Light Emitting Means (LED): FIGS. 85 to 87>
In a specific example 1 of this setting suggesting effect, an LED (light emitting means) arranged so as to be visible to the player emits light in a setting suggesting color display mode (setting suggesting color), thereby executing the setting suggesting effect. That's what it means. The setting suggesting effect by the LED as in this example is also referred to as "LED setting suggesting effect". Here, the LED is either a full-color LED (single LED) in which LEDs of three primary colors of red, green, and blue are packaged, or a planar light source (hereinafter referred to as a planar light source) consisting of an aggregate of these LEDs and a diffusion plate If necessary, the default (no suggestion) is white, purple (suggest even number), blue (suggest odd number), yellow (setting 2 or more (negative setting 1)), green (4 or more It is assumed that the light is emitted in colors such as red (5, 6 confirmed), rainbow (6 confirmed), and the like. The types of colors that these LEDs emit include blue, green, red, D patterns, and rainbow colors used in the pending change notice, and predetermined images during the jackpot game (for example, ending effect (end INT) as the background color of the display image (image notifying the end of the big hit)), etc., common to blue, black, green, gold, rainbow, specific characters that appear during pattern fluctuation (for example, A common color such as copper, silver, gold, or rainbow can be used as a color to be applied to a character such as an alien or a UFO related to a specific advance notice effect. In addition, it is possible to appropriately determine which color indicates what set value.

The LED according to this example (the LED used for setting suggestion) may be either an effect LED already provided in the gaming machine or a dedicated LED provided for setting suggestion (setting suggestion dedicated LED). It is up to you to decide whether to use the LED of or where to place the dedicated LED for setting suggestion. can also be used). First, the LED according to this example will be described in detail.

For example, at least a portion (at least a portion of the surrounding LEDs) of a decorative lamp 45 (hereinafter also referred to as "surrounding LEDs 45") in which a plurality of decorative LEDs are provided in the circumferential direction on the periphery of the front frame of the glass door 6 is provided. can be used for However, instead of using the decorative lamps 45 provided outside the glass door 6, LEDs provided inside the glass door 6 can also be used. For example, LEDs (LEDs provided on the game board) for number sectors (reference numeral 85a shown in FIG. and LEDs.

In FIG. 85, planar LEDs 83b are arranged on the rear wall of the upper starting port 34 and the lower starting port 35 below the center decoration 48 of the game board 3, and the setting suggestion effect is performed by the light emission mode of the planar LEDs 83b. indicates This configuration shows a configuration in which the setting suggesting effect is formed at a position where the player can easily check it while playing the game normally. Further, FIG. 86 shows a configuration in which the setting suggesting effect is performed using the number sector portion provided in the number display portion 85a. The form using the number display part 85a includes a form using only the number sector part at a specific position (FIG. 86(a)) and a form in which the lighting position changes (FIG. 86(b)).

Specifically, the former configuration shown in FIG. 86(a) is a “light-emitting point fixed type” in which the light-emitting point is fixed regardless of setting suggestion content (setting suggestion color). On the other hand, the latter configuration shown in FIG. 86(b) is a "light-emitting point variation type" in which the light-emitting point increases as the setting suggestion content (setting-suggesting color) with a relatively high expectation of high setting. be. In other words, it is a type in which the usage area of the setting suggestion effect varies according to the setting suggestion content (setting suggestion color). Regarding FIG. 86 (a) or (b), when performing a specific setting suggestion effect (for example, setting 6 confirmed suggestion), the entire number sector is colored in rainbow color, or the clock hand 82 is set at a predetermined time (for example, 6 o'clock), or effects (eg, glow, light, shadow, flare, gradation, etc.) may be applied.

Further, FIG. 87 shows a configuration example in which the surrounding LEDs 45 are used to perform setting suggestion effects. FIG. 87(a) shows a configuration in which a setting suggestion effect is performed using a part of the surrounding LEDs 45, and FIG. It is a thing. FIG. 87(a) shows four configuration examples, and the two configuration examples (i-1) and (i-2) on the left side of the front show one or more of the surrounding LEDs 45 for setting suggestion effect. In two configuration examples (E-3) and (E-4) on the right side of the front, the usage area of the surrounding LED 45 for the setting suggestion effect is the upper half and the lower half area. A large LED usage area is shown.

The configuration shown in FIG. 87(a) can be a "light emission point variation type" shown in FIG. 86(b). It should be noted that, once the setting suggestion effect by the LED is executed, if the setting suggestion effect continues for a long period thereafter (see "1-2. Concerning the duration of the LED setting suggestion effect" described later), the figure As shown in 87(C), after the setting suggesting effect is performed, a part of the surrounding LEDs 45 can be used as an area for setting suggesting effect, and the remaining area can be used for notice effect ( setting suggestion priority type). For example, in the case of the default without setting suggestion, the surrounding LEDs 45 as a whole function as LEDs for notice effect until some setting suggestion is made and the color changes to a color other than the default. However, after some setting suggestion is made and the color is changed to a color other than the default, at least a part of the surrounding LEDs 45 is made to function as a setting suggestion effect LED. When not used as an advance notice effect, control may be performed so that light is emitted in a default color (for example, white or off) (if the default is off, the light is off).

86 and 87, at least a part of "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first emblem) is displayed according to the emission of the number sectors provided in the number display section 85a and the surrounding LEDs 45. (Part or all of the component 1081) may emit light. For example, for "Fujimaru-kun" of the model name 1080 related to the model name logo 1090, "Fuji" is turned on in the case of FIG. and "maru" are emitted, and in the case of FIG. is, for example, to turn on the entire "Fujimaru-kun". In this case, the characters of the model name logo 1090 (“Fujimaru-kun” character string) correspond to the emission colors of the surrounding LEDs 45 (set suggested colors: here, white, purple, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.). , each character) may emit light in the same suggested setting color, or may emit light in a color different from the light emission color of the surrounding LEDs 45 . In any case, at least a part of "Fujimaru-kun" of the model name logo 1090 can be configured to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the lighting and blinking state of the surrounding LEDs 45 .

Also, contrary to the "setting suggestion priority type" in FIG. A configuration of "setting suggestion non-prioritized type" in which the light effect of the advance notice effect appears prior to the setting suggestion effect may be configured (see FIG. 87 (d)).

In addition, when waiting for customers (especially during the demo screen), it is configured as a "setting suggestion priority type" that prioritizes the setting suggestion effect over the light effect related to the demo screen. On the other hand, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be notified, or conversely, it may be a "setting suggestion non-priority type" that gives priority to the light effect related to the demonstration screen. In the former case, even when the pachinko hall is waiting for customers, it is possible to appeal that the pachinko hall has introduced a high setting at the time of an event, etc., so that the operating rate can be improved. On the other hand, however, if it is reported to the surroundings, there may arise a problem that players will scramble for the high setting platform. Therefore, it suffices to appropriately decide which type to adopt.

Any of the above-mentioned "fixed light emitting point type", "variable light emitting point type", "setting suggestion priority type", and "setting suggestion non-priority type" is adopted as the configuration for performing setting suggestion effects using LEDs. or is free. In addition, a configuration combining these, specifically, a configuration of "fixed light emission point type" and "prioritized type of setting suggestion", a configuration of "fixed light emission point type" and "non-prioritized type of setting suggestion", and a "variable light emission point type" and "setting suggestion priority type" configuration, or "light emission location variation type" and "setting suggestion non-priority type configuration" may be freely adopted.

(Setting suggestion production using LEDs provided on movable body accessories: Fig. 85)
Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect may be performed using an LED provided on the movable accessory. For example, the rear LED of the first movable body 91 (the corolla A1 or the corolla A2) can be used. In addition, for example, when performing a pseudo-continuation, a character plate (movable body accessory) such as "NEXT" provided at an appropriate place on the game machine is moved, and a configuration is provided to deterministically notify that the next pseudo-continuation will occur. Although it can be adopted, in the case of such a configuration, a setting suggesting effect may be produced using the lighting mode of LEDs used for a part of the character plate of "NEXT" or characters. For example, the logo plate 85 (usually arranged so as to be hidden behind the center decoration 48) indicated by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. Part or all of the characters (not shown) of "NEXT" displayed on the plate 85 are caused to emit light in the suggested colors (white, purple, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow).

(LEDs dedicated to suggesting settings: LEDs 83a, 84a, 84b, 84c in FIG. 85)
As described above, if the LED of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED of the notice effect are also used for the setting suggestion effect, it becomes difficult to distinguish from the color display mode of the normal decoration effect and the notice effect. It can be said that it is preferable to provide an LED and perform a setting suggesting effect by means of the LED. Therefore, in the case of providing a setting suggestion dedicated LED, there are the following forms.

For example, as shown in FIG. 85, a planar LED 83a may be provided around the performance button 13 (exhilarating button 70), and this planar LED 83a may be used as a setting suggestion dedicated LED. The reason why the external LED of the effect button 13 is used is that if the button LED 13b inside the effect button 13 is used, the player can decide which of the effect during the operation effective period (button effective period) and the setting suggesting effect. This is to prevent confusion because there is a risk of confusion. As another example, FIG. 85 shows an example in which LEDs 84a, 84b, and 84c are provided in the game board as LEDs dedicated to suggesting settings. These LEDs dedicated to the setting suggestion effect are provided at locations visible to the player, like the planar LEDs 83b described above.

The LED 84a is provided on the upper left part of the center decoration 48 of the game board, and the LED 84b is provided on the lower part of the center of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device, that is, on the front mounting plate 48a of the center decoration 48. Similar to the shape LED 83b, this is an example in which the setting suggestion effect is formed at a position where the player can easily confirm the effect while playing the game normally. However, the LED 84c is provided so as to be adjacent to the various function display portions in the non-game area in the upper right corner of the game board, and is formed at a position where the player hardly sees it during a normal game. That is, in the case of the LED 84c, compared with the other LEDs 84a and 84b arranged in the game area 3a, it is formed at a position where it is easy to distinguish whether or not it is an effect LED. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to whether it is the light effect by the notice effect or the LED setting suggesting effect. In particular, when the setting suggestion dedicated LED is formed in the non-game area, the player can easily confirm the contents of the setting suggestion effect without being confused with the light effect of the advance notice effect.

It should be noted that if the LED used for the advance notice effect, such as the decoration lamp 45, is also used for the setting suggestion effect, it becomes difficult to distinguish from the color display mode for the normal decoration effect and the notice effect. is provided, and the setting suggestion effect is preferably performed by this.

(1-1. Specific example of LED setting suggestion effect)
Next, an example of a configuration for suggesting settings by means of the LEDs will be described, paying particular attention to the display mode including the time of occurrence (opportunity for execution) and its duration.

In the setting suggestion by the LED (LED setting suggestion effect), the LED is changed from the default white to one of the setting suggestion colors "purple, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow", for example. The timing (execution timing) for changing to the suggestive color is roughly classified into "during a jackpot game", "during a symbol variation display game", and "waiting for a customer (during a demonstration waiting for the start of a demonstration or during a demonstration screen: Fig. 82 (G) (J))” and various other timings.

First, a specific example of the trigger for executing the LED setting suggestion effect will be described. When an execution opportunity arrives, the LED setting suggestion performance may be executed without fail, or when a predetermined execution lottery is won, the LED setting suggestion performance may be executed, and there are a plurality of execution opportunities. In that case, it is possible to appropriately decide whether or not to conduct the execution lottery according to the execution trigger.

(Execution opportunity related to jackpot game)
As an execution opportunity during the big win game, for example, at the end of the big win, specifically, there is a predetermined timing during the end INT (ending effect period), but at a predetermined timing from the start to the end of the big win game , an LED setting suggestion effect can be displayed. For example, during the start INT (opening production period), during the round game of a specific number of rounds (production period during a specific round), and during the INT between R of a specific number of rounds (INT production period between rounds), the end INT (ending effect period), the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined timing of at least one of the periods.

Further, when the LED setting suggestion effect is performed during the jackpot game, for example, the following conditions (a1) to (a4) may be attached.
(a1) When winning a specific jackpot. For example, when winning the jackpot with the highest advantage (16R long open probability variable in this embodiment) or the jackpot with the lowest advantage (for example, 4R long open time short), the LED setting suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot game. can be made
(a2) When the number of jackpot winnings (specific jackpots may be counted) reaches a predetermined number of times, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed.
(a3) When the number of consecutive big wins (specific big wins during consecutive games may be counted) reaches a predetermined number of times, an LED setting suggesting effect can be executed.
It should be noted that after executing the setting suggestion effect in the current big win, every time the number of times the big win is won reaches a predetermined number in the above (b1) (for example, the execution opportunity arrives in a cycle of two times), the big win in the above (c1). The execution opportunity is provided every time the number of consecutive residences reaches a predetermined number (for example, the execution opportunity arrives every two consecutive residences (2 times, 4 times, 6 times, etc.)). can be done.

(a4) In addition, when a specific effect is executed during the jackpot game, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed. For example, when a predetermined image during the jackpot game (for example, a display image (image notifying the end of the jackpot) during the ending effect (end INT)) is displayed (the predetermined image may function as a setting suggestion effect Good), execute the LED setting suggestion effect. The LED setting suggestion effect in this case can be said to belong to the above-mentioned "linked setting suggestion effect" in that the execution of the predetermined image (specific effect) is a condition (here, the display effect of the predetermined image is The relationship is "main" and the setting suggesting effect by the LED in this example is "subordinate"). However, even if the predetermined image (specific effect) and the LED setting suggesting effect are executed simultaneously or redundantly, if the LED setting suggesting effect does not require execution of the predetermined image, the The specific effect and the setting-suggesting effect by the LED are effects that are executed independently, and do not belong to the above-mentioned "linkage-type setting-suggesting effect".

(Execution opportunity related to symbol variation display game)
Further, the following (b1) to (b4) can be used as execution triggers related to the symbol variation display game, for example.
(b1) Every time the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (the number of symbol variations) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300 times) after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed.
(b2) When the number of pattern variations from the current big win reaches a predetermined number, that is, when the number of times of addiction to the next big win reaches a predetermined number, the LED setting suggesting performance can be executed.
(b3) When a specific notice effect is executed during the symbol variation display game, an LED setting suggestion effect can be executed. Specific advance notice effects include high-expectation advance notice effects such as SP reach and pseudo-reunion three times, but the specific notice effects are not particularly limited and can be determined as appropriate. In addition, when a specific pre-reading notice (for example, a pre-reading notice of a specific winning expectation level or more (red hold or more)) occurs, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed.
(b4) In addition, it is possible to execute the LED setting suggesting effect at an appropriate timing related to the symbol variation display game shown in specific examples 2 and 3 which will be described later.

(Execution opportunity related to waiting for customers)
In addition, the following (c1) to (c3) can be used as an execution trigger for waiting for a customer (during the demonstration start waiting effect or during the demonstration screen).
(c1) Execution of the LED setting suggesting effect at a predetermined timing during the demonstration start waiting effect (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the demonstration start waiting effect, or when the demonstration start waiting effect ends (at the start of the demo screen), etc.). can be done. In this case, the condition may be the time when the number of times of display during the demonstration start waiting effect reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, a plurality of times). By configuring to be able to execute the LED setting suggesting performance when the operation reserve balls are exhausted, even when the operation reserve balls are interrupted and the game cannot be started easily, the player is given a chance to execute the setting suggesting performance. Irritation can be alleviated.
(c2) The LED setting suggesting effect can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the demo screen starts, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the demo screen, etc.) in the demo screen (demo movie (demonstration display)). In this case, the condition may be that the demo screen has been displayed a predetermined number of times.

(Other triggers)
Other execution triggers include, for example, the following (d1) to (d4).
(d1) When a predetermined period of time has passed since the game machine was turned on, or each time a predetermined period of time has passed, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed (a form in which the timing of the execution trigger is managed by an RTC or a software counter). ).
(d2) When a predetermined time elapses from a specific timing (for example, start/end of a jackpot game, start/end of a specific game state, etc.), an LED setting suggestion effect can be executed. Note that the specific timing can be determined as appropriate.
(d2) When specific times (for example, 11:00 am, 3:00 pm, 7:00 pm, etc.) arrive, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed (the timing of the execution trigger is managed by the time information of the RTC). form).
(d3) When the number of out balls (for example, the number of out balls in normal state or the number of out balls in all states) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 shots), or each time the predetermined number is reached, an LED setting suggestion effect is executed. can be done (a form in which the execution opportunity is managed by the number of hit balls).

A plurality of execution triggers of (a1) to (d3) described above may be combined. In particular, in the case where the execution opportunity comes only once in a day's game, such as when a predetermined time has passed since the power of the gaming machine was turned on in (d1), it is possible to combine with other execution opportunities. , it is preferable to have the opportunity to execute the LED setting suggestion effect come a plurality of times.

(1-2. Concerning the duration of the LED setting suggestion effect)
When the above-described timing (execution opportunity) is reached, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed, but when the LED setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion is continued until a predetermined end condition is met. It can be carried out.

More specifically, when a certain execution opportunity arrives, a setting suggestion effect is started in which the LED emits light in a setting suggestion color, and thereafter, the current setting suggestion color of the LED is continued until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied. Here, the "predetermined end condition" is, for example, "when the next execution opportunity arrives and the LED setting suggesting effect is executed again", "after the execution of the LED setting suggesting effect this time, a predetermined number of rotations (symbol Until the number of fluctuations) ends”, “When a specific notice effect is executed (when SP reach occurs, when pseudo-ren appears 3 times, etc.)”, “Demonstration waiting for start of demo” or “Demonstration screen” etc. There are various forms such as a predetermined timing while waiting for a customer or "until the power is turned off", and the end condition can be a predetermined timing during a pattern variation display game, during a jackpot game, or during a customer wait.

One of the characteristic points of this example is, for example, "appears only during the period when the big win end screen is displayed", etc. Appears only for the effect time (ends in a relatively short time), Unlike the setting suggesting effect, the current LED setting suggesting effect is made possible to continue appearing over a plurality of game periods (for a long time). For example, it is possible to continuously appear over a plurality of game periods, or to continue appearing during a customer waiting waiting effect, one or a plurality of game periods, and a jackpot game period. Taking advantage of the fact that the LED setting suggestion effect is executed continuously for such a long period of time, a configuration having the following characteristics can be obtained.

(A-1) Configuration example 1
For example, as an example of the end condition of the LED setting suggestion effect this time, "when the next execution opportunity arrives and the LED setting suggestion effect is executed again", the case where the LED setting suggestion effect is executed at the end of the big hit is representative. For example, in one case, the LED lights up in 'blue' at the end of the first big win → the LED lights up in 'green' at the end of the second big win → the LED lights up in 'rainbow color' at the time of the third big win → Henceforth, the display mode of the light emission pattern is "no change". In other words, the case where information less useful than the previous setting suggestion information is not notified, in other words, the case of "no downfall (if it changes, only promotion)" and For example, white (no suggestion: default), purple (even number suggested), blue (odd number suggested), yellow (setting 2 or more confirmed), green (4 or more confirmed), red (setting 5 or more confirmed), rainbow (setting 6 confirmed ), "white →" purple ⇔ blue (there is no advantageous or disadvantageous relationship between the even number setting suggestion and the odd number setting suggestion, and it is treated as an equivalent suggested color (suggestion content). Same below) -> yellow -> green -> red -> rainbow color". For example, as shown in Figs. , in the current LED setting suggesting effect, if the "rainbow color" with the setting 6 confirmed appears, the "rainbow color" will be maintained thereafter, and the setting suggesting effect will not change to red or green. In this way, by setting "only promotion in case of change", it is possible to provide a setting suggestion effect that makes it easy to understand and confirm the event. In addition, by setting the changing color to "promotion color only", the more the number of games increases and the LED setting suggestion effect is executed (the more the setting suggestion promotion chance is encountered), that is, the more you hit, the more the set value This will increase the accuracy of inference about

However, it is not only the case of promotion, but the rainbow color of the setting 6 is confirmed at the first big hit, but it can change to a color such as blue that suggests a low rank, such as blue. may be demoted)” can also exist. In this case, even if the "rainbow color" appears this time, it may be a different setting suggestion color next time. It is possible to create a game period that can be confirmed at For this reason, the chance that another player who plays the game later can confirm the setting suggesting information without much effort is reduced, and there is a conflict between the player who made the setting suggesting color appear with difficulty and the other player. inequality can be avoided. Regarding the configuration in which the setting suggestion effect is performed using the LEDs, it is determined as appropriate whether the above-mentioned "no succession (only promotion in case of change)" or "presence of succession (in case of change, there is demotion)". be able to.

A preferable configuration example in the above-described "specific example 1 of setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion by LED color)" is as follows. Note that the parentheses indicate corresponding elements in this configuration example, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) shooting means (shooting operation handle 15, shooting device 32) capable of shooting game balls toward the game area;
Lottery means capable of executing a jackpot lottery (lottery related to the jackpot) (S410 during special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 12);
Pattern display means (liquid crystal display device 36 or special pattern display devices 38a, 38b) capable of variable display of patterns;
Production means capable of producing production (for example, an optical display device 45a including lamps and LEDs (decorative lamps 45), a liquid crystal display device 36, a vibrating device, a wind pressure device, a sound generator 46a, movable accessories 80 and 90, etc. )and,
Production control means (production control unit 24) capable of executing and controlling production by the production means,
When the result of the jackpot lottery is a predetermined result, a special game execution means (special electric role product management process S095 in FIG. 9) for executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player,
In a gaming machine in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery results in a predetermined result differs according to a set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages,
The production control means is
A setting suggestion effect execution means (production control unit 24, FIG. 32, FIG. 82 to FIG. 86, etc.) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value,
The setting suggestion effect execution means includes:
The rendering mode of the rendering means is changed from a first rendering mode (for example, first set suggestive color: for example, white) to a second rendering mode (second set suggested color: for example, purple, blue, yellow, green, red). and a second setting suggestive effect of changing the effect mode of the effect means from the second effect mode to a third effect mode (second set suggestive color: for example, rainbow color). and
When the effect mode of the effect means is changed to the second effect mode by the first setting suggesting effect, the second effect mode is continued until the second setting suggesting effect is executed (the next setting suggesting effect continue with the second suggested color until a color change occurs due to
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the configuration example related to (1), in the above "(A-1) configuration example 1" in which the setting is suggested by the color of the LED, after the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the next second setting suggestion effect is executed. This corresponds to a configuration example in which the first setting suggestion effect is continued until the first setting suggestion effect is performed. In terms of expression, it is simply "the effect mode of the effect means", but in the case of the LED, it is strongly conscious of the "LED effect mode of the effect means". In more detail, the ``lottery means'' is ``lottery means capable of executing a lottery related to a big win when the starting means detects a game ball'', and the ``symbol display means'' is in detail. , ``symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of the symbol''. Also, the "special game executing means" is configured to be capable of executing a winning game according to the winning type (win type: for example, winning type shown in FIG. 4).

(2) the production control means,
setting suggestion effect execution lottery means for performing a lottery for execution of a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value at least based on the current set value under a predetermined condition;
The second rendering modes include a plurality of second rendering modes (for example, purple, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) associated with set values,
The setting suggestion effect execution means includes:
executing any one of the plurality of second effect modes when winning a lottery by the setting suggestion effect execution lottery means;
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that:

In the configuration example related to (2), there are luminescent colors (setting suggested colors) such as purple, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow related to the setting value as the setting suggestion effect, and a predetermined setting suggestion effect execution lottery It is a configuration example in which, when winning, it changes to a color related to the current set value. In the lottery here, for example, the current set value is associated with a plurality of suggested setting colors, and the selection rate of which suggested setting color should be determined.

(3) The directing means
Including a plurality of effect means including a first effect means and a second effect means different from the first effect means,
The setting suggestion effect execution means includes:
Of the plurality of effect means, at least the first effect means and the second effect means are used to execute the first setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting using an LED and a liquid crystal display device 36). Execute suggestive production),
The second effect mode by the first effect means (LED) is continued until the second setting suggestion effect is executed, and before the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the second effect means (liquid crystal Ending the second rendering mode by the display device 36),
The game machine according to (1) or (2) above, characterized in that:

<Concrete Example 2 of Setting Suggestion Rendering: A Form in Which the Completed Shape of the Character is Different Depending on the Set Value: FIGS. 88 to 89>
Next, using FIGS. 88 and 89, a specific example 2 of setting suggestion effect will be described. In this example, setting suggestion is performed by changing (differentiating) the completed form of the character (completed form as a performance) according to the set value.

The trigger for execution of the setting suggestive effect according to the present example (the trigger for completion of the character product) is a predetermined timing during a specific advance notice effect. It's time to make advance notice, suggest, and confirm. in particular,
(a) When a high expectation notice occurs (for example, when SP reach develops, when pseudo series occurs 3 times),
(b) When a premium effect (probability effect) occurs during pattern fluctuation,
(c) At the time of winning/losing notification during pattern fluctuation (at the time of the above promotion effect or revival effect),
(d) When announcing winning a high-advantage jackpot such as a variable jackpot,
(e) At the time of holding continuous notification during a big hit game (during execution of holding continuous notification effect).

The above (e) "holding continuous notification effect" means that if there is an operation holding ball related to the jackpot winning among the operation holding balls that existed at least at the start of the big win game, during the winning production, for example , At a predetermined timing during the opening production, the production during a specific number of rounds, the interval production between rounds after a specific number of rounds, or the ending production, there is a winning pending ball within the existing active holding ball. In the case of this embodiment, which of the operation pending balls is the winning pending ball within holding (for example, the third operating pending ball is the winning pending ball within holding) are also reported together. It should be noted that whether or not there is an elected pending ball within pending, or whether any of the operation pending balls is an elected pending ball within pending is received by receiving the above pending addition command (prefetching determination information). It can be comprehended on the production control section 24 side. In addition, the operation holding balls that are the target of the holding continuous notification effect are not only the operation holding balls that existed before the start of the big win game, but also the operation that occurred before the execution timing of the holding continuous notification effect after the start of the big win game. Balls on hold can be targeted.

Regarding the completion form of the role, there are cases where it is a "prediction production form" related to "winning expectation" such as jackpot hit notice, winning/losing notification, holding consecutive notification, etc., and "form" related to "set value" There are cases where it is a "form in the setting suggestion production", but here, the completion form as production is different (changed) according to the setting value, and the winning expectation and notice contents due to the difference in the completion form The same applies to the "setting suggestive staging form". For example, if there are a triangle (△) and a star (☆) in the completed form of the role, both are a winning announcement with a winning expectation of 100% (the winning expectation and the content of the notice are the same), but there is a setting suggestion. From that point of view, the triangle (△) is a "low setting suggestion", and the star (☆) is a "high setting suggestion" (the completed form differs depending on the setting value). is. Further, the complete form here means the form that the movable accessory takes when it moves to a predetermined final position or in the process of moving.

(.delta.1) As the accessory handled in this example, for example, a plurality of movable body accessories such as the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 of the flower-shaped accessory (second movable body accessory) 90 There is a "united accessory" (for example, a flower-shaped accessory 90) that cooperates to form one design (flower-shaped) by decorations applied to them. By using such a united accessory, (δ1-1) differentiating the degree of completion of the design formed by the plurality of movable accessories at the united position according to the set value, or (δ1-2) set value Different designs (meaningful designs) are formed depending on the An example is shown in FIG.

(Setting suggestion production using united role: Fig. 88)
FIG. 88 shows a united character appearing in the form of covering the front surface of the liquid crystal. The illustrated movable accessory includes a combined decorative body 501 (see FIG. (E)) capable of forming a unique design with a first decorative frame 501a and a second decorative frame 501b, and a substantially central portion of the liquid crystal screen (combined A gimmick-type combined accessory (which forms a design shown in accessories 511, 513, 515, and 517 depending on how it is combined) that can be moved (approximately at the center of the formwork 501) (final position) is provided. , depending on the settings. It is a united accessory that can configure different overall shapes. Note that although the process of uniting the role objects 511, 513, 515, and 517 is omitted, the state in which a plurality of movable bodies are united is shown.

FIG. 88(A) shows the default completed form A (default form). In this default form, only the first decorative frame 501a appears and the decorative body 501 is incomplete. Also, a circular accessory 511 appears as a gimmick-type united accessory.
FIG. 88(B) shows the complete form B that appears when setting 2 or more is suggested. The completed form B has the same ornament 501 as the default form, but an oblique cross-shaped accessory 513 appears as a gimmick-type combined accessory. The reason why the decorative body 501 is in an unfinished form is that the completed form B shown in FIG. , In other words, the appearance of complete form B (a form with a low degree of perfection) is meant to imply that "high expectations are low".

When the high setting area is suggested, the first decorative frame 501a and the second decorative frame 501b are united vertically to form the decorative body 501, and the finished form including the decorative body 501 is obtained.
FIG. 88(C) shows a completed form C including the decoration 501, which appears when setting 4 or higher, which is a high setting range, is suggested. In the completed form C, a cross-shaped accessory 515 appears as a gimmick-type combined accessory.

Then, in the case of suggesting that setting 6, which is the highest setting, be confirmed, as shown in FIG. An accessory 517 having a rectangular shape appears, and a lively and flashy effect is produced. In addition, at least the gimmick-type united accessories 511 to 517 have planar LEDs formed inside them, and when performing a movable body presentation, the center part glows beautifully in rainbow colors. Incidentally, when the completed forms A to C appear, the gimmick-type united accessories 511, 513, and 517 may be configured to be colored in accordance with the setting suggestions. For example, in Fig. (A), it is white for completed form A (default form), yellow for completed form B, red for completed form C, and rainbow color for completed form D. .

(Setting-suggestion production using a separate role: Fig. 89)
It should be noted that each of the plurality of movable accessories is formed as a unique unique design, rather than a united accessory in which a plurality of movable accessories are combined to form a unique unique design. Setting suggestions may be made using "separate characters" that evoke different ideas depending on how the object appears. For example, as shown in FIG. 89, in the case of default, only one human-shaped gimmick character 521 (Fujimaru-kun's character) appears in FIG. , human-shaped gimmick roles 521 and 523 (Fujimaru-kun role and Fujika-chan role) appear, and at this stage, they evoke a friendship. Then, if it is suggested that the setting 5 or more is confirmed, as shown in Figure (C), from the human-shaped gimmick role 521, 523 (Fujimaru-kun role, Fujika-chan role) and "heart-shaped role + logo plate" A background role 525 appears to create a story-like production that evokes a relationship like a couple (lovers). In addition, it is not necessary for the group of movable bodies to create a story-like production as described above, and the group of movable bodies that have some kind of relationship between the characters. A group of movable body accessories that simply belong to the same category (weapon) may be employed, such as a role item imitating a warship, that is, a "accessory imitating a weapon".

In addition, there are the following (δ2) to (δ5) as modes for changing the completed form (final form) of the accessory depending on the set value.

(δ2) "Depending on the set value, the number of characters that operate or the combination of characters differs."
In this embodiment, the number of characters or the combination of characters that reach the final position differs depending on the setting value (the number of characters or the combination of characters that form the completed form differs). That is, a plurality of types of accessories are prepared in advance, and how many movable accessories among the plurality of types of accessories have reached the final position, or which of the combinations of the plurality of types of accessories is determined. The combination of , gives a difference in the finished form of the role item depending on whether the role item is completed when it reaches the final position. This includes, for example, the following forms (A) and (B). Here, three types of accessories A to C are prepared and explained as a united accessory in which the decorations applied to each are combined to form a significant unique design. may be In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the united role and the separated type are not particularly distinguished and will be referred to as a “united role” for explanation.

(A: The number of characters that operate varies depending on the setting value)
For example, it is a form suggesting that the setting value is relatively high as the number of characters to be operated is relatively large. Specifically, "only the role A" or "only the role B" (default: no setting suggestion), "the role A + the role B" (setting 2 or more confirmed), "the role A + the role B + the role C" (setting 4 or more confirmed). For example, it corresponds to the configuration example of FIG.

(B: The combination of characters (one or more combinations) differs depending on the set value)
For example, the default content is that only "accessory A" moves (one significant design is incomplete) and that there is no setting suggestion. Then, the number of movable roles that have reached the final position increases, and depending on the combination, for example, "only role B"=even number setting suggestion, "only role C"=odd number setting suggestion, "only role A + role "Item B" = Setting 2 or more confirmed, "Character A + Character C" = Setting 4 or more confirmed, "Character B + Character C" = Setting 5 or more confirmed, "Character A + Character B + Character C" = Setting 6 determined, and so on. In this case, when "accessory A+accessory B+accessory C" (one significant design is completed), "setting 6 finalized" is notified.

(δ3) “The character moves differently depending on the set value”
In this embodiment, the movement of the character moving to the final position is varied according to the set value. In other words, if the default motion of the role object is, for example, "falling motion", other motions, such as vibration and reciprocating motion, are added to this. Specifically, in the default case, the movement of the character is "falling only", and there is no setting suggestion based on this, but if vibration or reciprocating motion is added, some setting suggestion is made. For example, "Drop + small reciprocating motion" (even number setting suggested), "Drop + reciprocating motion" (odd number setting suggested), "Drop + large reciprocating motion" (setting 2 or more confirmed), "Drop + vibration" (setting 4 above confirmed), "drop + vibration + small reciprocating motion" (setting 5 or more confirmed), "drop + vibration + large reciprocating motion" (setting 6 or more confirmed). Further, as for the "vibration", instead of the vibration of the movable body accessory itself provided on the game board 3, the stimulus source means for the player may be used. For example, vibration by a vibrating device provided on the shooting operation handle 15 (provides vibration to the operating hand), wind pressure by the shooting operation handle 15 or a wind pressure device provided at an appropriate place in the game machine (applying wind pressure to the player) ).

In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned "combined accessory", it can be configured as follows. For example, the higher the set value, the longer it takes for one or all of the movable characters to prepare for moving from the original position A to the first position B (starting position waiting to start moving). configured to As a result, the arrival at the first position B (start position) is delayed and the timing at which the second position C (final position) is reached differs. It can be said that it is a suggestive production form. In the case of a united role, setting suggestions can be made by making at least one of the movable roles behave differently according to the set value, and leading the different action patterns to the completed form. .

(δ4) “The action ratio of the character is different”
This embodiment is a form in which the ratio (operation ratio) at which the role object operates (actuates) differs according to the set value. More specifically, when the role product A operates at a certain timing, conventionally, the role product A operates or does not operate according to the degree of expectation of winning. The setting suggestion is performed by making the operation ratio (operation probability) different for each. Specifically, regarding the action probability that the role object A will act, the higher the set value, the higher or lower the action probability can be. For example, in the former case "5% for setting 1, 8% for setting 2, 10% for setting 3, 12% for setting 4, 15% for setting 5, 18% for setting 6", and for the latter Conversely, "18% for setting 1, 15% for setting 2, 12% for setting 3, 10% for setting 4, 8% for setting 5, and 5% for setting 6". As a modification, when using the above-mentioned "combined accessory", the ratio of forming the completed form can be changed according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the higher or lower the probability of completion.

(δ5) “Different effects associated with characters”
In this embodiment, assuming that the movement of the accessory is, for example, a "falling motion", an effect (effect rendering) is executed in association with the falling motion, for example, to make the user guess the set value. This form can have the following configuration according to the type of effect presentation.

For example, in the case of effect production by light production, "fall + white" (no suggestion: default), "fall + purple" (even number setting suggestion), "fall + blue" (odd number setting suggestion), "fall + yellow ” (setting of 2 or more confirmed), “fall + green” (setting of 4 or more confirmed), “fall + red” (setting of 5 or more confirmed), “fall + rainbow color” (setting of 6 or more confirmed). As for the light effect, an LED provided on the accessory may be used, or an effect LED such as the decorative lamp 45 may be used.

In addition, in the case of effect production by sound production, "fall + no sound effect" (no suggestion: default), "fall + first sound effect" (even number setting suggestion), "fall + second sound effect" (odd number Setting suggestion), "Fall + 3rd sound effect" (Setting 2 or more confirmed), "Fall + 4th sound effect" (Setting 4 or more confirmed), "Fall + 5th sound effect" (Setting 5 or more confirmed), " "Fall + sixth sound effect" (setting 6 confirmed). The first to sixth sound effects are different sound effects, but the effect duration may be the same or different, and can be determined as appropriate. It should be noted that at least the 6th sound effect with setting 6 confirmed is a flashy sound effect that has a relatively longer production duration or a relatively louder volume than other sound effects in the sense of a blessing production. It is preferable to

Also, an effect production by image display (for example, character or item image) may be adopted. For example, "fall + no background" (no suggestion: default), "fall + tank A" (even number setting suggestion), "fall + tank B" (odd number setting suggestion), "fall + tank C" (setting 2 or more confirmed ), “fall + tank D” (set 4 or more confirmed), “fall + tank E” (set 5 or more confirmed), “fall + tank F” (set 6 or more confirmed).

In the form of (δ5), the action of the character itself is the same regardless of the set value, but by attaching a different production mode (effect production) according to the set value, it can be made to function as a setting suggestion production. can. This effect production can also be applied to (δ1) to (δ4) described above. For example, in the case of the above embodiment of "(A) of (δ2)", "character A + character B + character C" was explained as suggesting "setting 4 or more confirmed", but the effect production of this example is applied, "Set 4 or more confirmed" for "Role A + B + C + Green", "Set 5 or more confirmed" for "Role A + B + C + Red", "Set 5 or more confirmed" A+character B+character C+rainbow color" can determine a plurality of types of suggested setting contents by adding an effect performance even if the number of action characters is the same, such as "setting 6 fixed". Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of setting suggestions.

<Concrete Example 3 of Setting Suggestion Rendering: Form of Performing Setting Suggestion Rendering Through Operation of Operating Means: Fig. 90>
A specific example 3 of this setting suggestion effect is a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed through the operation of the operation means such as the effect button 13 or the direction key 75 .

For example, referring to FIG. 90, first, a state is shown in which a button valid period for accepting button operations (during button operation instruction) is entered during a predetermined notice effect (here, during SP reach) ( FIG. 90(A)). In order to notify that the button valid period has started, the button LED 13b is switched from white to yellow, for example, as a pre-operation effect, and a button notice effect (operation instruction effect) is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and "Press! , a timer image 156 indicating the remaining time of the button operation valid period, and a button image 157 imitating the effect button 13 are displayed.

Then, when the effect button 13 is operated during the button valid period, setting suggesting effects shown in FIGS. (B) and (C) appear as post-operation effects. Fig. (B) shows, as an example, a setting suggestion effect suggesting that "setting 4 or more is confirmed" by the appearance of a disk image suggesting "setting 4 or more is confirmed" and a message of "first-class close encounter". , (C) shows a setting suggesting effect suggesting that "setting 5 or more is confirmed" by the appearance of an alien image and a message of "close encounter of the third kind". Incidentally, this setting suggestion effect may be irrelevant to the content of the advance notice effect, or may be related to the content of the notice effect (for example, see FIG. 83). Also, in the figure (D) or (E), the surrounding LED 45 is used during or after the setting suggestion effect (figure (B) or (C)) is being executed during the symbol variation (including after the symbol variation is completed) , a state in which the LED setting suggestion effect appears in a color related to the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion content) executed during the symbol variation is illustrated.

In this example, the setting suggestion effect is performed through the operation of the operation means, but there are various opportunities for the execution. As already described, the input of the operating means is validated during a predetermined operation valid acceptance period (button valid period). Therefore, the target of this example is a configuration that enables execution of the setting suggestion effect when the button operation is performed during the button valid period. The button valid period (period during which execution of the setting suggestion effect is permitted based on the operation of the operating means) includes the following periods.

(.zeta.1) A period of waiting for a customer. Specifically, the valid period for switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). When the menu screen (for example, FIG. 82(H)) is displayed, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed. In this case, the LED setting suggesting effect may be executed when the player performs the switching operation to the menu screen, or the LED setting suggesting effect may be executed when the menu item is selected. good.

(.zeta.2) Predetermined period during symbol variation (during symbol variation display game). Specifically, a predetermined period during a specific advance notice effect (for example, notice effect including player participation type effect). For example, the example shown in FIG. 90 corresponds to this example.

(.zeta.3) A predetermined period during a specific symbol variation display game. The specific symbol variation display game is, for example, a game with a predetermined number of rotations after the power is turned on, a game with a predetermined number of rotations or less, a game with a predetermined number of rotations after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the jackpot game of a specific jackpot), or the like. be.

(ζ4) Predetermined period during jackpot game. For example, a predetermined period during at least one of the opening effect, the effect during a specific number of rounds, the interval effect between rounds after a specific number of rounds, and the effect during the ending effect. In addition, this (.zeta.4) jackpot game may be only a jackpot game by a specific jackpot, or may be a jackpot game when the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number. Also, it may be the big win game of the first big win won after the power is turned on, or if the big win won after the power is turned on is the predetermined number of big wins, that big win game may be used.

(ζ5) All or part of the period during which the first setting suggestion effect is being executed. Specifically, the second setting suggestion effect can be executed when the operating means is operated during all or part of the period during which the first setting suggestion effect is being executed. For example, when the button effective period comes while the end interval screen change (FIGS. 52 and 53) is being executed and the effect button 13 is pressed during the effective period, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed.

It should be noted that (ζ6) any of the embodiments described in the above specific examples 1 to 3 can be configured such that the setting suggestion effect is executed based on a predetermined operation of the operating means.

In addition, (ζ7) in the above-mentioned "specific example 2 of setting suggestion effect", when the player operates the operation means within the button effective period or when the button effective period has passed, this is used as an execution opportunity to can be operated. However, in this case, if the player does not operate the operation means and the button valid period elapses, that is, if the player does not participate in the button operation effect related to the action of the accessory, the accessory operates, The operation mode can be configured to perform a "default operation" without setting suggestions. In other words, when the player does not actively operate the button, the action is controlled so as to perform only the action mode of informing "no setting suggestion" as a penalty. In this way, by creating a situation in which "setting suggestion information cannot be obtained without button operation", the player will actively perform button operations. As a result, the button operation effect (player-participation type effect) can be given great significance, and variations of the effect can be enriched.

As described above, regarding the execution of all setting suggestion effects described in this specification, it may be configured so that the setting suggestion effect is always executed (appeared) when the execution opportunity arrives, or when the execution opportunity arrives Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on a predetermined execution condition. The latter form includes, for example, (I) a form in which a predetermined execution lottery is performed and whether or not to execute the setting suggesting effect is determined based on the lottery result, and (II) an operation result of one or a plurality of operation means. (III) A form of executing the setting suggesting effect when at least the first execution condition and the second execution condition are satisfied. This is a form having a plurality of conditions as conditions for executing the target setting suggestion effect. For example, when a predetermined execution lottery is won and operation means is operated, or when a specific effect is executed and a predetermined execution lottery or operation means is operated.

One or more of all the embodiments described above (including all of the configurations and modifications described in each embodiment) may be combined, and the contents described in each embodiment are only for individual embodiments. It is not limited.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pinball game machine using game balls as the game medium has been described, but the present invention is not limited to the pinball game machine. For example, it may be an arrangement ball machine or a mahjong game machine. Other game media include a game machine using game medals (rotary type game machine) and a game medium using electromagnetic recording means. It may be a managed game machine or the like.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 game machine,
2 front frame (door),
3, 3a game board, game area,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 main control unit (main control board),
24 production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 launch control board,
29 payout control board,
34, 34a upper starting port, upper starting port sensor 35, 35a lower starting port, lower starting port sensor,
37, 37a normal symbol start opening, normal symbol start opening sensor,
38a, 38b special pattern display device,
39a normal pattern display device,
50, 52a large winning opening, large winning opening sensor 41, 41c normal fluctuation winning device, normal electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c special variable winning device, big winning opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 liquid crystal displays, decorative lamps, speakers,
49 out port,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 setting change completion switch,
97 setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241, 242, 243 production control CPU, production control ROM, production control RAM.

Claims (1)

an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect;
a display control means capable of controlling display by the display means;
a movable body that can be displaced;
displacement control means capable of controlling the displacement of the movable body at a predetermined timing;
a first mark that is composed of a plurality of individual elements and is arranged at a position visible to the player and that indicates the model name;
a first lighting control means capable of controlling lighting of the first mark;
an operation valid period control means capable of setting an operation valid period for the operation means;
a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is established;
In a gaming machine configured to be able to transition from a gaming state to a non-gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied,
The display control means is
It is possible to control the variable display of symbols during the game state, and it is possible to control the demonstration effect during the non-game state,
The non-gaming state includes a first period during which the demonstration effect is not executed and a second period during which the demonstration effect is executed,
The operation effective period control means is
It is possible to provide the operation valid period during the variable display of the pattern,
The displacement control means is
Displacement control of the movable body can be performed at a timing when the operation means is operated during the valid operation period during the variable display of the pattern as the predetermined timing,
The first lighting control means is
A first aspect of the first mark, wherein all of the plurality of individual elements are lit in the same system color or all of the plurality of individual elements are extinguished; and individual elements of the first mark. and a second mode in which only a part of the first mark is lit or all the individual elements of the first mark are lit so as not to be the same system color,
During the operation effective period during the variable display of the symbols , the first mark is set to the first mode during the symbol variation until the operation means is operated, and when the operation means is operated, the first mark is set to the first mode during the symbol variation. It is possible to control the 1 mark to be the second mode during design fluctuation ,
During the non-playing state, while the demonstration effect is not being executed, the first mark is set to the first mode during the non-execution of the demonstration effect, and during the execution of the demonstration effect, the first mark is set to the state during the demonstration effect. A second mode of control is possible,
The first mark is configured such that the first period is longer than the second period when the operation means is not operated during the non-game state, so that the first mark is a demonstration effect. configured such that the period of the first mode during non-execution of the demonstration effect is longer than the period of the second mode during execution;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images